Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 User Manual Download Page 809

Page: 809 / 1927

758

Manag

eme
nt

Module

Set
tin

Item

Description

Edit

Display

Takes you to the SVP Log Display view.

Display

Takes you to the System Event Log Display view.

Download

Downloads a dump log.
When you click

Download

, a Save As dialog box

appears. Specify a file name and click

Save

to download

the file.

Display

Takes you to the Power Status Trend Data view.

Display

Takes you to the Short-term Environment Log Display

view.

Display

Takes you to the Access Log Display view.
You can select whether to display all access log

information or information logged during a specific time

period.

Download

Downloads access log information.
When you click

Download

, a Save As dialog box

appears. Specify a file name to download the file.

Display

Takes you to the WWN Change log Display view.

Error log

Takes you to the selection page for system event logs.
To download the error log information, select the required

System Event Log and click

Download

10 MARLOG display Takes you to the selection page for MAR logs.

When you click a link in the number of MARLOG required

in the selection screen, you can go to the Detail Display

of MARLOG.

11 Operation log

(Download)

Downloads operation logs for management modules.
Select Partition or Server chassis from the drop-down list

and click

Download

to open a dialog box for saving files.

Selectable items depend on the privilege for a login

account.

Partition

selected: Downloads logs of operation

Summary of Contents for Compute Blade 2000

Page 1: ...MK 99BDS2K001 16 Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 User s Guide ...

Page 2: ...cts and services can be ordered only under the terms and conditions of the applicable Hitachi Data Systems Corporation agreements The use of Hitachi Ltd products is governed by the terms of your agreements with Hitachi Data Systems Corporation Hitachi is a registered trademark of Hitachi Ltd in the United States and other countries Hitachi Data Systems is a registered trademark and service mark of...

Page 3: ...partment for the appropriate system Regulatory Compliance Notices Federal Communications Commission FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This ...

Page 4: ...and to be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations For further information regarding return collection recycle or disposal please contact your sales company where you purchased the Products The above mark is not printed on the following Products but these Products are also subject to electrical and electronic equipment EEE These un marked Products are as well as...

Page 5: ...act our sales representative Note that the same handling is required for peripheral equipment and pre installed software shipped with this product Chinese RoHS Notes on Deleting Data when Disposing of or Transferring the System Equipment Personal computers and system equipment are used for various purposes at the office and home Important data of customers are recorded in the hard disks in these c...

Page 6: ...d using special data recovery software Consequently important data on the hard disk of the system equipment can be read and used for unexpected applications by malicious people To avoid unauthorized access to important data on the hard disk when disposing of or transferring the system equipment it is extremely important for you to erase all data recorded on the hard disk at your own risk When you ...

Page 7: ...feature substitute references to Hitachi logical partitioning manager LPAR manager or LP with HVM Notation Symbols Meanings of symbols used in this manual are as follows Danger This indicates information about how to avoid physical injury to yourself and others WARNING This indicates the presence of a potential risk that might cause death or severe injury CAUTION This indicates the presence of a p...

Page 8: ...ise without Hyper VTM Hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2008 Enterprise without Hyper V Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Datacenter without Hyper VTM Hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2008 Datacenter without Hyper V Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard 32 bit Hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2008 Standard 32 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise 32 bit Hereinafter re...

Page 9: ...Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Standard Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Datacenter Windows Server 2008 Standard without Hyper V Windows Server 2008 Enterprise without Hyper V Windows Server 2008 Datacenter without Hyper V Windows Server 2008 Standard 32 bit Windows Server 2008 Enterprise 32 bit Windows Server 2...

Page 10: ...Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Windows Server 2003 x64 Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edit Windows Server 2003 32 bit Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Windows S...

Page 11: ...y and rack Windows Deployment Manager Provides OS package backups system disks Windows CM2 Network Element Configuration Manages network devices Windows ServerConductor Agent Manages resources operation and faults of the system equipment Windows ServerConductor Advanced Agent Controls power supplies in cooperation with ServerConductor Agent Windows Linux MegaRAID Storage Manager Watch management m...

Page 12: ...o local support personnel visit you when the product is delivered If you find any missing part or if you have any questions on the delivered product in such cases contact your reseller When You Need Help 1 Refer to the manual Refer to Chapter 13 When You Need Help in this manual Also refer to other printed manuals provided with the product 2 Contact us by phone Contact the reseller where you have ...

Page 13: ...nd Peripheral Equipment 4 Handling the System Equipment and Peripheral Equipment 5 Electrical Outlets 7 Avoiding Problems 8 Backing Up Data Back 8 Function of RAID 8 Preventing Computer Viruses 8 Backing Up System Equipment Settings 9 2 How to Use the System Equipment 11 System Equipment 12 Names and Functions 12 I O Slot Expansion Unit 35 Names and Functions 35 3 Connecting the System Equipment a...

Page 14: ...dvanced Menu 144 Chipset Menu 150 Boot Menu 152 Security Menu 156 Save Exit Menu 157 Remote CD DVD Boot Procedure 158 Remote Console Application Reclient 158 Remote Console Application Java application 161 Hardware Memory Dump 167 How to Set Hardware Memory Dump 168 How to Start Hardware Memory Dump 172 Where Hardware Memory Dump is Stored 174 MegaRAID WebBIOS 175 SAS RAID Controller 176 MegaRAID ...

Page 15: ...er Blade 450 Account 452 Account Overview 452 Privilege and Role 454 Privilege Role and Account 454 System Console Command Reference 455 Command List 455 Basic Operation 457 Chassis Management 462 Partition Management 528 Network Management 543 External Server Connection Manager 569 Managing Security 609 Managing Switch Modules 639 Backing Up and Restoring Settings 643 Association between Commands...

Page 16: ...iew 805 Operation Command Mode For the General User 805 Operation Command Mode For the System Administrator 805 Configuration Command Mode 806 Initial Installation Operation Overview 807 Login 807 Setting the System Administrator s Password 808 Adding a User ID and Deleting operator 808 Backup and Restore of Module Information 810 Connection with the Server Blades 813 Uplink Failover Overview 814 ...

Page 17: ...ation Overview 862 Connection with Server Blades 863 Backup and Restore of Module Information 867 11 I O Slot Expansion Unit 869 External Interface for the I O Slot Expansion Unit 870 Cable connection to the I O Slot Expansion Unit 872 Connection with LAN Cable 872 Connection with Serial Cable 873 Initial Settings of the I O Slot Expansion Unit 874 Initial Settings via System Console 874 Backup an...

Page 18: ...ssign Remote Consoles to LPARs 1083 Assign VNICs Virtual NICs to LPARs 1084 Assign Shared FCs to LPARs 1086 Save Configuration Changed on LPAR manager Screen 1088 Guest OS Operation 1090 Boot the Guest OS 1090 Guest OS Display Setting 1139 Shutdown Guest OS and Deactivate LPAR 1142 Backup of LPAR manager 1145 Backup Files for LPAR manager 1145 LPAR manager Screen Operations 1147 LPAR manager Scree...

Page 19: ...tting with Guest Screen in Use 1380 Using Linux 1380 Using Windows 1380 NETM Remote Control 1381 Notes on ServerConductor Blade Server Manager 1381 Notes on ServerConductor Deployment Manager 1383 SC Advanced Agent 1383 Power Capping 1384 Processor Capping 1384 Assigning Processors when SMT Enabled 1384 Degeneration Isolation of Processors Memories and PCI Devices 1386 Degeneration of Processor Co...

Page 20: ...odule 1436 Connection to 1 10 Gbps LAN Switch Module 1437 Connection between 8 Gbps FC Switch Modules and 2 port FC Mezzanine Cards 1438 Connection between 8 Gbps FC Switch Modules and 4 port FC Mezzanine Cards 1439 LPAR manager Boot Messages 1440 LPAR manager On Screen Messages 1452 LPAR manager System Logs Screen Messages 1453 HCSM Hitachi Compute Systems Manager Alert Message 1480 Software Lice...

Page 21: ...N M Cold Standby 1540 RTC Time Synchronization at N M Cold Standby Failover 1541 Digital Certificates for the System Web Console 1543 Overview of Digital Certificates for the System Web Console 1543 Procedures to Use Digital Certificates for the System Web Console 1555 E mail Notification 1555 E mail Notification Overview 1555 E mail Notification Setup 1558 SNMP Function 1562 SNMP Function Overvie...

Page 22: ...lure 1781 PCI Error Handling Mode 1784 PCI Error Handling Mode Available for OS Virtual Environment 1785 Devices Supporting PCIe Error Isolation Mode 1787 SMASH for Server Blades 1790 SMASH Overview 1790 SMASH Features 1790 Connection to SMASH CLP 1791 Connection to SMASH using WS MAN 1795 IPMI Commands List 1800 Security of Management Interfaces 1802 Network Communication by the System Equipment ...

Page 23: ... Contents Items Requiring Routine Maintenance 1828 Cleaning 1829 System Equipment 1829 I O Slot Expansion Unit 1830 Service Life Limited Parts 1831 Notes on Maintenance 1832 Appendix Specifications Glossary ...

Page 24: ...of a potential risk that might cause severe damage to the equipment and or damage to surrounding properties Example 1 hazard identification The equilateral triangle filled in with yellow indicates a precaution A safety alert symbol inside the triangle indicates the type of hazard such as an electric shock hazard Example 2 prohibition The red circle with a red diagonal bar indicates an action that ...

Page 25: ...ose manuals Failure to follow those instructions can cause injury fire or damage to property including the equipment Operations and actions to perform Do not perform operations or actions other than those described in the manual Should you find any problem with the equipment turn off the power unplug the power cable from the electrical outlet and then contact your reseller or call for maintenance ...

Page 26: ...bject the power cables to ultraviolet or strong visible light continuously Keep the power cables from contact with alkali acid fat and oil or humidity Do not use the power cables in a high temperature environment Do not use the power cables above their specified rating Do not use the power cables for other devices Be sure to hold the plug section when inserting or removing the power cable Do not t...

Page 27: ...ng turn off the power and unplug all the power cables of the equipment maximum of 4 from the electrical outlets Using the power cables after such occurrences can lead to an electric shock or fire Do not place any objects around the electrical outlets to allow users to quickly unplug the power cables Do not repair remodel or disassemble Do not attempt to repair remodel or disassemble the equipment ...

Page 28: ...he cover and handle get hot Be careful when replacing a failed module You can get burned High temperature at the 10GBASE R transceiver The 10GBASE R transceiver in the 10Gbps LAN switch module gets hot in operation To remove the transceiver therefore allow at least approximately 5 minutes after the power supply for the 10Gbps LAN switch module is turned off from the management module Failure to do...

Page 29: ... equipment to fall resulting in injury or equipment failure To perform any operation with the equipment pulled out from the rack cabinet be sure to install a stabilizer into the rack cabinet Applying excessive force could cause the rack cabinet to fall resulting in injury or equipment failure If a stabilizer is not installed call for maintenance personnel Locking the rail into place Be sure to pul...

Page 30: ...t place heavy items on the cables Avoid routing cables close to a thermal appliance If you do it could cause damage to cable sheaths resulting in failure of the connected devices Disposal of the equipment For disposal by a business operator Check the industrial waste disposal regulations in your country and follow the necessary procedures For disposal by an individual Consult your reseller or foll...

Page 31: ...fective conditions can cause failure Vent A vent is used for preventing rise in temperature inside the equipment Do not block the vent by placing or leaning an object If you do the temperature rises which can cause failure Check and clean ventilation holes periodically to keep the dust from gathering on them Power supply module Since the power supply module has a high voltage area in it do not ope...

Page 32: ...it for about two hours Adding and connecting to peripheral devices Before adding or connecting peripheral devices to the equipment remove all power plugs from the outlets and disconnect all cables from the equipment unless otherwise instructed Use only peripheral devices which are explicitly listed as supported in the manual and always follow the instructions in the manual Using devices other than...

Page 33: ...t to vibrate or hit it Before handling a hard disk remove static electricity or wear cotton gloves Before moving the system equipment turn off the power remove the power plug from the electrical outlet and wait for at least 30 seconds Rat control Rats can cause the following damage to a computer system Breakage of cable sheaths Corrosion contact failure or soiled parts inside the equipment In orde...

Page 34: ...the circuit breaker which affects other devices on the same circuit Refer to Chapter 3 Connect the Power Cables Connect the I O Slot Expansion Unit Not designed to operate in a humid or dusty environment Do not use the equipment near a place where water is used such as a bath tab washing stand sink washing machine or swimming pool in a humid basement or in a dusty place Such conditions can lower e...

Page 35: ...Since parts implemented in the system equipment are high density operation or maintenance by inexperienced persons leads to injury or equipment failure When you need to add or replace optional components contact your reseller or call for maintenance personnel Refer to Chapter 4 Mount Internal Optional Components Using at an unstable place Do not place the equipment in an unstable place such as an ...

Page 36: ...and be corrupted Refer to Chapter 5 Virtual Drives Building Disk Arrays for RAID 0 1 5 and 6 Building Disk Arrays for RAID 10 Changing the Write Policy for Disk Arrays When a disk array is deleted all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before deleting a disk array Refer to Chapter 5 Deleting Disk Arrays When a disk array is initiali...

Page 37: ... procedure for power operation Powering on or off not according to the prescribed procedure can cause equipment failure Refer to Chapter 3 Turn the Power On or Off Connecting a cable to the management module If a device with the same IP address as that for the BMC on the management module or server blade exists on the network a failure will occur on the system equipment when you connect the manage...

Page 38: ...igure Make sure to apply the same LPAR manager firmware version with the active partition to the standby partition If you apply different LPAR manager firmware versions to the active and standby partition N M failover may fail Refer to Chapter 13 Mechanism of the N M Cold Standby Do not set the EFI Shell to the highest booting priority in the EFI Setup menu If the EFI Shell is on the top of the bo...

Page 39: ...o Chapter 7 Uplink Failover Overview When setting this function to the port of a link aggregation set this to the channel group to which the port belongs Refer to Chapter 7 Uplink Failover Overview Set this function only when the target external port and the link aggregation channel group have linked up Refer to Chapter 7 Uplink Failover Overview ...

Page 40: ... as possible Have someone call an ambulance at once while you apply first aid Break the victim s contact with the source of electricity in the quickest safe way possible Turn off the main switch of the power distribution panel immediately and ground the circuits Remove the victim from contact with the current using a dry wooden pole a dry rope or dry clothing Do not touch the victim before contact...

Page 41: ...xli Precautions for Safe Use Warning labels Warning labels can be found at the following locations on the system equipment Chassis Front View of A1 A2 Chassis ...

Page 42: ...xlii Precautions for Safe Use Rear View of A1 A2 Chassis ...

Page 43: ...xliii Precautions for Safe Use Rear View of A2 Chassis ...

Page 44: ...xliv Precautions for Safe Use Server Blade ...

Page 45: ...xlv Precautions for Safe Use I O Slot Expansion Unit ...

Page 46: ...xlvi Precautions for Safe Use I O Module ...

Page 47: ...xlvii Precautions for Safe Use AC Power Input Module ...

Page 48: ...escribes the manuals provided with the system equipment Manual Organization The User s Guide and Software Guide are available as electronic manuals Depending on the configuration of the system equipment additional manuals may be provided Read these manuals if necessary ...

Page 49: ...nt module 7 Configuring the LAN Switch Module Describes processes for configuring the LAN switch module 8 Configuring the 10 Gb DCB Switch Module Describes processes for configuring the 10 GB DCB switch module 9 Configuring the LAN Pass Through Module Describes processes for configuring the LAN pass through module 10 Configuring the Fibre Channel Switch Module Describes processes for configuring t...

Page 50: ...Adobe Reader must be installed on your system to read the electronic manuals If you do not have Adobe Reader download it from the Adobe website http www adobe com Open close the electronic manual Double click on the User s Guide or Software Guide The electronic manual appears To close the electronic manual click the button at the top right corner of the window ...

Page 51: ...li How to Use the Manuals This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 52: ...1 1 Before use This chapter contains an overview of the system equipment and information users must know before installation Installation environment 2 Restrictions 4 Avoiding problems 8 ...

Page 53: ...tive humidity 20 to 80 In non operating status 8 to 90 no dew condensation Vibration Max 2 50 m s 2 In non operating status 9 80 m s 2 Dust Same level as business offices in general Installation space Do not install the system equipment in the following environment Indirect sunlight In a location subject to excessive or abrupt temperature or humidity change Near any equipment generating electrical...

Page 54: ...3 1 Before Use When multiple racks are connected and installed be careful when opening a rack door so that you do not hit the adjacent rack door ...

Page 55: ...ng the equipment Do not use the equipment in a place subject to direct sunlight or heat generated by a heater or similar equipment Do not use the equipment in an extremely dusty environment Do not use the equipment in an extremely hot or cold environment or an environment where the temperature widely fluctuates Do not use the equipment in an extremely humid environment Air that contains corrosive ...

Page 56: ...nd that the system equipment and its peripheral equipment should be powered through the same power strip with a noise filter Remove any dirt and foreign particles from inside the mouse and internal roller Foreign matter in the mouse prevents the smooth operation of the mouse After turning off the power to the system equipment wait at least 10 seconds before turning on the power again Otherwise the...

Page 57: ...esults in a system error When you use a commercial console unit turn on power to the system equipment and server blades without connecting the external power supply of the console unit After turning on the power to the system equipment and server blades connect the external power supply of the console unit The system uses a network segment the network address default 192 168 253 0 24 If external n...

Page 58: ... Outlet 1 200 240V Outlet for the blade server A1 chassis 200 240VAC outlet box Grounding 2 slot hook up type outlet 30 A 250 V NEMA L6 30P NEMA L6 30R 2 240 V Outlet for the blade server A1 chassis 200 240VAC outlet box 32 A 250 V IEC309 Plug IEC309 Socket 3 AC200V 20V 50Hz 60 Hz 1Hz Outlet for the I O slot expansion unit Outlet for the blade server A2 chassis Grounding 2 slot plug and socket out...

Page 59: ...ed by using the RAID function When using this system equipment Hitachi recommends the RAID function be used Be sure to back up the content of the hard disks to an auxiliary source such as a Linear Tape Open LTO library device or NAS regularly using the copy command and the backup program Preventing computer viruses When a program or data suddenly becomes corrupted such as an unexpected operation o...

Page 60: ...up the setup data of the host bus adapter HBA basic input output system BIOS Back up the settings according to the procedure in the Hitachi Gigabit Fibre Channel Board User s Guide Utility Software Edition Back up the BIOS settings of the server blade Write down the changed BIOS settings Back up the settings of the local area network LAN switch module Back up the settings according to the procedur...

Page 61: ...10 1 Before Use ...

Page 62: ...11 2 How to use the system equipment This chapter describes the parts of the system equipment System equipment 12 I O slot expansion unit 35 ...

Page 63: ...12 2 How to Use the System Equipment System equipment Names and functions Compute Blade system equipment Front view of A1 A2 chassis ...

Page 64: ...13 2 How to Use the System Equipment Rear view of A1 chassis Rear view of A2 chassis ...

Page 65: ...w of system configuration Respective types of power supply modules are installed in A1 chassis and A2 chassis See Power Supply Module Specifications per module in the Appendix for details Server chassis Server blade Front panel Power supply module ...

Page 66: ...ion A1 chassis Rear view of system configuration A2 chassis I O board module Back plane Switch module Management module AC power input module I O board module Fan module Switch module Back plane Switch module Management module I O board module Fan module Switch module ...

Page 67: ...hen the main power of the server blade is on Lights solid orange when all server blades are powered off Blinks orange during initialization when power is supplied to the server chassis D ERR LED ALM Lights solid red when an error occurs in the server chassis E NODE LED NODE Lights solid orange when an error occurs in a server blade Front panel Server blade 0 Server blade 1 Server blade 2 Server bl...

Page 68: ...orange when an error occurs in a fan module H PS LED PS Lights solid orange when an error occurs in a power supply module I TEMP LED TEMP Lights solid orange when the temperature is abnormal in the server chassis A plastic stick is attached to the front panel of the system equipment Use this stick to press a button when it is difficult to reach using your finger ...

Page 69: ...18 2 How to Use the System Equipment Standard server blade X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 Mezzanine card Internal SAS RAID card Upper Lower Upper Lower Mezzanine card Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower ...

Page 70: ...is button for one or more seconds to reset the server blade C Location ID LED LID Lights solid blue when a server blade is identified D POWER LED PWR Lights solid green during operation Blinks green during sleep mode Lights solid orange while in standby mode E Error LED ALM Lights solid red when an error occurs Lights solid red when Watch Dog Timer WDT of Baseboard Management Controller BMC a mana...

Page 71: ...n the network is running H Hard disk drive HDD active LED Blinks green when booting or accessing the HDD Lights solid green when the HDD is idle I HDD Error LED Lights solid red when an error occurs Blinks red when rebuilding the HDD J Serial port Used to connect a device using a serial interface K Universal Serial Bus USB port Two USB ports It is not guaranteed that every device connected to thos...

Page 72: ...t off main power to the server blade without OS shutdown You should avoid a forcible power cycle whenever possible B Reset button RST Press and hold this button for one or more seconds to reset the server blade C Location ID LED LID Lights solid blue when a server blade is identified D POWER LED PWR Lights solid green during operation Blinks green while in the sleep mode Lights solid orange while ...

Page 73: ... CND Lights solid green to show BMC initialization G LAN 1 2 LED LAN1 LAN2 Lights solid orange when a link to the network is established Blinks orange when the network is running H Primary LED Lights solid green when the server blade is primary Blinks green when the server blade does not belong to any physical partition or SMP between blades is being configured I USB port Two USB ports J Serial po...

Page 74: ...ower supply module A POWER LED Lights solid green when main power is on Blinks green when the sub power is on B FAIL LED Lights solid orange when not working according to specifications due to an error Blinks orange when the AC input is off ...

Page 75: ...e slot 4 Fan module slot 1 Fan module slot 0 Fan module slot 5 Fan module slot 4 I O board module slot 0 7 AC power input module 0 AC power cable 0 Power supply module 0 AC power cable 1 Power supply module 1 Management module slot 1 Switch module slot 1 Switch module slot 3 Switch module slot 5 Fan module slot 2 Fan module slot 3 Fan module slot 6 Fan module slot 7 I O board module slot 8 15 AC p...

Page 76: ...n module slot 4 I O board module slot 0 7 Management module slot 1 Switch module slot 3 Switch module slot 5 Fan module slot 2 Fan module slot 3 Fan module slot 6 Fan module slot 7 I O board module slot 8 15 AC power cable 0 Power supply module 0 AC power cable 1 Power supply module 0 AC power cable 2 Power supply module 1 AC power cable 3 Power supply module 1 AC power cable 7 Power supply module...

Page 77: ...s active G Remote RMT Lights solid green when the module is accessed remotely H LAN interface connector Used to connect LAN cables A condition LED on the upper right of the connector shows the link status Lights solid green when a link is established Blinks green during communication A condition LED on the upper left shows the link rate Lights solid yellow when linked at 1000BASE T Lights solid gr...

Page 78: ...itch module is located D Memory Card slot MC A slot for a Secure Digital SD memory card used for upgrading software and collecting dump data E Access LED ACC Lights solid green when the SD memory card is accessed Do not remove the SD memory card when the LED lights solid green If you do the memory card may be damaged or data might become corrupted F Reset button RST Press and hold this switch for ...

Page 79: ...d used for upgrading software and collecting dump data E Access LED ACC Lights solid green when the SD memory card is accessed Do not remove the SD memory card when the LED lights solid green If you do the memory card may be damaged or data might become corrupted F Reset button RST Press and hold this switch for about 5 seconds to reset the LAN switch module G LAN interface connectors 1 to 4 Used ...

Page 80: ...he temperature exceeds the threshold or a deconfiguration occurs while the switch is working Lights solid red when the switch has a serious failure causing improper performance D SFP interface connector 1 to 8 SFP modules SFP modules 1000Base T connection or direct attach cables can be connected Connect optical fiber cables to SFP modules E Uplink port diagnostics LED Indicates a state of uplink p...

Page 81: ... located C LAN interface connectors 0 to 15 Used for LAN cables Even numbers 0 2 4 14 are assigned to the upper side connectors odd numbers 1 3 5 15 to the lower side connectors LED on the left of a connector to show the link status lights solid green when a link is established Blinks green during communication However when the LED on the right of a connector lights solid orange a link is not esta...

Page 82: ...15 to the lower side connectors E Port status LED 0 to 15 Indicates internal and external port status Lights solid green when a link is established on ports for the LAN interface and for the server blade Blinks green during communication Lights solid orange when a link is not established on ports of the LAN interface and for the server blade Communication is not available 8 Gbps Fibre channel swit...

Page 83: ... port is online but segmented Blinks green rapidly when the port is diagnosed with the internal loopback Both FC port diagnosis LED and FC port status LED are turned off when no signal is received G USB connector for optional USB memory devices dedicated to the Fibre channel To use an optional USB memory device connect it to this connector Do not connect any devices other than USB memory devices d...

Page 84: ...urned on B Attention LED ATN Lights solid orange when the I O board module fails C Attention button ATN Used for hot inserting or hot removing the I O board module Note This hot plug function is currently not supported To obtain information on when the hot plug function will be supported consult your reseller ...

Page 85: ... Equipment AC power input module With two input connectors With one input connector Fan module A ACTIVE LED Lights solid green while the fan is working normally Lights solid orange when the module is not working due to a failure ...

Page 86: ...35 2 How to Use the System Equipment I O slot expansion unit Names and functions Overview of I O slot expansion unit Front view of I O slot expansion unit Rear view of I O slot expansion unit ...

Page 87: ...ront view of I O slot expansion unit configuration Rear view of I O slot expansion unit configuration Power supply module for I O slot expansion unit Fan module for I O slot expansion unit I O module I O adapter for I O slot expansion unit ...

Page 88: ...ights solid green when the main power to the I O module is on Lights solid orange when the main power to all I O modules is off Blinks orange during initialization when the power is on Blinks green during shutdown C Error LED ALM Lights solid red when an error occurs in the I O slot expansion unit Lights solid orange during a warning D Serial port SERIAL0 1 Connects devices that use a serial inter...

Page 89: ... when the module is in standby mode Blinks orange when the module is not working properly due to a failure Blinks orange when temperature exceeds its threshold or if any fan works improperly Fan module for I O slot expansion unit A ACTIVE LED ACT Lights solid green during normal operation Lights solid orange when the module is not working properly due to a failure A A ...

Page 90: ...button RST Resets the I O module when it is pressed for a second or more and released Forcibly turns off main power to all components when it is pressed for 4 or more seconds C Location ID LED LOCID Lights solid blue when the I O module is located D POWER LED PWR Lights solid green during the power on I O adapter slot 8 15 I O adapter slot 0 7 I O module 1 I O module 0 A B G C D E F ...

Page 91: ...es are connected to these connectors The LED on the lower left of the connector shows the link status lights solid green when the link is established blinks green during communication LED on the lower right shows the link speed lights solid yellow when link is at 1000BASE T lights solid green when at 100BASE TX turns off when at 10BASE T or is offline MGMT port for management network MAINT port fo...

Page 92: ...O slot expansion unit A Attention button ATN Starts the hot insertion and hot removal of the I O adapter B POWER LED PWR Blinks green when power to the I O adapter is turning on or off C Attention LED ATN Blinks orange when the I O adapter is located B C A ...

Page 93: ...42 2 How to Use the System Equipment ...

Page 94: ...m equipment and powering on This chapter describes how to install connect and turn on or off the power to the system Install the system 44 Connect the system 45 Connect the I O slot expansion unit 68 Turning power on or off 70 ...

Page 95: ...y loads could lead to injury or equipment failure Checking the parts in the packaging Unpack and check all parts and accessories using the Part Check List Check each part for damage If you find damaged missing parts or any other problem contact your dealer Check the location and installation Referring to the requirements in Chapter 2 Installation Environment check the installation environment and ...

Page 96: ...plication Java application is a Java application that provides Remote Console functionality Remote Console Application is downloaded from a server blade and runs on a console terminal To use the Remote Console Application Java application the following firmware version is required depending on the server blade model Standard server blade X55A1 X55A2 models BMC 03 91 X55R4 Standard server blade X55...

Page 97: ... blades to use FD drives of a console terminal The function also enables server blades to use FD image files on a console terminal as FD media Remote CD DVD function enables server blades to use CD DVD drives of a console terminal The function also enables server blades to use CD DVD image files on a console terminal as CD DVD media When using these functions you can install the OS and application...

Page 98: ...ternal CD DVD drives or USB CD DVD drives connected to the console terminal If you use USB CD DVD drives it is recommended to use USB 2 0 compliant CD DVD drives FD Drive Console terminal s internal FD drives or USB FD drives connected to the console terminal Keyboard 101 104 keyboard or 106 109 keyboard 1 Any windows 6 0 or later browser is recommended 2 64 bit version is not supported Use 32 bit...

Page 99: ...r Connection from Multiple Management PCs Multiple console terminals cannot log in to a single server blade at the same time Number of sessions Up to 130 MB memory is used by the remote console application If you perform too many remote console application sessions from a single console terminal while multiple console terminals are running they may operate improperly due to the lack of memory Nume...

Page 100: ...onsole See Chapter 5 Server Blade Setup Java Runtime Environment JRE version 7 update25 or higher Since security policy has been changed with JRE 7 update25 or higher the remote console application may not be able to start If so execute one of the following a Use Exception Site List JRE 7 update51 or higher Add the Web console to the Site List on the Exception Site List Security tab on Java Contro...

Page 101: ...50 3 Connecting the System Equipment and Powering On 2 Click Add 3 Enter https serever blade Web console IP address and click OK ...

Page 102: ...that the IP address is shown in the Exception Site List and click OK b Use Java Runtime Environment JRE version 7 update 21 or lower Use JRE version before the security policy is changed When enabling the remote console connection via SSL TLS use JRE7u2 or higher ...

Page 103: ...52 3 Connecting the System Equipment and Powering On c Set the security level to Medium Start Java Control Panel and move the security level slider to Medium ...

Page 104: ...authority Check Do not check not recommended under Perform certificate revocation checks on on the Java Control Panel If not startup may take longer or a warning message may appear showing the invalid certificate For JRE 7 Update 21 or lower certificate revocation is not checked by default When you set this item you also need to set Java Runtime Environment JRE version 7 update25 or higher ...

Page 105: ...onsole Application 1 Start a client browser and connect it to the Server Blade web console to display the login page 2 Click Launch Remote Console on the login page The Remote Console Application Java application will start 3 If the following dialog box appears click Yes ...

Page 106: ...onnecting the System Equipment and Powering On 4 If the following dialog box appears click Run 5 When Remote Console Application is started a login dialog appears Enter the User ID and Password Click Connect ...

Page 107: ...e VGA screen is displayed If you already logged in to the Server Blade Web Console use Launch Remote Console on the left side of the page Terminating Remote Console Application To terminate the Remote Console Application select Exit on the menu bar and click Exit on the submenu which appears by clicking Exit on the menu bar ...

Page 108: ...menu is used to execute the functions of the Remote Console Application When a menu item is selected by the mouse cursor the corresponding function is executed See Menu items and functions for the functions of the menu items 3 Remote screen This area shows the video screen of the server blade 4 5 Scroll bars The scroll bars are used to change the displayed part of the server screen 6 Window contro...

Page 109: ... 1 Pin button The button is used to have the bar always displayed 2 Menu button The button is used to display the menu that runs the functions of Remote Console See Menu items and functions for the functions of the menu items 3 Title The title shows the IP address power status and LID LED status of the server blade 4 Window control buttons These buttons are used to minimize maximize and terminate ...

Page 110: ... When CD DVD drive is selected on the dialog Remote CD DVD is started If this item is selected when Remote CD DVD is running Remote CD DVD is terminated Redirect CD DVD image Open a dialog to select CD DVD image file When CD DVD image file is selected on the dialog Remote CD DVD is started If this item is selected when Remote CD DVD is running Remote CD DVD is terminated Change CD DVD image Change...

Page 111: ...emote console Java application supports the following two mouse modes ABSOLUTE mode With this mode you can remotely operate the mouse by using the mouse cursor displayed by the console terminal s OS RELATIVE mode With this mode you can remotely operate the mouse by using the mouse cursor displayed by the server OS To use the mouse remote control you need to use the appropriate mouse mode depending...

Page 112: ... use the 101 104 keyboard To use the 106 109 keyboard both of them must be configured to use the 106 109 keyboard The following table shows that the keys work different when the keyboard is directly connected to a server blade Key Status Solution Alt on the left Alt on the right Keyboard input is not sent to the server blade Use menu or shortcut keys for keyboard input to the server blade Windows ...

Page 113: ... with the standard server blade USB port locations of the high performance server blade are different from those of the standard server blade See High performance server blade X57A1 X57A2 in Chapter 2 for more information When using a server blade by connecting one plug of a combined cable to the USB port do not connect the other plug of the combined cable to another server blade USB port USB DVD ...

Page 114: ...rovide one circuit on the branch circuit in the distribution panel with one outlet Do not connect any other electrical device to the branch circuit to which this equipment is connected Use a fuse free breaker FFB to equip with the distribution circuit panel as a circuit breaker The number of power outlets National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA L6 30R 30A 250V required is the same as th...

Page 115: ...ribution panel A 1 1 AC power module redundant configuration Connect power cables to each outlet from the distribution panel A or B Power cable for AC200 V NEMA L6 30R IEC60309 32 200 VAC 240 VAC Distribution panel B FFB 30A Distribution panel A FFB 30A Line A Line B Power cable for AC200 V NEMA L6 30R IEC60309 32 200 VAC 240 VAC Distribution panel A FFB ...

Page 116: ... A 2 2 AC power module redundant configuration Connect power cables to each outlet from the distribution panel A or B Power cable for AC200 V NEMA L6 30R IEC60309 32 200 VAC 240 VAC Distribution panel A FFB Power cable for AC200 V NEMA L6 30R IEC60309 32 200 VAC 240 VAC Distribution panel B FFB 30A Distribution panel A FFB 30A Line A 200 VAC 240 VAC Line B ...

Page 117: ...h outlet from the distribution panel A 2 1 DC power module redundant configuration up to 7 2 kWdc Connect power cables to each outlet from the distribution panel A 200 VAC 240 VAC FFB 30 A Distribution panel A up to 10 A up to 3 6 kWdc 12 20 A PDU 200 VAC 240 VAC FFB 30 A Distribution panel A up to 10 A up to 7 2 kWdc up to 3 6 kWdc PS up to 20 A PDU ...

Page 118: ...nt configuration up to 7 2 kWdc Connect power cables to each outlet from the distribution panel A or B FFB 30 A Distribution panel B up to 10 A up to 3 6 kWdc up to 20 A PDU FFB 30 A Distribution panel A Line A 200 VAC 240 VAC Line B 200 VAC 240 VAC FFB 30 A Distribution panel B up to 10 A up to 7 2 kWdc up to 3 6 kWdc PS 12 20 A PDU FFB 30 A Distribution panel A Line A 200 VAC 240V AC Line B 200 ...

Page 119: ...it breaker which affects other devices on the same circuit When unplugging a power connecter wait 10 or more seconds before reconnecting the power cable Otherwise the system equipment may not boot Install the outlet beside the equipment side because this has no circuit breaker Provide one circuit on the branch circuit in the distribution panel with one outlet Do not connect any other electrical de...

Page 120: ... 1 1 AC Input redundancy configuration Connect the power cable to the PDU and connect the PDU to the socket outlet through the distribution panel A Power cable for 200 VAC 200 VAC 240 VAC Distribution panel A PDU FFB 30 A 15A x4 NEMA L6 30R 200 VAC 240 VAC Distribution panel A Distribution panel B PDU Line A Line B Power cable for 200 VAC Power cable for 200 VAC NEMA L6 30R NEMA L6 30R 15A x4 15A ...

Page 121: ...e rear door of the rack cabinet and connect the power cable of the alternating current AC power input module to the power outlet The POWER LED of the power supply module blinks See the Instruction Manual that came with the rack cabinet This is often located inside the front door of the rack cabinet 3 When the POWER LED on the front panel stops blinking and lights solid orange press and hold the po...

Page 122: ...er of the system equipment When turning off system equipment power power off all server blades and then execute the shutdown of the management module by using the Software Defined Networking SDN Command from the system service processor SVP console See SDN Command in Chapter 6 for further details Power saving System Standby and Hibernate functions are not supported Do not select System Standby and...

Page 123: ...72 3 Connecting the System Equipment and Powering On ...

Page 124: ...73 4 Adding optional components This chapter provides information about installing optional components Mounting internal optional components 74 ...

Page 125: ...nance personnel CAUTION Adding or replacing optional components inside the system equipment must be performed by maintenance personnel Do not attempt to remove the cover of the equipment Do not attempt to install or remove optional components Since parts implemented in the system equipment are high density operation or maintenance by inexperienced persons might lead to injury or equipment failure ...

Page 126: ...els 76 Standard server blade setup menu X55A1 X55A92 Models 127 Standard server blade setup menu X55R3 X55S3 55R4 models 141 Remote CD DVD boot procedure 158 Hardware memory dump 167 MegaRAID WebBIOS 175 High performance Server Blade settings X57A1 X57A2 models 402 High performance server blade setup menu X57A1 X57A2 models 415 ...

Page 127: ...ntroller BMC time settings Connection Connect to the server blade Web console via the management network of the management module See External Interface of the Management Module in Chapter 6 for information about how to connect to the network Confirm that the client web browser is properly configured before using the server blade Web console If the settings are not appropriate the server blade Web...

Page 128: ...nsfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer protocol enter https server blade IP address port number to the URL address field You can omit the port number only when the port number is 443 3 When the connection is established the following login screen is displayed Launch Remote Console shown in the login screen is available with the following system firmware revisions or later Standard server blade X5...

Page 129: ... screen is displayed Using the default server blade setting configured during shipment you can log in to the server blade as an administrator by entering user01 to the user name field and pass01 to the password field on the login screen If a user account is set in the server blade different from the above you cannot log in using the method mentioned above Hitachi Data Systems recommends selecting ...

Page 130: ...f no operation is run for more than 30 minutes the system will log out automatically Make sure to log out by clicking Logout on the upper right of the screen before closing the browser When closing the browser without clicking Logout you remain in the server blade web console until automatically logging out after 30 minutes If you close out the browser without logging out you cannot log in for 30 ...

Page 131: ...r accounts Item Description 1 Refresh Reloads user account information 2 Select Option buttons to select a user account 3 Username Shows the names of user accounts 4 Role Login Shows the roles given to user accounts Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware SMASH 5 Administrator 6 Server Operation 7 User Account Management 8 Service Settings 9 Remote Console 10 Remote Media 11 SMASH CLP ...

Page 132: ...e server blade and remote control of the keyboard and mouse This role also allows users to use the OS console 7 Remote Media Role to use the remote floppy disk FD function and remote compact disc digital versatile disc CD DVD function 8 SMASH CLP 1 Role to use SMASH CLP WS MAN 9 IPMI Over LAN 2 Role to use IPMI Over LAN Notes 1 This role is available for the following BMC firmware version or later...

Page 133: ... 2 user02 pass02 None Ordinary users 3 user03 pass03 4 user04 pass04 5 user05 pass05 6 user06 pass06 7 user07 pass07 8 user08 pass08 9 user09 pass09 10 user10 pass10 11 user11 pass11 3 Changing and deleting user account Click the option button of the user account to change or delete and click Edit The screen to change the settings of the selected user account is displayed 4 Edit user accounts scre...

Page 134: ...d contents in this screen 7 Modify Validates the edited settings and moves to Edit User Accounts Confirm screen You cannot omit entering username When setting a password enter the same password in the password field and the password confirm field When editing a user account entering the password is not essential If no password is entered it is handled as no password change SSH public key files gen...

Page 135: ... When you click Modify the following confirmation screen is displayed Item Description 1 Back Cancels the edited settings and returns to Edit User Account screen 2 Confirm Allows the edited settings to become effective 1 2 1 ...

Page 136: ...model string 4 LP Firmware Version Bank0 Bank1 Displays LP firmware version of each bank Active shows the firmware bank currently selected Alternate shows the firmware bank not currently selected When firmware exists its version is shown When no firmware exists N A is shown 5 Switch the LP firmware Selects which bank Bank0 or Bank1 is to be used for next LPAR manager boot Switching banks is execut...

Page 137: ...ntrol mouse using the mouse cursor on the server blade screen Use a mouse mode appropriate for the server OS For details about Reclient see the Remote Console Application User s Guide Compute Blade 2000 for details about Java application see Mouse Mode Java application settings in Chapter 3 3 Reset Cancels the edited settings 4 Modify Validates the edited settings and moves to the confirmation scr...

Page 138: ...e EFI Setup Screen in Standard server blade setup menu X55A1 X55A2 models for setting the time in the EFI menu 1 1 2 3 6 5 4 8 7 Item Description 1 Refresh Reloads the information 2 Time Synchronization Method Do not use NTP The BMC time is set as follows 1 Basic mode not using LPAR manager with SC ServerConductor Agent installed Time synchronization function of SC Agent sets the BMC time to the O...

Page 139: ... management module time Real time clock RTC time of the active partition is taken over to the standby partition at N M failover Continue N M cold standby failover if RTC handover fails displayed on the screen Available only when Use the NTP server of the Management Modules with RTC time handover on N M cold standby failover is checked See N M Cold Standby in Chapter 13 for details 3 Month Day Year...

Page 140: ...anagement Modules is selected in 2 Time Synchronization Method the time synchronization between the BMC time and the OS time by the SC agent is disabled The time synchronization between the BMC time and LP system time is also disabled Item Description 1 Back Cancels the edited settings and returns to BMC Time screen 2 Confirm Allows the edited settings to be effective Logout Click Logout on the lo...

Page 141: ...nd configures access restriction settings 9 Service Settings 1 Enables or disables the services of the server blade and configures the port numbers for the services 10 Security and Service Settings 2 Enables or disables security and services and sets port numbers for the services 11 User Accounts Configures user accounts 12 BMC Time Sets the BMC time and time zone 13 Remote KVM Sets the mouse mode...

Page 142: ...ilable for the following system firmware version or later Standard server blade X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 models BMC 05 18 or 07 01 High performance server blade X57A1 X57A2 BMC 04 71 or 06 01 4 This menu is available for the following system firmware version or later Standard server blade X55A1 X55A2 models BMC 03 60 Standard server blade X55R3 X55S3 models BMC 05 00 or 07 01 High performance server blad...

Page 143: ...n display only 13 Remote KVM 14 SSH Server 15 SSL Server 16 DNS Client 17 LDAP None None None Maintenance tab 18 EFI Firmware Management Information display only Information display only Information display only Information display only 19 BMC Firmware Management 20 Backup System Settings None None None None 21 Restore System Settings 22 Backup Server Management Settings 23 Restore Server Manageme...

Page 144: ... Console Remote Media and SMASH CLP roles are not related to the operations of the server blade Web console With X57A1 X57A2 model you can operate all menus in the server configuration and reduction settings using the Administrator role ...

Page 145: ...P address of the server blade For BMC IP address settings see LC Command in Chapter 6 BMC MAC Address shows the BMC MAC address UUID Universal Unique ID shows the UUID of the server blade BMC Firmware Version shows the BMC firmware version EFI Firmware Version shows the EFI firmware version 3 Server Field Replaceable Unit FRU Information Shows the product information of the server blade Product Na...

Page 146: ...server blade is off ON The power of the server blade is on OFF Power on is disabled The power cannot be turned on due to a power failure 3 Power on Turns on the power of the server blade 4 Force Power off Turns off the power of the server blade without OS shutdown You can do a shutdown on the OS screen or use the SC function to turn off the power 5 Hard Reset Hardware resets the server blade Enabl...

Page 147: ...cription of each LED see Standard Server Blade X55A1 X55A2 in Chapter 2 In the following cases power on requests are ignored and the server blade is not powered on 1 Power on is disabled due to failure in the server blade 2 The number of power supply modules installed is not enough for the installed server blades To prevent the EFI firmware storage from being corrupted power off requests issued du...

Page 148: ...emory controller in Intel CPU Disable Enable Default 5 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Disables or enables the Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch function of the memory controller in Intel CPU Disable Default Enable 6 Memory Channel Mode Sets the operation mode of the memory system Independent Channel Mode Default Mirrored Channel Mode Lockstep Channel Mode Spare Channel Mode Note Do not use Lockstep Chann...

Page 149: ... for UEFI to execute 12 PXE Option ROM Execution Policy 5 Sets execution mode of the storage option ROM 9 Do not launch Not executes UFEI only Executes codes only for UEFI Legacy Only Default Use the code for the legacy BIOS Legacy first Prioritize codes for the legacy BIOS to execute UEFI first Prioritize codes for UEFI to execute 13 PXE LAN1 Option ROM Scan 5 PXE LAN2 Option ROM Scan 5 Sets Opti...

Page 150: ...not change this value due to non support for the item 22 Reliability availability serviceability RAS Feature Deconfigured Mode Disables or enables the processor and memory deconfiguration or reduction that is executed when a component fails Disable Enable Default 23 Set All EFI Settings to their Defaults Restores the EFI Default settings All the EFI settings including the settings 2 to 14 are set ...

Page 151: ...XE boot Setting item UEFI boot Legacy boot PXE Option ROM Execution Policy UEFI only Legacy only PXE LAN1 Option ROM Scan PXE LAN2 Option ROM Scan Enable the LAN you use Enable the LAN you use Network Stack Enable Only for UEFI boot Set the default value in Legacy boot IPv4 PXE Support IPv6 PXE Support Set to Enable depending on your LAN environment Only for UEFI boot Set the default value in Lega...

Page 152: ...nitial Settings with Server Blade Web Console Server Configuration and Reduction This screen displays information of the CPUs and mezzanine cards installed in the server blade and also displays the reduction information on the CPUs and DIMMs Reduction information includes whether components are deconfigured due to a failure You can also set up the planned reduction for the CPUs and DIMMs on this s...

Page 153: ...reduction settings to be applied at the next power on or reset Deconfigured CPU DIMM will be deconfigured Configured CPU DIMM will not be deconfigured 6 Modify Next Planned Reduction Settings Changes the planned CPU DIMM reduction settings to be applied at the next power on or reset Deconfigured CPU DIMM will be deconfigured Configured CPU DIMM will not be deconfigured 7 Reset Cancels the edited s...

Page 154: ... the server blade web console on the following screen Item Description 1 Refresh Reloads the information 2 Language English Sets English as the displayed language on the server blade Web console Japanese Set Japanese as the displayed language on the server blade Web console 3 Reset Cancels the edited settings 4 Modify Validates the edited settings and moves to the confirmation screen ...

Page 155: ...rver name is shown in the Server name field at the left top of the screen and Server Information screen in the Server Operation tab 3 Server Asset Information A comment can be registered This field can be used to record information such as the installed location and administrator of the server blade 4 Reset Cancels the edited settings 5 Modify Validates the edited settings and moves to the confirm...

Page 156: ...ettings of the server blade To set or modify the IP address and netmask use the LC Command of the management module For DNS setting see the DNS Client screen DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 3 IP address Restriction Enable or disable the restriction on the IP addresses 4 Permitted IP Address 1 4 Enter IP addresses that you allow connection to the server blade You can set a single IP addres...

Page 157: ...rt number used by the remote console application to connect to the server blade 5 Web Console Shows the HTTP port and HTTPS port used by the server blade Web console 6 IPMI over LAN Enables disables IPMI over LAN permits or not access over LAN v1 5 and null account selects suite privilege levels Shows the port number used by the IPMI Over LAN 7 WS MAN 1 Enables or disables WS MAN Web Service Manag...

Page 158: ...er 13 Security Strength for details 3 OS Console Telnet Enables disables access to the OS console via Telnet Shows the port number used by the OS console via Telnet 4 OS Console SSH Enables disables access to the OS console via SSH Shows the port number used by the OS console via SSH 5 Remote Console Enables disables remote console functions Sets a connection method TLS version and port number use...

Page 159: ...nt Sets a port number for connecting to WS MAN 10 Reset Cancels the edited settings 11 Modify Validates the edited settings and moves to the confirmation screen To power on or off a server blade from SC Blade Server Manager register the server chassis as a target on SC Blade Server Manager before setting IPMI over LAN User accounts See User account configuration in Initial Settings with Server Bla...

Page 160: ...are used in the server blade SSH server 3 SSH Host Keys Updates SSH host keys 4 SSH User Authentication Method Selects the authentication method that is used in the server blade SSH server 5 Reset Cancels the edited settings 6 Modify Validates the edited settings and moves to the confirmation screen This button is available with the following BMC firmware or later BMC 07 01 on standard server blad...

Page 161: ...ate on this screen You can display the information of the server certificate used by the server blade create a self signed server certificate create a certificate signing request CSR import a server certificate and download the server certificate 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 11 10 9 8 7 ...

Page 162: ...up to 60 ASCII characters can be specified DN Qualifier Surname Given Name A string of up to 60 characters can be specified Initials A string of up to 30 characters can be specified Common Name CN must be specified Other items can be omitted The characters that can be used in State or Province Name ST Locality Name L Organization Name O Organization Unit Name OU DN Qualifier Surname Given Name and...

Page 163: ...er certificate to import to the server blade Format Specifies the format of the server certificate to import PEM or DER can be specified Certificate to import Specifies the file of the server certificate 10 Import Server Certificate Imports the server certificate specified in 9 to the server blade When the button is pressed the confirmation screen is displayed 11 Download Server Certificate Specif...

Page 164: ...NS Server IP Address 1 3 Sets the IP addresses of DNS servers Up to 3 IP addresses can be specified The IP address on the top of the screen is used first then one in the middle and the bottom one the last If you do not use the second and or third DNS servers enter 0 0 0 0 to those fields If you do not use DNS set 0 0 0 0 to all the fields 3 Reset Cancels the edited settings 4 Modify Validates the ...

Page 165: ...n to the user account 7 Edit Goes to the Edit IPMI Over LAN User Account screen but does not go there without the option button checked For User ID1 you can change only Status Enable or Disable User ID1 is set by default at the factory as follows Status Enable User name blank Password blank Privilege Level Administrator When you turn a server blade on or off from ServerConductor Blade Server Manag...

Page 166: ...2 Retype the password 6 Privilege Level 1 Set a privilege level 7 Back Returns to the List of IPMI Over LAN User Accounts screen without saving edits 8 Reset Returns settings to the previous state without saving edits 9 Modify Saves the edits and goes to the confirmation screen 1 User ID1 cannot be changed 2 You can set a password depending on the BMC firmware versions as follows BMC 04 71 or late...

Page 167: ... Over LAN User Account screen the following screen appears When clicking Back you return to the Edit IPMI Over LAN User Account screen without saving the edits When clicking Confirm you return to the List of IPMI Over LAN User Accounts screen while saving the edits ...

Page 168: ... user authentication Authenticates a user with user accounts registered in the server blade If it fails then authenticate the user with user accounts on the LDAP server 3 LDAP 1 3 Specifies an LDAP with IP address XXX XXX XXX XXX or FQDN up to 255 characters 4 Port Number Specifies a destination port number with decimal numbers 1 to 65535 5 Encryption Start Method 1 Specifies a method to connect t...

Page 169: ...for Role Specifies an attribute containing a character string to show a role among attributes in user entry up to 64 characters 13 Attribute for Group Member Specifies an attribute to show a member among attributes in group entry up to 64 characters 14 Group DN1 DN5 Specifies DNs of groups allowed to login up to 256 characters If nothing is typed in all fields no group authentication is performed ...

Page 170: ...n XXX XXX XXX XXX or FQDN using up to 127 characters 3 Port Number Shows the port number for syslog transfer destination 4 Reset button Disables the edit and returns to the state before editing 5 Modify button Enables the edit and goes to the confirmation screen 6 Send button Issues a test syslog for confirmation This function is available with the following BMC firmware versions or later BMC 07 0...

Page 171: ...t BMC using the other bank You can update the BMC firmware on this screen BMC firmware is updated by writing a new BMC firmware image to a bank Alternate which is not currently used then switching banks and restarting BMC You can also switch banks on this screen without updating the BMC firmware Item Description 1 Refresh Reloads the information 2 Base Firmware SDR Version Shows the information sh...

Page 172: ... the confirmation screen is displayed 7 Switch BMC Firmware Bank Switches banks for use When clicking Switch BMC Firmware Bank the confirmation screen is displayed Only maintenance personnel can use Update BMC Firmware and Switch BMC Firmware Bank Backup System Settings Only maintenance personnel can use this menu Restore System Settings Only maintenance personnel can use this menu Backup Server M...

Page 173: ...iguration state of PCI Express Not Deconfigured In the server partition no PCI Express device is deconfigured Deconfigured In the server partition one or more PCI Express devices are deconfigured 3 Cancel PCI Express Deconfiguration Cancels PCI Express deconfiguration and makes the deconfigured PCI Express devices enabled again When Cancel PCI Express Deconfiguration is pressed the confirmation sc...

Page 174: ...the serial console of the server blade A log is collected when 1 The server blade is powered off 2 The server blade is reset 3 BMC watchdog timer is expired 4 The server blade Web console downloads logs 64 kB of data is collected each time for conditions 1 3 Logs collected the last 5 times in above 1 3 will be stored in BMC and downloaded In 4 only the latest log will be downloaded 2 VFP Virtual F...

Page 175: ...y Processing Failure in the Server Conductor Blade Server Manager System Management Guide for BMC WDT Watch Dog Timer Operation Log You can download the operation logs and clear them on this screen Item Description 1 Download Operation Log Downloads the operation logs collected by BMC 2 Clear Operation Log Moves to the confirmation screen When using the operation log with server blades X55A1 X55A2...

Page 176: ...itialization code at the power on of a server blade The VFP log is recorded in the three line format The format includes Line1 L1 Line2 L2 and Line3 L3 and each line consists of 40 characters Item Description 1 Line1 L1 Records the time stamp at output 2 Line2 L2 Records the EFI initialization code power on self test POST code 3 Line3 L3 Records the front panel LED status for reference VFP snapsho...

Page 177: ...ns of the server blade web console may not be displayed in the web browser window Also if the throughput of the network is low it may take some time for the screens of the server blade web console to be displayed Check that there is no failure or problem in the network If there is no problem or failure continue to Procedure 2 Procedure 2 Restart the server blade BMC 1 Log in to the system console ...

Page 178: ...ering the EFI Setup screen while the server blade is booting you can halt the boot process and check or change the settings With the EFI startup screen open press the F2 key to display the EFI Setup screen The EFI Setup screen has six setup menus Main Advanced Chipset iSCSI Boot Security and Save Exit ...

Page 179: ...for operations in the EFI Setup menus are shown on the right side of the screen Make sure not to use function keys F1 to F4 because you may unintentionally alter the settings with those keys Checking the EFI version The EFI version is the XX YY part of X8DTE XX YY x64 in the Project Version field where XX Major Version YY Minor Version In the following example the EFI version is 01 40 ...

Page 180: ...is example 6144 MB of memory is installed Note that when memory mirroring mode is enabled the displayed size is one half of the total installed memory Setting the server blade system time You can check and set the date and time set in the server blade system Move the cursor to the item you want to change Use the Tab key to toggle between System Date and System Time To change the setting use the pl...

Page 181: ...130 5 Server Blade Setup Advanced menu On the Advanced menu you can enable or disable the PXE booting option Standard Server Blade Setup Menu X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 Models Figure 5 2 Advanced Menu ...

Page 182: ...or to Launch PXE OpROM and press Enter Figure 5 3 Setting PXE Enabled The screen appears as shown in Figure 5 3 To specify Enabled move the cursor to Enabled and press Enter Next enable PXE booting for LAN1 in the same manner Figure 5 4 Setting LAN1 PXE Enabled ...

Page 183: ...r LAN1 and LAN2 respectively or simultaneously Figure 5 5 Setting LAN2 PXE Enabled After changing settings make sure to select Save Changes and Reset or Save Changes on the Save Exit menu This is the last item that can be set on the Advanced menu Be sure not to change other settings If you do EFI may fail to restart ...

Page 184: ...Chipset Menu 1 Checking the Memory Mode and NUMA Settings To check the Memory Mode and NUMA settings select North Bridge on Figure 5 6 Chipset menu to show the following sub menu Figure 5 7 North Bridge Sub Menu Make sure that the settings for Memory Mode and NUMA are the same as the settings on the server blade web console ...

Page 185: ...le The settings on the North Bridge sub menu can be viewed only They must not be changed Be careful because if a setting is changed inadvertently the EFI may not start 2 Checking and Setting Wake On Lan To check the Wake On Lan setting select South Bridge on Figure 5 6 Chipset Menu to show the following sub menu Figure 5 8 South Bridge Sub Menu Wake On Lan is always set to Enable If the setting ap...

Page 186: ...135 5 Server Blade Setup iSCSI menu On the iSCSI menu you can check the internet small computer system interface iSCSI settings Figure 5 9 iSCSI Selection Menu ...

Page 187: ...ade Device name Location Slot No 1 Embedded HDD 2 Onboard NIC0 1 Switch module slot 0 3 Onboard NIC1 1 1 4 I O board 1 2 I O board module slot Odd number 5 I O board 0 2 Even number 6 Expansion card 0 Switch module slot 2 7 3 8 Expansion card 1 4 9 5 1 In SMP configuration PXE boot is supported only by onboard NIC of the primary blade 2 When an I O slot expansion unit is connected I O devices are ...

Page 188: ...egacy booting conventional mode and boot method EFI booting newly supported mode and boot method The boot mode is determined automatically according to the boot device selected as Boot Option 1 When Built in Shell or UEFI xxxxx is selected as Boot Option 1 EFI booting applies and the legacy boot path will be ignored Note that when a boot device other than Built in Shell or UEFI xxxxx is selected a...

Page 189: ...r Launch PXE OpROM on the Advanced menu To specify PXE booting set Boot Option 1 as follows Figure 5 11 Setting the PXE Boot Path Figure 5 12 Screen with PXE Boot Path Specified After changing the setting remember to select Save Changes and Reset or Save Changes on the Save Exit menu described later in this manual ...

Page 190: ... is set The password is not set 1 With EFI firmware version 01 61 02 61 or later or 03 44 04 44 or later you are not requested to input a password for authentication while a server blade is being booted Any password can be set for a user When you set a user password with EFI firmware version earlier than 01 61 02 61 or earlier than 03 44 04 44 it is always necessary to enter the password for authe...

Page 191: ...e set in the boot path 3 Save Changes and Reset Saves changes and restarts the system 4 Discard Changes and Reset Discards changes and exits the Setup utility Restarts the system 5 Save Changes Saves changes 6 Discard Changes Discards changes 7 Restore Defaults Restores settings to the system Defaults 8 Save as User Defaults Saves settings as user Defaults 9 Restore User Defaults Restores settings...

Page 192: ... while the server blade is booting you can halt the boot process and check or change the settings With the EFI startup screen open press one of the following keys to display the EFI Setup screen X55R3 X55S3 model F2 key X55R4 model Delete key The EFI Setup screen has six setup menus Main Advanced Chipset Boot Security and Save Exit ...

Page 193: ...used for operations in the EFI Setup menus are shown on the right side of the screen Make sure not to use function keys F1 to F4 because you may unintentionally alter the settings with those keys Checking the EFI version The EFI version is the XX YY part of X8DTE XX YY in the Project Version field where XX Major Version YY Minor Version In the example below the EFI version is 09 01 ...

Page 194: ... In this example 32 GB of memory is installed When memory mirroring mode is enabled the displayed size is one half of the total installed memory Setting the server blade system time You can check and set the date and time set in the server blade system Move the cursor to the item you want to change Use the Tab key to toggle between System Date and System Time To change the setting use the plus and...

Page 195: ...stalled For the X55R4 model Launch PXE OpROM and Launch storage OpROM are not shown see the EFI Setup screen in Standard server blade settings X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 models for the following settings Launch PXE OpROM LAN1 Option ROM Scan LAN2 Option ROM Scan Launch storage OpROM Figure 5 16 Advanced menu if TPM is installed Figure 5 17 Advanced menu if TPM not installed ...

Page 196: ...ting move the cursor to Launch PXE OpROM and press Enter Figure 5 18 Setting PXE enabled The screen appears as in Figure 5 18 To specify Enabled move the cursor to Enabled and press Enter Next enable PXE booting for LAN1 in the same manner Figure 5 19 Setting LAN1 PXE enabled ...

Page 197: ...orm the setting in the same manner You can enable PXE for LAN1 and LAN2 respectively or simultaneously Figure 5 20 Setting LAN2 PXE enabled 2 Viewing iSCSI To show iSCSI settings place the cursor on iSCSI and press Enter Figure 5 21 iSCSI setting to view or not ...

Page 198: ...etup The following screen shows the iSCSI setting Figure 5 22 iSCSI setting shown 3 TPM settings To set TPM place the cursor on Trusted Computing and press Enter to show the TPM setting screen Figure 5 23 TPM to set or not ...

Page 199: ...ORT If you do BitLocker may not be installed Just view other items and do not change their values Figure 5 24 TPM to set On Windows Server 2012 installed from EFI boot do not execute BitLocker drive encryption using TPM due to it not being supported ...

Page 200: ...you permit the TPM operation press the F10 key if not press the Esc key Press the F12 key instead of the F10 key depending on the operation Note that pressing the Esc key may display the Physical Presence request screen again You do not need to press the Esc key again Figure 5 25 Physical presence request After changing settings make sure to select Save Changes and Reset or Save Changes on the Sav...

Page 201: ... settings Figure 5 26 Chipset menu 1 Checking the memory mode and NUMA settings To check the Memory Mode and NUMA settings select North Bridge on the Chipset menu Figure 5 27 North Bridge sub menu Make sure that the settings for Memory Mode and NUMA are the same as those on the server blade web console ...

Page 202: ...web console The settings on the North Bridge sub menu can be viewed only They must not be changed If a setting is changed inadvertently the EFI might not start 2 Checking and setting Wake On Lan To check the Wake On Lan setting select South Bridge on the Chipset menu Figure 5 28 South Bridge to set WOL Wake On Lan is always set to Enabled If the setting appears as Disable change it to Enable On th...

Page 203: ...hell starts again Then perform the exit command again About boot paths legacy boot and EFI boot Boot paths are categorized into two boot modes in the Compute Blade 2000 The implemented boot processing depends on which mode you select The two Compute Blade 2000 boot modes are Legacy booting conventional mode and boot method EFI booting newly supported mode and boot method The boot mode is determine...

Page 204: ... OpROM on the Advanced menu or on the Server Operation EFI Setup of the server blade Web console See Standard server blade settings X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 models for details of the server blade Web console To specify PXE booting set Boot Option 1 as follows Figure 5 30 Setting the PXE boot path Examples of Legacy boot ...

Page 205: ...154 5 Server Blade Setup Figure 5 31 PXE boot path specified Example of Legacy boot After changing the setting remember to select Save Changes and Reset or Save Changes on the Save Exit menu ...

Page 206: ...tialize the boot priorities to the default Reset Boot Option is shown and available for EFI firmware version 09 42 10 42 or later for X55R3 X55S3 model and for EFI firmware version 11 01 12 01 or later on X55R4 model Make sure to execute Save Changes and Reset referring to Save Exit menu before initializing Boot Option Priorities You cannot separately delete boot options and initialize boot priori...

Page 207: ...1 While a server blade is being booted 2 When you enter the EFI Setup screen 3 While a server blade is being booted The password is set The password is not set Any password can be set for a user When you set a password however it is always necessary to enter the password for authentication when booting the server module When you set the N M cold standby or automatic OS boot do not set a password O...

Page 208: ...set in the boot path 3 Save Changes and Reset Saves changes and restarts the system 4 Discard Changes and Reset Discards changes and exits the Setup utility Restarts the system 5 Save Changes Saves changes 6 Discard Changes Discards changes 7 Restore Defaults Restores settings to the system defaults 8 Save as User Defaults Saves settings as user defaults 9 Restore User Defaults Restores settings t...

Page 209: ...he procedure mentioned below Steps may be different depending on your remote console application Remote Console Application Reclient 1 Insert the CD DVD media into the console terminal s CD DVD drive 2 Start the Remote Console Application Reclient and then select Remote CD DVD on the toolbar and Start CD DVD If the toolbar is not visible press Alt G to display it ...

Page 210: ...setting the server blade otherwise the server blade will not recognize the remote CD DVD If you want to install an OS or perform some other task using a remote FD complete steps 1 to 3 and then select the Remote FD menu and Start FD 4 Power on or reset the server blade and start the EFI and then press the F2 key to display the EFI Setup menus ...

Page 211: ...in the following figure Depending on the types of devices installed in or connected to the server blade the display may differ from the following screen If the boot order differs from the order shown in the previous screen set the correct boot devices in Boot Option 1 and Boot Option 2 The following screen shows the sub menu for setting Boot Option 1 Boot Option 2 can be set similarly ...

Page 212: ...minal s floppy disk drive In this case remove the floppy disk and then restart the server blade Remove the CD DVD driver media from the console terminal after installation When using the remote console application Reclient select Remote CD DVD End CD DVD When using the remote FD remove the media from the console terminal FD drive and select Remote FD End FD on the remote console toolbar Remote Con...

Page 213: ...the server blade otherwise the server blade will not recognize the remote CD DVD If you want to install an OS or perform some other task using a remote FD complete steps 1 to 3 and then choose the Remote FD menu and Start FD 4 Power on or reset the server blade and start the EFI Press the F2 key to display the EFI Setup menus ...

Page 214: ...in the following figure Depending on the types of devices installed in or connected to the server blade the display may differ from the screenshot below If the boot order differs from the order shown in the previous screen set the correct boot devices in Boot Option 1 and Boot Option 2 The following screen shows the sub menu for setting Boot Option 1 Boot Option 2 can be set similarly ...

Page 215: ...ooting from the remote CD DVD Booting from a remote CD DVD may fail if a floppy disk has been inserted in the console terminal s floppy disk drive In this case remove the floppy disk and then restart the server blade Remove the CD DVD drive media from the console terminal after installation If HITACHI Remote CD DVD or HITACHI Remote FD is not listed in the boot options change the settings as follo...

Page 216: ...Remote CD DVD Sub Menu 1 Sub Menu 2 3 After enabling HITACHI Remote CD DVD press ESC to return to the Boot menu On the Boot menu set HITACHI Remote CD DVD in Boot Option 2 To boot from a remote FD select Floppy Driver BBS Priorities on the Boot menu and then perform the same procedure as above ...

Page 217: ...ia from the console terminal s CD DVD drive Then choose the Remote CD DVD on the toolbar of the Remote Console Application and End CD DVD If you use a remote FD remove the floppy disk from the console terminal s floppy drive and then choose the Remote FD on the toolbar and End FD ...

Page 218: ...s about 400 MB more of main memory than usual disabled This feature is available with X57A1 X57A2 X55A1 1 X55A2 X55S3 X55R3 2 and X55R4 models 1 X55A1 model needs to have EFI version 03 xx 04 xx applied 2 X55S3 X55R3 models need to have EFI version 09 32 10 32 or later applied You can usually use this feature only on Redhat Enterprise Linux 5 4 or later without using KVM Kernel based Virtual Machi...

Page 219: ... mezzanine card I O adapter Hitachi 8 Gb 1 port Fibre channel adapter Hitachi 8 Gb 2 port Fibre channel adapter Hitachi 16Gb 1 port fibre channel adapter Hitachi 16Gb 2 port fibre channel adapter 2 File system FAT 32 3 Partition size Any size is available Recommended partition size is about 102 of the physical memory size installed For Hitachi 16 Gb fibre channel the following EFI firmware version...

Page 220: ... file beyond the free space size is discarded Since dump files are not automatically deleted the user needs to properly delete some for maintenance An area where memory pages are the default value all 0x0 at hardware memory dump is not saved in the dump file We recommend that you set a distinguishable name on the volume label of a dump partition It is recommended that a dump partition be connected...

Page 221: ...e BIOS EFI Edition for detailed procedures The LU with a dump partition is registered in Boot Priority See Procedure to set a Boot Priority or Procedure to set a Boot Priority manually in the Hitachi Gigagbit Fibre Channel Adapter User s Guide BIOS EFI Edition for detailed procedures 4 Enable the hardware memory dump Enter the EFI setup menu and select hardware memory dump Settings to display the ...

Page 222: ...dump Reset Resets automatically and reboots the server blade after the dump 6 Save the settings and reboot the server blade To check if the dump partition is properly identified Select hardware memory dump Settings under the Advanced tab in the EFI setup menu after rebooting the server blade Check that the volume label of the target dump partition is displayed in dump partition ...

Page 223: ...ware memory dump is performed in the Power and LEDs screen under the server operation tab of the server blade web console 1 In the Power and LEDs screen click Hardware Memory Dump 2 In the Power and LEDs Confirm screen click Confirm Hardware memory dump will start ...

Page 224: ...dump depends on the write performance of the storage When the dump is successfully completed hardware dump complete is displayed After the dump is complete the operation set in Post process of the EFI setup menu is executed When the dump partition does not have enough free space for the dump file a message appears and the dump is stopped when free space runs out Once the dump is stopped it cannot ...

Page 225: ...irectory on the dump partition Directory structure Content HDUMP_YYMMDD_ hhmm register dat Processor Registers pci dat PCI Config Header manifest dat Memory Manifest memory_ 1 st page address dat Address in hex in the unit of 4 Kbyte Memory Data Dump files are not be automatically deleted Delete them manually if necessary ...

Page 226: ...al When using a mouse in MegaRAID WebBIOS operations change the setting for the mouse of the remote console to Relative mode Change the mode to Relative mode referring to Mouse mode settings for the remote console before starting MegaRAID WebBIOS When using the boot from an external storage disable the boot from MegaRAID WebBIOS Referring to BIOS settings for SAS internal RAID board change the con...

Page 227: ...s can be installed in the system unit MegaRAID SAS 1078 model GVX CA2SRD2X1 MegaRAID SAS 2108 model GVX CA2SRD4X1 MegaRAID SAS 2208 CB2000 standard server blade X55R3 model This section describes MegaRAID WebBIOS per SAS RAID controller type See one of the two that are installed on your system ...

Page 228: ...perating system and then restart the system equipment Check the manual for ending your operating system because some operating systems such as Windows require shutdown and other special operations when the particular operating system is terminated 3 The MegaRAID WebBIOS is started and the Adapter Selection menu appears LSI MegaRAID SAS MFI BIOS Version x xx xx Build xxx xx xxxx Copyright c 2008 LS...

Page 229: ...hen you operate MegaRAID WebBIOS press the Ctrl key once 5 Press Enter once Without pressing Enter the mouse will not work properly The main menu is displayed If a hard disk which has different disk array configuration coming from the record in the disk array controller board exists the following screen is displayed See Disk with a foreign configuration for more details Note ...

Page 230: ...Use the following procedure to end the MegaRAID WebBIOS 1 From the main menu click Exit The exit confirmation screen appears When you want to return to the main menu click or 2 Click Yes Clicking No returns you to the main menu ...

Page 231: ...nsole application Java application click Keyboard Ctrl Alt Del in the toolbar or press the Alt L keys to restart the system equipment For the remote console Reclient see the Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 Remote Console Application User s Guide contained in the remote console application CD attached to the system equipment For the remote console Java application see Remote Console Application Java App...

Page 232: ...d Operating MegaRAID WebBIOS with keyboard You can set the following items for MegaRAID WebBIOS using the keyboard Key Operation Tab Moves the cursor in order 1 Shift Tab 2 Moves the cursor in reverse order Enter Space Selects the item that the cursor is put on Determines an item setting Determines a disk array or physical hard disk Selects a disk array or physical hard disk Selects a setting valu...

Page 233: ... the Shift key to move the cursor among Menu Logical View and Physical View When displaying the main menu press the Tab key once to move the cursor to Controller Selection that is selected Move the cursor to Exit using the Tab key With the cursor on Exit press the Tab key once The cursor moves to Logical View or Physical View With the cursor on Logical View or Physical View press the Tab key twice...

Page 234: ...onfigured as shown below Adapter Selection is displayed on the Controller Selection window Controller Selection MegaRAID WebBIOS Starts Adapter Selection Main menu Controller Properties Scan Devices Virtual Drives Drives Configuration Wizard Physical View Logical View Events MegaRAID WebBIOS ends ...

Page 235: ...ebBIOS are displayed Click each item to go to the respective menu screen C Logical View Physical View Hard disks or disk arrays connected to the disk array controller are displayed Icon at the upper left on the screen Operation from an icon click Return to the main menu Return to the previous screen End the utility Temporarily stop ringing the buzzer on the disk array controller board 1 Display th...

Page 236: ...ed to associate the setup screen and each of the items In the table the underlined values are Default values Those in brackets are recommended values Example Enabled valid Disabled invalid Enabled is the Default and also the recommended value Enabled valid Disabled invalid Disabled is the Default value and Enabled is the recommended value which requires a setting change When you need to change the...

Page 237: ...ices D Virtual Drives Viewing and setting the disk array logical drive information See Virtual Drives Viewing and setting disk array information E Drives Viewing and setting the hard disk physical drive information See Drives Viewing physical hard disk information F Configuration Wizard Building or formatting disk arrays See Building disk arrays G Physical View Logical View Switching display modes...

Page 238: ...mware Version Firmware version G FW Package Version Firmware package version H Firmware Time Current time at which firmware is acquired I WebBIOS Version MegaRAID WebBIOS version J FRU Board names per maintenance K Encryption Capable Encryption function Enable or Disable L NVRAM Size Size of NVRAM installed M Memory Size Size of memory installed N Min Stripe Size Minimum stripe size O Max Stripe S...

Page 239: ... Mode 3 Setting the cluster mode Disabled invalid Enabled valid F Alarm Control Sounding the buzzer on the controller in the event of a fault at a connected device Disabled not sounding Enabled sounding Silence stop sounding temporarily G Rebuild Rate 3 Priority of rebuilding 0 to 100 30 H Patrol Read Rate 3 Priority of patrol reading 0 to 100 30 I BGI Rate 3 Priority of background initializing 0 ...

Page 240: ... hard disk Disabled invalid Enabled valid S SSD Guard 4 Setting the solid state drive SSD Guard function Disabled invalid Enabled valid 1 This can be changed only when no disk arrays have been set 2 Do not use Set Factory Defaults This setting must be changed to the recommended values 3 Always use the Default setting 4 Always use the recommended values Place the mouse cursor on a setting item and ...

Page 241: ...t the consistency check CC No continuous operation Yes stops the consistency check B Maintain PD Fail History Sets whether or not a failed hard disk can be used Enabled Registers failed hard disk information Disabled Not register failed hard disk information C Schedule CC Sets a consistency check schedule When clicking Supported the screen moves to Schedule CC Page Schedule Consistency Check setti...

Page 242: ... CC Start mm dd yyyy Sets on what date the consistency check starts Choose any date C CC Start Time Sets on what time the consistency check starts 12 00 AM to 11 00 PM The nearest to the present time D CC Mode Sets if the consistency check is executed on multiple disk arrays Sequential a consistency check per array Concurrent a consistency check on multiple arrays E Select Virtual Drives VDs to Ex...

Page 243: ...the disk array logical drive that is already set Select Virtual Drives in the main menu and the following screen appears Select a disk array for viewing information and changing the setting from the list on the upper right of the screen Check Properties and then click Go and the disk array properties screen appears A B D C F E G ...

Page 244: ...izing No background initializing valid Yes background initializing invalid F Disk Cache 1 Setting the cache installed in a physical hard disk Disable cache not used Enable cache used No change based on the hard disk setting G I O 1 Setting the read cache operation Direct reading from the cache at a cache hit Cached always reading from the cache 1 Make sure to set the default value or recommended v...

Page 245: ...the physical drive connected to the disk array controller Select Drives in the main menu and the following screen appears Select a disk array for viewing and setting information from the list on the upper right of the screen Check Properties and then click Go The following screen appears Hard disk property menu 1 A B C D E F G H I J ...

Page 246: ...nclosure ID ID number of the enclosure device connected B Revision Firmware version C Slot Number Number of the slot installed D Device Type Device type E Connected Port Port number of the disk array controller board connected F Media Errors Number of media errors detected G Pred Fail Count Number of S M A R T warnings reported H SAS Address SAS address I Physical Drive Status Physical hard disk s...

Page 247: ... already set Physical View mode displays a list of physical hard disks comprising of a disk array configuration The Logical View mode is applied when the MegaRAID WebBIOS is started To switch to the physical view mode click Physical View in the Logical View mode from the main menu To switch to the logical view mode click Logical View in the Physical View mode from the main menu Logical View mode D...

Page 248: ...ended value unless other specific directions are given Otherwise the system may not properly operate Hitachi Data System is not responsibile for a malfunction due to changed settings other than our recommended values Building disk arrays for RAID 0 1 5 and 6 This section describes the procedure for building new disk arrays for Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks RAID 0 1 5 and 6 To build RAID 10...

Page 249: ...onfiguration The existing disk arrays will remain when you select Add Configuration Add Configuration should be selected when you want to keep the existing disk arrays and to build disk arrays using additional hard disks If you select New Configuration you lose the existing disk arrays This should be selected when you discard the existing disk array and build a new one If you select New Configurat...

Page 250: ...sk array The number of hard disks required varies depending on the RAID level to be set The following table summarizes the number of hard disks required RAID level Number of hard disks required RAID 0 1 or more RAID 1 2 RAID 5 3 or more RAID 6 4 or more RAID 6 with three hard disks is not supported because the system may not operate properly Note ...

Page 251: ...rd disks click them while pressing the Ctrl key 5 After selecting all hard disks for building a disk array click Add to Array Status of those selected hard disks is Online as shown in the Drives pane To release a hard disk from Online select the hard disk and click Reclaim 6 Click Accept DG The following screen appears ...

Page 252: ...201 5 Server Blade Setup 7 Click Next The following screen appears 8 Click Add to SPAN The following screen appears ...

Page 253: ...g Ahead always advance reading Adaptive advance reading only in the event of sequential access Write Policy 4 5 Write policy Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed IO Policy 3 Read cache operation Direct reading from the cache at a cache hit Cached always reading from the cache Drive Cache 3 ...

Page 254: ...ange from the Default value to the recommended value 7 Maximum capacity size that can be set is shown under Next LD Possible RAID Levels at the right of the screen Change the maximum capacity value for your RAID level Maximum capacity value under the RAID 0 setting 408 656 GB Maximum capacity value under the RAID 5 setting 272 437 GB Maximum capacity value under the RAID 6 setting 136 218 GB 8 Do ...

Page 255: ...204 5 Server Blade Setup 11 Click Accept One of the following screens appears When selecting Write Through in the write policy setting When selecting Always Write Back in the write policy setting ...

Page 256: ...205 5 Server Blade Setup 12 Click Yes The following screen appears 13 Click Next The following screen appears 14 Click Accept The following screen appears ...

Page 257: ...206 5 Server Blade Setup 15 Click Yes The following screen appears 16 Click No The screen returns to the main menu 17 Initialize the disk array that you have built referring to Initializing disk arrays ...

Page 258: ...ng procedure describes building disk arrays for RAID 10 The following table summarizes the number of hard disks required for building RAID 10 RAID level Number of hard disks required RAID 10 4 1 Select Configuration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears ...

Page 259: ...figuration The existing disk arrays will remain when you select Add Configuration Add Configuration should be selected when you want to keep the existing disk arrays and to build disk arrays through an additional hard disk If you select New Configuration you lose the existing disk arrays This should be selected when you discard the existing disk array and build a new one If you select New Configur...

Page 260: ...tion and click Next The following screen appears 4 Select two hard disks to be used for building a disk array You can select only a hard disk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused To select multiple hard disks click them while pressing the Ctrl key ...

Page 261: ...ard disks for building a disk array click Add to Array Status of those selected hard disks is Online as shown in the Drives pane To release a hard disk from Online select the hard disk and click Reclaim 6 Click Accept DG The following screen appears ...

Page 262: ...til you have selected all hard disks used for RAID 10 and then click Next The following screen appears 8 Click Add to SPAN as many times as repeated in steps 4 5 and 6 in step 7 Click it until the following display under Array With Free Space disappears ...

Page 263: ...ced reading Adaptive advanced reading only in the event of sequential access Write Policy 2 3 Write policy Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed IO Policy 1 Read cache operation Direct reading from the cache at a cache hit Cached always reading from the cache Drive Cache 1 Setting the hard d...

Page 264: ...icy for disk arrays 3 Do not select Write Back with BBU 4 Change from the default value to the recommended value 5 Keep the existing maximum capacity value in Select Size 6 Do not change the unit of Select Size always GB by Default If you specify a larger disk array size than the maximum capacity Unacceptable size appears on the screen and all the setting items are initialized You need to set all ...

Page 265: ...214 5 Server Blade Setup 11 Click Accept One of the following screens appears When selecting Write Through in the write policy setting When selecting Always Write Back in the write policy setting ...

Page 266: ...215 5 Server Blade Setup 12 Click Yes The following screen appears 13 Click Next The following screen appears ...

Page 267: ...up 14 Click Accept The following screen appears 15 Click Yes The following screen appears 16 Click No The screen returns to the main menu 17 Initialize the disk array that you have built referring to Initializing disk arrays ...

Page 268: ...ard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before initializing a disk array 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list of disk arrays displayed in the frame at the upper right select a disk array configuration to initialize 3 Check Slow Initialize and click Go The following screen appears ...

Page 269: ...below Single hard disk capacity Initialization time 147 GB SAS type Approximately 50 minutes 300 GB SAS type Approximately 100 minutes 600 GB SAS type Approximately 200 minutes The initialization time varies depending on the single hard disk capacity regardless of the RAID level or disk array capacity 6 When initialization is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 270: ...eted all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before deleting a disk array Deleting all disk arrays simultaneously 1 Select Configuration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears 2 Check Clear Configuration and click Next The following screen appears 3 Click Yes ...

Page 271: ...electively 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array that you want to delete Then check Properties and click Go The following screen appears ...

Page 272: ...221 5 Server Blade Setup 3 Check Del and click Go The following screen appears 4 Click Yes ...

Page 273: ...manual in the DriverKit CD ROM for how to check consistency from the MegaRAID Storage Manager Consistency check on disk arrays can be executed only for RAID 1 5 6 and 10 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array that you want to check the consistency Then check Properties and click Go The f...

Page 274: ...er Blade Setup 3 Check CC and click Go The progress of consistency check is displayed 4 Wait until the process is completed 100 5 When the consistency check is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 275: ... to the disk array that was set first You can assign a disk array that has been built later however to the highest in the boot order 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears Set Boot Drive is followed by the number of the current disk array being booted 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array for which you want to set a boot dev...

Page 276: ...ure to configure redundant disk arrays RAID 1 5 6 or 10 before setting hotspares 1 Click the hard disk that is recognized as Unconfigured Drives in the Logical View pane while the main menu is displayed Only a hard disk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused can be selected 2 The following screen appears ...

Page 277: ...226 5 Server Blade Setup 3 Check Make Global HSP 4 Click Go Hotspare is set to the specified hard disk ...

Page 278: ... procedure for canceling hotspares 1 When the main menu is displayed click the hard disk that is set in hotspare in Logical View or Physical View Select a hard disk with hotspare status The following screen appears 2 Check Remove HOTSPARE and click Go Hotspare is released ...

Page 279: ...array can be restored even if two hard disks fail With hotspares configuration rebuilding will work automatically when a hard disk problem occurs Without hotspare configuration rebuilding will work automatically after you replace the faulty hard disk in hot plug The following is a procedure for manually rebuilding when automatically rebuilding did not work 1 Select Drives from the main menu The fo...

Page 280: ...ly 200 minutes RAID 5 294 GB SAS 147GB HDD x 3 Approximately 50 minutes 600 GB SAS 300GB HDD x 3 Approximately 100 minutes 1200 GB SAS 600GB HDD x 3 Approximately 200 minutes RAID 6 294 GB SAS 147GB HDD x 4 Approximately 80 minutes 600 GB SAS 300GB HDD x 4 Approximately 160 minutes 1200 GB SAS 600GB HDD x 4 Approximately 320 minutes RAID 10 294 GB SAS 147GB HDD x 4 Approximately 50 minutes 600 GB ...

Page 281: ...om MegaRAID Storage Manager See the MegaRAID Storage Manager manual in the DriverKit CD ROM for information about how to expand disk arrays from the MegaRAID Storage Manager A disk array expansion cannot be cancelled during the execution Make sure to install a hard disk with Unconfigured Good status unused before expanding the capacity 1 Select Virtual Drives in the main menu The following screen ...

Page 282: ...creen Check Properties and click Go The following screen appears 3 Select a hard disk to use for the capacity expansion from the list displayed at the lower right of the screen check Migration with addition and click Go To select multiple hard disks click hard disks while pressing the Ctrl key The following screen appears ...

Page 283: ...00GB HDD x 3 Approximately 1200 minutes RAID 5 Expands 294 GB SAS 147GB HDD x 3 Approximately 240 minutes Expands 600 GB SAS 300GB HDD x 3 Approximately 480 minutes Expands 1200 GB SAS 600GB HDD x 3 Approximately 960 minutes RAID 6 Expands 294 GB SAS 147GB HDD x 4 Approximately 240 minutes Expands 600 GB SAS 300GB HDD x 4 Approximately 480 minutes Expands 1200 GB SAS 600GB HDD x 4 Approximately 96...

Page 284: ...e data in the write cache may disappear or be destroyed during a blackout or instant power failure In Write Policy Always Write Back can be supported only when the system equipment is connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set to Write Through when installing the operating system Otherwise installation may not be properly completed 1 Select Virtual Drives in the main m...

Page 285: ...ick Change Setting value Description Always Write Back Write cache is valid Write Through Write cache is invalid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed In Write Policy operation with Always Write Back can be supported only when the system equipment is connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set Write Through when installing the OS Ot...

Page 286: ...es When selecting Write Through in the Default write setting When selecting Always Write Back in the Default write setting 5 Click Home to return to the main menu Set the write policy per disk array When building multiple disk arrays set the write policy to all disk arrays ...

Page 287: ...troller BIOS setting to Disabled This section describes the procedure for changing the BIOS setting of the SAS internal RAID board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y When the BIOS setting Controller BIOS setting is changed to Disabled you cannot execute the boot from the disk array configured in the SAS internal RAID Board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y 1 Select Controller Properties from the main menu Th...

Page 288: ...n Enabled Enables BIOS of the SAS internal RAID board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y Enables the boot from the disk array Disabled Disables BIOS of the SAS internal RAID board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y Disables the boot from the disk array Make sure to click Submit after changing the setting 4 Confirm that Controller BIOS is set to that value 5 Click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 289: ...ray controller board configuration Differences in configuration between disks may be caused by the following conditions Conditions to generate foreign configuration A disk failed and could not be recognized Then the disk has been restored to be recognized A hard disk used in another device with a specific disk array configuration is used in the array 1 Click Preview ...

Page 290: ...t If the displayed configuration is incorrect click Cancel When the screen returns to Step 1 click Clear When clicking Clear a message Previous foreign configuration will be lost Do you want to proceed is displayed Click Yes and the previous foreign configuration will be eliminated ...

Page 291: ...s in a redundant disk array or a failure in a hard disk in a non redundant disk array Status of the hard disk The following table lists the hard disks status Status indication Description Online Normal Offline Failed A fault has occurred The hard disk is separated from the disk array due to failure Rebuild Rebuilding is underway Dedicated Hot Spare Global Hot Spare This is set as a hotspare either...

Page 292: ...nce Press D to disable this warning if your controller does not have a battery Battery backup unit information is not set correctly Press the D key while this message is displayed If not recovered contact your reseller from which you purchased the product or consult maintenance personnel Some configured disks have been removed from your system or are no longer accessible Please check your cables a...

Page 293: ...cy setting from MegaRAID WebBIOS referring to Changing the write policy for disk arrays Do not change the write cache from the current MegaRAID Storage Manager Multibit ECC errors were detected on the controller DIMM on the controller needs replacement If you continue data corruption can occur Press X to continue or else power off the system and replace the DIMM module and reboot If you have repla...

Page 294: ...s and hold the Ctrl key on the lower left of the keyboard and press the H key The MegaRAID WebBIOS is started If the operating system was been started before you press the keys shutdown the operating system and then restart the system equipment Check the manual for ending your operating system because some operating systems such as Windows require shutdown and other special operations for terminat...

Page 295: ...tem equipment 2 When the following screen appears press and hold the Ctrl key and press the H key The MegaRAID WebBIOS is started If the operating system was started before you press the keys shutdown the operating system and restart the system equipment Check the manual for ending your operating system because some operating systems such as Windows require shutdown and other special operations wh...

Page 296: ...s started and Adapter Selection appears 4 Press the Ctrl key once Without pressing the Ctrl key your keyboard and mouse might not operate properly If the keyboard or mouse is not available when you operate MegaRAID WebBIOS press the Ctrl key once Note ...

Page 297: ...246 5 Server Blade Setup 5 Press Enter once Without pressing Enter the mouse will not work properly The main menu is displayed Firmware version 2 110 63 1184 Firmware version 2 120 233 1474 or later ...

Page 298: ...e Setup If a hard disk which has different disk array configuration coming from the record in the disk array controller board exists the following screen is displayed See Disk with foreign configuration for more details ...

Page 299: ...ing procedure to end the MegaRAID WebBIOS Firmware version 2 110 63 1184 1 From the main menu click Next and then Exit The exit confirmation screen appears When you want to return to the main menu click or 2 Click Yes Clicking No returns you to the main menu ...

Page 300: ...ystem console with the remote console application Java application click Keyboard Ctrl Alt Del in the toolbar or press the Alt L keys to restart the system equipment Firmware version 2 120 233 1474 or later 1 From the main menu click Exit The exit confirmation screen appears When you want to return to the main menu click or 2 Click Yes Clicking No returns you to the main menu ...

Page 301: ...Java application click Keyboard Ctrl Alt Del in the toolbar or press the Alt L keys to restart the system equipment For the remote console Reclient see the Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 Remote Console Application User s Guide contained in the remote console application CD that came with the system equipment For the remote console Java application see Remote Console Application Java Application in Cha...

Page 302: ...rd Operating MegaRAID WebBIOS with Keyboard You can set the following items for MegaRAID WebBIOS using the keyboard Key Operation Tab Moves the cursor in order 1 Shift Tab 2 Moves the cursor in reverse order Enter Space Selects the item that the cursor is put on Determines an item setting Determines a disk array or physical hard disk Selects a disk array or physical hard disk Selects a setting val...

Page 303: ...w and Physical View When displaying the main menu press the Tab key seven times to move the cursor to Controller Selection that is selected Move the cursor to Events or Exit using the Tab key With the cursor on Events or Exit press the Tab key once and the cursor moves to Logical View or Physical View that is selected on the right of the screen With the cursor on Logical View or Physical View pres...

Page 304: ...s item is displayed for firmware version 2 120 233 1474 3 Adapter Selection is displayed on the Controller Selection window Controller Selection 3 MegaRAID WebBIOS Starts Controller Selection Controller Properties Scan Devices Virtual Drives Drives Configuration Wizard Physical View Logical View Events MegaRAID WebBIOS ends Manage Advanced Software Option 1 Advanced Software Options 2 ...

Page 305: ...u Menu items for MegaRAID WebBIOS are displayed Click each item to go to the respective menu screen C Logical View Physical View Hard disks or disk arrays connected to the disk array controller are displayed Icons Description Return to the main menu Return to the previous screen End the utility Temporarily stop ringing the buzzer on the disk array controller board 1 Display the version of MegaRAID...

Page 306: ... are used to associate the setup screen and each of the items In the table the underlined values are Default values Those in brackets are recommended values Example Enabled valid Disabled invalid Enabled is the Default and also the recommended value Enabled valid Disabled invalid Disabled is the Default value and Enabled is the recommended value which requires a setting change When you need to cha...

Page 307: ...in menu Start MegaRAID WebBIOS and the following main menu appears Firmware version 2 110 63 1184 When you click Next the following screen appears When you click Prev the screen returns to the previous screen A B C D E F G H I J ...

Page 308: ...e disk array logical drive information See Virtual drives Viewing and setting disk array information F Drives Viewing and setting the hard disk physical drive information See Drives Viewing physical hard disk information G Configuration Wizard Building or formatting disk arrays See Building disk arrays H Physical View Logical View Switching display modes See Switching the display mode I Events Dis...

Page 309: ...ewing and setting the disk array logical drive information See Virtual drives Viewing and setting disk array information F Drives Viewing and setting the hard disk physical drive information See Drives Viewing physical hard disk information G Configuration Wizard Building or formatting disk arrays See Building disk arrays H Physical View Logical View Switching display modes See Switching the displ...

Page 310: ...ost interface H NVRAM Size Size of non volatile RAM NVRAM installed I Firmware Version Firmware version J Memory Size Size of memory installed K FW Package Version Firmware package version L Min Stripe Size Minimum stripe size M Firmware Time Current time at which the firmware acquires N Max Stripe Size Maximum stripe size O WebBIOS Version MegaRAID WebBIOS version P Virtual Drive Count Exisiting ...

Page 311: ...are version J Memory Size Size of memory installed K FW Package Version Firmware package version L Min Stripe Size Minimum stripe size M Firmware Time Current time at which the firmware acquires N Max Stripe Size Maximum stripe size O WebBIOS Version MegaRAID WebBIOS version P Virtual Drive Count Exisiting number of array configurations logical devices Q Disk Count Number of physical devices insta...

Page 312: ...porting 0 to 65535 300 600 E Cluster Mode 3 Setting the cluster mode Disabled invalid Enabled valid F Alarm Control Sounding the buzzer on the controller in the event of a fault at a connected device Disabled not sounding Enabled sounding Silence stop sounding temporarily G Rebuild Rate 3 Priority of rebuilding 0 to 100 30 H Patrol Read Rate 3 Priority of patrol reading 0 to 100 30 I BGI Rate 3 Pr...

Page 313: ...8MB way using a capacity as a multiple of 128MB 1GB way using a capacity as a multiple of 1GB C Set Factory Defaults 2 Returning all the settings to their Defaults values D S M A R T Polling 4 Setting the interval of S M A R T reporting 0 to 65535 300 600 E Cluster Mode 3 Setting the cluster mode Disabled invalid Enabled valid F Alarm Control Sounding the buzzer on the controller in the event of a...

Page 314: ... no disk arrays have been set at all 2 Do not use Set Factory Defaults This setting must be changed to the recommended values 3 Change the value to the recommanded value 4 Always use the Default setting Place the mouse cursor on a setting item and left click the mouse to change the setting values Or left click the mouse to move the cursor and enter a value from the keyboard Click Submit after the ...

Page 315: ...y check B Schedule CC 1 Sets a consistency check schedule When clicking Supported the screen moves to Schedule CC Page Schedule Consistency Check setting submenu C Maintain PD Fail History 1 Sets whether or not a failed hard disk can be used Enabled Registers failed hard disk information Disabled Not register failed hard disk information D Stop On Error 2 Sets whether or not to boot the OS when an...

Page 316: ...C Page Schedule Consistency Check setting submenu C Maintain PD Fail History 1 Sets whether or not a failed hard disk can be used Enabled Registers failed hard disk information Disabled Not registers failed hard disk information D Stop On Error 2 Sets whether or not to boot the OS when an error is detected at the system startup Disabled Enabled E Controller BIOS Sets the disk array controller BIOS...

Page 317: ...ble or Disable Disable invalid schedule Enabled valid schedule B CC Start mm dd yyyy Sets on what date the consistency check starts Choose any date C CC Start Time Sets on what time the consistency check starts 12 00 AM to 11 00 PM The nearest to the present time D CC Mode Sets if the consistency check is executed on multiple disk arrays Sequential a consistency check per array Concurrent a consis...

Page 318: ...heir default setting Setting item Description Setting display value A Specify the power save setting below 1 Displays disk power saving settings Setting items is described in item B to D B Unconfigured drivers Enables Disables unused disks Checked enabled Unchecked disabled C Hot spare drives Enables Disables a hot spared disk Checked enabled Unchecked disabled D Configured drives Enables Disables...

Page 319: ...u and the following screen appears Select a disk array for viewing information and changing the setting from the list on the upper right of the screen Check Properties and then click Go and the disk array properties screen appears NOTICE When enabling the write cache of the disk array connect the system equipment to UPS When you use the equipment without connecting to the UPS data can disappear an...

Page 320: ...ed Enable cache used No change based on the hard disk setting E I O Setting the read cache operation Direct reading from the cache at a cache hit Cached always reading from the cache F Disable BGI Setting the background initializing No background initializing valid Yes background initializing invalid G Default Write 1 Setting the write cache Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back writ...

Page 321: ...cal drive connected to the disk array controller Select Drives in the main menu and the following screen appears Select a disk array for viewing and setting information from the list on the upper right of the screen Check Properties and then click Go The hard disk properties screen appears When clicking Next you can view the following screen ...

Page 322: ... displayed A Connector Disk array controller board connector connected B Enclosure ID ID number of the enclosure device connected C Model Name Disk model name D Vendor Vendor name E Revision Firmware version F Slot Number Number of the slot installed G Device Type Device type H Connected Port Port number of the disk array controller board connected ...

Page 323: ... Pred Fail Count are cleared when the system power is turned off Display item What is displayed A Media Errors Number of media errors detected B Pred Fail Count Number of S M A R T warnings reported C SAS Address SAS address D Physical Drive State Physical hard disk status E Certified Certification F FDE Capable Full Disk Encryption Capable or No G Max Device Speed The maximum connection speed H L...

Page 324: ... are cleared when the system power is turned off Display item What is displayed A Media Errors Number of media errors detected B Pred Fail Count Number of S M A R T warnings reported C SAS Address SAS address D Physical Drive State Physical hard disk status E Certified Certification F FDE Capable Full Disk Encryption Capable or No G Max Device Speed The maximum connection speed H Link Speed Link s...

Page 325: ... Blade Setup Drives properties Disk properties menu 3 Firmware version 2 120 233 1474 You cannot change the setting for the item displayed here Display item What is displayed A Temperature Celsius Disk temperature ...

Page 326: ...mprising a disk array configuration and hot spare information The Physical View mode displays a list of physical hard disks The Logical View mode is applied when the MegaRAID WebBIOS is started To switch to the physical view mode click Physical View in the Logical View mode from the main menu To switch to the logical view mode click Logical View in the Physical View mode from the main menu Logical...

Page 327: ... Otherwise the system might not properly operate We are not responsible for a malfunction due to a setting except our recommended values Building disk arrays for RAID 0 1 5 and 6 This section describes the procedure for building new disk arrays To build RAID 10 see Building disk arrays for RAID 10 For information about how to set hotspare see Setting hotspares NOTICE RAID0 configuration single har...

Page 328: ...uration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears NOTICE If you select New Configuration all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before selecting New Configuration ...

Page 329: ... Configuration should be selected when you want to keep the existing disk arrays and to build disk arrays using additional hard disks If you select New Configuration you lose the existing disk arrays This should be selected when you discard the existing disk array and build a new one If you select New Configuration the following screen appears Clicking Yes allows you to build a disk array ...

Page 330: ...array The number of hard disks required varies depending on the RAID level to be set The following table summarizes the number of hard disks required RAID level Number of hard disks required RAID 0 1 or more RAID 1 2 RAID 5 3 or more RAID 6 4 or more RAID 6 with 3 hard disks is not supported If you set this the system might not operate properly Note ...

Page 331: ...rd disks click them while pressing the Ctrl key 5 After selecting all hard disks for building a disk array click Add to Array Status of those selected hard disks is Online as shown in the Drives pane To release a hard disk from Online select the hard disk and click Reclaim 6 Click Accept DG The following screen appears ...

Page 332: ...281 5 Server Blade Setup 7 Click Next The following screen appears 8 Click Add to SPAN The following screen appears ...

Page 333: ...are version 2 120 233 1474 or later 10 Specify the RAID level stripe size read policy write policy and disk array size NOTICE When enabling the write cache of the disk array connect the system equipment to a UPS When you use the equipment without connecting to the UPS data can disappear and be corrupted ...

Page 334: ...e hard disks and RAID 1 with three or more hard disks are not supported 2 For RAID 1 set 64 KB by Default 3 In Write Policy Write Back can be set only when the system equipment is already connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Confirm that the checkmark is removed from Wrthru for BAD BBU at that time Even in this case set Write Through when the operating system is installed Otherwise in...

Page 335: ...e following screens appears When selecting Write Through in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Always Write Back in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes The following screen appears ...

Page 336: ...ollowing screen appears 13 Click Accept The following screen appears 14 Click Yes The following screen appears 15 Click No The screen returns to the main menu 16 Initialize the disk array that you have built referring to Initializing disk arrays ...

Page 337: ...for building RAID 10 RAID level Number of hard disks required RAID 10 4 See Setting hotspares for information about how to set hotspare 1 Select Configuration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears NOTICE If you select New Configuration all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before selecting New Configuration ...

Page 338: ...uration should be selected when you want to keep the existing disk arrays and to build disk arrays through an additional hard disk If you select New Configuration you lose the existing disk arrays This should be selected when you discard the existing disk array and build a new one If you select New Configuration the following screen appears first Clicking Yes here allows you to build a disk array ...

Page 339: ...tion and click Next The following screen appears 4 Select two hard disks to be used for building a disk array You can select only a hard disk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused To select multiple hard disks click them while pressing the Ctrl key ...

Page 340: ...ard disks for building a disk array click Add to Array Status of those selected hard disks is Online as shown in the Drives pane To release a hard disk from Online select the hard disk and click Reclaim 6 Click Accept DG The following screen appears ...

Page 341: ...6 until selecting all hard disks used for RAID 10 and then click Next The following screen appears 8 Click Add to SPAN the same number of times as repeated in steps 4 5 and 6 in step 7 Click it until the pane under Array With Free Space becomes blank ...

Page 342: ...291 5 Server Blade Setup 9 Click Next The following screen appears Firmware version 2 110 63 1184 Firmware version 2 120 233 1474 or later ...

Page 343: ...rd disk setting Disable BGI Setting the background initializing No background initializing valid Yes background initializing invalid Select Size 2 Size of a disk array Entering the maximum capacity value 1 In Write Policy Always Write Back can be set only when the system equipment is already connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set Write Through when the operating sy...

Page 344: ...e following screens appears When selecting Write Through in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Always Write Back in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes The following screen appears ...

Page 345: ...294 5 Server Blade Setup 12 Click Next The following screen appears ...

Page 346: ...up 13 Click Accept The following screen appears 14 Click Yes The following screen appears 15 Click No The screen returns to the main menu 16 Initialize the disk array that you have built referring to Initializing disk arrays ...

Page 347: ...ard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before initializing a disk array 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list of disk arrays displayed in the frame at the upper right select a disk array configuration to initialize 3 Check Slow Initialize and click Go The following screen appears ...

Page 348: ... is shown in the table below Single hard disk capacity Initialization time 147 GB SAS type Approximately 50 minutes 300 GB SAS type Approximately 100 minutes The initialization time varies depending on the single hard disk capacity regardless of the RAID level or disk array capacity 6 When initialization is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 349: ...eted all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before deleting a disk array Deleting all disk arrays simultaneously 1 Select Configuration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears 2 Check Clear Configuration and click Next The following screen appears 3 Click Yes ...

Page 350: ... selectively 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array that you want to delete Check Properties and click Go The following screen appears ...

Page 351: ...300 5 Server Blade Setup 3 Check Delete and click Go The following screen appears 4 Click Yes ...

Page 352: ...e DriverKit CD ROM for information about how to check consistency from the MegaRAID Storage Manager Consistency check on disk arrays can be executed only for RAID 1 5 6 and 10 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array that you want to check the consistency Then check Properties and click Go...

Page 353: ...r Blade Setup 3 Check CC and click Go The progress of consistency check is displayed 4 Wait until the processing is completed 100 5 When the consistency check is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 354: ... to the disk array that was first set You can assign a disk array that has been built later however to the highest in the boot order 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears Set Boot Drive is followed by the number of the current disk array being booted 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array for which you want to set a boot dev...

Page 355: ...arrays RAID 1 5 6 or 10 before setting hotspares 1 With the main menu displayed click a hard disk for hotspare from the hard disk list in the Logical View Physical View pane The following screen appears Only a hard disk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused can be selected 2 Check Make Global HSP 3 Click Go Hotspare is set to the specified hard disk ...

Page 356: ...cedure for canceling hotspares 1 When the main menu is displayed click a hard disk that is set in hotspare from the list in Logical View Physical View Select a hard disk with hotspare status The following screen appears 2 Check Remove HOTSPARE and click Go Hotspare is released ...

Page 357: ...restored even if two hard disks fail With hotspares configuration rebuilding will work automatically when a hard disk problem occurs Without hotspare configuration rebuilding will work automatically after you replace the faulty hard disk in hot plug The following procedure describes manually rebuilding disk arrays when rebuilding did not work automatically 1 Select Drives from the main menu The fo...

Page 358: ...ly 50 minutes 300 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 2 Approximately 100 minutes RAID 5 294 GB SAS 147 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 50 minutes 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 100 minutes RAID 6 294 GB SAS 147 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 80 minutes 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 160 minutes RAID 10 294 GB SAS 147 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 50 minutes 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 100 minutes The...

Page 359: ...so be done from MegaRAID Storage Manager See the MegaRAID Storage Manager in the DriverKit CD ROM for how to expand disk arrays from the MegaRAID Storage Manager A disk array expansion cannot be cancelled during the execution Be sure to install a hard disk with Unconfigured Good status unused before expanding the capacity 1 Select Virtual Drives in the main menu The following screen appears ...

Page 360: ...ck Properties and click Go The following screen appears 3 Check Adv Opers and click Go The following screen appears 4 Check Change RAID Level and Add Drive select a hard disk to use for the capacity expansion from the list displayed in the pane and click Go To select multiple hard disks click hard disks while pressing the Ctrl key ...

Page 361: ...he table below RAID level Capacity of a disk array Rebuilding time for expansion RAID 0 Expands 441 GB SAS 147 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 300 minutes Expands 900 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 600 minutes RAID 5 Expands 294 GB SAS 147 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 240 minutes Expands 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 480 minutes RAID 6 Expands 294 GB SAS 147 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 240 minute...

Page 362: ...r Blade Setup The rebuilding time for expansion is proportional to the capacity of a disk array regardless of the number of hard disks to add 8 When expansion is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 363: ...e system equipment to a UPS Otherwise data in the write cache may disappear or be destroyed durig a blackout or instant power failure In Write Policy Always Write Back can be supported only when the system equipment is connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set to Write Through when installing the operating system Otherwise installation may not be properly completed 1 ...

Page 364: ...lick Change Setting value Description Always Write Back Write cache is valid Write Through Write cache is invalid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed In Write Policy operation with Always Write Back can be supported only when the system equipment is connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set Write Through when installing OS Other...

Page 365: ... following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Always Write Back in the Default write setting the following screen appears Click Yes 4 Click Home to return to the main menu Set the write policy per disk array When building multiple disk arrays set the write policy to all disk arrays ...

Page 366: ...troller BIOS setting to Disabled This section describes the procedure for changing the BIOS setting of the SAS internal RAID board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y When the BIOS setting Controller BIOS setting is changed to Disabled you cannot execute the boot from the disk array configured in the SAS internal RAID Board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y 1 Select Controller Properties from the main menu Th...

Page 367: ...owing table from Controller BIOS and click Submit Setting value Description Enabled Enables BIOS of the SAS internal RAID board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y Enables the boot from the disk array Disabled Disables BIOS of the SAS internal RAID board GVX CA2SRD2X1 GV CA2SRD2X1 Y Disables the boot from the disk array Make sure to click Submit after changing the setting ...

Page 368: ...317 5 Server Blade Setup 5 Confirm that Controller BIOS is set to that value 6 Click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 369: ...ferent configuration detected from the disk array controller board configuration The difference in configuration between disks may be caused by the following conditions Conditions to generate foreign configuration A disk failed and could not be recognized Then the disk has been restored to be recognized 1 Click Preview ...

Page 370: ...he displayed configuration is incorrect click Cancel When the screen returns to Step 1 click Clear When you click Clear the message Previous foreign configuration will be lost appears Do you want to proceed is displayed Click Yes and the previous foreign configuration will be eliminated ...

Page 371: ...hard disks in a redundant disk array or a failure in a hard disk in a non redundant disk array Status of the hard disk The following table lists the status for hard disks Status indication Description Online Normal Offline Failed A fault has occurred The hard disk is separated from the disk array due to failure Rebuild Rebuilding is underway GL Hot Spare This is set as a global hotspare DED Hot Sp...

Page 372: ...the cached data Foreign configuration s found on adapter Press any key to continue or C load the configuration utility or F to import foreign configuration s and continue A hard disk with a different configuration from the disk array configuration in the disk array controller was detected See Disk with foreign configuration FW package xxxx This shows the firmware package version You do not need to...

Page 373: ...een removed When this message is displayed even if the device is installed properly contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel Press any key to continue or C to load the configuration utility Press the C key while this message is displayed MegaRAID WebBIOS will start Press Ctrl H for WebBIOS When this message is displayed press the Ctrl and H keys at the same time to start MegaRAID WebBIO...

Page 374: ...ed Baseport XXXXh does not respond When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel This is a TEST message You may hit a key to ignore it or wait 5 seconds No further action is required When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel This firmware is an ALPHA version It has not completed all validations The validation stamp is X ...

Page 375: ...arrays Invalid memory configuration detected Please contact your system support System has halted When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel Entering the configuration utility in this state will result in drive configuration changes Press Y to continue loading the configuration utility or please power off your system and check your cables to ensure all disks...

Page 376: ...nnel Unable to Rekey security to EKMS as not able to communicate to EKMS If you continue the drive security will remain in the existing security mode Please check connection with the EKMS reboot the machine to retry the EKMS or press any key to continue The native configuration is no longer supported by the current controller settings Please ensure that correct controller or iButton is being used ...

Page 377: ...the configuration utility Incompatible secondary iButton present Please insert the correct iButton and restart the system Press any key to continue but original equipment manufacturer OEM specific features will not be upgraded When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel Upgrade Key Missing An upgrade key was present on a previous power cycle but it is not con...

Page 378: ...down the operating system and then restart the system equipment Check the manual for ending your operating system because some operating systems such as Windows require shutdown and other special operations when the particular operating system is terminated 3 The MegaRAID WebBIOS is started and Adapter Selection appears LSI MegaRAID SAS MFI BIOS Version x xx xx Build xxx xx xxxx Copyright c 2008 L...

Page 379: ...en you operate MegaRAID WebBIOS press the Ctrl key once 5 Press Enter once Without pressing Enter the mouse will not work properly The main menu is displayed If a hard disk which has a different disk array configuration coming from the record in the disk array controller board exists the following screen is displayed See Disk with foreign configuration for details Note ...

Page 380: ...Use the following procedure to end the MegaRAID WebBIOS 1 From the main menu click Exit The exit confirmation screen appears When you want to return to the main menu click or 2 Click Yes Clicking No returns you to the main menu ...

Page 381: ... application Java application click Keyboard Ctrl Alt Del in the toolbar or press Alt L keys to restart the system equipment For the remote console Reclient see the Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 Remote Console Application User s Guide contained in the remote console application CD that came with the system equipment For the remote console Java application see Remote Console Application Java Applicati...

Page 382: ...the MegaRAID WebBIOS only with the keyboard Operating MegaRAID WebBIOS with keyboard You can set the following items for MegaRAID WebBIOS using the keyboard Key Operation Tab Moves the cursor in order 1 Shift Tab 2 Moves the cursor in reverse order Enter Space Selects the item that the cursor is put on Determines an item setting Determines a disk array or physical hard disk Selects a disk array or...

Page 383: ...l View and Physical View When displaying the main menu press the Tab key seven times to move the cursor to Controller Selection that is selected Move the cursor to Events or Exit using the Tab key With the cursor on Events or Exit press the Tab key once and the cursor moves to Logical View or Physical View that is selected on the right on the screen With the cursor on Logical View or Physical View...

Page 384: ...hown below 1 Adapter Selection is displayed on the Controller Selection window Controller Selection 1 MegaRAID WebBIOS Starts Controller Selection Controller Properties Scan Devices Virtual Drives Drives Configuration Wizard Physical View Logical View Events MegaRAID WebBIOS ends Advanced Software Options Exit ...

Page 385: ...d Click each item to go to the respective menu screen C Logical view physical view Hard disks or disk arrays connected to the disk array controller are displayed Icon at the upper left on the screen Operation from an icon click Return to the main menu Return to the previous screen End the utility Temporarily stop ringing the buzzer on the disk array controller board This function is not supported ...

Page 386: ...e used to associate the setup screen and each of the items In the table the underlined values are default values Those in brackets are recommended values Example Enabled valid Disabled invalid Enabled is the Default and also the recommended value Enabled valid Disabled invalid Disabled is the Default value and Enabled is the recommended value which requires a setting change When you need to change...

Page 387: ...ices E Virtual Drives Viewing and setting the disk array logical drive information See Virtual Drives Viewing and setting disk array information F Drives Viewing and setting the hard disk physical drive information See Drives Viewing physical hard disk information G Configuration Wizard Building or formatting disk arrays See Building disk arrays H Physical View Logical View Switching display modes...

Page 388: ... Size of NVRAM installed I Firmware Version Firmware version J Memory Size Size of memory installed K FW Package Version Firmware package version L Min Stripe Size Minimum stripe size M Firmware Time Current time at which the firmware acquires N Max Stripe Size Maximum stripe size O WebBIOS Version MegaRAID WebBIOS version P Virtual Drive Count Exisiting number of array configurations logical devi...

Page 389: ...fig Good for Emergency Whether or not to rebuild a different type of unconfigured physical drive C Emergency for SMARTer Whether or not to apply SMART copy back to a different type of physical drive for hotspare D Shield State Supported Diagnostics for physical drives 1 E SSD Disk Cache Setting SSD cache setting value F Metadata Size Metadata size of the disk array controller 1 Diagnostics for phy...

Page 390: ...600 E Cluster Mode 5 Setting the cluster mode Disabled invalid Enabled valid F Alarm Control Sounding the buzzer on the controller in the event of a fault at a connected device Disabled not sounding Enabled sounding Silence stop sounding temporarily G Rebuild Rate 5 Priority of rebuilding 0 to 100 30 H Patrol Read Rate 5 Priority of patrol reading 0 to 100 30 I BGI Rate 5 Priority of background in...

Page 391: ... use Set Factory Defaults This setting must be changed to the recommended values 4 Change the value to the recommended value 5 Always use the Default setting Place the mouse cursor on a setting item and left click the mouse to change the setting values Or left click the mouse to move the cursor and enter a value from the keyboard Click Submit after the setting Values of Spin Drive Count and Spin D...

Page 392: ...Current amount Displayed only Temperature Temperature Displayed only B Mfg Name Product name Displayed only Mfg Date Date of manufacture Displayed only Serial No Serial number Displayed only FRU Cache backup module name per maintenance Displayed only Memory Module FRU Memory module name per maintenance Displayed only Design Voltage Design voltage amount Displayed only Device Name Device name Displ...

Page 393: ...hether or not a failed hard disk can be used Enabled Registers failed hard disk information Disabled Not register failed hard disk information D Stop On Error 2 Sets whether or not to boot the OS when an error is detected at the consistency check Disabled Enabled E Controller BIOS Sets the disk array controller BIOS Enabled Disabled F Disc Activity 1 Sets hard disk LED switching Disabled Enabled G...

Page 394: ...ule Continuous Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly B CC Start mm dd yyyy Sets on what date the consistency check starts 01 01 2000 Choose any date 1 C CC Start Time Sets on what time the consistency check starts 12 00 AM 03 00 AM Choose any date 1 D CC Mode Sets if the consistency check is executed on multiple disk arrays Sequential a consistency check per array Concurrent a consistency check on multiple ...

Page 395: ...roller Properties submenu3 screen and the following screen appears This system however does not support the Link Speed submenu Use those default values as shown below for all items Setting item Description Setting display value A Select Link Speed Sets the speed to link to physical drives Auto 1 5 Gbps 3 Gbps 6 Gbps ...

Page 396: ... following screen appears Select a disk array for viewing information and changing the setting from the list on the upper right of the screen Check Properties and then click Go and the disk array properties screen appears NOTICE When enabling the write cache of the disk array connect the system equipment to UPS When you use the equipment without connecting to the UPS data can disappear and become ...

Page 397: ... G Default Write 2 3 Setting the write cache Without cache backup module installed 4 Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed With cache backup module installed 5 Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back With BBU Write cache is valid only when a cache bac...

Page 398: ...ical hard disk in the physical drive connected to the disk array controller Select Drives in the main menu and the following screen appears Select a disk array for viewing and setting information from the list on the upper right of the screen Check Properties and then click Go The hard disk properties screen appears ...

Page 399: ...or connected B Enclosure ID ID number of the enclosure device connected C Model Name Disk model name D Vendor Vendor name E Revision Firmware version F Slot Number Number of the slot installed G Device Type Device type H Connected Port Port number of the disk array controller board connected I Media Errors Number of media errors detected J Pred Fail Count Number of S M A R T warnings reported I J ...

Page 400: ...ncryption Capable or No O Max Device Speed The maximum connection speed P Link Speed Link speed Q Temperature Celsius Hard disk temperature R Commissioned Hotspare Fault tolerance by Hotspare Items described in the table above cannot be changed For the status of the physical hard disk see Status Media Errors and Pred Fail Count are cleared when the system is powered off or rebooted ...

Page 401: ...mprising a disk array configuration and hot spare information The Physical View mode displays a list of physical hard disks The Logical View mode is applied when the MegaRAID WebBIOS is started To switch to the physical view mode click Physical View in the Logical View mode from the main menu To switch to the logical view mode click Logical View in the Physical View mode from the main menu Logical...

Page 402: ...y operate We are not responsible for a malfunction due to any settings except our recommended values Building disk arrays for RAID 0 1 5 and 6 This section describes the procedure for building new disk arrays The following procedure is for building disk arrays for RAID 0 1 5 and 6 To build RAID 10 see Building disk arrays for RAID 10 For information about how to set hotspare see Setting hotspares ...

Page 403: ...uration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears NOTICE If you select New Configuration all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Backup your required data before selecting New Configuration ...

Page 404: ...n should be selected when you want to add disk arrays to an existing disk group or to build disk arrays using an additional hard disk If you select New Configuration you lose existing disk groups and disk arrays This should be selected when you discard existing drive groups and disk arrays to build a new one If you select New Configuration the following screen appears Clicking Yes allows you to bu...

Page 405: ...us of Unconfigured Good unused select hard disks in the Drives pane When adding a disk array to an existing drive group go to step 7 without selecting a hard disk The number of hard disks required varies depending on the RAID level to be set The following table summarizes the number of hard disks required RAID level Number of hard disks required RAID 0 1 or more RAID 1 2 RAID 5 3 or more RAID 6 4 ...

Page 406: ...sk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused To select multiple hard disks click them while pressing the Ctrl key 5 After selecting all hard disks for building a disk array click Add to Array Status of those selected hard disks is Online as shown in the Drives pane To release a hard disk from Online select the hard disk and click Reclaim 6 Click Accept DG The following screen appears Note ...

Page 407: ...356 5 Server Blade Setup 7 Click Next The following screen appears Select the target drive group from the pull down menu of Array With Free Space 8 Click Add to SPAN The following screen appears ...

Page 408: ...hrough write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed With cache backup module installed 8 Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back With BBU Write cache is valid only when a cache backup module is installed IO Policy Read cache operation Direct reading from the cache at a ca...

Page 409: ... the write policy for disk arrays Do not select Write Back with BBU 5 When the equipment has installed a cache backup module make sure to set Write Back With BBU for Write Policy If not write performance may slow down 6 Maximum capacity size that can be set is shown under Next LD Possible RAID Levels at the right of the screen Type a new value up to the maximum capacity value for your RAID level D...

Page 410: ...cting Write Through in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Always Write Back in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Write Back with BBU in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes ...

Page 411: ...en set it again When Write Back with BBU is set as Write policy to the equipment with a cache backup module installed 2 and the cache backup module status is checked the following screen appears Click Yes 1 None is shown for Battery Backup in the Properties Controller properties submenu 2 2 Present is shown for Battery Backup in Properties Controller properties submenu 2 The following screen appea...

Page 412: ...ollowing screen appears 13 Click Accept The following screen appears 14 Click Yes The following screen appears 15 Click No The screen returns to the main menu 16 Initialize the disk array that you have built referring to Initializing disk arrays ...

Page 413: ...quired for building RAID 10 RAID level Number of hard disks required RAID 10 4 See Setting hotspares for how to set hotspare 1 Select Configuration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears NOTICE If you select New Configuration all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Back up your required data before selecting New Configuration ...

Page 414: ...n should be selected when you want to add disk arrays to an existing drive group or to build disk arrays using an additional hard disk If you select New Configuration you lose existing drive groups and disk arrays This should be selected when you discard existing drive groups and disk array to build a new one If you select New Configuration the following screen appears Clicking Yes allows you to b...

Page 415: ... When building a disk array with hard disks with Unconfigured Good unused select two hard disks in the Drives pane When adding a disk array to an existing drive group go to step 7 without selecting a hard disk You can select only a hard disk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused To select multiple hard disks click them while pressing the Ctrl key ...

Page 416: ...ard disks for building a disk array click Add to Array Status of those selected hard disks is Online as shown in the Drives pane To release a hard disk from Online select the hard disk and click Reclaim 6 Click Accept DG The following screen appears ...

Page 417: ... building a disk array with hard disks on status of Unconfigured Good unused select the all drive groups added in step 7 by repeating steps 4 through 6 from the Array With Free Space menu and then click Add to SPAN When adding a disk array to an existing drive group select the target drive group from the Array With Free Space pane and click Add to SPAN When adding a disk array to existing drive gr...

Page 418: ...y 1 2 Write policy Without cache backup module installed 4 Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when the battery is installed With cache backup module installed 5 Write Through write cache invalid Always Write Back write cache valid Write Back With BBU Write cache is valid only when a cache backup module is installed IO...

Page 419: ... with BBU 2 When the equipment has installed a cache backup module make sure to set Write Back With BBU for Write Policy If not write performance may slow down 3 The maximum Select Size to be set is shown under Next LD Possible RAID Levels on the right pane Type a value up to the maximum size for the RAID level that you set Delete a value from the text box before typing another value When specifyi...

Page 420: ... screens appears When selecting Write Through in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Always Write Back in the write policy setting the following screen appears Click Yes The following screen appears after Yes is clicked ...

Page 421: ...ollowing screen appears 13 Click Accept The following screen appears 14 Click Yes The following screen appears 15 Click No The screen returns to the main menu 16 Initialize the disk array that you have built referring to Initializing disk arrays ...

Page 422: ...rd disks including the disk array information will be lost Back up your required data before initializing a disk array 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list of disk arrays displayed in the frame at the upper right select a disk array configuration to initialize 3 Check Slow Initialize and click Go The following screen appears ...

Page 423: ...tialization time 147 GB SAS HDD Approximately 20 minutes 300 GB SAS HDD Approximately 40minutes 600 GB SAS HDD Approximately 80 minutes 900 GB SAS HDD Approximately 120 minutes 200 GB SAS SSD Approximately 20 minutes The initialization time varies depending on the single hard disk capacity regardless of the RAID level or disk array capacity 6 When initialization is completed 100 click Home to retu...

Page 424: ...eted all data in those hard disks including the disk array information will be lost Back up your required data before deleting a disk array Deleting all disk arrays simultaneously 1 Select Configuration Wizard from the main menu The following screen appears 2 Check Clear Configuration and click Next The following screen appears 3 Click Yes ...

Page 425: ...electively 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array that you want to delete Then check Properties and click Go The following screen appears ...

Page 426: ...375 5 Server Blade Setup 3 Check Delete and click Go The following screen appears 4 Click Yes ...

Page 427: ...nager in the DriverKit CD ROM for how to check consistency from the MegaRAID Storage Manager Consistency check on disk arrays can be executed only for RAID 1 5 6 and 10 1 Select Virtual Drives from the main menu The following screen appears 2 From the list displayed at the upper right of the screen select a disk array that you want to check the consistency Check Properties and click Go The followi...

Page 428: ...er Blade Setup 3 Check CC and click Go The progress of consistency check is displayed 4 Wait until the process is completed 100 5 When the consistency check is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 429: ...the logical drive consisting of hard disks Install an SSD in the logical drive consisting of SSDs You cannot set a disk as a reserve disk different from those configured the logical drive 1 With the main menu displayed click a hard disk for hotspare from the hard disk list in the Logical View Physical View pane The following screen appears Only a hard disk whose status is Unconfigured Good unused ...

Page 430: ...379 5 Server Blade Setup 3 Click Go Hotspare is set to the specified hard disk ...

Page 431: ...cedure for canceling hotspares 1 When the main menu is displayed click a hard disk that is set in hotspare from the list in Logical View Physical View Select a hard disk with hotspare status The following screen appears 2 Check Remove HOTSPARE and click Go Hotspare is released ...

Page 432: ...ray can be restored even if two hard disks fail With hotspares configuration rebuilding will work automatically when a hard disk problem occurs Without hotspare configuration rebuilding will work automatically after you replace the faulty hard disk in hot plug The following is a procedure for manually rebuilding where an automatic rebuild did not work 1 Select Drives from the main menu The followi...

Page 433: ...tely 40 minutes 200 GB SAS 200 GB SSD x 2 Approximately 10 minutes RAID 5 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 40 minutes 400 GB SAS 200 GB SSD x 3 Approximately 10 minutes RAID 6 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 40 minutes 400 GB SAS 200 GB SSD x 4 Approximately 10 minutes RAID 10 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 40 minutes 400 GB SAS 200 GB SSD x 4 Approximately 10 minutes The r...

Page 434: ...ne from MegaRAID Storage Manager See MegaRAID Storage Manager in the DriverKit CD ROM for information about how to expand disk arrays from the MegaRAID Storage Manager A disk array expansion cannot be cancelled during the execution Be sure to install a hard disk with Unconfigured Good status unused before expanding the capacity 1 Select Virtual Drives in the main menu The following screen appears ...

Page 435: ...ck Properties and click Go The following screen appears 3 Check Adv Opers and click Go The following screen appears 4 Check Change RAID Level and Add Drive select a hard disk to use for the capacity expansion from the list displayed in the pane and click Go To select multiple hard disks click hard disks while pressing the Ctrl key ...

Page 436: ...nsion time is shown in the table below RAID level Capacity of a disk array Rebuilding time for expansion RAID 0 900 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 210 minutes 600 GB SAS 200 GB SSD x 3 Approximately 70 minutes RAID 5 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 3 Approximately 160 minutes 400 GB SAS 200 GB SSD x 3 Approximately 60 minutes RAID 6 600 GB SAS 300 GB HDD x 4 Approximately 170 minutes 400 GB SAS 200 G...

Page 437: ...r Blade Setup The rebuilding time for expansion is proportional to the capacity of a disk array regardless of the number of hard disks to add 8 When expansion is completed 100 click Home to return to the main menu ...

Page 438: ... or be destroyed during a blackout or instant power failure In Write Policy for the equipment that has no cache backup module installed Always Write Back can be supported only when the system equipment is connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set to Write Through when installing the operating system Otherwise installation may not be properly completed When the equipme...

Page 439: ...rite cache is invalid Write Back with BBU Write cache is valid only when a cache backup module is installed In Write Policy for the equipment that has no cache backup module installed operation with Always Write Back can be supported only when the system equipment is connected to the UPS uninterruptible power supply Even in this case set Write Through when installing OS Otherwise installation may ...

Page 440: ... following screen appears Click Yes When selecting Always Write Back in the Default write setting the following screen appears Click Yes 4 Click Home to return to the main menu Set the write policy per disk array When building multiple disk arrays set the write policy to all disk arrays ...

Page 441: ...tting to Disabled This section describes the procedure for changing the BIOS setting of the SAS RAID controller MegaRAID SAS 2208 When changing the BIOS setting Controller BIOS setting is changed to Disabled you cannot execute the boot from the disk array configured in the SAS RAID Controller MegaRAID SAS 2208 1 Select Controller Properties from the main menu The following screen appears 2 Click N...

Page 442: ...es in the table below from Controller BIOS and then click Submit Setting value Description Enabled Enables BIOS of the SAS RAID controller MegaRAID SAS 2208 Enables the boot from the disk array Disabled Disables BIOS of the SAS RAID controller MegaRAID SAS 2208 Disables the boot from the disk array Make sure to click Submit after changing the setting ...

Page 443: ...erent configuration detected from the disk array controller board configuration A difference in configuration between disks may be caused by the following conditions Conditions to generate foreign configuration A disk failed and could not be recognized Then the disk has been restored to be recognized A disk that had been used in another system unit with a foreign configuration contained was used 1...

Page 444: ... If the displayed configuration is incorrect click Cancel When the screen returns to Step 1 click Clear When you click Clear a message Previous foreign configuration will be lost Do you want to proceed is displayed Click Yes and the previous foreign configuration will be eliminated ...

Page 445: ...disks in a redundant disk array or a failure in a hard disk in a non redundant disk array Status of the hard disk The following table lists the status for hard disks Status indication Description Online Normal Offline Failed A fault has occurred The hard disk is separated from the disk array due to failure Rebuild Rebuilding is underway Global Hot Spare This is set as a global hotspare Dedicated H...

Page 446: ... present If you continue the data in the cache will be permanently discarded Press X to acknowledge and permanently destroy the cached data 5 Foreign configurations found on adapter Press any key to continue or press C to load the configuration utility A hard disk with a different configuration from the disk array configuration in the disk array controller was detected See Disk with foreign config...

Page 447: ...les to ensure all disks are present Press any key to continue or press C to load the configuration utility Some disk array configurations are removed When this message is displayed even if the device is installed properly contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel 13 The following VDs are missing complete spans If you proceed or load the configuration utility these VDs will be removed fro...

Page 448: ...detected during the previous boot of the controller The DIMM on the controller needs replacement If you continue data corruption can occur Press X to continue or power off the system and replace the DIMM module and reboot If you have replaced the DIMM press X to continue 20 Multibit ECC errors were detected on the RAID controller If you continue data corruption can occur Contact technical support ...

Page 449: ... 33 Previous configuration cleared or missing Importing configuration created on X Y X Y Press any key to continue or press C to load the configuration utility 34 An enclosure was found that contains both SAS and SATA drives but this controller does not allow mixed drive types in a single enclosure Correct the problem and restart your system Press any key to continue or press C to load the configu...

Page 450: ...de Reconfiguring automatically to persistent mapping mode Automatic reboot would happen in 10 seconds An unsupported device expander is detected When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel 48 The controller s I O processor has a fault that can potentially cause data corruption Your controller needs replacement Contact your system support Press Y to acknowledg...

Page 451: ...cted Verify the connection and allow 30 minutes for charging If the battery is properly connected and it has not returned to operational state after 30 minutes of charging contact Technical Support for additional assistance Press D to disable this warning if your controller does not have a battery Cache backup module information is incorrect When this message is displayed contact your reseller or ...

Page 452: ...rect When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel 67 Upgrade Key Missing An upgrade key was present on a previous power cycle but it is not connected This can result in inaccessible data unless it is addressed Reattach the upgrade key and reboot Any upgrade key is not supported When this message is displayed contact your reseller or call maintenance personnel ...

Page 453: ...tings of the server blade via the server blade Web console The following items require initial settings User account configuration LPAR manager boot settings Mouse mode settings for the remote console BMC time settings Connection For connection see Connection Standard server blade settings X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 models You can connect to the server blade Web console in the same way as stand...

Page 454: ...is the Default setting If you use LPAR manager set it to LP Mode Item Description 1 Refresh Reloads the information 2 OS Mode Basic Mode Select this not to use LPAR manager LP Mode Select this to use LPAR manager 3 LP Model Displays the LP model string 4 LP Firmware Version Bank0 Bank1 Displays LP firmware version of each bank Active shows the firmware bank currently selected Alternate shows the f...

Page 455: ... of the server blade BMC Baseboard Management Controller See BMC time settings in Standard server blade settings X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 models for how to set the BMC time Logout Click Logout on the right end of the screen to log out of the server blade Web console Server blade web console function This section describes the functions of the server blade Web console See Server blade web cons...

Page 456: ...on EFI Firmware Version shows the EFI firmware version 3 Server FRU Information Shows the product information of each server blade in the server partition Product Name shows the product name of the server blade Product Part Module Number shows the product part number of the server blade Product Version shows the hardware version of the server blade Product Serial Number shows the serial number of ...

Page 457: ...Turns off the power of the server partition without OS shutdown Shutdown on the OS screen or use the SC function to turn off the power 5 Hard Reset Hardware resets the server partition Enabled when the server partition power is on 6 NMI Generates an NMI signal The dump process will start if the dump function of the OS is configured Enabled when the server partition power is on 7 Hardware Memory Du...

Page 458: ...407 5 Server Blade Setup Item Description High performance Server partition X57A1 X57A2 in Chapter 2 EFI setup You can configure the main settings of EFI on the following screen ...

Page 459: ...oose this setting to use an OS which supports x2APIC RHEL6 x and Win2008R2 xAPIC Choose this setting to use an OS which does not support x2APIC Any other OS than RHEL6 x and Win2008R2 x2APIC Do not choose this because this is currently not supported 8 Memory RAS Mode 3 Sets the operation mode of the memory system Lockstep Channel Mode Default Mirrored Channel Mode Spare Channel Mode 9 Socket Inter...

Page 460: ...edited settings and moves to the confirmation screen 1 For EFI firmware version 07 43 08 43 or later on X57A2 you can specify LOM or PFM for the value of Processor Error Mode PFM can be specified only with Window Server 2012 or later But for redundancy configuration with the system do not change from the default value LOM For model other than X57A2 EFI firmware version later than 07 43 08 43 and O...

Page 461: ...FD or remote CD DVD before you power on the server blade For details about Remote Console Application see the Remote Console Application User s Guide Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 in the CD that came with this equipment LP setup You can enable and disable the LP boot and set the LP firmware to be used for the LP boot on this screen See LPAR manager boot settings in Initial Settings with Server Blade ...

Page 462: ...anine cards installed in the server partition and also displays the reduction information on the CPUs DIMMs and processor cores Reduction information includes whether components are deconfigured due to a failure or not You can also set up the planned reduction for the CPUs DIMMs and processor cores on this screen ...

Page 463: ... Next Reduction Status Shows the CPU DIMM reduction status to be applied at the next power on or reset 5 Next Planned Reduction Settings Shows the planned CPU DIMM reduction settings to be applied at the next power on or reset Deconfigured CPU DIMM will be deconfigured Configured CPU DIMM will not be deconfigured 6 Modify Next Planned Reduction Settings Changes the planned CPU DIMM reduction setti...

Page 464: ...n Mezzanine Card 0 Shows the FRU information of the mezzanine card 0 per server blade in the server partition 14 Mezzanine Card FRU Information Mezzanine Card 1 Shows the FRU information of the mezzanine card 1 per server blade in the server partition You cannot set up the planned reduction or deconfigure CPU or DIMM below the minimum configuration A message indicating that planned reduction is no...

Page 465: ...See Maintenance tab in Standard Server Blade Setup X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 models EFI firmware management Only maintenance personnel can use this menu FPGA ROM management Only maintenance personnel can use this menu Log tab Using the Log tab you can download the logs collected by BMC the blade management micro controller See Logs tab in Standard Server Blade Setup X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55...

Page 466: ... entering the EFI Setup screen while the server blade is booting you can halt the boot process and check or change the settings With the EFI startup screen open press the F2 key to display the EFI Setup screen The EFI Setup screen has six setup menus Main Advanced Chipset iSCSI Boot Security and Save Exit ...

Page 467: ...ed for operations in the EFI Setup menus are shown on the right side of the screen Make sure not to use function keys F1 to F4 because you may unintentionally alter the settings with those keys Checking the EFI version The EFI version is the XX YY part of HBS51 XX YY x64 in the Project Version field where XX Major Version YY Minor Version In the example below the EFI version is 01 04 ...

Page 468: ...s example 16384 MB of memory is installed Note that when memory mirroring mode is enabled the displayed size is one half of the total installed memory Setting the server blade system time You can check and set the date and time set in the server blade system Move the cursor to the item you want to change Use the Tab key to toggle between System Date and System Time To change the setting use the pl...

Page 469: ...an enable or disable the PXE booting option Figure 5 35 Advanced menu To enable PXE booting move the cursor to Launch PXE OpROM and press Enter The following screen displays Figure 5 36 Setting PXE enabled To specify Enabled move the cursor to Enabled and press Enter ...

Page 470: ...ing in the same manner You can enable PXE for LAN1 and LAN2 respectively or simultaneously Figure 5 38 Setting LAN2 PXE enabled After changing settings make sure to select Save Changes and Reset or Save Changes on the Save Exit menu This is the last item that can be set on the Advanced menu Be sure not to change other settings because EFI might fail to restart ...

Page 471: ...ipset menu 1 Checking the Memory Init Mode and NUMA Settings To check the Memory Init Mode and NUMA settings select North Bridge on the Chipset menu to show the following sub menu Figure 5 40 North Bridge sub menu Make sure that the settings for Memory Init Mode and NUMA are the same as the settings on server blade Web console ...

Page 472: ...console The settings on the North Bridge sub menu can be viewed only They must not be changed because if a setting is changed inadvertently the EFI may not start 2 Checking and setting Wake On Lan To check the Wake On Lan setting select South Bridge on the Chipset menu to show the following sub menu Figure 5 41 South Bridge sub menu Wake On Lan is always set to Enable If the setting appears as Dis...

Page 473: ...422 5 Server Blade Setup iSCSI menu On the iSCSI menu you can check iSCSI settings Figure 5 42 iSCSI selection menu ...

Page 474: ...the Compute Blade 2000 The implemented boot processing depends on which mode you select The two Compute Blade 2000 boot modes are Legacy booting conventional mode and boot method EFI booting newly supported mode and boot method The boot mode is determined automatically according to the boot device selected as Boot Option 1 When Built in Shell or UEFI xxxxx is selected as Boot Option 1 EFI booting ...

Page 475: ...t for Launch PXE OpROM on the Advanced menu To specify PXE booting set Boot Option 1 as shown in the following screen Figure 5 44 Setting the PXE boot path Figure 5 45 Screen with PXE boot path specified After changing the setting remember to select Save Changes and Reset or Save Changes on the Save Exit menu ...

Page 476: ...FI shell to delete the boot option Initialize the boot priorities to the default Reset Boot Option is shown and available for EFI firmware version 07 43 08 43 or later for X57A2 Make sure to execute Save Changes and Reset referring to Save Exit menu before initializing Boot Option Priorities You cannot separately delete boot options and initialize boot priorities Initialize Boot Option Priorities ...

Page 477: ...ntication 1 While a server blade is being booted 2 When you enter the EFI Setup screen 3 While a server blade is being booted The password is set The password is not set Any password can be set for a user When you set a password it is always necessary to enter the password for authentication while booting the server module When you set the N M cold standby HA or automatic OS boot do not set a pass...

Page 478: ...he device set in the boot path 3 Save Changes and Reset Saves changes and restarts the system 4 Discard Changes and Reset Discards changes and exits the Setup utility Restarts the system 5 Save Changes Saves changes 6 Discard Changes Discards changes 7 Restore Defaults Restores settings to the system Defaults 8 Save as User Defaults Saves settings as user Defaults 9 Restore User Defaults Restores ...

Page 479: ...428 5 Server Blade Setup ...

Page 480: ...ule External interface for the management module 430 Cable connection for the system console 432 Initial settings of management module 434 Backing up and restoring the settings 441 Account 452 Privilege and role 454 System console command reference 455 System web console 658 SVP service processor log message 774 HCSM Hitachi Compute Systems Manager alert message 789 ...

Page 481: ...dicated port for maintenance Only maintenance personnel can use this port Any user cannot use this Serial Port Serial port for the system console used for maintenance when a local area network LAN port is not available Prepare the following items for connection with the MAINT port A terminal for the system console Unshielded Twist Pair cable UTP cable UTP 5 or better Client software HyperText Tran...

Page 482: ...onnection via serial port A terminal for the system console A connecting cable for the serial port RS 232C cross cable D SUB9 pin female female connector Terminal software such as Hyper Terminal available for VT100 emulation When you connect to the serial port of a management module see the following table about communication parameter settings to the terminal software The system Web console canno...

Page 483: ...ble When two management modules are installed connect to the management module with the Master light emitting diode MSR LED that lights solid green Prepare the LAN cable to connect to the terminal by yourself NOTICE If a device with the same IP address as that for the Baseboard Management Controller BMC on the management module or server blade exists on the network a failure will occur on the syst...

Page 484: ...hipment is 9600 bps Connect the serial port of the management module in the rear of the system equipment to your system console terminal using a RS 232C cross cable When two management modules are installed connect to the management module with the MSR LED that lights solid green Prepare the RS 232C cross cable to connect to the terminal System console terminal RS 232C cross cable MSR ...

Page 485: ...l settings of the management module via system web console 1 Prerequisites for using the system Web console A system console terminal should satisfy the following conditions to use the system Web console Item Condition OS Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2...

Page 486: ... image display Enable the cookie See the OS manual for each procedure 3 First login 1 Boot the browser of the system console terminal 2 Enter http 192 168 0 1 in the URL field on the browser When the firmware version of your management module is A0310 or later enter https 192 168 0 1 here 3 When connection is successful the login screen of the Web console will appear 4 Fixed user account and passw...

Page 487: ...Password change in Administrator account See User Account Setting It is strongly recommended that the password to the Administrator account is changed 5 Device identifier setting See Server Chassis Module Management 6 Network information setting such as IP address See Configuration of Network in System Web Console ...

Page 488: ...437 6 Management Module Settings 7 Logout 1 Click Logout on the upper right on the system Web console screen 2 When the logout confirmation screen appears click OK ...

Page 489: ...Settings 3 Logout is complete Close the browser Make sure to log out of the Web console before closing the browser If you close the browser before logging out close all browsers and then log into the Web console the next time ...

Page 490: ...g at the shipment User account administrator Password password 4 When login is successful the system console main menu will appear 5 Enter S on the system console main menu to enter the command mode Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 Management Module ALL RIGHTS RESERVED COPYRIGHT C 2008 2010 HITACHI LTD Chassis ID 5713RF0 00108 Firmware Revision B0100 Z 2919 System Console Main Menu P Start OS console se...

Page 491: ...etting See CI command 4 Network information setting such as IP address See LC command 5 Logout Execute the EX command in the command mode and then enter X on the system console main menu to complete the logout 5713RF0 00108 0 SVP EX Enter Clear the screen System Console Main Menu P Start OS console session SW Start switch module console session S System command mode X Exit P SW S X S Enter 接続断 ...

Page 492: ...ystem Web console is described below For the system console see UBR command Setting backup files that are created using the system web console or system console can be restored using the system console as well as the system web console LPAR manager backup files saved in the management module can be restored using the LPAR manager Maintenance Tool Backing up the management module settings 1 Log in ...

Page 493: ...e to click Close only after the download has been completed 4 When the file is ready to download the following dialog box appears Click Save 5 Select a destination to save the backup file Backup file name is svp YYYYMMDD hhmmss backup by default which can be changed Enter a file name and then select Save Download will start 6 After the download has been completed close the window ...

Page 494: ...dule settings 1 Log in to the web console as Administrator 2 Select Settings and then Backing up and Restoring the Settings from the tree menu 3 Click Browse in Restoring the LPAR manager settings to the management module and select a backup file for restoration ...

Page 495: ...ckup file name is correct and click Restoration The following screen appears 5 Click Operation on the above confirmation screen The management module configuration will be restored The screen returns to the Backup or Restoration of the configuration screen ...

Page 496: ... console as Administrator 2 Select Settings and then Backing up and restoring the settings from the tree menu 3 In Backing up the fibre channel settings on the screen above select a card type and a partition and click List 4 The following list including backup files that can be saved will appear ...

Page 497: ...ears Click Save 7 Select a destination to save the backup file Backup file name is hba YYYYMMDD hhmmss backup for Hitachi 16 Gb fibre channel mezzanine card hba16 YYYYMMDD hhmmss backup by default which can be changed Enter a file name and then select Save Download will start 8 After the download has been completed close the window The backup file of the Fibre channel card configuration saved with...

Page 498: ...elect Settings and then Backing up and Restoring the Settings from the tree menu 3 In Backing up the LPAR manager settings select a partition for backup from the pull down menu and click Backup The following window appears Download will start in about five minutes Click Close only after the download has been completed ...

Page 499: ...m YYYYMMDD hhmmss backup by default which can be changed Enter a file name and then select Save Download will start 6 After the download has been completed close the window Restoring the LPAR manager settings to the management module 1 Log in to the web console as Administrator 2 Select Settings and then Backing up and Restoring the Settings from the tree menu hvm 20090428 181814 backup ...

Page 500: ...for restoration 4 Confirm that the backup file name is correct Select the resource partition from the pull down menu and click Restoration The following screen appears 5 Click Operation on the above confirmation screen The management module configuration will be restored The screen returns to the Backup or Restoration of the configuration screen ...

Page 501: ...nagement Module Settings Restoring the LPAR manager settings to the server blade 1 Log in to the web console as Administrator 2 Select Settings and then Backing up and Restoring the Settings from the tree menu ...

Page 502: ...ck Restoration The following window appears 4 Click Operation on the above confirmation screen The LPAR manager configuration will be restored into the server blade The screen returns to the Backup or Restoration of the configuration screen The restoration of LPAR manager configuration to the server blade can be executed with the LPAR manager Maintenance Tool ...

Page 503: ... up to 32 characters with the following conditions First character Alphabetic character Second and subsequent characters Alphanumeric characters hyphens underscores _ and periods 2 Status Indicates whether a user account is enabled or disabled Set as Enabled or Disabled With Enabled the account is available 3 Role Role names assigned to an account See Privilege and role for the details of Role 4 T...

Page 504: ...gital signature algorithm DSA It is recommended that the key length should be 1024 bits or over Public keys must be recorded after an account has been set 1 American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII characters from character codes 0x20 to 0x7e Account setting You can use the system console or system Web console to set accounts For procedures see SO command for the system console Use...

Page 505: ...ccount at the shipment Privilege Description 1 Chassis Can set and operate a chassis 2 Network Can set network 3 Switch Can set and operate a switch module Each slot has individual privilege 4 Partition Can set and operate a partition Each partition has individual privileges 5 Account Can add and delete Account or Role Role name Privilege Account Chassis Network Switch module Partition 1 Administr...

Page 506: ... setting 472 DF Displays modules installed in the equipment 474 DH Displays the relation between partitions and IO board modules 479 WWN Sets WorldWideName 480 PSM Displays and sets the power module status 490 MMC Operates the management module 494 FAN Displays the FAN module status 497 DL Log 498 DEL Deletes files in the user directory of the management module 515 FV Displays the firmware version...

Page 507: ... Network diagnosis 565 MLC Reference for maintenance network setting 566 ILC Internal LAN setting 567 Command Description See page BSM SC BSM cooperation setting 569 SNM SNMP setting 574 MI E mail setting 581 HA HA monitor setting Not available in this equipment 595 LDAP LDAP setting 595 HCSM HCSM Hitachi Compute Systems Manager 600 ST Syslog transfer setting 607 Command Description See page CER O...

Page 508: ...g Enter Prompt is displayed in the following composition Chassis ID the slot number of the management module that currently logs in SVP Example the slot number is 0 of the management module that logs in with Chassis ID 5713RF0 NNNNN EX command To disconnect select X Exit in this screen Command Description See page DC Restores to the default setting at the shipment 643 UBR Backups and restores each...

Page 509: ... DL Log EX Exit FAN FAN module FV Show firmware version HA HA monitor setting HE Help ILC Internal LAN setting LC LAN configuration LFT Link Fault Tolerance setting LM Language Mode LS LAN controller discriminating information MI E mail notification MLC Maintenance LAN setting MMC Management module control PC Partition control PR Physical partition setting PS Show power and other sensors PSM Power...

Page 510: ...ntegers from 0 to 1440 can be specified Unit minute Setting 0 cancels the timer and timeout for inactivity is not executed The serial console setting the console information on serial connection is shown in the following list Item Description of item Value Description of value Baud rate The baud rate of the serial console for the management module 9600 Can Select a baud rate among the three 9600 b...

Page 511: ...ogged in is shown in the following list Item Description of item Value Description of value No Serial number of sessions during the user login 0 to 21 Name Account name Character string in ASCII Comprised of up to 32 characters Role Role ID Integer Role ID from 0 to 23 MNT Maintenance personnel Login Login time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY A D MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Access Type of...

Page 512: ...tart OS console session Starts the OS console SW Start switch module console session Starts the switch module console Q Quit Quits the CHCO command When you operate from the console terminal connected to the serial port of the management module a break signal sent from the terminal software cannot reach the server blade or switch module Send a break signal from the console terminal connected to th...

Page 513: ...ute it Menu Description C Edit chassis ID Sets a chassis ID Q Quit Quits the CI command The following table describes the displayed item Item Description of item Value Description of value Chassis ID Chassis ID Up to 20 ASCII characters Identifier for a chassis The default value is the chassis serial number 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP CI Enter CI Chassis ID Chassis ID 5713RF0 NNNNN Chassis ID menu C Edit ...

Page 514: ...ble DST start time DST end time Time synchronization NTP Enable NTP server NTP0 Hostname Status Not connect NTP1 Hostname Status Not connect NTP2 Hostname Status Not connect NTP3 Hostname Status Not connect NTP disconnection alert policy Policy Immediately Time setting menu L Edit local time Z Edit time zone and Daylight Saving Time S Edit synchronization setting N Edit NTP server setting R Restar...

Page 515: ...ble below Item Description of item Value Description of value Time zone from 12 00 to 14 00 Time difference from Coordinated Universal Time UTC DST Daylight Saving Time Enable The daylight saving time setting is enabled Disable The daylight saving time setting is disabled DST start time When DST starts MMM ZZZZZ hh mm The time to start DST MMM the first 3 characters of a month ex Apr Oct ZZZZZ sta...

Page 516: ...nection is available but the NTP server is not synchronized a server with higher priority exists Sync Connection is available and the NTP server is synchronized Unknown Connection status is unknown No NTP server is set With the following conditions time synchronization is not available NTP server address is specified as the domain name The management module with time synchronization by NTP enabled...

Page 517: ...SDN at the prompt and press Enter Select a menu item you require from the following list and execute it Menu Description S Shutdown system Shuts down the system Q Quit Quits the SDN command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP SDN Enter SDN System shutdown Shutdown menu S Shutdown system Q Quit S Q ...

Page 518: ...Displays sensors of the fan module Q Quit Quits the PS command If you enter C in the PS command menu and press Enter the server chassis information is displayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP PS Enter PS Show power and other sensors Sensor menu C Show information of server chassis M Show sensors of management module P Show sensors of partiti...

Page 519: ...ayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration Sensors of Management module0 Temperature 38 00 degrees C 3 3V 3 30 V 2 5V 2 52 V 1 8V 1 84 V 1 2V 1 19 V 12 0V 12 21 V Current data of Management module0 Name GVX BE2MNG1X1 Slot 0 Nameplate Power 25 W Average Power 25 W Maximum Power 25 W Minimum Power 25 W ...

Page 520: ... MB0 CPU1 1 5V 1 49 V MB0 12V 11 97 V MB0 3 3V 3 27 V MB0 1 5V 1 50 V MB0 1 1V 1 08 V MB0 3 3VSB 3 30 V MB0 1 8VSB 1 78 V MB0 BAT 3V 3 20 V MB0 HDDBP 12V 11 94 V MB0 HDDBP 5V 4 98 V MB0 MEZZ0 3 3V 3 25 V MB0 MEZZ0 2 5V 2 50 V MB0 MEZZ0 1 8V 1 78 V MB0 MEZZ0 1 0V 0 98 V MB0 MEZZ1 3 3V 3 25 V MB0 MEZZ1 2 5V 2 48 V MB0 MEZZ1 1 8V 1 79 V MB0 MEZZ1 1 0V 0 99 V Current data of Partition4 Name Server bla...

Page 521: ...depending on your configuration Sensors of Switch module1 Current data of Switch module1 Name GVX BE2LSW1X1 Slot 1 Nameplate Power 60 W Average Power 60 W Maximum Power 60 W Minimum Power 60 W Sensors of Power supply module1 Ambient 30 53 degrees C Hot spot 46 84 degrees C Exhaust 44 07 degrees C Main 12V 12 26 V Standby 12V 12 53 V Input 196 00 V Main 12V 49 00 A Standby 12V 0 87 A Input 3 60 A F...

Page 522: ...s displayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration Sensors of Fan module3 Temperature 31 50 degrees C Voltage 12 01 V Current 4 10 A FAN0 6375 rpm FAN1 6716 rpm FAN2 6844 rpm Current data of Fan module3 Slot 3 Nameplate Power 46 W Average Power 46 W Maximum Power 46 W Minimum Power 46 W ...

Page 523: ... partition order to power off when the power supply capacity is exceeded Q Quit Quits the PSV command Server chassis power cap information is described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value Power cap Control of maximum power consumption Enable Power capping function is enabled Disable Power capping function is disabled Upper limit Maximum power consumption by a ser...

Page 524: ...long to a partition No server blade slot that belongs to a partition No setting value is set Integer Maximum power consumption value Unit watt Exception handling Exceptional processing No server blade slot that belongs to a partition Warning only Only warning when the maximum power consumption value defined by a user is exceeded Warn Set Frequency Warning and lowering the central processing unit C...

Page 525: ... module Displays information on an I O module SW Switch module Displays information on a switch module PS Power supply module Displays information on a power supply module T Show mass of modules Displays information on mass A All module Displays information on all modules Q Quit Quits the DF command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP DF Enter DF Show field replaceable unit information Detail field replaceable un...

Page 526: ...isplay may be different depending on your configuration Server chassis Part Model Number GVX RE2A1X11 Serial Number 5713RF0 00108 Model ID BladeSymphony 2000 00 Backplane ID Basic model 00 Chassis ID Chassis 7 Management module Slot 0 Board information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name HBS03 ZA Serial Number 851590 Product information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name Management Module Part Model ...

Page 527: ...Product information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name BladeSymphony E55 Part Model Number GVAE55A1 XXXXXXX Product Version 0020G55100 Serial Number 4609QF0 10439 MultiRecord information Manufacturer ID 000074 Module Type1 00 Module Type2 01 E Type 01 Capacity on Demand 01 UUID XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX Processor information Physical Processors 2 Physical Cores 16 Activated Cores 8 Memor...

Page 528: ... on the I O adapter and the I O slot expansion unit that connected to the I O adapter is displayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration I O adapter Slot 0 Board information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name HBS04 AA00 Serial Number XXXXXXXX Product information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name I O Board Module Part Model Number GV BE2CDM1N1 Serial Number XXXXXXXX Mul...

Page 529: ...ferent depending on your configuration If you enter A in the DF command menu and press Enter information on each module and mass is displayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration Switch module Slot 0 Type 1G LANSW Product information Part Model Number GVX BE2LSW1X1 Serial Number 000085 Power supply module Slot 1 Product information Manufacturer FUJI ELECTRIC Product ...

Page 530: ... below Item Description of item Value Description of value P Partition number 0 to 7 I Slot number of the I O adapter 0 to 15 Presence I O adapter installation Installed Installed Not Installed Not installed Unknown No server blade is installed 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP DH Enter DH Show connection of I O adapter module and partition I O adapter connection P I Presence 0 0 Installed 0 1 Installed 1 2 1 3...

Page 531: ... Menu Description C Show current WWN Displays information on WWN currently used O Show Edit original WWN Displays and sets information on the Default Physical WWN A Show Edit additional WWN Displays and sets information on the Optional Physical WWN Q Quit Quits the WWN command World wide name World wide name menu C Show current WWN O Show Edit original WWN A Show Edit additional WWN Q Quit C O A Q...

Page 532: ...wide node name Type 0 0 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 80 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 81 Additional 0 1 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 82 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 83 Additional 0 2 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 84 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 85 Additional 0 3 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 86 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 87 Additional 1 0 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 80 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 81 Additional 1 1 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 82 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 83 Additional 1 ...

Page 533: ...ical WWN changed from the initial value XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX User Default Physical WWN World wide node name WWNN No card is installed XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Optional Physical WWN equivalent to the initial value Default Physical WWN XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Optional Physical WWN changed from the initial value XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX User Default Physical WWN Type Type of WWN Additional Additiona...

Page 534: ...sion unit connect adapter 14 Part Model Number xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx I Port World wide port name World wide node name 0 0 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 80 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 81 0 1 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 82 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 83 0 2 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 84 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 85 0 3 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 86 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 87 1 0 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 80 ...

Page 535: ...dapter CNA adapter or 10 Gb CNA board the following values are shown WWN for port 0 is the WWN value for port 0 of the controller 0 WWN for port 1 is the WWN value for port 1 of the controller 0 WWN for port 2 is the WWN value for port 0 of the controller 1 WWN for port 3 is the WWN value for port 1 of the controller 1 WWN is shown only when CNA Personality setting is Fibre Channel over Ethernet F...

Page 536: ...ITACHI Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter User s Guide BIOS EFI edition to check it on the BIOS Utility screen For Hitachi Fibre channel mezzanine card See HITACHI Gigabit Fibre channel Adapter User s Guide BIOS EFI Edition to check it on the SELECT HBA screen Applicable EFI firmware version with each server blade model is as follows EFI firmware version 09 33 10 33 or earlier with standard server blad...

Page 537: ...xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx I Port World wide port name World wide node name 0 0 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 80 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 81 0 1 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 82 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 83 0 2 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 84 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 85 0 3 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 86 24 00 00 00 87 00 01 87 1 0 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 80 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 81 1 1 24 00 00 00 87 00 02 82 24 00 00 0...

Page 538: ...r 0 to 7 S Server blade number 0 to 7 Card FC card type and slot number ECX Expansion card IOXX I O adapter Port Port number 0 to 3 World wide port name WWPN XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Optional Physical WWN equivalent to the initial value XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX WWN changed from the initial value World wide node name WWNN XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Optional Physical WWN equivalent to the initial value X...

Page 539: ...0 EC1 0 N XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Console YY MM DD hh mm ss 0 0 EC1 0 WWPN XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Console YY MM DD hh mm ss 0 0 EC1 0 N XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Console YY MM DD hh mm ss 0 0 EC1 0 WWPN XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Console YY MM DD hh mm ss 0 0 EC1 0 N XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X...

Page 540: ...pe and slot number ECX Expansion card IOXX I O adapter IOXX IOX I O adapter on the I O slot expansion unit Displays I O adapter slot number connected to the I o slot expansion unit slot number on the I O slot expansion unit Port Port number 0 to 3 WWN World Wide Name WWNN World Wide Node Name WWPN World Wide Port Name Before WWN before changed XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX After WWN after changed XX XX ...

Page 541: ...On Normal Normal 1 On Normal Normal 2 On Normal Normal 3 On Normal Normal Power supply redundancy setting Policy N 1 Power supply optimization setting Optimization Enable Power supply AC recovery setting PS AC recovery 0 Enable 1 Enable 2 Enable 3 Enable Power supply module menu R Edit power supply redundancy setting O Edit power supply optimization setting P Show power supply module statistics A ...

Page 542: ...s No power supply module is installed On The power is on Processing power off In the process of powering off Off The power is off Processing power on In the process of powering on Condition Status failure status No power supply module is installed Normal No problem FAIL The power supply fails and does not work according to specifications AC input AC input status No power supply module is installed...

Page 543: ...supply module The current value and specifiable values are displayed and prompt is ready Press Enter or input a setting value and press Enter and the changed value is displayed A message to confirm the setting appears and prompt is ready Input Y and press Enter the redundant setting for the power supply module will be effective To cancel the setting change input N after the confirmation message an...

Page 544: ...nd menu and press Enter you can change the power supply AC recovery setting You are requested to select a power supply module and the prompt is ready When you input the number of a power supply the current setting values and specifiable values are displayed the prompt is ready Just press Enter or input a setting value and press Enter and the new setting value is displayed A message appears to conf...

Page 545: ... management module Q Quit Quits the MMC command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP MMC Enter MMC Management module control Management module status M Behavior Power Condition LID lamp 0 Active On Normal Off 1 Standby On Normal Off Management module control menu P Power control L LID lamp control Q Quit P L Q Select power supply module 0 3 A All Q Quit 0 Enter AC recovery Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 0 Ente...

Page 546: ...ion Status Whether or not available for the user operation FAIL status No management module is installed Normal Active standby Booting Booting now Shutting down Shutting down now Boot disable Boot is disabled FAIL The module fails LID Lamp Status of the identification LED No management module is installed Boot is disabled Boot of the other module is disabled On LED lights solid Off LED is off Ente...

Page 547: ...ng down may not be detected When restarting and shutting down a management module while the server blade with N M cold standby enabled is not in operation make sure to perform Smart Configure afterwards If you enter L in the MMC command menu and press Enter the identification LED menu is displayed Select a menu item you require from the following list and execute it Menu Description T Turn on Turn...

Page 548: ...d to the fan module Processing power on Power is being supplied to the fan module Condition Status FAIL status No fan module is installed Normal No problem FAIL The module fails and does not operate as the specifications Unit1 rpm Fan 1 Fan 1 is not installed Integer Revolution per minute of Fan 1 Unit rpm Unit2 rpm Fan 2 Fan 2 is not installed Integer Revolution per minute of Fan 2 Unit rpm 5713R...

Page 549: ...file to the user directory in the management module The file can be downloaded via FTP P Show power monitoring log Views power monitoring logs M Show environment monitoring log Views environment monitoring logs A Show management module console access log Views console access logs F Create error log file Views and creates error logs I Show MARLOG Views maintenance action report MAR logs C Show RC l...

Page 550: ...F907A10341 SID PAR XX MTY 04 SLT 01 2009 03 03 17 22 22 17E0 Info The management module sent out a connection request alert 2009 03 03 17 28 06 17E0 Info The management module sent out a connection request alert 2009 03 03 17 28 21 17E0 Info The management module sent out a connection request alert 2009 03 03 17 28 33 17E0 Info The management module sent out a connection request alert 2009 03 03 1...

Page 551: ...p Module Level System event log Message 2009 03 09 18 50 47 M1 Info 0000 02 6100 04 1D15 6FA1FFFF Management Module 1 General Reset 2009 03 09 18 50 47 M1 Info 0001 02 6100 04 F2F9 07A80B00 Management Module z In operation as master 2009 03 09 18 50 47 PS0 FAIL 0002 02 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF Power Supply module z Operated without Redundancy N 2009 03 09 18 53 05 M1 Caution 0003 02 6100 04 F2F9 07A1...

Page 552: ...CII If you enter D in the DL command menu and press Enter you are required to select a module for data collection the prompt is ready Select a module for data collection and a message to confirm the data collection the prompt is ready If you select the physical partition input the physical partition number Input Y and press Enter and the log file data for a probe start to be created To cancel crea...

Page 553: ...er chassis DC output Unit watt Max DC Maximum power consumption value DC output Integer Maximum power consumption value by the server chassis DC output Unit watt Min DC Minimum power consumption value DC output Integer Minimum power consumption value by the server chassis DC output Unit watt Upper limit Upper limit value of power consumption 0 No setting Integer Upper limit value of power consumpt...

Page 554: ...C output Integer Minimum power consumption value by the partition Unit watt Upper limit Upper limit value of power consumption 0 No setting Power cap is disabled Integer Upper limit value of power consumption Unit watt Speed CPU performance Integer The latest operation frequency of CPU in the 3 minute sampling This value changes only with static power cap setting enabled Unit MHz Select target C S...

Page 555: ...onitoring log Date intake temperature C avg min max 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX ...

Page 556: ...d in a specific day 00 23 Temperature sensor value by the hour Integer Average value of the temperature sensor by the hour Unit C Temperature sensor values are invalid Date exhaust temprature C avg min max 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 avg min max 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX...

Page 557: ...A Show all log Displays access logs P Show log for a period of time Displays access logs for a specific period Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you enter C in the access log menu and press Enter the access log file is created Management module console access log menu C Create log file A Show all log P Show log for a period of time Q Quit C A P Q Confirm Y N Y Enter Creating management module...

Page 558: ...09 02 21 13 47 59 1 00002_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 47 59 2 00001_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 47 59 3 00000_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 47 59 4 00019_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 5 00018_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 6 00017_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 0...

Page 559: ... IP address Source IP address for the user connected via LAN Connected from a serial port Access Connection type Serial Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPS Login Login time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Login date and time YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Logout Logout time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Logout date and time YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Behavior Management module ...

Page 560: ...13 47 59 3 00000_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 47 59 4 00019_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 5 00018_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 6 00017_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 7 00016_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 8 00015_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 4...

Page 561: ...the user directory in the management module You can download it via FTP Error log and E mail notification history No Timestamp System event log 0 2009 03 07 15 12 15 2000 04 010E 07A30000 1 2009 03 07 15 23 42 2000 04 010E 07A30000 2 2009 03 07 15 25 44 2000 04 0862 6FA10000 3 2009 03 07 15 28 45 0100 04 F4E0 07A84000 4 2009 03 07 15 28 26 0100 04 0710 07A30000 5 2009 03 07 15 40 06 0100 04 0700 6...

Page 562: ...e language mode MARLOG INDEX No Timestamp Assist Reason 0 2009 03 09 10 13 39 OK BMC detected failure 1 2009 03 09 10 13 48 OK Dumplog collected 2 2009 03 09 10 13 29 OK Processor abnormal 3 2009 03 09 10 07 40 OK LP detected failure 4 2009 03 09 10 07 34 OK BMC detected failure 5 2009 03 09 10 07 40 OK Dumplog collected 6 2009 03 09 09 38 54 OK PCI Slot IOA failure 7 2009 03 09 09 38 56 OK Dumplo...

Page 563: ...fix it within a week UC Non emergency the redundant component PR Protective maintenance request MARLOG 2009 03 09 10 13 39 CALL FACTOR INFORMATION Reason 15 Impact UU RC INFORMATION EVENT 0000 02 D3EBB449 0100 04 1530 07A30001 RC 10 0100 10 15300000 07A30001 RC NAME IOH RUNTIME ERROR COMMENT Uncorrectable IOH QPI failure EventData2 bit 7 Logical Node ID bit 3 0 QPI Port 1 Replace CPU Chip Suspecte...

Page 564: ...item Value Description of value UNIT Unit name The value of the target unit PARTS NAME Component name Character string in ASCII ACTION Action code RPL Replace CHK Check ADJ Adjust CRT Correct CLN Clean CKE Check externally RTM Execute TMP RPE Replace externally RMD Execute MD CSP Call maintenance personnel ADD Add REM Remove DRAWING NO Part number Character string in ASCII FRU MNEMONIC FRU mnemoni...

Page 565: ...5 10 0100 38 F4E00000 07A3CC00 3 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 38 F4E00000 07A3EB00 4 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 38 F4E00000 07A3CB00 5 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 70 F4E00000 07A2EA00 6 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 70 F4E00000 07A2CA00 7 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 70 F4E00000 07A2E900 8 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 70 F4E00000 07A2C900 9 2009 03 09 12 50 15 10 0100 38 F4E00000 07A3E800 10 2009 03 0...

Page 566: ... list RC NAME RC name Character string Displayed in ASCII COMMENT Character string RC comment in ASCII DEL command You can delete files in the user directory of the management module Enter DL at the prompt and press Enter Select a menu item you require from the following list and execute it Menu Description D Delete file Q Quit Quits the DEL command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP DEL Enter DEL Delete copy of...

Page 567: ...Equipment parameter Revision A002 Server blade firmware BMC firmware S Active Alternate 0 04 00 87 60 1 ERROR ERROR 2 3 08 47 4 5 6 7 03 53 03 49 EFI firmware S Active Alternate Spool 0 01 03 99 70 1 ERROR ERROR 2 3 01 36 4 5 6 7 70 48 70 48 LP firmware S Active Alternate 0 Not installed Not installed 1 Not installed Not installed 2 3 Not installed Not installed 4 5 6 7 Switch module firmware SW R...

Page 568: ...Description of item Value Description of value Dictionary Dictionary file version XXXXX Dictionary version 5 characters Equipment parameter is described in the table below Equipment parameter information Item Description of item Value Description of value Equipment parameter Equipment parameter version XXXX Equipment parameter version 4 characters Items of the BMC firmware are described in the tab...

Page 569: ... Alternate EFI firmware version XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX EFI firmware version Not used currently 32 characters Items of the LP firmware are described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value S Server blade slot number 0 to 7 Active Active bank firmware version XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LPAR manager bank firmware version currently used 32 characters Alternate Alternate bank firmware ve...

Page 570: ...nt module firmware are described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value M Management module slot number 0 1 Behavior SVP mode Active Active mode Standby Standby mode FW Update management module firmware Management module firmware M Behavior Revision 0 1 Active A0110 D 4252 Dictionary Revision 00032 Equipment parameter Revision Equipment parameter update status P Upd...

Page 571: ...ibed in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value Equipment parameter Equipment parameter version XXXXX Equipment parameter version 5 characters Items of the equipment parameter update status are described in the table below Information on how the equipment parameter is applied to each partition Item Description of item Value Description of value P Partition number 0 to 7...

Page 572: ...mmand Check your dictionary version with the dictionary file name as follows Naming rules dict xxxxx update Transfer the dictionary file to the user directory in the management module via FTP or SSH File Transfer Protocol SFTP before updating the dictionary To log into FTP or SFTP use the same account name and password as login to the system console Update file information File name File size byte...

Page 573: ...tting value and specifiable values are displayed and the prompt is ready Just press Enter or input a setting value and press Enter and the new setting value is displayed A message appears to confirm the setting and the prompt is ready Press Y and press Enter and the language value will become effective To cancel the setting value input N after the confirmation message and press Enter or just press...

Page 574: ...p control Turns on or off LID per server blade Q Quit Quits the SBC command MAC Command You can display and set a media access control MAC address Type MAC at the prompt and press Enter SBC Server blade control Server blade status S LID lamp 0 On 1 Off 2 3 Off 4 Off 5 On 6 Off 7 Off Server blade control menu L LID lamp control Q Quit L Q SVP MAC MAC MAC address MAC address menu C Show current MAC ...

Page 575: ... shown If you enter O in the MAC command menu press Enter and select a partition number the Default Physical MAC address is shown If you enter A in the MAC command menu and press Enter the Optional Physical MAC address menu is shown C O A Q C Select partition 0 7 Q Quit 0 Current MAC address P S Card Controller Port MAC address Type 0 0 ONBD 0 0 00 30 48 D7 DF 60 Original 0 0 ONBD 0 1 00 30 48 D7 ...

Page 576: ...Partition number 0 to 7 S Server blade number 0 to 7 Card Card type and slot number ONBD Onboard MCx x 0 to1 Expansion card IOx x 0 to 15 I O board Controller Controller number 0 to 1 Fixed to 0 zero when the card type is onboard or I O board Port Port number 0 to 7 MAC address MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Default Optional Physical MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Optional Physical MAC address chang...

Page 577: ... number only for expansion cards the Optional Physical MAC address can be edited S I E H Q I Select partition 0 7 A All Q Quit 5 Confirm Y N Y Partition5 Writing setting was completed Hit enter key S I E H Q E Select partition 0 7 Q Quit 7 Select server blade 7 Q Quit 7 Select card 0 Onboard 1 Mezzanine card 2 I O adapter Q Quit 0 Port0 Additional MAC address 00 00 87 C4 C5 7E Unchange 00 00 87 AA...

Page 578: ...30 19 56 13 5 5 MC0 0 0 00 00 87 C4 1D FC 00 1F 67 63 0B FC Console 12 01 30 19 56 13 5 5 MC0 0 1 00 00 87 C4 1D FD 00 1F 67 63 0B FD Console 12 01 30 19 56 14 5 5 MC0 0 2 00 00 87 C4 1D FE 00 1F 67 63 0B FE Console 12 02 03 00 41 46 7 7 MC0 0 6 00 00 87 C4 C5 86 00 00 87 C5 AA AA Console 12 02 03 00 41 46 7 7 MC0 0 7 00 00 87 C4 C5 87 00 00 87 C5 BB BB Console 12 02 03 00 44 31 7 7 MC0 0 0 00 00 ...

Page 579: ...off 0 6 Ignore Stay off 0 7 Ignore Stay off 0 Pre configure setting Method type MAC type P N M cold standby Current Config Current Config Current Config 0 Disable PXE PXE Original Original Original Original 1 Disable Inline Inline Additional Additional Original Additional 2 Enable Inline Inline Additional Additional Additional Additional 3 Disable Inline PXE Original Original Original Original 4 E...

Page 580: ...Ineffective partition AC recovery Action setting when the power is restored Stay off Remain OFF when the power is restored Power on Turns on power when the power is restored Last state If the power is on before the failure the power turns on when the power is restored Ineffective partition Recovery wait min Wait time to turn on the partition when the power is restored 0 to 60 minute s Ineffective ...

Page 581: ...ype Config additional HBA uses Optional Physical WWN original HBA uses Default Physical WWN Ineffective partition ERROR Fails to obtain values MAC type Current additional LAN controller uses the Optional Physical MAC address original LAN controller uses the Default Physical MAC address Ineffective partition partition in initialization no server blade installed improper hardware configuration busy ...

Page 582: ...at Not Installed Sub version of the FRU format is the default value LPAR manager license is invalid LPAR manager 4 0 format Essential LPAR manager Essential model LPAR manager license is valid LPAR manager 4 1 or later formats Enterprise LPAR manager Enterprise model LPAR manager license is valid LPAR manager 4 1 or later formats ERROR Fails to obtain status due to an error If you enter P in the P...

Page 583: ...t the Smart Configure You are required to select a partition at the prompt Enter a partition number Press Enter or input the setting value and press Enter to go to the next setting Displayed order Item 1 Setting to enable or disable the N M cold standby 2 Setting for Smart Configure method 3 Setting a type of WWN used for Smart Configure 4 Setting a type of MAC Select partition 0 7 Q Quit 0 Chassi...

Page 584: ... is used with the PXE method Applicable type of MAC depends on what type of Smart Configure method is used Description of item Value Description of value Inline Additional A type of MAC can be selected with In line method original PXE original Default Physical MAC is used with PXE method S P R C Q R Select partition 0 7 Q Quit 2 N M cold standby Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 0 Method Inline 0...

Page 585: ...ion configuration C Configure partition W Write configuration Q Quit C W Q C Select partition 0 7 Q Quit 0 Input blade count 1 2 D Delete partition Q Quit 2 Partition configuration Server blade P Power 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S S S S 0 Off X X Modified 1 Off Deleted 2 X 3 Off X 4 X 5 X X 6 7 Off X WARNING If confirm partition1 is deleted Confirm Y N Y Partition configuration Server blade P Power 0 1 2 3 4...

Page 586: ... blade P Power 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S S S S 0 Off X X Modified 1 Off Deleted 2 X 3 Off X 4 X 5 X X 6 7 Off X Confirm Y N Y Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Item Description of item Value Description of value P Partition number 0 to 7 Power Current power status No blade slot assigned No blade slot installed On Power is on Processing power off Power is being turned off Off Power is off Process...

Page 587: ...on configuration Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you enter C in the PR command menu and press Enter you can change the partition configuration You are required to select a partition at the prompt Enter a partition number and the number of server blade slots that can belong to the partition Input the setting value and press Enter to go on the next setting To delete the partition enter D Repe...

Page 588: ... SVP PC PC Partition control Partition status P Power Condition LID lamp Mode Auto power on 0 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 1 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 2 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 3 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 4 5 6 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 7 Pre configure status P Autorun Run status Result 0 Disable Not get Not Complete 1 Disable Not get Complete 2 Disable Not g...

Page 589: ... No blade slot assigned No blade slot installed which is assigned On LED is on Off LED is off ERROR Error occurs Mode Logical Partitioning No blade slot that it belongs to No blade slot installed which is belonged to LP Logical Partitioning is Enabled LPAR manager boots Basic Logical Partitioning is Disabled LPAR manager does not boot Auto power on Current status of the power synchronization Initi...

Page 590: ...ber 0 to 7 Autorun Run automatically Enable Valid Disable Invalid Run Status Smart Configure is being executed Configured Enabled No information Nothing is obtained Not Configured No setting In Progress In Progress No blade installed Autorun is disabled ERROR Error occurs Result Result of Smart Configure Complete Not Complete Aborted No blade installed Autorun is disabled ERROR Error occurs If you...

Page 591: ...ic Synchronized 4 5 6 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 7 Pre configure status P Autorun Run status Result 0 Disable Not get Not Complete 1 Disable Not get Complete 2 Disable Not get Complete 3 Disable Not get Complete 4 Disable 5 Disable 6 Disable Not get 7 Disable Power control menu P Power on S Shutdown F Force power off C Run pre configure R Restart H Hard reset N Generate NMI D Cancel delayed...

Page 592: ...Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you enter L in the PC command menu and press Enter the LID lamp control menu is displayed P L Q L Partition status P Power Condition LID lamp Mode Auto power on 0 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 1 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 2 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 3 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 4 5 6 Off Normal Off Basic Synchronized 7 Pre configure ...

Page 593: ...that belongs to the partition Q Quit Returns to the previous menu UTL command You can release the power on request suppress setting to the partition with this command Enter UTL at the prompt and press Enter Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description C Change power on request suppress setting Q Quit Quits the UTL command SVP UTL Enter UTL Utility Utility menu C Change...

Page 594: ...nfigured with the LC command such as the network setting of the management module M Edit management module setting P Edit partition setting Edit the network setting of the partition SW Edit switch module setting V Edit VLAN setting Q Quit Quits the LC command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP LC Enter LC LAN configuration Management LAN setting menu C Show management LAN setting M Edit management module setting...

Page 595: ...gateway Ext port 0 172 16 201 10 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 1 172 16 201 11 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 2 172 16 201 12 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 3 172 16 201 13 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 4 172 16 201 14 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 5 172 16 201 15 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 6 172 16 201 16 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 7 172 16 201 17 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 Switch module current network setting S...

Page 596: ...t press Enter or enter a setting value and press Enter and the screen will go to the next setting Menu Description 1 IP address of the management module 2 Subnetmask of the management module 3 Default gateway of the management module C M P SW V Q M Enter Management module LAN interface setting IP address Subnetmask Default gateway Ext port 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 Management module...

Page 597: ...onnected by specifying the former IP address is disconnected To cancel the network setting in the management module press N and press Enter or simply press Enter to confirm the new setting value L Q L Enter IP address 192 168 0 1 Unchange 192 168 0 10 Enter Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Unchange 255 255 254 0 Enter Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Unchange Enter DNS0 0 0 0 0 Unchange Enter DNS1 0 0 0 0 Unchange...

Page 598: ... and the screen will go to the next setting Menu Description 1 Subnetmask 2 Default gateway 3 IP address of the partition 0 4 IP address of the partition 1 5 IP address of the partition 2 6 IP address of the partition 3 7 IP address of the partition 4 8 IP address of the partition 5 9 IP address of the partition 6 10 IP address of the partition 7 C M P SW V Q P Enter Partition network setting P IP...

Page 599: ...the partition enter N and press Enter or just press Enter to confirm the new setting value A N Q A Enter Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 Unchange 255 255 254 0 Enter Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Unchange Enter Partition0 IP address 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 1 1 Enter Partition1 IP address 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 1 2 Enter Partition2 IP address 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 1 3 Enter Partition3 IP address 0 0 0 0 Unchang...

Page 600: ...ge enter N and press Enter or just press Enter Partition network setting P IP address Subnetmask Default gateway Ext port 0 192 168 1 1 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 1 192 168 1 2 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 2 192 168 1 3 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 3 192 168 1 4 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 4 192 168 1 5 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 5 192 168 1 6 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 6 192 168 1 7 255 25...

Page 601: ...1 4 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 4 192 168 1 5 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 5 192 168 1 6 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 6 192 168 1 7 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 7 192 168 1 8 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 MGMT 0 WARNING Session may be disconnected when setting saved Confirm Y N Y Enter Partition0 Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter C M P SW V Q SW Switch module network setting SW Ext IP add...

Page 602: ...n IOSW IOSW input output switch Ethernet port of the switch module For 10 Gb DCB SW no Ethernet port of the switch module exists When it is specified neither internal connection nor connection from external output ports is available IP address IP address of the management interface in the switch module IP address format IP address format Interface to view and update the management interface LAN se...

Page 603: ...setting Edits the network setting of the individual switch module S Show the switch module current network setting Displays the current setting of the switch module W Synchronize network setting to switch module Applies the setting held by the management module to the switch module Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you enter A and press Enter the prompt for setting the switch module connectio...

Page 604: ...ess 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 0 111 Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 Unchange 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 0 112 Switch module4 Ext setting Int 0 Int 1 Ext 2 IOSW Unchange 1 Synchronize No 0 No 1 Yes Unchange 1 IP address 0 0 0 0 Unchange 0 0 0 0 Switch module5 Ext setting Int 0 Int 1 Ext 2 IOSW Unchange Switch module network setting SW Ext IP address Subnetmask Default gateway Ext port...

Page 605: ...m Y N Switch module0 Writing setting was completed Switch module1 Writing setting was completed Switch module2 Writing setting was completed Switch module3 Writing setting was completed Switch module4 Writing setting was completed Switch module5 Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter ...

Page 606: ...es not take effect on the switch module Log in to the switch module and configure it using the ip route command See the Network OS Administrator s Guide for details If Network OS version 2 0 1 is on the switch module you cannot configure the gateway A N S W Q N Select switch module 0 5 Q Quit 0 Ext setting Int 0 Int 1 Ext 2 IOSW Unchange 1 Synchronize No 0 No 1 Yes Unchange 1 IP address 0 0 0 0 Un...

Page 607: ...Enter and the switch module setting held by the management module is applied to the network setting of the switch module To cancel the setting change enter N and press Enter or just press Enter A N S W Q S Switch module current network setting SW IP address Subnetmask Default gateway 0 192 168 1 111 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 128 1 2 3 4 5 Hit enter key A N S W Q W Switch module network setting SW Ex...

Page 608: ...enu Description M Move port Moves ports between virtual local area networks VLANs C Create VLAN D Delete VLAN Q Quit Returns to the previous menu C M P SW V Q V Enter VLAN setting Partition Switch module VLAN ID Ext port M 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 Untag0 MGMT 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Untag1 MGMT 1 VLAN setting M Move port C Create VLAN D Delete VLAN Q Quit M C D Q ...

Page 609: ...n message appears At the prompt enter Y and press Enter and the VLAN setting is saved To cancel the setting change enter N and press Enter or just press Enter M C D Q M Enter VLAN setting Partition Switch module VLAN ID Ext port M 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 Untag0 MGMT 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Untag1 MGMT 1 Select target 0 Management module 1 Partition 2 Switch module Q Quit 0 Enter VLAN I...

Page 610: ...ss Enter and the VLAN setting is saved To cancel the setting change enter N and press Enter or just press Enter M C D Q C Enter VLAN setting Partition Switch module VLAN ID Ext port M 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 Untag0 MGMT 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Untag1 MGMT 1 X VLAN ID 2 4000 Q Quit 2 Enter Ext port MGMT 0 0 MGMT 0 1 MGMT 1 Unchange 0 Enter VLAN setting Partition Switch module VLAN ID Ext ...

Page 611: ... is saved To cancel the setting change enter N and press Enter or just press Enter M C D Q D Enter VLAN setting Partition Switch module VLAN ID Ext port M 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 Untag0 MGMT 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Untag1 MGMT 1 X 2 MGMT 0 Select VLAN Q Quit 2 Enter VLAN setting Partition Switch module VLAN ID Ext port M 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 Untag0 MGMT 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X...

Page 612: ...put port MGMT 0 MGMT0 port MTGMT 1 MGMT1 port MNT MAINT port Management module Which management module has open ports Active or Standby LFT Redundancy function of the management LAN port Enable or Disable Down s How many seconds it takes to ascertain that the external output port is linkdown specify 1 to 3600 seconds Up s How many seconds it takes to ascertain that the external output port is link...

Page 613: ...message appears At the prompt enter Y and press Enter and the VLAN setting is saved To cancel the setting change enter N and press Enter or just press Enter If you enter O in the LFT command menu and press Enter you can change the redundancy setting in the management LAN port of the MGMT1 port For the MAINT port you can only display the setting Z O Q Z Enter LFT Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange ...

Page 614: ...ade Q Quit Quits the LS command If you enter M in the LS command and press Enter the MAC address of the management module is displayed 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP LS Enter LS LAN controller discriminating information LAN controller information menu M Show MAC address of controller on management module B Show MAC address of controller on server blade O Show MAC address of controller on management module an...

Page 615: ... D0 ED 6A 00 30 48 D0 ED 6B 00 30 48 D0 ED 6C 00 30 48 D0 ED 6D 6 00 30 48 D0 EC B6 00 30 48 D0 EC B7 00 30 48 D0 EC B8 00 30 48 D0 EC B9 Hit enter key Enter M B O Q O Enter MAC addresses on management module M controller0 controller1 0 00 00 87 12 84 4A 00 00 87 12 84 4B 1 00 00 87 12 84 2E 00 00 87 12 84 2F MAC addresses on server blade S Onboard0 Onboard1 I O Controller BMC 1 00 30 48 D0 ED 96 ...

Page 616: ...onfirmation message appears to confirm executing diagnostics At the prompt enter Y and press Enter Diagnostics are executed and the result is displayed To cancel diagnostics enter N and press Enter or just press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP XD Enter XD Execute diagnostics Diagnostics menu I ICMP Ping Q Quit I Q I Q I Enter Input IP address Q Quit 192 168 0 253 Enter Confirm Y N Y PING 192 168 0 253 1...

Page 617: ...e interface for the maintenance network of the management module Items of the static route are described in the table below Menu Description Network address Network address of a network targeted for static routing Subnetmask Subnetmask of a network targeted for static routing Router IP address IP address of a router transferring to targeted network for static routing 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP MLC Enter ...

Page 618: ... on the screen are described in the table below Item Description Network address Network address of internal network Default value 192 168 253 0 Subnetmask Subnetmask of internal network Default value 255 255 255 0 Do not set the internal network address to 192 168 0 0 or 192 168 254 0 in the internal network setting 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP ILC Enter ILC Internal LAN setting Internal network Network a...

Page 619: ...nter N and press Enter or just press Enter Do not change the internal network address while the server blade is operating which causes the management module to restart If you do error events which have occurred while the management module is restarting may not be detected When changing the internal address while the server blade with N M cold standby enabled is not in operation make sure to perfor...

Page 620: ...w Edit basis detail setting Shows and edits the processing details about accepting requests from SC BSM DM Show Edit manager detail setting Shows and edits details about SC BSM connection setting T Test N M cold standby Issues the alert to test the switch of the N M cold standby environment Q Quit Quits the BSM command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP BSM Enter BSM SC BSM setting Manager setting No Name IP add...

Page 621: ...der or the recommended value is displayed To proceed to the next setting press Enter or enter a setting value and press Enter Menu Description 1 SC BSM name 2 SC BSM IP address 3 Alert level to notify SC BSM If you enter an alert level the changed setting value is displayed A confirmation message appears At the prompt enter Y and press Enter The edited SC BSM connection setting is saved To cancel ...

Page 622: ...er or just press Enter If you enter DB in the BSM command menu and press Enter the current setting is displayed Select a menu item from the table below to execute it Menu Description S Edit setting Edits SC BSM setting related to command requests Q Quit Returns to the previous menu M D DB DM T Q D Enter Select manager 0 3 Q Quit 1 Enter Manager setting No Name IP address Alert level 0 BSM_0 192 16...

Page 623: ...u and press Enter you are asked to select SC BSM connection setting At the prompt enter the SC BSM connection setting number specified and the current setting is displayed Select a menu item in the table below to execute the function Menu Description S Edit setting Edits details of SC BSM connection setting Q Quit Returns to the previous menu S Q S Enter Command port 21001 1 65535 Unchange 21002 E...

Page 624: ...SM connection setting is saved To cancel the setting enter N and press Enter or just press Enter Do not perform an N M cold standby switching test by issuing an alert in this screen together with LPAR migration targeted to that partition See Chapter 12 Logical partitioning manager for further information S Q S Enter Name BSM_1 Unchange BSM_01 Enter IP address 192 168 0 253 Unchange 192 168 0 254 E...

Page 625: ...NMP version v1 v2c Hostname host Port number 162 Community name com Manager1 SNMP version v3 Hostname snmp esd hitachi com Port number 162 User name user Access type AuthPriv Authentication type MD5 Authentication password Encryption type DES Encryption password Manager2 SNMP version v1 v2c Hostname Port number 162 Community name Manager3 SNMP version v1 v2c Hostname 0 0 0 0 Port number 162 Commun...

Page 626: ... installation site Character string in ASCII Up to 60 characters in ASCII Port number Port number for SNMP agent to use Integer Integer between 1 and 65535 However the value 162 is not available Trap level Levels notified in SNMP trap Disable Nothing notified Alert Notifies reports in non recoverable and serious level Information Notifies reports in information level All All levels are notified SN...

Page 627: ... Available only when the SNMP version is v3 With authentication but no encryption AuthPriv Available only when the SNMP version v3 With authentication and encryption Authentication type Authentication type MD5 Available only when the SNMP version is v3 Type MD5 SHA Available only when the SNMP version is v3 Type SHA Authentication password Authentication password Character string in ASCII Availabl...

Page 628: ... agent setting is saved To cancel the setting enter N and press Enter or just press Enter A M DA DM T C Q A Agent Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Contact name Unchange Administrator Location Unchange A3F Port number 161 1 65535 Unchange 8161 Trap level All 0 All 1 Alert 2 Information 3 Disable Unchange 2 SNMP version v1 v2c 0 v1 v2c 1 v1 v2c v3 Unchange 1 Engine ID string zzzzzzzzzzzz Unchan...

Page 629: ...0 v1 v2c 1 v3 Unchange 1 Hostname 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 0 22 Port number 162 1 65535 Unchange 8162 User name xxxxxx Unchange UserName Access type noAuthnoPriv 0 noAuthnoPriv 1 AuthnoPriv 2 AuthPriv Unchange 2 Authentication type MD5 0 MD5 1 SHA Unchange 1 Authentication password Unchange Encryption type DES 0 DES 1 AES Unchange 1 Encryption password Unchange SNMP manager setting Manager0 SNMP v...

Page 630: ...ber to delete and a confirmation message appears At the prompt enter Y and press Enter and the SNMP manager setting is deleted To cancel the deletion enter N and press Enter or just press Enter A M DA DM T C Q DA SNMP agent setting Agent Disable Contact name Location Port number 161 Trap level All SNMP version v1 v2c Engine ID string Engine ID Confirm Y N Y Writing setting was completed Hit enter ...

Page 631: ...ecution and press Enter to copy it To cancel the copy process enter N and press Enter or just press Enter Enter H in the SNMP command menu and press Enter to set a trap message When you select BSM or HCSM on which the trap message is based on Confirm is shown Enter Y and press Enter to set the trap message To cancel the setting enter N and press Enter or just press Enter A M T C Q T Enter Confirm ...

Page 632: ...scription C Show e mail setting Displays the e mail settings E Edit e mail notification setting Sets the e mail notification A Edit e mail address M Send e mail notification Q Quit Quits the MI command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP MI Enter MI E mail notification E mail setting menu C Show e mail setting E Edit e mail notification setting A Edit e mail address M Send e mail notification Q Quit C E A M Q ...

Page 633: ...m Host FQDN bs2kfw com Comment test SMTP server 192 168 0 76 Port number 25 E mail authentication setting Authentication Enable Name auth Method PLAIN E mail encryption setting Encryption Disable Protocol SSL E mail address Address0 Nickname user0 Address user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Hit ent...

Page 634: ...II Make sure to specify the host name when the e mail notification function is enabled Comment Comment for information to identify a customer Character string in ASCII Up to 32 characters in ASCII SMTP server SMTP server Character string in ASCII IP address of the SMTP server or the SMTP server host name Up to 64 characters in ASCII Make sure to specify the SMTP server when the e mail notification...

Page 635: ... and delete the e mail notification setting The current setting is displayed in numerical order shown in the table below At the prompt to proceed to the next setting press Enter or enter a setting value and press Enter Menu Description 1 Enable or Disable the e mail notification 2 e mail address of the system administrator 3 Host name FQDN 4 Comment for information to identify a customer 5 SMTP se...

Page 636: ...192 168 0 76 Enter Authentication Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Enter Name Unchange admin Enter Password Unchange Method PLAIN 0 PLAIN 1 LOGIN 2 CRAM MD5 Unchange 2 Enter Encryption Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Enter Protocol SSL 0 SSL 1 TLS Unchange 1 Enter Set port number to 587 Y N N Enter Port number 1 65535 Unchange 25 Enter E mail notification setting Notification Enable Add...

Page 637: ...and press Enter or just press Enter If you enter A in the MI command menu and press Enter the e mail address setting menu is displayed C E A M Q A Enter E mail address setting menu E Edit e mail address D Delete e mail address Q Quit E D Q E R Q R Enter E mail notification setting Notification Disable Address Host FQDN Comment SMTP server Port number 25 E mail authentication setting Authentication...

Page 638: ...aracters in ASCII Signs available are as follows _ Attach With or Without a log file notification to the destination Yes Notification with a log file to be sent to the destination No Notification without a log file to be sent to the destination If you enter E in the e mail notification menu and press Enter you can edit the e mail address The current address list is displayed and the prompt is read...

Page 639: ... user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Select address 0 3 Q Quit 0 Enter Nickname user0 Unchange USER0 Enter Address user0 one8647 com Unchange Enter Attach Yes 0 No 1 Yes Unchange Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname USER0 Address user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Ad...

Page 640: ...ddress is deleted To cancel the setting change enter N and press Enter or just press Enter E D Q D Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname user0 Address user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Select address 0 3 Q Quit 0 Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname Address Attach No Address1 Nickname Address ...

Page 641: ... If you enter N in the manual e mail notification menu and press Enter the address list including addresses currently registered is displayed When you specify an address a message indicating that it takes a few minutes to put out the log to the file is displayed Then a message appears to confirm the e mail transmission At the prompt enter Y and press Enter and the log is put out to the file the e ...

Page 642: ...Enter and the file containing the log corresponding to the notification history is sent out the e mail will be sent to the selected address To cancel the e mail transmission enter N and press Enter or just press Enter N H Q N Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname USER0 Address user0 mail hitachi com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickna...

Page 643: ...932 0BA5FFFF X 19 2009 02 27 13 51 38 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 20 2009 02 27 15 15 56 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 21 2009 02 27 16 16 36 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 22 2009 02 27 20 39 17 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 23 2009 03 02 14 02 02 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 24 2009 03 02 14 13 25 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 25 2009 03 02 14 25 35 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 26 2009 03 02 14 40 51 6100 04 0932 0BA5FFFF X 27 2009 0...

Page 644: ...THER FRU MNEMONIC BUNDEN PARTS NAME REV ACTION CHK WEIGHT 50 DRAWING NO MAP_CHECK SERIAL NO 2 UNIT SYS FRU MNEMONIC PSALL PARTS NAME REV ACTION CHK WEIGHT 50 DRAWING NO MAP_CHECK SERIAL NO E mail address Address0 Nickname USER0 Address user0 mail hitachi com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Select address 0 3 A A...

Page 645: ...gg ee ssSS ee11223344 gggg Generator ID ee evn revision ss Sensor type SS Sensor number ee Event trigger 11 Event data 1 22 Event data 2 33 Event data 3 Result E mail notification result Not targeted O Notification is successful X Notification fails R Notification fails Wait for a retry C Collecting logs ...

Page 646: ...ing among directory service settings S Edit directory search setting Edits the search setting among directory service settings A Edit group authentication setting Edits the group authentication setting among directory service settings R Reset directory service setting Initializes the directory service settings Q Quit Quits the LDAP command LDAP Directory service setting Directory service setting m...

Page 647: ...iod Port number 1 65535 Port number used with the LDAP function Bind DN A string in ASCII Bind DN in the LDAP server Up to 256 characters A blank space is not available for the head and end of the string Password Bind password Character s in ASCII Password used for bind to the LDAP server From one to 32 character s including a blank space Retype password Bind password to retype Character s in ASCI...

Page 648: ...numeric 0 9 and A Z a z Items of the group authentication setting are described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value Group member Attributes to show group members Character s in ASCII Attributes to group members 1 up to 64 characters A blank space is not available for the head and end of the string Available for the 1 st character an alphabet A Z a z For the other...

Page 649: ... to 636 Y N N Port number 636 1 65535 Unchange 636 Set Bind DN to Anonymous Y N N Bind DN bind Unchange bind Password Unchange will not echo back Retype password will not echo back connection setting LDAP Enable LDAP server 0 esdadmin hitachi com LDAP server 1 192 168 1 200 LDAP server 2 Port number 636 Bind DN bind Confirm Y N Y Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Base DN testname Unchang...

Page 650: ...ting it the new setting and the confirmation message are displayed To reset the setting enter Y and press Enter To cancel settings enter N or just press Enter Set Group member attribute to unuse Y N N Group member attribute member_attribute Unchange member_attribute Group DN 0 GDN1 Unchange GDN1 Group DN 1 GDN2 Unchange GDN2 Group DN 2 GDN3 Unchange GDN3 Group DN 3 Unchange Group DN 4 Unchange gro...

Page 651: ...sables HCSM Access control Access control Enable Responds to a discovery only from the registered HCSM server Disable Responds to a discovery from HCSM servers both registered and not registered Port number Port number used by HTTP HTTPS server Integer Integer 1 up to 65535 Account HCSM account A string in ASCII ASCII characters 1 up to 32 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP HCSM Enter HCSM HCSM setting HCSM serv...

Page 652: ...ll Notifies all alerts including Warning Failure and Information Warning Notifies alerts including Warning and Failure Failure Notifies Failure alerts Do not notify Notifies no alert Retry interval Retry interval for alert notification attempts Integer Integer 1 up to 4 minutes Retry duration Retry duration for an alert notification attempt Integer Integer 4 up to 15 minutes Session Connected Bein...

Page 653: ... and the prompt is ready To apply the HCSM service settings type Y and press Enter To cancel the settings type N and press Enter Type M in the HCSM command menu and press Enter to display the HCSM server setting menu HCSM Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 0 Access control Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Use default account setting Y N N Account Compute Unchange Hitachi Password Retype passw...

Page 654: ...Select a menu item from the following list and execute it Menu Description A Add HCSM server Adds the HCSM server M Modify HCSM server Modifies the HCSM server D Delete HCSM server Deletes the HCSM server Q Quit Quits the LDAP command ...

Page 655: ...lert port 26119 1 65535 Unchange 12345 Alert level All 0 All 1 Warning 2 Failure 3 Do not notify Unchange 0 Retry interval min 2 1 4 Unchange 1 Retry duration min 10 4 15 Unchange 15 HCSM server setting IP address 192 168 0 110 Alert port 12345 Alert level All Retry interval min 1 Retry duration min 15 Confirm Y N Y Writing setting was completed Hit enter key HCSM server setting Retry Retry No IP ...

Page 656: ...mpt is ready To disconnect the HCSM server type Y and press Enter To cancel it type N and press Enter HCSM server setting Retry Retry No IP address Alert port Alert level interval Duration Session 1 192 168 0 20 26119 Warning 2 10 Connected 2 192 168 0 51 26119 All 2 10 Not connected Select HCSM server 1 2 Q Quit 1 Confirm Y N Y Writing setting was completed Hit enter key HCSM server setting Retry...

Page 657: ...nter to send a delayed failover You are prompted to enter a partition number the prompt is ready When you have entered a partition number a confirmation message is displayed the prompt is ready To send the delayed failover type Y and press Enter To cancel the delayed failover type N and press Enter or just press Enter after the confirmation message A M D S Q S Enter Partition status P Power Condit...

Page 658: ...55 available characters alphanumerics period and hyphen Syslog transfer is disabled Notification of audit event Notification setting for audit event Enable Executes Syslog transfer An Audit event occurs and the related log is sent by Syslog transfer Disable Not execute Syslog transfer Syslog transfer is disabled If you enter E in the ST command and press Enter you can edit the Syslog transfer sett...

Page 659: ...ess Enter or just press Enter after the confirmation message E Q E Syslog transfer Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Hostname of syslog server 192 168 0 100 Unchange 192 168 0 120 Notification of audit event Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 0 Syslog transfer setting Syslog transfer Enable Hostname of syslog server 192 168 0 120 Notification of audit event Disable Confirm Y N Y Writing setting...

Page 660: ...ollowing menu screen is displayed Select a menu item from the table below to execute the function Menu Description G Generate host key Generates host key pairs for the SSH server H Show host key information Display information about the host key of the SSH server B Backup Back up the host key pairs of the SSH server R Restore Restore the host key pairs of the SSH server Q Quit Return to the previo...

Page 661: ...nds for two hexagonal figures Alphabets from a to f is shown in lower case If you enter B in the SSH host key menu and press Enter you can save the host key pair of the SSH server You are prompted to enter characters used for a file name to be generated when saving Enter the characters for the file name and a confirmation message appears To save the host key pair enter Y and press Enter To cancel ...

Page 662: ...on Menu Description S Generate private key and self signed certificate Generates a pair of SSL keys and self signed certificate C Generate private key and certificate signing request CSR Generates a CSR to request the signed server certificate to a certificate authority H Show certificate Information Shows SSL certificate information I Import certificate file Imports the signed server certificate ...

Page 663: ...erver regenerating key pairs disconnects the communication S C H I P B R Q S Set key algorithm to RSA 1024bit Y N N Select key algorithm 0 RSA 1024bit 1 RSA 2048bit 2 DSA 1024bit Q Quit 1 Common Name localhost p99 blade com Input other subject information of certificate Y N Y Country JP State or province Kanagawa Locality Hadano Organization Hitachi Company Limited Organizational unit ESD E mail a...

Page 664: ...n ASCII 2 DN qualifier DN qualifier Character string Up to 60 characters 2 3 Surname Character string Up to 60 characters 2 3 Given name Character string Up to 60 characters 2 3 Initials Character string Up to 30 characters 2 3 1 Alphanumeric characters hyphens and periods are available 2 If nothing is entered the item is not displayed by default 3 Alphanumeric characters space single quotation pl...

Page 665: ...ation Hitachi Company Limited Organizational unit ESD E mail address p99 mail blade com DN qualifier Qualifier 01 Surname Hitachi Given name Taro Initials T H Unstructured name Unofficial 01 Challenge password password Input CSR file name 20090831 123456 XXXXXX Set CSR file type to PEM Y N N Select CSR file type 0 PEM 1 DER Q Quit 0 Certificate signing request information Key algorithm RSA 2048bit...

Page 666: ...er string Up to 60 characters 2 3 Given name Character string Up to 60 characters 2 3 Initials Character string Up to 30 characters 2 3 Unstructured name Unofficial name Character string Up to 60 characters 2 3 Challenge password Password to delete a certificate Character string Up to 30 characters 2 3 File name File name of a server certificate Character string Not available signs slash backslash...

Page 667: ...sued date and time of a certificate YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Validity Not After Expiration date and time of a certificate YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second S C H I P B R Q H SSL certificate information Version 3 Serial number 00 ff 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 aa bb cc dd ee ff 66 77 88 99 00 Key algorithm RSA 2...

Page 668: ...urname Character string Up to 60 characters Given name Character string Up to 60 characters Initials Character string Up to 30 characters Fingerprint SHA1 Certificate fingerprint XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X X XX XX XX XX XX XX Fingerprint for a certificate 20 byte hash value using SHA1 algorithm If you enter l in the SSL private key and certificate menu and press Enter you can import ...

Page 669: ...When you enter the file name a confirmation message appears To start creating the backup enter Y and press Enter To cancel the process enter N and press Enter or just press Enter S C H I P B R Q I file list file0 ssl TEST backup file1 SignedCertificate cer Select backup file 0 1 Q Quit 1 Select certificate file type 0 PEM 1 DER Q Quit 0 ssl certificate information SSL certificate information is di...

Page 670: ... start the restoration enter Y and press Enter To cancel the process enter N and press Enter or just press Enter SEC command You can set the network service Enter SEC at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP SEC Enter SEC Service setting Service setting menu F FTP setting T HTTP HTTPS setting S SSH setting E Telnet setting H Connection allowed network setting for all of above protocols A ...

Page 671: ...a particular network address and subnet mask To save the permissible setting for the network enter Y and press Enter To cancel the setting enter N and press Enter or just press Enter If you enter T in the SEC command menu and then press Enter you can set the permissible network settings for connecting an HTTP HTTPS server You can choose to allow or deny all access or allow access only from an addr...

Page 672: ...ter To cancel the setting enter N and press Enter or just press Enter F T S E H A Q T Enter HTTP HTTP 0 Disable 1 HTTP 2 HTTPS Unchange 1 Enter Set port number to 80 Y N Y Enter Allow all Y N Y Enter HTTP setting HTTP HTTP Port number 80 Allow Allow Network address ALL Subnetmask Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter F T S E H A Q S Enter Allow all Y N N Enter Deny ...

Page 673: ...rs FTP HTTP SSH and Telnet You can choose to allow or deny all access or allow access only from an address range defined by a particular network address and subnet mask When you enter a setting a confirmation message appears To save the permissible setting for all protocols FTP HTTP SSH and Telnet enter Y and press Enter To cancel the setting enter N and press Enter or just press Enter F T S E H A...

Page 674: ...pt and press Enter F T S E H A Q A Enter FTP setting Allow Allow Network address 192 0 0 0 Subnetmask 255 0 0 0 HTTP HTTPS setting HTTP HTTP Port number 80 Allow Allow Network address ALL Subnetmask SSH setting Allow Allow Network address ALL Subnetmask Telnet setting Allow Allow Network address ALL Subnetmask Hit enter key Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 SVP SO Enter SO Security setting Security setting me...

Page 675: ...Q Quit Quits the SO command If you enter A in the SO command menu and press Enter the current account setting information is displayed A R Q A Enter Account setting ID Name Status Role 0 administrator Enable Administrator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Account menu A Add account D Delete account E Edit account detail information Q Quit A D E Q ...

Page 676: ... displayed without the account you intend to delete and a message appears prompting you to confirm deletion of the account To delete the account enter Y and then press Enter To cancel the operation enter N and then press Enter or simply press Enter If you enter E in the account menu and press Enter you are prompted to enter an account number When you enter an account number detailed information ab...

Page 677: ... is logged in to the account If you enter R in the account detail setting menu and press Enter you can change the role assigned to the account You cannot change the role if a user is logged in to the account If you enter P in the account detail setting menu and press Enter you can change the role assigned to the account When changing the password of the currently logged in account you must enter t...

Page 678: ... supported Check the fingerprint of the public key and confirm that the fingerprint is identical to the fingerprint displayed before installation Backup the public key beforehand by yourself If you enter U in the account public key menu and press Enter you can uninstall the account public key A confirmation message appears To start uninstalling the public key enter Y and press Enter To cancel the ...

Page 679: ... time the user logs in to the account If you enter M in the account detail setting menu and press Enter you can change the account prompt settings You can select from two formats chassis ID management module slot number SVP chassis ID and slot number or SVP fixed If you enter R and press Enter at the prompt for the SO command menu you can display the current role settings A R Q R Enter Role settin...

Page 680: ...ions and all switch modules If you choose to grant permission to all partitions you do not need to set permissions for individual partitions Likewise you do not need to set permissions for individual switch modules if you grant permission to all switch modules Order Item 1 Role name 2 Partition 0 permission 3 Partition 1 permission 4 Partition 2 permission 5 Partition 3 permission 6 Partition 4 pe...

Page 681: ... A Enter Enter role name Quit admin Enter Select all partition Y N Y Enter Select all switch module Y N Y Enter Add network authority Y N Y Enter Add server chassis authority Y N Y Enter Add account authority Y N Y Enter Role setting P SW No Name Status 01234567 012345 Net Chassis Account 0 Administrator Enable XXXXXXXX XXXXXX X X X 1 admin Enable XXXXXXXX XXXXXX X X X 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Page 682: ...rompting you to confirm the deletion To delete the role enter Y and then press Enter To cancel the operation enter N and then press Enter or just press Enter A D E Q D Enter 0 23 Q Quit 1 Enter Role setting P SW No Name Status 01234567 012345 Net Chassis Account 0 Administrator Enable XXXXXXXX XXXXXX X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing sett...

Page 683: ...ion 2 permission 5 Partition 3 permission 6 Partition 4 permission 7 Partition 5 permission 8 Partition 6 permission 9 Partition 7 permission 10 Switch module 0 permission 11 Switch module 1 permission 12 Switch module 2 permission 13 Switch module 3 permission 14 Switch module 4 permission 15 Switch module 5 permission 16 Network permission 17 Server chassis permission 18 Account permission If yo...

Page 684: ...llow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Switch module1 Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Switch module2 Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Switch module3 Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Switch module4 Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Switch module5 Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Network authority Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Server chassis authority Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange E...

Page 685: ...figuration Security strength of management module Security strength High Security strength of partition P Security strength BMC status 0 High High 1 High High 2 High High 3 High High 4 Default Default 5 Default Default 6 Default Default 7 Default Default TLS version of management module TLS 1 2 Enable TLS 1 1 Enable TLS 1 0 Enable SSL 3 0 Enable Security strength setting menu C Edit security stren...

Page 686: ...on initialization has aborted Disabled partition TLS version of management module shows the following items Menu Description TLS 1 2 Enables or disables TLS version 1 2 Enable Disable TLS 1 1 Enables or disables TLS version 1 1 Enable Disable TLS 1 0 Enables or disables TLS version 1 0 Enable Disable SSL 3 0 Enables or disables SSL version 3 0 Enable Disable Select a menu you require from the foll...

Page 687: ...artition is powered on or has not been initialized you cannot set the security strength For a server blade with N M cold standby enabled make sure to execute Smart configure after the management module has restarted Security strength of management module Security strength High Security strength of partition P Security strength 0 High 1 High 2 High 3 High 4 Default 5 Default 6 Default 7 Default Sec...

Page 688: ... module has restarted If you enter P at the SC command menu and press Enter the current settings for security strength of all partitions are displayed At the prompt enter a partition number and security strength level The new setting values are displayed A warning message showing BMC restart displays if the partition setting is changed A confirmation message displays prompting you to confirm the n...

Page 689: ...ss Enter You cannot disable all TLS SSL versions When security strength of the management module is high you neither enable nor disable TLS SSL versions Only TLS 1 2 can be used TLS 1 2 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 0 TLS 1 1 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange TLS 1 0 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange SSL 3 0 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange TLS version of management module TLS 1 2 Disable...

Page 690: ...N switch module 8G FCSW 8 Gbps FC switch module 1G LANPT 1 Gb LAN pass through module 10G LANPT 10 Gb LAN pass through module 10G DCBSW Brocade10 Gb DCB switch module Power Power status On the power is on Off the power is off Condition Status NORMAL Working normally Booting Just booting or during CONFIG ERROR configured incorrectly WARNING Exceeds the warning threshold value of the sensor FAIL Exc...

Page 691: ...wer control menu and press Enter you are prompted to select a switch module P L Q P Enter Switch module status SW Type Power Condition LID lamp 0 1G LANSW On Normal Off 1 1G LANSW On Normal Off 2 1 10G LANSW On Normal Off 3 1 10G LANSW On Normal Off 4 1 10G LANSW On Normal Off 5 1 10G LANSW On Normal Off Power control menu P Power on F Power off Q Quit P F Q P F Q P Enter Select switch module 0 5 ...

Page 692: ... to the previous menu P F Q F Enter Select switch module 0 5 A All A Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter Switch module0 Power off was completed Switch module1 Power off was completed Switch module2 Power off was completed Switch module3 Power off was completed Switch module4 Power off was completed Switch module5 Power off was completed Hit enter key Enter P L Q L Enter Switch module status SW Type Power Co...

Page 693: ...s completed Switch module2 Turn on LID lamp was completed Switch module3 Turn on LID lamp was completed Switch module4 Turn on LID lamp was completed Switch module5 Turn on LID lamp was completed Hit enter key Enter T F Q F Enter Select switch module 0 5 A All A Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter Switch module0 Turn off LID lamp was completed Switch module1 Turn off LID lamp was completed Switch module2 Tu...

Page 694: ... Configuration of network User account settings H Reset LP setting Reset the LPAR manager configuration information to the factory settings Q Quit Quits the DC command If you enter R at the DC command menu and press Enter a warning message appears indicating that if you proceed the current session will be terminated and the management module will restart with the factory defaults To restore the ma...

Page 695: ...artition number and press Enter a confirmation message appears To reset the LPAR manager configuration enter Y at the confirmation prompt and press Enter To cancel the operation enter N at the confirmation prompt and press Enter or simply press Enter Do not perform H Reset LP setting of this command to a partition on which LPAR migration has been performed See Chapter 12 Logical partitioning manag...

Page 696: ... the LPAR manager configuration information H Fibre channel HBA Back up the Fibre channel card settings HBA host bus adapter D Delete backup data of server blade The operations in this sub menu are unavailable Q Quit Quits the UBR command If you enter M at the UBR command menu and press Enter the menu for backing up and restoring the management module configuration information is displayed 5713RF0...

Page 697: ...or SFTP The account name and password for connection via FTP or SFTP are the same as when you log in to the system console If you enter R at the UBR command menu and press Enter the list of files containing the management module configuration is stored in the user directory You are prompted to select a file to be restored When you enter the number to specify a file a warning message indicating tha...

Page 698: ...evious menu If you enter R at the BMC configuration menu and press Enter you are prompted to select a partition When you enter the partition number and press Enter the history list for storing BMC configuration information appears and you are prompted to select a datum to be restored When you enter the number to specify the history a confirmation message appears To restore the configuration enter ...

Page 699: ...I configuration information appears and you are prompted to select a datum to be restored When you enter the number to specify the history a confirmation message appears To restore the configuration enter Y at the confirmation prompt and press Enter To cancel the operation enter N at the confirmation prompt and press Enter or simply press Enter M B E F V H D Q E Enter EFI menu R Restore Q Quit R Q...

Page 700: ...tory to save the FRU information of the server blade appears You are prompted to select a datum to be restored When you enter a number to specify the history a confirmation message appears To restore the configuration enter Y at the confirmation prompt and press Enter To cancel the operation enter N at the confirmation prompt and press Enter or simply press Enter M B E F V H D Q F Enter FRU of ser...

Page 701: ...ing the configuration information enter Y at the confirmation prompt and press Enter To cancel the operation enter N at the confirmation prompt and press Enter or simply press Enter When the file finishes storing the configuration information the file name is displayed and the prompt is ready Press Enter and the screen returns to the management module configuration menu That file is stored in the ...

Page 702: ...r the list of LPAR manager configuration data files is displayed You are prompted to select a file to restore When you enter the number to specify the file you are prompted to select a partition When you enter the partition number and press Enter a confirmation message appears To restore the configuration in the LPAR manager configuration data management area enter Y at the confirmation prompt and...

Page 703: ... 16Gb Fibre Channel Card Backs up settings for Hitachi 16 Gb Fibre channel card Q Quit Returns to the previous menu Entering B allows you to back up settings for Hitachi 4 Gb or 8 Gb fibre channel card If you enter B at the Fibre channel card setting menu and press Enter you are prompted to select a partition When you enter the partition number and press Enter you are prompted to select a server b...

Page 704: ...rompted to select one of the adapters I O adapter or the one on the I O slot expansion unit If you select the I O adapter you are prompted to enter the I O adapter slot number If you select the I O adapter on the I O slot expansion unit you are prompted to enter the slot number of the connection board to the I O slot expansion unit and the I O adapter slot number on the I O slot expansion unit pro...

Page 705: ...count name and password for connection via FTP or SFTP are the same as when you log in the system console B F Q F Select partition 0 7 Q Quit 0 Select server blade 0 Q Quit 0 Select card 1 I O adapter 2 I O adapter for expansion unit Q Quit 1 Select I O adapter 0 1 Q Quit 0 Backup file list No Time 0 2009 03 09 21 10 46 1 2009 03 10 08 45 46 2 2009 03 10 10 41 15 Select backup data 0 2 Q Quit 0 En...

Page 706: ...ch module Partition 1 BSM Yes 2 CER Yes 3 CHCO Yes 1 Yes 1 4 CI Yes 5 DC Yes 6 DEL Yes 7 DF Yes Yes 1 8 DH Yes 2 9 DL Yes 10 ELI Yes 11 EX None required 12 FAN None required 13 FV Yes 14 FW Yes 15 HA Yes 16 HCSM Yes 17 HE None required 3 18 ILC Yes 19 LC Yes 20 LDAP Yes 21 LFT Yes 22 LM Yes 23 LS Yes 24 MAC Yes 25 MI Yes 26 MLC Yes 27 MMC Yes 28 PC Yes 1 29 PR configure partitions Yes 1 30 PR crea...

Page 707: ...s Yes 34 PSV Yes 35 SBC Yes 36 SC Yes 37 SCO set inactivity timer None required 38 SCO other than setting inactivity timer Yes 39 SD Yes 40 SDN Yes 41 SEC Yes 42 SNM Yes 43 SO edit the logged in account None required 44 SO other than edit ting logged in account Yes 45 ST Yes 46 SWC Yes 1 47 UBR Yes 48 UTL Yes 1 49 WHO display a session None required 50 WHO forcibly terminate a session Yes 51 WWN Y...

Page 708: ...partitions are designated as allowed None required Executable without any permission None required 3 Executable without any permission Only the commands executable by the user are displayed None required 4 Executable without any permission Available operations are limited to changing the password changing the console type changing the inactivity timer setting and changing the prompt type ...

Page 709: ...dows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows Vista Business 2 Browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or later versions Tab functions of the browser however are not available 3 Display resolution 800 x 600 or later with 65536 or more colors 1280 x 1024 or later is recommended Client settings Ensure that you perform the following ...

Page 710: ...is Management Displays information about WWNs FRUs and sensors in the server chassis 687 9 Session Management Manages connections to the management module 707 10 Physical Partition Settings Changes the configuration and attributes of physical partitions 708 11 User Account Settings Sets up user accounts and roles 713 12 Configuration of Network Performs network related settings 715 13 Service Sett...

Page 711: ...page 24 HA Monitor Settings Configures the HA monitor 750 25 LDAP Monitor Settings Sets the LDAP monitor 751 26 Firmware Management Displays the firmware versions of the management module and server blade 754 27 Log Management Displays a variety of log information 757 ...

Page 712: ... as follows Item Description 1 Chassis ID The chassis ID of the server chassis to which you are logged in 2 User account The account name of the logged in user 3 Log out Takes you to the logout screen Click this button to exit system web console 4 Menu Click a menu item to navigate to the associated screen 5 Refresh Updates the information displayed in the browser window This button does not appea...

Page 713: ...e describes how to interpret the information on the following pages Item Description Edit The name of the GUI item A description of the GUI item Indicates whether the item can be edited in the editing page Yes in this column indicates that the item can be edited Confirmation screen Menu List screen List screen Confirmation screen Edit screen Confirmation screen Detailed screen Select a target Deta...

Page 714: ...663 6 Management Module Settings Status display Displays the current status of the server chassis in list form Status display view ...

Page 715: ...f the management view for each module Role dependent variation in available operations To display detailed information about a partition the user must have partition permission for that partition To display detailed information about the respective modules the user must have chassis permission ...

Page 716: ...ysical partition Set as ON or OFF 3 Status The operating status of the physical partition Set as Normal Init Fail Initializing or Error 4 N M cold standby Indicates N M cold standby is Enabled or Disabled 5 Auto power on Setting whether or not the physical partition powers on automatically synchronized with the power on to the server chassis Synchronized or as not synchronized 6 Logical Partitioni...

Page 717: ...666 6 Management Module Settings Details of a physical partition ...

Page 718: ...ized with the power operation for the chassis regardless of this setting value 5 AC recovery Indicates what behavior the physical partition power supply adopts when power is restored to the server chassis Set as Remain OFF Turn ON or Maintain status before power failure 6 Recovery wait Indicates how long the system waits before performing the action specified above Set as 0 to 60 7 Powered on cont...

Page 719: ...lues reported by the sensors in the server blade installed in the physical partition 20 ON Turns on power to the physical partition 21 Shutdown Shuts down the physical partition 22 Forced power off Forcibly powers off the physical partition 23 Smart Configure Perform Smart Configure on the physical partition 24 Hard reset Performs a hard reset of the physical partition 25 Restart Restarts the phys...

Page 720: ...endent variation in available operations To display detailed information about a partition the user must have partition permission for that partition To perform actions on a partition the user must have partition permission for that partition ...

Page 721: ...Server blade The server blade number If the number appears as a hyperlink clicking the link takes you to the Server Blade Details view 2 Power The power status of the server blade Set as ON or OFF 3 Status The operating status of the server blade Set as Normal Init Fail Initializing or Error 4 LID LED The status of the Location ID LED for the server blade Set as Lit or Unlit 5 Type The type of ser...

Page 722: ...671 6 Management Module Settings Server blade details view ...

Page 723: ...672 6 Management Module Settings ...

Page 724: ...ncluding both currently active and alternative 11 LP licenses The status of the LPAR manager license in the server blade Set as Install or Not Install for LPAR manager 4 0 Essential Enterprise or Not Install for LPAR manager 4 1 or later versions 12 Mezzanine card The WWNs allocated to the mezzanine cards installed in the server blade The World Wide Port Name and World Wide Node Name are displayed...

Page 725: ...ement In the I O adapter management view you can display the status of I O adapters I O adapter list view Item Description 1 Module The module number If the number appears as a hyperlink clicking the link takes you to the I O Board Module Details view ...

Page 726: ...ies Board and Product of the module 2 Default Physical WWN The WWNs allocated to the module The World Wide Port Name and World Wide Node Name are displayed for each of the module s ports Role dependent variation in available operations To display detailed information about a module the user must have chassis permission ...

Page 727: ... the link takes you to the Switch module details view 2 Power The power status of the module Set as ON or OFF 3 Status The operating status of the module Set as STARTING NORMAL CONFIG ERROR or ERROR 4 LID lamp The status of the Location ID LED for the module Set as Lit or Unlit 5 Type The type of the module Set such as 1Gb LANSW 1_10 LANSW or 8G FCSW 6 ON button Powers on the modules whose check b...

Page 728: ...ails view Item Description 1 Power The power status of the module Set as ON or OFF 2 Status The operating status of the module Set as STARTING NORMAL CONFIG ERROR or ERROR 3 LID lamp The status of the Location ID LED for the module Set as Lit or Unlit ...

Page 729: ...low Go to System web console Settings The configuration of network Management LAN network general setting The switch module to configure the settings to configure the settings Item Connected to IP address 1 Gb LAN switch module Internal LAN network Not required 1 10 Gb LAN switch module Internal LAN network Not required Internal Fibre channel switch Management LAN network or an internal port of th...

Page 730: ... 6 Management Module Settings Management module management In the Management module management view you can display the status of management modules and perform associated tasks Management module list view ...

Page 731: ...ent module is serving as an active or standby system Set as Active or Standby 6 Shutdown Shuts down the modules whose check boxes are selected 7 Restart Restarts the modules whose check boxes are selected 8 Switch Switches the roles of the active management module and the standby management module Do not perform Shutdown and Restart while the server blade is operating Error events which have occur...

Page 732: ...681 6 Management Module Settings Management module details view ...

Page 733: ...onary version and equipment parameter version 6 MAC address The MAC addresses associated with the module The MAC addresses of Port 0 and Port 1 are displayed 7 FRU FRU information for the module under categories Board Product and Multirecord 8 Sensor The values reported by the sensors in the module 9 Shutdown Shuts down the module 10 Restart Restarts the module 11 Turning on Turns on the Location ...

Page 734: ...iption 1 Module The module number If the number appears as a hyperlink clicking the link takes you to the Fan module details view 2 Power The power status of the module Set as ON Turning ON OFF or Turning OFF 3 Status The operating status of the module Set as Normal or Error 4 Fan 0 2 Rotational speed rpm The speed in revolutions per minute RPM of the fans within the fan module ...

Page 735: ... module Set as ON Turning ON OFF or Turning OFF 2 Status The operating status of the module Set as Normal or Error 3 Sensor The values reported by the sensors in the module Role dependent variation in available operations To display detailed information about a module the user must have chassis permission ...

Page 736: ...tem Description 1 Module The module number If the number appears as a hyperlink clicking the link takes you to the Power supply module details view 2 Power The power supply status of the module Set as ON Turning ON OFF or Turning OFF 3 Status The operating status of the module Set as Normal or Error 4 AC input The status of the AC power supply to the module Set as AC input or No AC input ...

Page 737: ...3 AC input The status of the AC power supply to the module Set as AC input or No AC input 4 FRU FRU information for the module under the category Product 5 Sensors The values reported by the sensors in the module 6 ON OFF frequency The number of times the power supply module has been switched off Role dependent variation in available operations To display detailed information about a module the us...

Page 738: ...687 6 Management Module Settings Server chassis management In the Server chassis management view you can display the status of the server chassis and perform associated tasks Server chassis list view ...

Page 739: ...tween physical partitions and I O board modules 8 Display Takes you to a page where you can view or set WWNs such as WWN currently used Default Physical WWN Optional Physical WWN or also which partition information to display from the pull down menu 9 Display Takes you to a page displaying the FRU information for all modules 10 Display Takes you to a page displaying the sensors for all modules 11 ...

Page 740: ...689 6 Management Module Settings Partition configuration list view In this view displays the associated I O board module for each partition ...

Page 741: ...ame WWN associated with the port An asterisk is appended if an Optional Physical WWN has been changed from its initial value Information about the I O slot expansion unit connected to the I O adapter is described in the table below per I O adapter connected to the I O slot expansion unit Item Description Edit 1 Part Model Number Part Model number of the I O slot expansion unit 2 Serial Number Seri...

Page 742: ...ts initial value Default Physical WWN List view Items of the partition information are described in the table below Item Description Edit 1 Serverblade The server blade number 2 Card type The type of card Set as Mezzanine card or I O board module 3 Port number The port number 4 World Wide Port Name The World Wide Name WWN of the device 5 World Wide Node Name The World Wide Name WWN of the device I...

Page 743: ...rt2 and port3 as WWN For 10 Gb CNA adapter or 10 Gb CNA board the following values are shown WWN for port 0 is the WWN value for port 0 of the controller 0 WWN for port 1 is the WWN value for port 1 of the controller 0 WWN for port 2 is the WWN value for port 0 of the controller 1 WWN for port 3 is the WWN value for port 1 of the controller 1 WWN is shown only when CNA Personality setting is FCoE ...

Page 744: ...ITACHI Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter User s Guide BIOS EFI edition to check it on the BIOS Utility screen For Hitachi fibre channel mezzanine card See HITACHI Gigabit Fibre Channel Adapter User s Guide BIOS EFI Edition to check it on the SELECT HBA screen Applicable EFI firmware version with each server blade model is as follows EFI firmware version 09 33 10 33 or earlier with standard server blad...

Page 745: ...694 6 Management Module Settings Optional Physical WWN list view ...

Page 746: ...cal WWN has been changed from its initial value Items of information on the I O slot expansion unit connected to the I O adapter are described in the table below per I O adapter connected to the I O slot expansion unit Item Description Edit 1 Part Model Number Part Model number of the I O slot expansion unit 2 Serial Number Serial number of the I O slot expansion unit Items of information on the I...

Page 747: ... I O adapter 0 or 8 for I O slot expansion units This results in calculating and setting all Optional Physicals WWN of I O adapter 0 1 4 5 or 8 9 12 13 for I O slot expansion units In the same way edit the World Wide Port name of port 0 of the I O adapter 2 or 10 for I O slot expansion units This results in calculating and setting all Optional Physical WWNs of I O adapters 2 3 6 7 or 10 11 14 15 f...

Page 748: ...697 6 Management Module Settings Optional Physical WWN initialization view ...

Page 749: ...adapter 0 or 8 for I O slot expansion units This results in calculating and setting all Optional Physical WWN of I O adapter 0 1 4 5 or 8 9 12 13 for I O slot expansion units In the same way edit the World Wide Port Name of port 0 of the I O slot expansion units Edit the World Wide Port name of port 0 of the I O adapter 2 or 10 for I O slot expansion units This results in calculating and setting a...

Page 750: ...699 6 Management Module Settings FRU list view Displays FRU information for all installed modules ...

Page 751: ...700 6 Management Module Settings ...

Page 752: ...701 6 Management Module Settings Sensor list view Displays sensor information for all installed modules ...

Page 753: ...he maximum amount of power in watts able to be supplied by all installed power supply modules excluding faulty modules 3 Current power supply The amount of power being supplied by all active power supply modules in watts 4 Power consumption The total rated power output of all installed power supply modules in watts 5 Current power The power consumption of all active modules in watts 6 Chassis powe...

Page 754: ...703 6 Management Module Settings Power status details view ...

Page 755: ... in watts 5 Present supplied power The current power consumption of the power supply module in watts 6 Present power consumption AC The current AC power consumption of the power supply module in watts The consumption status Item Description Edit 1 Nameplate Power The maximum rated power consumption of all installed modules in watts 2 Current power The power consumption of all active modules in wat...

Page 756: ...ent module Item Description Edit 1 Module The module number of the module 2 Installation Status The installation status of the management module 3 Power The power status of the module Set as ON or OFF 4 Nameplate Power The power rating of the module in watts The switch module Item Description Edit 1 Module The module number of the module 2 Installation Status The installation status of the switch ...

Page 757: ...ave chassis permission To display the correspondence between physical partitions and I O board modules the user must have permission for all physical partitions To display a full list of WWNs the user must have chassis permission To display the FRU information for all modules the user must have chassis permission and permission for all switch modules To display the sensor readings for all modules ...

Page 758: ...er account 3 Login time The time when the user logged in 4 Remote IP address The IP address from which the user connected to the management module No IP address is displayed for serial connections 5 Connection type The protocol used to connect to the management module Displayed as Serial Telnet SSH or HTTP 6 Forced close Forcibly terminates the sessions of users whose check boxes are selected Role...

Page 759: ...8 6 Management Module Settings Physical partition settings In the Physical partition setup view you can change the configuration and attributes of physical partitions Physical partition settings list view ...

Page 760: ... specified above Set as 0 to 60 Yes Smart Configure setting items are described in the table below Item Description Edit 1 Partition The physical partition number 2 N M cold standby Sets Enable or Disable Yes 3 Current Configuration method The current Configuration method depends on the Smart Configure method settings and device configuration 4 Configuration method Sets a Smart Configure method PX...

Page 761: ...ration for physical partition 0 to 3 and 4 to 7 using a radio button If any physical partition cannot be powered on in any configuration because no server blade or SMP connection board is installed a message appears indicating that the partition cannot be powered on You cannot change the configuration with partitions that have been power on ...

Page 762: ...711 6 Management Module Settings Step 2 In the physical partition configuration you select enable or disable physical partitions ...

Page 763: ...ttings Step 3 Check the physical partition configuration Click Apply to apply the new configuration Role dependent variation in available operations To edit a partition the user must have partition permission for that partition ...

Page 764: ...713 6 Management Module Settings User account settings In the User account setup view you can set up user accounts and roles User account settings list view ...

Page 765: ...nsole or other Prompt type SVP or the chassis ID Inactivity timer the period of inactivity after which a user is automatically logged out from 1 to 1440 minutes Login password In the editing view you can also delete existing user accounts Role Item Description Edit 1 ID The ID number of the role 2 Role name The name of the role Role names can contain a maximum of 15 characters The conventions for ...

Page 766: ...he status of the network and perform related settings A VLAN ID can be deleted only under a condition that no module or physical partition belongs to the VLAN ID Adding or deleting a VLAN ID and changing any module or physical partition cannot be executed at the same time When changing a VLAN ID that has been set delete all modules and physical partitions from the VLAN ID first and then delete the...

Page 767: ...716 6 Management Module Settings ...

Page 768: ...717 6 Management Module Settings ...

Page 769: ...718 6 Management Module Settings ...

Page 770: ...gateway Default gateway of the management interface in the switch module The settings held by the management module Item Description Edit 1 Module The module number 2 Connection type Destination to which the switch module connected to Can connect to the management LAN network internal LAN network or a port in the switch module Yes 3 IP address IP address of the management interface in the switch m...

Page 771: ...ou can select Management LAN port 0 or Management LAN port 1 Yes 3 MM P0 to P7 SW0 to SW5 Indicates which user defined VLAN is associated with each module and physical partition Yes Internal LAN network Item Description Edit 1 Network address The network address of the internal LAN network Changing internal LAN network addresses makes the management module restart Do not set the internal network a...

Page 772: ...ler 1 The MAC address of controller 1 4 Server blade The server blade number 5 On board 0 The MAC address of the on board NIC 0 6 On board 1 The MAC address of the on board NIC 1 7 I O controller The MAC address of the I O controller 8 BMC The MAC address of the BMC ...

Page 773: ...1 Port The LAN port of the management module 2 Module Indicates whether the active or standby module is connecting to the network Set as Active or Standby 3 Redundancy Indicates whether LAN redundancy is enabled Set as Enabled or Disabled Yes 4 Time until judging that is not possible to connect sec The length of time that must elapse before a LAN link is considered to be down A value from 1 to 360...

Page 774: ...dress When FTP connections are permitted the network address from which to allow connections Yes 3 Subnet mask The subnet mask of the network address Yes HTTP Item Description Edit 1 Status Indicates whether connections that use the HTTP protocol are permitted Set as HTTP HTTPS or Disabled Yes 2 Port number The port number used for the HTTP protocol Set as 1 to 65535 Yes 3 Connectable IP address W...

Page 775: ...ndicates whether connections that use the Telnet protocol are permitted Set as Enabled or Disabled Yes 2 Connectable IP address When Telnet connections are permitted the network address from which to allow connections Yes 3 Subnet mask The subnet mask of the network address Yes Certification Item Description Edit 1 The operation for certification Takes you to the Certificate Operations page SSH se...

Page 776: ...te 2 Serial number Serial number of the server certificate 3 Key algorithm length Key algorithm and length of the server certificate 4 Validity Not Before Starting date of validity for the server certificate 5 Validity Not After Ending date of the validity for the server certificate 6 Issuer Common Common name that has issued the server ...

Page 777: ...for Initials Initial the server certificate is issued for 8 SHA1 Fingerprint Fingerprint the server certificate is issued for Creating a self signed certificate Item Description Edit 1 Creation Goes to the screen to create a self signed certificate For how to create it see Digital Certificate for the System Web console in Chapter 13 Creating a CSR Item Description Edit 1 Creation Goes to the scree...

Page 778: ...em Description Edit 1 Backup Backs up the keys and server certificates currently used on the system web console Restoring keys and certificates Item Description Edit 1 Restoration Restores the backed up keys and certificates in the system web console Specify a file name ...

Page 779: ...tton to create a new key pair Backing up the SSH server s host key Item Description Edit 1 backup Generates a host key pair for the SSH server Click this button to create a new key pair Restoring the SSH server s host key Item Description Edit 1 restoration Restores the host key pair of the SSH server To restore the host key pair specify the file name and then click this button Do not specify a fi...

Page 780: ...ttings to be linked to the AC input recovery Item Description Edit 1 Power supply module The number of a power supply 2 AC recovery Power synchronization setting Enable or Disable When AC power turns off from all power supply modules which is set to Enable in this setting and then AC power supply recovers to one of modules with Enable power supply synchronization between the chassis and partition ...

Page 781: ...730 6 Management Module Settings Power settings In the Power control setup view you can set up power control for various components Power control settings list view ...

Page 782: ...at which power capping is implemented Set as 0 to 65535 in watts If you specify a value lower than the minimum power cap the minimum power cap is used instead Yes 5 Minimum value of maximum power cap The minimum value specifiable as the power cap Set as 0 to 65535 in watts 6 Current power capping mode The current control mode status Set as Static or Dynamic 7 Control mode setting The control mode ...

Page 783: ...732 6 Management Module Settings Role dependent variation in available operations To display the Power control setup view and use the features therein the user must have chassis permission ...

Page 784: ...733 6 Management Module Settings Time setting In the Time settings view you can set how the system handles time Time settings list view ...

Page 785: ...r First prior The first occurrence of the specified day of the week after or before the date specified in Day If you specify this condition you must specify the Day of week setting Last If you specify this condition there is no need to specify the Day setting However the Day of week must be specified Yes 5 Day of the week Used when the time at which daylight saving is to start or finish is specifi...

Page 786: ...1 Restart Restarts the NTP service Role dependent variation in available operations To display the Time setup view and use the features therein the user must have chassis permission Language setting In the Language setting view you can set which language to use Language setting list view Language setting Item Description Edit 1 Language for user You can specify a language you use ...

Page 787: ...nsole Console settings list view Item Description Edit 1 Inactivity timer min The period of inactivity after which a user is automatically logged out from the system web console Set as 1 to 1440 in minutes The default is 30 Role dependent variation in available operations This information can be displayed and edited by all roles ...

Page 788: ...737 6 Management Module Settings Backing up and restoring the settings In the Console setup view you can perform settings related to the system web console Backing up and restoring the settings ...

Page 789: ...gs select the backup that you want to restore and then click Restore 5 Back up Backs up LPAR manager settings kept on the management module When you select a partition and click this button a Save As dialog box appears Specify a file name and click Save to download the file 6 Restoration Restores LPAR manager settings from backed up settings on the management module To restore the settings specify...

Page 790: ...the backup file while the server blade with N M cold standby enabled is not in operation make sure to perform Smart Configure afterwards Role dependent variation in available operations To back up and restore settings the user must have chassis permission When restoring the configuration before LPAR migration to the migrated partition with the restoring function of this command restore the configu...

Page 791: ...740 6 Management Module Settings SC BSM settings In the SC BSM Linkage setup view you can display and configure the settings for linkage with SC BSM SC BSM linkage setup view ...

Page 792: ...ds Set as 5 to 50 Yes 6 Alert retry duration min The length of time SC BSM continues to retry sending the alert notification in minutes Set as 4 to 20 Yes When configuring a management server check Deletion of the settings for unused management servers Sending an alert information Item Description Edit 1 Submit Sends an alert You can send one of two alert types N M cold standby immediate switchove...

Page 793: ...Enable or Disable Yes 2 Port number Port number used for HCSM Can be changed in the Service settings list view HTTP Status Select HTTPS Port number 3 Access control Control of access to the management module from HCSM depending on the IP address Set as Enable or Disable Enable Only access from HCSM with the address shown in HCSM server settings is available Yes 4 Account Account used by HCSM to co...

Page 794: ...val from 1 to 4 minutes Yes 6 Alert retry duration min Shows the alert retry duration from 4 to 15 minutes in case that an alert cannot be notified to HCSM due to temporary failure in the network Yes 7 Add Adds HCSM to connect 8 Edit Edits settings for connection to the selected HCSM 9 Delete Deletes connection of the selected HCSM Sending an alert notification Item Description Edit 1 Partition Se...

Page 795: ...744 6 Management Module Settings SNMP settings In the SNMP setup view you can display and configure settings related to the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP SNMP setup view ...

Page 796: ...sed by the agent which is automatically created from the engine ID string 9 SNMP trap message Indicates SNMP trap failure messages One of the following values BSM Indicates alerts in the same way as BSM alerts HCSM Indicates alerts in the same way as HCSM alerts Yes The Manager settings Item Description Edit 1 SNMP version SNMP version used by the SNMP manager Set as v1 v2c or v3 Yes 2 IP address ...

Page 797: ...d Enabled only when the SNMP version is v3 and the access type is AuthPriv Password for the SNMP manager encryption 8 to 64 characters 1 byte printable alphanumeric characters and signs can be used When nothing is entered no change happens Yes MIB Information Item Description Edit 1 Revision The revision number of the MIB file Download MIB file Item Description Edit 1 Download Downloads the MIB fi...

Page 798: ... Management Module Settings E mail notification In the Remote E mail notification setup view you can display and configure settings related to remote email notification Remote E mail notification setup view ...

Page 799: ... notification function Specify an IP address or host name The host name can be specified as a fully qualified domain name FQDN containing no more than 64 characters Yes 6 Port number The port number of the SMTP server Set as 1 to 65535 Yes SMTP server authentication settings Item Description Edit 1 SMTP authentication Setting whether or not to execute the SMTP authentication Set as Enabled or Disa...

Page 800: ... Set as Yes or No Yes Manual e mail notification Item Description Edit 1 Send Manually sends a notification of the latest log data Select the destination e mail address and then click Notify E mail notification retransmission Item Description Edit 1 Go to the selection screen Use this button to resend a remote e mail notification from the e mail notification log Clicking this button takes you to a...

Page 801: ...750 6 Management Module Settings HA monitor settings HA monitor does not function with this equipment Thus this setting is not available ...

Page 802: ...751 6 Management Module Settings LDAP settings In the LDAP settings you can display and set connection to the directory service ...

Page 803: ...racters including a blank space in ASCII Yes 6 Bind password retype Retype the Bind password Yes Directory search settings Item Description Edit 1 Base DN 1 to 256 characters in ASCII A blank space is not available for the head and end character Yes 2 Login ID attribute 1 to 64 characters in ASCII A blank space is not available for the head and end character Available for the first character Engli...

Page 804: ...alphanumeric A Z a z 0 9 Yes 2 Login permit group attribute Group with permission to login DN0 to 4 1 to 256 characters in ASCII A blank space is not available for the head and end character Yes Reset LDAP settings Item Description Edit 1 Reset Resets all LDAP setting Click Reset to jump to the confirmation screen Then to confirm the reset click Confirm Role dependent variation in available operat...

Page 805: ...754 6 Management Module Settings Firmware management In the Firmware management view you can display and update a range of firmware data Firmware management view ...

Page 806: ...rmware version The firmware version of the management module Dictionary Item Description Edit 1 Dictionary version The dictionary version used in the translation of event codes Equipment Parameter Item Description Edit 1 Equipment Parameter Equipment parameter version 2 Partition Partition number 3 Update Displays whether or not the equipment parameter is applied to the partition When there is no ...

Page 807: ...ntly used and that of the alternate EFI LP Item Description Edit 1 Server blade The server blade number 2 Active LP version The LPAR manager version currently in use on the server blade 3 Alternate LP version An alternate LPAR manager program which is present on the server blade but not currently in use Switch module Item Description Edit 1 Module The number of a switch module 2 Version The firmwa...

Page 808: ...ownload a range of log information If the download is blocked by the security protection of the browser check the security settings of Internet Options and change them to the proper values including those below File download Enable Automatic prompting for file downloads Enable Log management view ...

Page 809: ...cess log information When you click Download a Save As dialog box appears Specify a file name to download the file 8 Display Takes you to the WWN Change log Display view 9 Error log Takes you to the selection page for system event logs To download the error log information select the required System Event Log and click Download 10 MARLOG display Takes you to the selection page for MAR logs When yo...

Page 810: ...759 6 Management Module Settings Item Description Edit executable with the partition privilege Server chassis selected Downloads all operation logs of management modules SVP log display view ...

Page 811: ...ert ID 3 Level The alert level 4 Message The event message System event log display view Item Description Edit 1 Time The time in local time when the event was recorded 2 Module The module that generated the event 3 Level The level of the System Event 4 System event log The event data 5 Message The translation of the event data ...

Page 812: ...761 6 Management Module Settings Power status trend view chassis For Internet Explorer 8 or higher enable the browser compatibility view If not the graph might not display correctly ...

Page 813: ...wer consumption DC output of the server chassis in watts 3 Minimum power consumption The minimum power consumption DC output of the server chassis in watts 4 Maximum power consumption The maximum power consumption DC output of the server chassis in watts 5 Upper bound value The upper limit imposed on the power consumption of the server chassis in watts ...

Page 814: ...763 6 Management Module Settings Power status trend view partition ...

Page 815: ...ower consumption The maximum power consumption of the physical partition in watts 5 Upper bound value The upper limit imposed on the power consumption of the physical partition in watts 6 Frequency of CPU The latest CPU operating frequency in MHz of the server blade associated with the physical partition measured over a three minute sampling period For Internet Explorer 8 or later enable the brows...

Page 816: ...gs are in degrees Celsius 3 Lowest temperature The minimum temperature reported by the temperature sensor on that day Temperature readings are in degrees Celsius 4 Highest temperature The maximum temperature reported by the temperature sensor on that day Temperature readings are in degrees Celsius 5 00 to 23 The average temperature reported hour by hour by the temperature sensor Temperature readin...

Page 817: ...766 6 Management Module Settings Access log display view ...

Page 818: ... management module No IP address is displayed for serial connections 4 Type The protocol used to connect to the management module Displayed as Serial Telnet SSH or HTTP 5 Login time The time when the user logged in 6 Logout time The time when the user logged out 7 System Indicates whether the management module to which the user logged in is serving as an active or standby system Set as Active or S...

Page 819: ...768 6 Management Module Settings WWN change log display view ...

Page 820: ...dapters For the I O adapter on the I O slot expansion unit displays which I O slot expansion unit the I O adapter is connected to 5 Port number The port number 6 WWN Type The WWN type WWPN or WWNN 7 Before the change The WWN of the device before the change was made 8 After the change The WWN of the device after the change was made Role dependent variation in available operations To display and use...

Page 821: ...display of MARLOG Item Description Edit 1 Display system information logs Display button Displays the selected MARLOG system information logs 2 Download error log Download button Downloads the error logs when the selected MARLOG is collected ...

Page 822: ...771 6 Management Module Settings Role dependent variation in available operations To display and use the Detail display of MARLOG the user must have chassis permission ...

Page 823: ...tes that the current session has timed out Close your browser window You can establish a new session by logging in again from a new browser window A session may time out in the following situations The user did not perform any action in the system web console for a specific period of time set in the Console Setup view The session was closed ...

Page 824: ...or Indicates that an operation performed through the system web console resulted in an error in the internal processing of the management module Close the browser window You can establish a new session by logging in again from a new browser window ...

Page 825: ...nd Reference or from the System Web Console 2 Format of SVP log messages viewed from the management module serial console Timestamp ID Level Message YYYY MM DD hh mm ss XXXX XXXXXXX YYYY MM DD hh mm ss XXXX XXXXXXX Timestamp The date and time when the log message was generated in the format YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minutes ss seconds ID The message ID Level The level of the message Inf...

Page 826: ...odule Action No particular action is required 14E5 Info Module information update alert is sent error degradation Meaning Upon receiving this alert BSM will update its internal management information by acquiring the latest information from the management module No particular action is required 14EA Info The BMC IP address of the server blade indicated by s was updated Meaning Upon receiving this ...

Page 827: ...non LP compatible server blades exist in the configuration Meaning LPAR manager cannot start because a server blade in the physical partition indicated by s1 lacks a valid LPAR manager license Action Check the LPAR manager license type and whether the license is present and valid If LPAR manager does not start and this message is output despite the server blade having a valid license contact your ...

Page 828: ...tion Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel 1631 WARNING On physical partition s1 LP disabled a processor core Meaning LPAR manager placed a faulty processor in the physical partition indicated by s1 in a degraded state Action Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel 1632 FAIL On physical partition s1 LP detected a physical BMC access error Meaning LPAR manager detected an access err...

Page 829: ...ition indicated by s1 Action Contact your sales or service representative 1643 FAIL On physical partition s1 a non recoverable H W failure occurred on the shared Fibre channel s2 Meaning A persistent hardware error occurred in the shared FC s2 in the physical partition indicated by s1 Action Contact your sales or service representative 1644 FAIL On physical partition s1 a PCI bus error occurred on...

Page 830: ... recovery from a problem and no particular action is required 1710 WARNING On module s1 the voltage s2 exceeded the warning level Meaning The voltage at the component indicated by s2 in the module indicated by s1 is above a warning threshold Action Although the module can continue operating a higher warning level 1711 may be reached at any time Contact your sales or service representative 1711 FAI...

Page 831: ...indicated by s2 in the module indicated by s1 Action The affected module may be shut down to protect its hardware Contact your sales or service representative Also make sure that the equipment s cooling is not impaired Impaired cooling may be caused by inadequate air conditioning a malfunctioning fan module or blocked vents in the equipment 1723 Info On module s1 the temperature of the CPU s2 has ...

Page 832: ... sales or service representative 173C WARNING On module s1 the fuse for I O on the motherboard has blown Meaning The fuse indicated by s2 on the board in the module indicated by s1 has blown Action Contact your sales or service representative 173F FAIL On module s1 an abnormal event occurred Meaning A fault occurred in the module indicated by s1 Action Contact your sales or service representative ...

Page 833: ...on Contact your sales or service representative 174B FAIL On partition s A link down occurred in FibreChannel card Meaning A linkdown occurred in a Fibre channel card on the partition indicated by s Action Contact your sales or service representative 174C WARNING On partition s A warning event occurred in FibreChannel card Meaning A failure occurred in a Fibre channel card on the partition indicat...

Page 834: ...ition indicated by s failed Action Contact your sales or service representative 175B FAIL On partition s A link down occurred in LAN card Meaning A linkdown occurred in a LAN card on the partition indicated by s failed Action Contact your sales or service representative 175C WARNING On partition s A warning event occurred in LAN card Meaning A failure occurred in a LAN card on the partition indica...

Page 835: ...layed N M cold standby failover occurred Meaning A failure which is subject to delayed failover by the N M cold standby function occurred on the partition indicated by s1 The affected partition will now fail over to its counterpart in the standby system Action Contact your sales or service representative 178C FAIL On partition s1 a failure occurred in s2 during Pre configure Meaning In the partiti...

Page 836: ...ice representative 179A WARNING A warning about the system configuration was detected Meaning There is a problem with the system configuration Action If you changed an aspect of the system configuration before the message was output check whether there is a problem with the change you made If there is nothing wrong with the configuration contact your sales or service representative 17A0 WARNING LA...

Page 837: ...omparison of the alert messages at the BSM console and the SVP log messages shows that some have not reached the BSM console take the recommended action for those messages 17B0 Info The time of the management module was updated Meaning The system time was changed on the management module Action No particular action is required 17B1 WARNING The management module failed to connect to the NTP server ...

Page 838: ...n on the partition indicated by s1 The nature of the maintenance task may cause this message to be output multiple times Action Do not connect to or operate the indicated partition until the update process has completed 17D1 Info On partition s1 updating the server blade BMC F W has completed Meaning The process of updating the server blade firmware has completed on the partition indicated by s1 T...

Page 839: ...iple times Action No particular action is required 17DE Info On the partition s1 maintenance mode was set Meaning A maintenance task has begun on the partition indicated by s1 The nature of the maintenance task may cause this message to be output multiple times Action A maintenance task is in progress on the indicated partition Do not connect to or operate the indicated partition until the task ha...

Page 840: ... stopped for hardware protection Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel Check if anything interferes with the cooling system When finding some factors interfering with cooling such as a malfunction in the cooling equipment or in fan modules in the system and dust covered intake remove the problem factor If the temperature does not return to the normal when you have removed it contact your ...

Page 841: ... Y Description The voltage of the location shown as Y has reached Error level X shows either Upper high voltage or Lower low voltage at error level Action The specified module may be stopped for hardware protection Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FD12 Information Voltage has been restored to a normal level Voltage X Location Y Description The voltage of the location shown as Y has r...

Page 842: ...On cooling fan a warning event occurred Location X Event Y Description A warning event has occurred in the cooling fan module X shows a position that the event occurred Y describes the event Action Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FD4A Error On cooling fan an error event occurred Location X Event Y Description An error event has occurred in the cooling fan module X shows a position t...

Page 843: ...the event occurred Y describes the event Action None This is a recovery message FD58 Warning On other module a warning event occurred Location X Event Y Description A warning event has occurred in other than server blades power supply modules cooling fan modules switch modules HDDs and management modules X shows a position that the event occurred Y describes the event Action Contact your reseller ...

Page 844: ... running Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FD71 Warning Memory is disabled Location X Description The CPU shown in Location X is disabled Action Performance slows down although you can keep operations running Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FD78 Warning Module lacks redundancy Location X Description Redundancy for the module shown in Location X is lost Action Redundancy...

Page 845: ...r supply is powered off Location X Description The power supply module shown in Location X is powered off Action None FDAB Error Power supply failed to power on Location X Description The power supply module shown in Location X failed to power on Action Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FDAC Warning Power supply failed to power off Location X Description The server blade shown in Loca...

Page 846: ...e the problem to stop power on If the problem is unknown contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FDD3 Error Power supply capacity is insufficient Description Power supply capacity is not enough Action Check if power supply modules are properly installed If they are contact your reseller or maintenance personnel FDD5 Error The total number of cooling fan modules is insufficient Description T...

Page 847: ...e may be displayed several times Action Since Location X is in maintenance mode do not operate the module in Location X FF19 Information On X maintenance mode is ended Description Maintenance work has been completed in Location X This message may be displayed several times Action None FF22 Error On X a failure occurred in Y during smart configure Description When a smart configure process is perfo...

Page 848: ... Module sent a connection request alert Description The management module sent a connection request to HCSM Action None FFC1 Information Management Module sent a connection establishment alert Description Connection between the management module and HCSM has established Action None FFC2 Information Management Module sent a keep alive alert Meaning This message is an alert for confirming connection...

Page 849: ...f X changed Description Information on the module shown as X has been updated Action None FFCD Information System information changed Description The system information has been updated Action None Messages in the table above are shown when you use the management module firmware version A0360 or later and SEL dictionary version 00290 or later With firmware earlier than A0360 or SEL dictionary earl...

Page 850: ...ails concerning the operation of the local area network LAN switch module see the manual in the CD ROM that came with the compact disc Read Only Memory CD ROM switch module Notes on use 800 Connection to setup terminal 802 Command input mode overview 805 Initial installation operation overview 807 Backup and restore of module information 810 Connection with the server blades 813 Uplink failover ov...

Page 851: ...le below Use a port setting value specific to each server blade to avoid communication errors Server blade model Setting for server blade connection port X55A1 X55A2 X57A1 X57A2 speed 1000 Models launched in or before March 2012 duplex full X55R3 X55S3 speed auto Models launched in or after April 2012 duplex auto You need not specify the value in a configuration file because it is set before confi...

Page 852: ... or safety is not guaranteed Laser light is used for the 10GBASE R transceiver Laser light is colorless and transparent meaning that it is invisible to the human eye Never look directly into the light transmitting receiving unit In the default configuration limit queue length of transmission in physical ports is set to 1976 and also flowcontrol send on is set to all ports When you start the switch...

Page 853: ...a a LAN or serial cable is initially required This section describes how to connect a terminal to the module in each method LAN interface connection As shown below connect your PC and the port line 1 of the switch module with a LAN cable Prepare the LAN cable for connection LAN cable Setup terminal ...

Page 854: ...h module4 192 168 0 64 switch module5 192 168 0 65 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Type of cable Cross Straight Based on Auto MDI MIDX Transmission rate Auto Negotiation Use the telnet client with CRLF disabled For information on how to disable the carriage return line feed CRLF see Help of each telnet client or other materials Server blade model Port setting for server connection X55A1 X55A2 X57A1 X57A...

Page 855: ...nication port RS 232C port Communication software Any of the following communications software products or its equivalent communication software Hyper terminal attached to Windows 2000 or Windows XP Tera Term Pro Version 2 3 Communication setting Communication protocol ZMODEM protocol Communication parameter 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Communication rate 1 19200bit s 9600bit s 4800bit s 2400bit s ...

Page 856: ...ote Operation command General user login user ID logout You can use some operation commands System administrator enable disable You can use all operation commands Configuration command System administrator configure config config exit You can use all configuration commands Operation command mode for the general user If you log in to the system this mode will be set In this mode you can run some op...

Page 857: ...ture The configuration command config in the table above config is called the global configuration mode and supports input modes classified depending on a command type For details about configuration command mode see the Configuration Guide Information on the user levels in which you can run the operation command is described in the Operation Command Reference in the Software Manual Information on...

Page 858: ...the system administrator s password Set the system administrator s password which is not initially set To prevent security deterioration set that password 3 Adding a user ID and deleting operator Create a new user ID When not using login user operator set during initial installation as the qualified login user you should delete it after a new login user created by the rmuser command to prevent sec...

Page 859: ...The password must consist of 6 to 128 characters If you enter more than 128 characters up to 128 characters will be registered as the password The system rejects a password consisting of lowercase alphabetic characters only You have to enter uppercase alphabetic numeric or special characters in addition to lowercase alphabetic characters enable Qualified as the system administrator password enable...

Page 860: ...809 7 Configuring the LAN Switch Module Deleting user ID operator Delete the user ID operator that set during initial installation ...

Page 861: ...config is different from running config You can back up and restore information separately by using the backup and copy cp commands You can copy the data into the ftp server or the optional memory card MC The following shows an example of using commands Backing up configuration 1 Backup using the ftp server Server address 192 168 0 128 user name staff 2 Backup using the MC Stored into the MC enabl...

Page 862: ... enable Press Enter backup ftp ftpserver MCBackup dat Press Enter backup ftp 192 168 0 128 MCBackup dat Press Enter Backup information to FTP 192 168 0 128 MCBackup dat Input username staff Press Enter Input password ftp transfer start ftp transfer succeeded enable Press Enter backup mc MCBackup dat Press Enter Backup information to MC MCBackup dat Copy file to MC Backup information success enable...

Page 863: ... from the MC enable Press Enter copy ftp staff 192 168 0 128 Backup conf startup config Press Enter Configuration file copy to startup config y n y Press Enter Authentication for 192 168 0 128 User staff Password Transferring Data transfer succeeded cd usr home operator Press Enter cp mc file backup conf backup conf Press Enter enable Press Enter copy usr home operator backup conf startup config P...

Page 864: ...AN10 5 line 15 1 LAN1 82576 0 line 6 LAN2 1 line 6 LAN3 82576 2 line 6 LAN4 3 line 6 LAN5 82576 2 line 16 LAN6 3 line 16 LAN7 82576 4 line 6 LAN8 5 line 6 LAN9 82576 4 line 16 LAN10 5 line 16 7 LAN1 82576 0 line 12 LAN2 1 line 12 LAN3 82576 2 line 12 LAN4 3 line 12 LAN5 82576 2 line 22 LAN6 3 line 22 LAN7 82576 4 line 12 LAN8 5 line 12 LAN9 82576 4 line 22 LAN10 5 line 22 To use LAN3 to LAN10 both...

Page 865: ...operation External network device Failure External network device Server Blade LAN switch module 0 LAN switch module 1 Switch communication paths using SFT or Linux bonding function Set SFT mode of Intel PROSet or Linux bonding function Primary Standby Setting outline 1 Teaming setting to NIC on the server blade 1 Set the SFT mode or Linux bonding function 2 Set the preferred primary SFT and Maste...

Page 866: ...o the channel group will activate those server blade connection ports Server blades detect that those server blade connection ports are activated and then redundancy configuraiton will be restored With NIC teaming set as described in the previous page the primary communication path will be recovered See Configuration Command in the Firmware Accessory CD for Compute Blade Built in LAN Switch Module...

Page 867: ...odule Details View in Chapter 6 The LAN switch module Web console can be used with a 1 G 10 G LAN switch module in which the firmware version 10 7 or later is installed With the firmware version earlier than 10 7 an error might occur You can check the firmware version on Display version screen When you have changed settings with the LAN switch module Web console the new settings directly affect th...

Page 868: ...tree setting screen 5 VLAN Sets VLAN settings VLAN list screen 6 Link aggregation Sets link aggregation settings Link aggregation list screen 7 Ethernet port Sets Ethernet port settings Ethernet ports screen 8 Uplink failover Sets uplink failover settings Uplink failover setting screen 9 IPv4 static route Sets IPv4 static route settings IPv4 static route setting screen 10 Log output Sets log outpu...

Page 869: ...ype the user ID Login password and Administrator password to connect to the LAN switch module When this window appears type the user ID Login password and Administrator password which are registered in the LAN switch module and click Connection execution The input information is stored in the management module and you can connect to the module automatically the next time ...

Page 870: ...ay from the left navigation menu bar To finish the LAN switch module Web console click Close on the upper right of the screen The following flow charts show the basic procedure for the LAN switch module Web console operation Edit screen Confirmation screen Menu Select a menu Confirm button Confirm button List View screen Adding Edit screen Menu Confirmation screen Select a menu Adding Edit button ...

Page 871: ...a LAN switch module firmware version Use the firmware version 10 7 or later If a version earlier than 10 7 is used an error might occur when you open a setting screen Display version screen Item Description Edit 1 Switch module firmware version Displays the firmware version of the LAN switch module ...

Page 872: ...hows the screen for time zone setting Time zone setting screen Item Description Edit 1 Timezone name Put a name to identify the time zone using up to 7 alphanumeric characters Available 2 Time offset from UTC Set a time offset from Greenwich Mean Time Available ...

Page 873: ... When changing settings of an NTP server select the NTP server and click Edit Item Description Edit 1 IP address Displays IP addresses of NTP servers to synchronize time with 2 NTP version number Displays NTP version numbers 3 Authentication key Displays authentication keys for access 4 Preference Displays preference 5 Adding Moves to the screen for adding an NTP server 6 Edit Moves to the screen ...

Page 874: ... for access which is a value from 1 to 4294967295 Available 4 Preference Select preference Enable or Disable With multiple NTP servers those with Enable this item are preferred Available 5 This NTP server setting is deleted If deleting this NTP server check this item Available You can type an IP address only when displaying this screen with the Adding button The This NTP server setting is deleted ...

Page 875: ... Spanning tree This section shows the screen for enabling or disabling the spanning tree function Spanning tree setting screen Item Description Edit 1 Spanning tree function Select from Enable and Disable the spanning tree function Available ...

Page 876: ...s With more than 100 VLANs registered move among pages using the navigation buttons on the upper right of the List of registered VLANs Item Description Edit 1 VLAN ID Displays VLAN IDs 2 VLAN status Displays VLAN status 3 VLAN name Displays VLAN names 4 VLAN interface Displays VLAN interfaces 5 IP address Displays IP addresses 6 Subnet mask Displays subnet masks 7 Adding Moves to the screen of add...

Page 877: ... subnet mask Available 7 This VLAN setting is deleted If deleting this VLAN setting check this item Available You can type an IP address only when displaying this screen with the Adding button The This VLAN setting is deleted checkbox is displayed only when you have clicked Edit on the VLAN list screen When setting an IP address type both the IP address and subnet mask and enable the VLAN intrerfa...

Page 878: ...down status Enable or Disable 3 Channel group LACP priority Displays channel group Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP priority 4 VLAN mode Displays VLAN modes 5 Access port VLAN ID Displays access port VLAN IDs 6 Trunk port VLAN ID Displays trunk port VLAN IDs 7 Trunk port native VLAN ID Displays trunk port native VLAN IDs 8 Spanning tree PortFast Displays spanning tree PortFast Enable or Disa...

Page 879: ...828 7 Configuring the LAN Switch Module Link aggregation adding editing screen ...

Page 880: ...m 1 to 4094 which can be a range such as 10 20 Up to 8 values separated by commas can be typed Available 7 Trunk port native VLAN ID Edit the trunk port native VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 Available 8 Spanning tree PortFast Select a value for the spanning tree PortFast Enable or Disable Available 9 Uplink failover watch object Select an uplink failover watch object Available 10 This link aggregation set...

Page 881: ...ch Module Ethernet port This section shows the screen for setting Ethernet ports Ethernet ports screen The following screen lists all Ethernet ports When changing settings of an Ethernet port select the Ethernet port and click Edit ...

Page 882: ... status Displays shutdown status Enable or Disable 4 Port speed Displays port speeds 5 Port Connected mode Displays port connected modes 6 Flow control reception Displays flow control receptions 7 Flow control transmission Displays flow control transmissions 8 Edit Moves to the screen of editing the selected Ethernet port Ethernet port editing screen ...

Page 883: ...half When you have changed the port speed to 10 or 100 and the duplex to half for the server connection port the mode becomes auto without applying the changed values The values however are changed on the Web console When not using auto negotiation with the server connection port make sure to select 1000 for the port speed and full for the port connection mode When selecting auto 1000 for the port...

Page 884: ...t If returning the VLAN setting to the default check this item Available 14 Spanning tree Port Fast Select a value for PortFast Enable or Disable Available 15 Uplink failover watch object Select a value for uplink failover watch object Available 16 Uplink failover blockage object Select an uplink failover watch object Available 17 Link aggregation channel group number Set a number for the link agg...

Page 885: ...834 7 Configuring the LAN Switch Module With a 10 G LAN switch module Port speed and Port connection mode for ports 25 and 26 cannot be changed ...

Page 886: ...k failover Uplink failover setting screen Item Description Edit 1 Blockage mode Select a value for blockage mode partial mode Enables the partial control function per port port control Enables the control function per port whole control Enables the function to block every server connection port Available ...

Page 887: ...section shows the screen for setting IPv4 static route IPv4 static route setting screen Item Description Edit 1 Default gateway Type an IP address to set Available 2 Clear IPv4 static route setting If deleting the IPv4 static route setting check this item Available ...

Page 888: ...n shows the screen for setting a log output destination Log output setting screen Item Description Edit 1 Log information output destination Type an IP address to set Available 2 Clear log output setting If deleting the log output setting check this item Available ...

Page 889: ...on Operation terminal connection setting screen Item Description Edit 1 Number of users in which remote login can be done to device at the same time Select the number of users who can remotely log in to the device at the same time Available Set the number of users who can remotely log in the device at the same time to a number from 3 to 16 ...

Page 890: ...reen for saving the settings configured on each screen into the LAN switch module If you restart the LAN switch module without performing SAVE the new settings will be lost Make sure to write the settings on this screen after completing the LAN switch settings SAVE screen ...

Page 891: ...ion shows the screen for setting the LAN switch module using the configuration file Select a configuration file and click Setting You can use the configuration file backed up for the LAN switch module See Backup and restore of module information Configuration setting screen ...

Page 892: ...itial installation adding and deleting user IDs and module operations For details about the operation of the switch module see the manual in the CD ROM that came with the switch module Notes on use 842 Connection to setup terminal 843 Initial installation operation overview 844 Backup and restore of module information 846 Connection with the server blades 847 ...

Page 893: ... by powering off the switch module Make sure to perform the copy running config startup config command to save the setting information The 10GBASE R transceiver is available as an option You can purchase and use the optional item If you use any 10GBASE R transceiver other than the option correct operation or safety is not guaranteed ...

Page 894: ...on IP addresses shown in the table below are assigned to switch module slots for 10 Gb Data Center Bridging DCB switch modules Network connection specifications shipment setting Item Setting IP address switch module2 192 168 253 37 switch module3 192 168 253 38 switch module4 192 168 253 39 switch module5 192 168 253 40 Subnet mask 255 255 255 240 For serial cable connection select a 10 Gb DCB swi...

Page 895: ... the compact disc Read Only Memory CD ROM that came with the module 1 Login Log in to the switch module Use the user ID admin for initial installation The following table shows factory default settings for the user ID and password Item Factory default setting User ID admin Password password 2 Setting the switch module administrator s password Set the switch module administrator s password which is...

Page 896: ... Password prompt appears Type password to log in to the switch Note password is factory configured Setting the administrator s password Set the switch module administrator s password Note password is factory configured VDX6746 console login admin Password switch switch username admin password specified password role admin enable true A password for admin is to be the specified password ...

Page 897: ...onfig_ switch name _ date is saved in the FTP server by the command above 2 Store the configuration file saved on the FTP server in media such as FD and USB memory and store it in a safe place Restoring configuration An FTP server is required for backing up configuration information Make sure that your network switch module is connected to the FTP server 1 Restore configuration using the FTP serve...

Page 898: ... 5 9 NIC1 0 4 17 NIC1 1 5 17 1 0 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 2 10 NIC0 1 3 10 NIC1 0 2 18 NIC1 1 3 18 1 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 4 10 NIC0 1 5 10 NIC1 0 4 18 NIC1 1 5 18 7 0 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 2 16 NIC0 1 3 16 NIC1 0 2 24 NIC1 1 3 24 1 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 4 16 NIC0 1 5 16 NIC1 0 4 24 NIC1 1 5 24 10 Gb DCB switch modules can be installed in switch module slots 2 to 5 Referring to the table above if you are...

Page 899: ...848 8 Configuring the 10 Gb DCB Switch Module ...

Page 900: ...849 9 Configuring the LAN pass through module This chapter describes the local area network LAN pass through module 1 Gb LAN pass through module 850 10 Gb LAN pass through module 854 ...

Page 901: ...interfere with cable connection If so remove the cover from the plug to connect it If the cable is difficult to remove you can use a cable removal tool CBL for removing LAN cables as described in the following steps 1 Insert the plug firmly to unlock the plug 2 Place the tip of the CBL removal tool which is attached to the LAN pass through module on the latch of the plug and press the latch 3 Whil...

Page 902: ...2576 0 Line0 LAN2 1 Line0 LAN3 82576 2 Line0 LAN4 3 Line0 LAN5 82576 2 Line1 LAN6 3 Line1 LAN7 82576 4 Line0 LAN8 5 Line0 LAN9 82576 4 Line1 LAN10 5 Line1 1 LAN1 82576 0 Line2 LAN2 1 Line2 LAN3 82576 2 Line2 LAN4 3 Line2 LAN5 82576 2 Line3 LAN6 3 Line3 LAN7 82576 4 Line2 LAN8 5 Line2 LAN9 82576 4 Line3 LAN10 5 Line3 2 LAN1 82576 0 Line4 LAN2 1 Line4 LAN3 82576 2 Line4 LAN4 3 Line4 LAN5 82576 2 Lin...

Page 903: ...ine9 LAN6 3 Line9 LAN7 82576 4 Line8 LAN8 5 Line8 LAN9 82576 4 Line9 LAN10 5 Line9 5 LAN1 82576 0 Line10 LAN2 1 Line10 LAN3 82576 2 Line10 LAN4 3 Line10 LAN5 82576 2 Line11 LAN6 3 Line11 LAN7 82576 4 Line10 LAN8 5 Line10 LAN9 82576 4 Line11 LAN10 5 Line11 6 LAN1 82576 0 Line12 LAN2 1 Line12 LAN3 82576 2 Line12 LAN4 3 Line12 LAN5 82576 2 Line13 LAN6 3 Line13 LAN7 82576 4 Line12 LAN8 5 Line12 LAN9 8...

Page 904: ...pass through module installed Line number of 1 Gb LAN pass through module LAN8 5 Line14 LAN9 82576 4 Line15 LAN10 5 Line15 To use LAN3 to 10 a blade requires a LAN mezzanine card Interface connector to server blade Server blade 7 Server blade 6 Server blade 5 Server blade 4 Server blade 3 Server blade 2 Server blade 1 Server blade 0 ...

Page 905: ...k into the laser beam using an optical instrument Small form factor pluggable plus SFP optical transceiver uses a laser beam that is colorless transparent and invisible and can damage your eyes CAUTION Make sure to purchase and use the optional SFP transceiver If not proper behavior and safety cannot be guaranteed Consult your reseller for details ...

Page 906: ... 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line2 NIC0 1 3 Line2 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line3 NIC1 1 3 Line3 1 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line2 NIC0 1 5 Line2 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line3 NIC1 1 5 Line3 2 0 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line4 NIC0 1 3 Line4 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line5 NIC1 1 3 Line5 1 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line4 NIC0 1 5 Line4 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line5 NIC1 1 5 Line5 3 0 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line6 NIC0 1 3 Li...

Page 907: ...Engine3 4 Line10 NIC0 1 5 Line10 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line11 NIC1 1 5 Line11 6 0 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line12 NIC0 1 3 Line12 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line13 NIC1 1 3 Line13 1 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line12 NIC0 1 5 Line12 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line13 NIC1 1 5 Line13 7 0 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line14 NIC0 1 3 Line14 NIC1 0 Blade Engine3 2 Line15 NIC1 1 3 Line15 1 NIC0 0 Blade Engine3 4 Line14 NIC...

Page 908: ... s password For the details about the operation of the Fibre channel switch module see the user s guide in the Hitachi Compute Blade Fibre Channel Switch Accessory DVD EN that came with the Fibre channel switch module Notes on use 858 Connection to setup terminal 859 Initial installation operation overview 862 Connection with server blades 863 Backup and restore of module information 867 ...

Page 909: ...eference Web Tools Administrator s Guide Accessories The following accessories are attached to the built in Fibre channel switch Short wave SFP module 8 Gbps short wave small form factor pluggable plus SFP modules are installed in the module Each built in Fibre channel switch contains two or four modules When using more modules than those installed in each Fibre channel switch purchase optional SF...

Page 910: ... LC command a system console command of the management module Network connection specifications default value set during shipment Item Setting value IP address switch module2 192 168 253 37 switch module3 192 168 253 38 switch module4 192 168 253 39 switch module5 192 168 253 40 Subnet mask 255 255 255 240 Connection type Dedicated to the management module Via LAN port of the management module Whe...

Page 911: ...management modules are installed connect the system console with the MSR LED that lights solid green Prepare the LAN cable for connection Via LAN port of the built in Fibre channel switch When connecting to the LAN port of the built in Fibre channel switch you can change the connection setting using the system console command of the management module LAN cable System console terminal ...

Page 912: ... RS 232C cross cable for connection Requirements for the setup terminal Item Specification Communication port RS 232C port Communication software Any of the following communications software products or its equivalent communication software Hyper terminal attached to Windows 2000 or Windows XP Tera Term Pro Version 2 3 Communication setting Communication protocol ZMODEM protocol Communication para...

Page 913: ...de slot 4 10 4 External port Server blade slot 5 11 5 External port Server blade slot 6 12 Server blade slot 7 13 Unconnected 14 Unconnected 15 Server blade slot 0 16 Server blade slot 1 17 Server blade slot 2 18 Server blade slot 3 19 Server blade slot 4 20 Server blade slot 5 21 Server blade slot 6 22 Server blade slot 7 23 Unconnected 24 Unconnected 25 Active port setting You can use 12 or 22 p...

Page 914: ...scribed in the table below With 2 port Fibre channel mezzanine cards installed Slot number of server blade Port number on server blade Fibre channel switch module Number of mezzanine card Port number of Fibre channel Slot number Port number 0 0 0 2 6 1 3 6 1 0 4 6 1 5 6 1 0 0 2 7 1 3 7 1 0 4 7 1 5 7 7 0 0 2 13 1 3 13 1 0 4 13 1 5 13 Unconnected 2 5 14 25 ...

Page 915: ...r blade Port number on server blade Fibre channel switch module Number of mezzanine card Port number of Fibre channel Slot number Port number 0 0 0 2 6 1 16 2 3 6 3 16 1 0 4 6 1 16 2 5 6 3 16 1 0 0 2 7 1 17 2 3 7 3 17 1 0 4 7 1 17 2 5 7 3 17 7 0 0 2 13 1 23 2 3 13 3 23 1 0 4 13 1 23 2 5 13 3 23 Unconnected 2 5 14 15 24 25 ...

Page 916: ...one0012 0 12 zone0212 2 12 zone0412 4 12 zone0013 0 13 zone0213 2 13 zone0413 4 13 zone0016 0 16 zone0216 2 16 zone0416 4 16 zone0017 0 17 zone0217 2 17 zone0417 4 17 zone0018 0 18 zone0218 2 18 zone0418 4 18 zone0019 0 19 zone0219 2 19 zone0419 4 19 zone0020 0 20 zone0220 2 20 zone0420 4 20 zone0021 0 21 zone0221 2 21 zone0421 4 21 zone0022 0 22 zone0222 2 22 zone0422 4 22 zone0023 0 23 zone0223 ...

Page 917: ... not installed or power is not supplied to Internal ports not connected to any Fibre channel mezzanine card 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 0 1 2 3 4 5 Unused Internal ports External ports Unused Example Displays switchshow command of a built in fibre channel switch BR5460 admin switchshow omitted in the middle Area Port Media Speed State Proto 0 0 id N8 No_Light omitted in...

Page 918: ...h Module Backup and restore of module information For information about how to backup and restore Fibre channel switch modules see the user s guide in the Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 Fibre Channel Switch Accessory CD EN that came with the device ...

Page 919: ...868 10 Configuring the Fibre Channel Switch Module ...

Page 920: ...it External interface for the I O slot expansion unit 870 Cable connection to the I O slot expansion unit 872 Initial settings of the I O slot expansion unit 874 Backup and restore the settings 876 Account 879 Privilege and role 881 System console command reference 882 Alert log message 989 ...

Page 921: ...for maintenance Only maintenance personnel can use this port Any user cannot use this Serial Port Serial port for the system console used for maintenance when a local area network LAN port is not available Serial port for the system console 0 used for connection to I O module 0 Serial port for the system console 1 used for connection to I O module 1 LAN port MAINT LAN port MGMT Unavailable Serial ...

Page 922: ...address 192 168 0 65 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 SSH Enabled Telnet Enabled Prepare the following items for connection via the serial port A terminal for the system console A connecting cable for the serial port RS 232C cross cable D SUB9 pin female female connector Terminal software such as Hyper Terminal available for VT100 emulation When you connect to the serial port of an I O module refer to th...

Page 923: ...efore connecting the unit to the network Both straight cable or cross cable are available for the LAN port for the system console 10 100 Mbps is automatically selected as the communication rate Connect the MGMT0 port of the I O module in the back of the I O slot expansion unit to your system console terminal using a LAN cable Since two I O modules are installed connect to the I O module with the s...

Page 924: ...ting at the time of shipment is 9600 bps Connect the serial port in the front panel of the I O slot expansion unit to your system console terminal using a RS 232C cross cable Since two I O modules are installed connect to the I O module with the STS that lights solid orange Prepare the RS 232C cross cable to connect to the terminal System console terminal RS 232C cross cable ...

Page 925: ...0 65 to connect the client software which is not required for serial connection and start the connection 3 Fixed user account and password are set to Administrator account for the system console at the time of shipment Type the following user account and password to login Item Setting at the shipment User account administrator Password password 4 When login is successful you can type a command to ...

Page 926: ...ce identifier setting See CI Command in Chapter 6 4 Network information setting such as IP address See LC command in Chapter 6 5 Logout Execute the EX command at prompt to logout 5713RF0 00108 0 IOEU EX Enter Clear the screen Disconnected ...

Page 927: ... 2 Type UBR and press Enter 3 Type B in the menu and press Enter A message asks you to input a backup file name B R Q B Enter Input backup file name Quit Compute Blade 2000 I O slot expansion unit I O Module ALL RIGHTS RESERVED COPYRIGHT C 2010 HITACHI LTD Chassis ID 5713RF0 00108 Firmware Revision A0100 Z 919 Use EX Command to logout Use HE Command to get a list of available commands 5713RF0 0010...

Page 928: ...he file with the settings to the I O slot expansion unit with File Transfer Protocol FTP or SSH File Transfer Protocol SFTP Log into FTP or SFTP using the same account name and password as those used in logging into the console Log into the Web console as Administrator 2 Log in to the console as Administrator 3 Type UBR at prompt and press Enter Input backup file name Quit conf Enter Confirm Y N Y...

Page 929: ...ion unit is displayed A confirmation message is displayed and the prompt is ready 6 Type Y and press Enter and the setting restoration starts The I O slot expansion unit will restart after the setting restoration To cancel the setting restoration type N and press Enter or just press Enter B R Q R Enter Backup file list File0 io conf backup Select backup file 0 Q Quit Select backup file 0 Q Quit 0 ...

Page 930: ...ions First character Alphabetic character Second and subsequent characters Alphanumeric characters hyphens underscores _ and periods 2 Status Indicates whether an account is enabled or disabled With Enabled the account is available 3 Role Role names to be assigned to an account See Privilege and role for the details of Role 4 Type of prompt Type of a prompt displayed Select one from IOEU fixed and...

Page 931: ...880 11 I O Slot Expansion Unit Account setting You can use the console to set accounts For procedures see SO command ...

Page 932: ... set to a role Privilege list The following role account is set at the shipment Defined roles at the shipment Defined account at shipment Privilege Description 1 Chassis Can set and operate a chassis 2 Network Can set a network 3 Account Can add and delete accounts or roles Role name Privilege Account Chassis Network 1 Administrator Permitted Permitted Permitted Account name Default password Assig...

Page 933: ...down the unit 891 PES Sets PCI express expander 892 PS Displays status of all modules 895 DF Displays modules installed in the unit 897 DH Displays riser boards and I O adapter module 900 WWN Displays WorldWideName 903 PSM Displays status of power modules and sets those modules 905 IOC Operates the I O module 906 FAN Displays the FAN module status 909 DL Log 910 DEL Deletes files in the user direc...

Page 934: ...gnosis 934 MLC Reference for maintenance network setting 935 ILC Internal LAN setting 936 Command Description See page BSM SC BSM linkage setting 937 SNM SNMP setting 942 MI E mail setting 950 LDAP Directory service connection setting 963 Command Description See page CER Operates SSH public keys 969 SEC Service setting 971 SO Role and account setting 974 Command Description See page DC Restores to...

Page 935: ... change it Characters in brackets mean that you can enter the value by pressing Enter Prompt is displayed in the following composition Chassis ID the slot number of the I O module that currently logs in IOEU Ex the slot number is 0 of the I O module that logs in with Chassis ID 5713RF0 NNNNN EX command This command finishes the system console and executes disconnection For disconnection type EX at...

Page 936: ...ress adapter information DL Log EX Exit FAN FAN module FW Update I O module firmware HE Help ILC Internal LAN setting IOC I O module control LC LAN configuration LDAP Directory service setting LFT Link Fault Tolerance setting LM Language Mode LS LAN controller discriminating information MI E mail notification MLC Maintenance LAN setting PES PCI Express expander PS Show power and other sensors PSM ...

Page 937: ...alue Description of value Inactivity timer Monitoring timer for inactivity 0 to 1440 Integers from 0 to 1440 can be specified Unit minute Setting 0 cancels the timer and timeout for inactivity is not executed The serial console setting is shown in the following list Item Description of item Value Description of value Baud rate The baud rate of the serial console for the I O module 9600 Can select ...

Page 938: ...to 6 Name Account name Character string in ASCII Comprised of up to 32 characters MAINTENANCE Maintenance personnel Role Role ID Integer Role ID from 0 to 23 MNT Maintenance personnel GST Guest Login Login time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY A D MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Access Type of connection Serial Serial connection Telnet Telnet connection SSH SSH connection IP address A user IP ...

Page 939: ...u Description C Edit chassis ID Sets a chassis ID Q Quit Quits the CI command The following table describes the displayed item Item Description of item Value Description of value Chassis ID Chassis ID Up to 20 characters in ASCII Identifier for a chassis The default value is the chassis serial number 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU CI Enter CI Chassis ID Chassis ID 5713RF0 NNNNN Chassis ID menu C Edit chassi...

Page 940: ...ver R Restart NTP service Restarts NTP service Q Quit Quits the SD command 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU SD Enter SD Edit local time time zone and NTP Local time Date 2009 03 02 Time 09 37 50 Time zone and Daylight Saving Time Time zone 09 00 DST Disable DST start time DST end time Time synchronization NTP Disable NTP server NTP0 Hostname Status Not connect NTP1 Hostname Status Not connect NTP2 Hostname St...

Page 941: ...ate hh hour mm minute DST is disabled DST end time When DST finishes MMM ZZZZZ hh mm The time to finish DST MMM the first 3 characters of a month ex Apr April Oct October ZZZZZ end date hh hour mm minute DST is disabled Details of DST are described in the following list Item Description of value Y The day in the month lastXXX The last day of a week in the month XXX is 3 characters to show a day of...

Page 942: ...a server with higher priority exists Sync Connection is available and the NTP server is synchronized Unknown Connection status is unknown No NTP server is set With the following conditions time synchronization is not available NTP server address is specified as the domain name The I O module with time synchronization by NTP enabled cannot be connected to the domain name system DNS server SDN comma...

Page 943: ...bed in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value I O module slot number with a PCI express expander installed 0 1 Power Power status PCI express expander Not installed in the I O module On Power is On Off Power is Off Condition Failure status PCI express expander Not installed in the I O module Normal Normal condition Fail Failed status 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU PES Enter PES ...

Page 944: ...1 4 mode To display the cable status type D at the prompt and press Enter The display may be different depending on your configuration Control signal cable status I O module0 Presence Server status 0 Connected On 1 Connected On I O module1 Presence Server status 0 Not connected 1 Not connected I O slot expansion unit connect cable status I O module0 Presence Link status Type 0 0 Connected Up Metal...

Page 945: ...nected On Power is on Off Power is off I O slot expansion unit connect cable status is described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value Number of slots used for cable connection 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Ports for connection to server chassis 0 0 Port0 upper port 0 1 Port0 lower port 1 0 Port1 upper port 1 1 Port1 lower port Presence Connection status I O module Not installed...

Page 946: ...O slot expansion unit chassis Displays the chassis information I Show sensors of I O module Displays sensors of the I O module PS Show sensors of power supply module Displays sensors of the power supply module F Show sensors of fan module Displays sensors of the fan module Q Quit Quits the PS command If you type C in the PS command menu and press Enter the chassis information is displayed The scre...

Page 947: ... Sensors of I O module0 Temperature Intake 32 00 degrees C Exaust 31 00 degrees C Riser 31 00 degrees C Voltage hotswap sub 5 01 V hotswap main 11 94 V sub 3 3V 3 27 V sub 1 8V 1 78 V sub 1 2V 1 19 V main 12V 11 91 V main 3 3V 0 00 V main 1 2V 0 00 V main 1 0V 0 00 V riser sub 3 3V 3 27 V riser main 3 3V01 0 00 V riser main 3 3V02 3 34 V riser main 3 3V03 3 34 V riser main 12V 11 99 V Current hots...

Page 948: ... Information on internal modules is displayed Type DF at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU DF Enter DF Show field replaceable unit information Detail field replaceable unit information menu C I O slot expansion unit chassis M I O module main board R I O module riser board PS Power supply module T Show mass of modules A All module Q Quit C M R PS T A Q Select a menu item from the foll...

Page 949: ...n your configuration I O module main board Slot 0 Board information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name HBS23 YA Serial Number 851590 Product information Manufacturer HITACHI Product Name I O Module Part Model Number GV0EDW11 224N11N Serial Number 851590 MultiRecord information Manufacturer ID 000074 Module Type1 40 Module Type2 00 Model ID Compute Blade 2000 I O Slot expansion unit 00 If you type R...

Page 950: ...ou type T in the DF command menu and press Enter the mass information is displayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration I O slot expansion unit chassis Total 40 96 kg If you type A in the DF command menu and press Enter information on each module and mass is displayed The screen display may be different depending on your configuration I O slot expansion unit chassis ...

Page 951: ...apter 0 2 Installed On Normal 1000BASE T 2 port LAN adapter 0 3 Not Installed 0 4 Installed Off Unknown 0 5 Not Installed 0 6 Installed On Normal Hitachi 8Gb 2 port fibre channel adapter 0 7 Installed On Normal Unknown 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 Riser board and PCI Express adapter menu Q Quit Q Select a menu item from the table below to execute it Menu Description Q Quit Quits the DH co...

Page 952: ... item Value Description of value Slot number of the I O module with a riser board installed 0 1 P Slot number of the I O board 0 to 15 Presence Status of the I O board I O module Not installed Installed Not installed Power Power status Riser board Not installed On Power is on Off Power is off Condition Failure status No riser board is installed or power is off Normal Fail Type Type of I O adapters...

Page 953: ...annel adapter Emulex 8 Gb 2 port Fibre channel adapter Hitachi 16Gb 1 port fibre channel adapter Hitachi 16Gb 2 port fibre channel adapter Emulex 16Gb 2 port fibre channel adapter 3 Gb 1 port SAS adapter 10 Gb 2 port LAN adapter I O adapter name A name of the displayed I O adapter may be different from a name of the installed I O adapter ...

Page 954: ...CD F2 0 2 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F3 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F4 0 3 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F5 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F6 1 0 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F7 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F8 1 1 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F9 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD FA 1 2 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD FB 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD FC 1 3 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD FD 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD FE Omitted in the middle 14 0 01 23 45 67 89 AB CE 5F 01 23 45 67 89 AB CE 60 14 1 01...

Page 955: ... 23 45 67 89 AB CD F1 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F2 0 2 0 3 1 0 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F7 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD F8 1 1 1 2 1 3 Omitted in the middle 14 0 14 1 14 2 14 3 15 0 15 1 15 2 15 3 Information on the Default Physical WWN is described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value P I O adapter slot number 0 to 15 Port Port number 0 to 3 World wide port name WWPN Not installe...

Page 956: ...ule and display the status Type PSM at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU PSM Enter PSM Power supply module Power supply module status PS Power Condition AC input 0 On Normal Normal 1 On Normal Normal AC input voltage setting Voltage 200 Power supply module menu Q Quit Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description Q Quit Quits the PSM command Items of the...

Page 957: ...nknown IOC command You can display I O module status and operate the module Type IOC at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU IOC Enter IOC I O module control I O module status Behavior Power Condition LID lamp 0 Active On Normal Off 1 Standby On Normal Off I O module control menu P Power control L LID lamp control Q Quit P L Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Men...

Page 958: ...t disable Boot is disabled FAIL The module fails LID Lamp Status of the identification LED No I O module installed Boot is disabled Boot of the other module is disabled In failure the other module in failure On LED lights solid Off LED is off Type P in the IOC command menu and press Enter The Power control menu is displayed P L Q P Enter I O module status Behavior Power Condition LID lamp 0 1 Acti...

Page 959: ...status Behavior Power Condition LID lamp 0 1 Active On Normal Off LID lamp control menu T Turn on F Turn off Q Quit T F Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description T Turn on Turns on the identification LED of the I O module F Turn off Turns off the identification LED of the I O module Q Quit Returns to the previous menu ...

Page 960: ...the fan module status are described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value F Fan module slot number 0 to 3 Power Power supply status No fan module is installed On Power is supplied to the fan module Processing power off Power is being turned down Off No power is supplied to the fan module Processing power on Power is being supplied to the fan module Condition Status...

Page 961: ...le to execute it Menu Description S Show alert log Views alert logs E Show system event log Views system event logs D Dump log to file Creates a log file for a probe to the current system equipment and saves the file to the user directory in the I O module The file can be downloaded via FTP or SFTP P Show power monitoring log Views power monitoring logs M Show environment monitoring log Views envi...

Page 962: ...ormation update alert is sent 2009 12 25 04 10 12 18E4 Info Module information update alert is sent 2009 12 25 04 10 12 18E4 Info Module information update alert is sent 2009 12 25 04 10 12 18E4 Info Module information update alert is sent 2009 12 25 04 10 15 18E4 Info Module information update alert is sent 2009 12 25 04 10 15 18E4 Info Module information update alert is sent Hit enter key Items ...

Page 963: ...gnal cable installed 2009 12 25 04 10 16 IO0 Info 0022 02 6100 04 F2F8 07A80A61 I O module z Control signal cable installed Hit enter key Items of the system event log are described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value Timestamp When a log is created local time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Module Where the event occu...

Page 964: ... type P in the DL command menu and press Enter power monitoring logs are displayed The I O module and chassis display different items in the screen I O module Select target 0 1 C chassis A All Q Quit 0 Enter Select trend data 0 last 24 hours 1 yesterday Q Quit 0 Enter I O module0 power monitoring log Main Power consumption W Sub Power consumption W Timestamp Ave Max Min Ave Max Min YYYY MM DD hh m...

Page 965: ...ocal time YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second Ave Average power consumption value Integer Average power consumption value by the chassis Unit watt Max Maximum power consumption value Integer Maximum power consumption value by the chassis Unit watt Min Minimum power consumption value Integer Minimum power consumption value by the chassis Unit watt If you typ...

Page 966: ... 21 22 23 YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX YY MM DD aa bb cc XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX ...

Page 967: ...ed Riser board is displayed in the title instead of Main board exhaust for Riser board is always displayed as No logs due to no temperature sensor If you type A in the DL command menu and press Enter the access log menu is displayed Console access log menu C Create log file A Show all log P Show log for a period of time Q Quit C A P Q Menu Description C Create log file Outputs access logs as a CSV...

Page 968: ..._ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 10 00013_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 11 00012_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 12 00011_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 13 00010_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 14 00009_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 15 000...

Page 969: ... personnel SPECIALIST Factory specialist Role Integer Role ID from 0 up to 23 Maintenance Maintenance personnel Specialist Factory specialist Guest Host Connection source IP address IP address Source IP address for the user connected via LAN Connected from a serial port Access Connection type Serial Connected via serial Telnet Connected via Telnet SSH Connected via SSH Login Login time YYYY MM DD ...

Page 970: ...BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 8 00015_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 9 00014_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 10 00013_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 11 00012_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 12 00011_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY 192 168 0 1 2009 02 21 13 45 38 13 00010_A...

Page 971: ...ure is created and saved in the user directory in the I O module You can download it via FTP or SFTP If you type l in the DL command menu and press Enter the MAR log list is displayed MARLOG INDEX No Timestamp Assist Reason 0 2009 03 09 10 13 39 OK IOA detected failure 1 2009 03 09 10 13 48 OK no redundancy 2 2009 03 09 10 13 29 OK PCI Slot IOA failure Fault Status asserted 3 2009 03 09 10 07 40 O...

Page 972: ... MAR log list and the MAR log details are displayed MARLOG 2009 03 09 10 13 39 CALL FACTOR INFORMATION Reason 21 Impact UU Partition No BMC ID RC INFORMATION EVENT 0000 02 19584F4B 6100 04 2139 6FA00000 RC 10 6000 40 21390000 6FA00000 RC NAME IOA1 STATUS COMMENT I O module 1 Failure 1 Replace the I O module Hit enter key Enter FRU INFORMATION 0 UNIT SYS FRU MNEMONIC IOA1 PARTS NAME REV ACTION RPL ...

Page 973: ...SCII Items of field replaceable unit FRU information are described in the list below FRU information to MAR logs Item Description of item Value Description of value UNIT Unit name See UNIT and FRU mnemonic shown below PARTS NAME Component name Character string in ASCII ACTION Action code RPL Replace CHK Check ADJ Adjust CRT Correct CLN Clean CKE Check externally RTM Execute TMP RPE Replace externa...

Page 974: ...390000 6FA00000 1 2010 01 18 13 09 07 10 6000 40 21390000 6FA00000 2 2010 01 18 10 40 42 10 6001 40 21190000 6FA00000 3 2010 01 18 10 26 24 10 6001 40 21190000 6FA00000 4 2010 01 18 10 26 24 10 6601 40 F2F90000 07A30B04 5 2010 01 14 17 44 57 10 6000 40 21390000 6FA00000 6 2010 01 14 17 32 34 10 6001 40 21190000 6FA00000 7 2010 01 14 17 32 34 10 6601 40 F2F90000 07A30B04 8 2010 01 14 14 20 34 10 62...

Page 975: ...code XXXXXXXX 8 digits in hex Items of the RC information are described in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value RC Reference code Hexadecimal string Consists of RE UID EC Failure and Additional in the RC list RC NAME RC name Character string Displayed in ASCII COMMENT Character string RC comment in ASCII DEL command You can delete files from the user directory of the...

Page 976: ... Enter D Q D Enter File list File0 io conf backup Select file 0 Q Quit 0 Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter io conf backup Deleting file was completed Hit enter key Enter FW command You can display the firmware version of an I O module Type FW at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU FW Enter FW Update I O module firmware I O module firmware Behavior Revision 0 Active A0101 A 3138 1 Standby A0101...

Page 977: ...ow Dictionary information Item Description of item Value Description of value Revision Dictionary file version XXXXX Dictionary version 5 characters You can update the dictionary by typing U in the FW command menu and pressing Enter The dictionary to be updated and then a confirmation message are displayed At the prompt if you type Y and press Enter the dictionary will be updated To cancel the upd...

Page 978: ...P before updating it For access via FTP or SFTP use the same account name and password as those for login LM command You can display and set a language Type LM at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU LM Enter LM Language Mode Language mode Language Japanese Language mode setting menu L Set language mode Q Quit L Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description...

Page 979: ... press Enter and the new setting value is displayed A confirmation message appears At the prompt press Y and press Enter and the language value will become effective To cancel the setting value type N after the confirmation message and press Enter or just press Enter Language Japanese 0 English 1 Japanese Unchange 1 Enter Language mode Language Japanese Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was comp...

Page 980: ...ng Q Quit E Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description M Edit I O module setting Edits network setting for the I O module Q Quit Quits the LC command If you type E in the LC command menu and press Enter the current values appear in numerical order as shown in the following table At the prompt press Enter or enter a setting value and press Enter and the screen will ...

Page 981: ...s disconnected To cancel the network setting in the I O module type N and press Enter or just press Enter to confirm the new setting value E Q L Enter IP address 192 168 0 65 Unchange 192 168 0 10 Enter Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Unchange 255 255 254 0 Enter Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Unchange Enter DNS0 0 0 0 0 Unchange Enter DNS1 0 0 0 0 Unchange Enter DNS2 0 0 0 0 Unchange I O module LAN interface s...

Page 982: ...tion G Edit management port setting Edit redundancy setting on MGMT port of the I O module Q Quit Quits the LFT command Items on the screen are described in the table below Menu Description Ext port External output port MGMT MGMT port MNT MAINT port I O module I O module with open ports Active unit management master Standby non unit management master LFT Redundancy status of the management LAN por...

Page 983: ...ter a setting in seconds to ascertain linkup The changed setting value is displayed A confirmation message appears Type Y and press Enter and the management LAN redundancy setting is saved To cancel the setting change type N and press Enter or just press Enter G Q G Enter LFT Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 0 Enter Down s 3 1 3600 Unchange 10 Enter Up s 180 1 3600 Unchange 1800 Enter Link Fault...

Page 984: ... controller1 0 00 00 87 12 5B B0 00 00 87 12 5B B1 1 00 00 87 12 5B 4C 00 00 87 12 5B 4D LAN controller information menu Q Quit Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description Q Quit Quits the LS command Items on the screen are described in the table below Menu Description I O module slot number controller0 MAC address to the network interface controller0 controller1 MA...

Page 985: ...reen goes back to the XD command menu Enter the IP address at the prompt A message to confirm executing diagnostics appears At the prompt type Y and press Enter diagnostics is executed and the result is displayed To cancel diagnostics type N and press the Enter or just press Enter I Q I Enter Input IP address Q Quit 192 168 0 253 Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter PING 192 168 0 253 192 168 0 253 56 data b...

Page 986: ... following list to execute it Menu Description Q Quit Quits the MLC command Items per I O module on the screen are described in the table below Menu Description IP address IP address of the interface for the maintenance network of the I O module Subnetmask Subnetmask of the interface for the maintenance network of the I O module Items of the static route are described in the table below Menu Descr...

Page 987: ...ubnetmask Subnetmask of internal network Default value 255 255 255 0 If you type E in the ILC command menu and press Enter the current setting is displayed At the prompt enter an internal network address and the changed setting value is displayed A warning message appears indicating that the I O module will restart after the setting change is displayed A confirmation message appears Type Y and pre...

Page 988: ... execute it Menu Description M Edit manager setting Edits SC BSM connection setting D Delete manager setting Deletes SC BSM connection setting DB Show Edit basis detail setting Shows and edits the processing details about accepting requests from SC BSM DM Show Edit manager detail setting Shows and edits details about SC BSM connection setting Q Quit Quits the BSM command Items displayed on the scr...

Page 989: ...nnection setting is applied To cancel the setting type N and press Enter or just press Enter M D DB DM T Q M Enter Select manager 0 3 Q Quit 1 Enter Name BSM_1 Unchange Enter IP address 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 0 253 Enter Alert level All 0 All 1 Alert 2 Information 3 Disable Unchange 1 Enter Manager setting No Name IP address Alert level 0 BSM_0 192 168 0 254 All 1 BSM_1 192 168 0 253 Alert 2 3 C...

Page 990: ...e it Menu Description S Edit setting Edits SC BSM setting related to command requests Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you type S in the BSM command menu and press Enter the current port number setting that receives requests from SC BSM is displayed At the prompt press Enter or enter a port number and press Enter The changed setting value is displayed A confirmation message appears Type Y an...

Page 991: ...n min 10 Manager setting menu S Edit setting Q Quit S Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description S Edit setting Edits details of SC BSM connection setting Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you type S in the BSM command menu and press Enter the current setting is displayed in the numerical order as shown in the table below To proceed to the next setting press E...

Page 992: ... Name BSM_1 Unchange BSM_01 Enter IP address 192 168 0 253 Unchange 192 168 0 254 Enter Alert port 20079 1 65535 Unchange 20078 Enter Alert level Alert 0 All 1 Alert 2 Information 3 Disable Unchange 0 Enter Retry interval sec 5 5 50 Unchange 6 Enter Retry duration min 10 4 20 Unchange 5 Enter Manager detail setting No 1 Name BSM_01 IP address 192 168 0 254 Alert port 20078 Alert level All Retry in...

Page 993: ...NMP manager setting Manager0 SNMP version v1 v2c Hostname 0 0 0 0 Port number 162 Community name Manager1 SNMP version v3 Hostname 0 0 0 0 Port number 162 User name User01 Access type noAuthnoPriv Authentication password Encryption type Encryption password Manager2 SNMP version v1 v2c Hostname 0 0 0 0 Port number 162 Community name Manager3 SNMP version v3 Hostname 192 168 0 22 Port number 162 Use...

Page 994: ...on of value Agent SNMP agent function Enable Valid Disable Invalid Contact name System contact name System administrator name Character string in ASCII Up to 60 characters in ASCII Location System location installation site Character string in ASCII Up to 60 characters in ASCII Port number Port number for SNMP agent to use Integer Integer between 1 and 65535 However the value162 is not available T...

Page 995: ... With SNMP version v1 v2c the following setting is displayed Item Description of item Value Description of value Community name Community name for SNMP manager Character string in ASCII Up to 60 character string in ASCII With SNMP version v3 the following settings are displayed Item Description of item Value Description of value User Name User name Character string in ASCII Character string in ASC...

Page 996: ...ption 1 SNMP agent Enable or Disable 2 System contact name administrator name 3 System location 4 Port number used by SNMP agents 5 SNMP trap notification level 6 SNMP version to be used 7 Type a character string for the engine ID when SNMP version v1 v2 v3 is selected When you type a notification level with SNMP trap or a character string for ID the changed setting value is displayed A confirmati...

Page 997: ...ting is displayed in the following numerical order To proceed to the next setting press Enter or enter a setting value and press Enter With SNMP version v1 v2c Menu Description 1 Address for SNMP manager 2 Port number for SNMP manager 3 Community Name for SNMP manager When you type a community manager of the SNMP manager the changed setting value is displayed A confirmation message appears Type Y ...

Page 998: ...lected When you type an encryption password the changed setting value is displayed A confirmation message appears Type Y and press Enter and the SNMP manager connection setting is applied To cancel the setting type N and press Enter or just press Enter A M DA DM T C Q M Enter Select manager 0 3 Q Quit 0 Enter SNMP version v1 v2c 0 v1 v2c 1 v3 Unchange 1 Enter Hostname 0 0 0 0 Unchange 192 168 0 22...

Page 999: ...isplayed When a password is configured 5 asterisks are displayed The screen for encryption type is displayed when AuthPriv as an access type is selected Be sure to configure an encryption password If not configured Unchange is not displayed When a password is configured 5 asterisks are displayed If you type DA in the SNM command menu and press Enter you can delete SNMP agent settings Type Y and pr...

Page 1000: ...g was completed Hit enter key Enter If you type T in the SNM command menu and press Enter an SNMP trap for test is sent Type Y in the message to confirm the test transmission and press Enter The SNMP trap for test is transmitted To cancel the test SNMP trap transmission type N and press Enter or just press Enter A M DA DM T C Q T Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter Sending SNMP trap was completed Hit enter ...

Page 1001: ...e mail setting E Edit e mail notification setting A Edit e mail address M Send e mail notification Q Quit C E A M Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description C Show e mail setting Displays the e mail notification settings E Edit e mail notification setting Sets the e mail notification setting A Edit e mail address M Send e mail notification Q Quit Quits the MI comma...

Page 1002: ...thentication Enable Name auth Method PLAIN E mail encryption setting Encryption Disable Protocol SSL E mail address Address0 Nickname user0 Address user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Hit enter key Enter If you type E in the MI command menu and press Enter you can display the email notification set...

Page 1003: ...Character string in ASCII Host name of the I O module Enter it as Qualified Domain Name Up to 64 character string in ASCII Make sure to specify the host name when the e mail notification function is enabled Comment Comment for information to identify a customer Character string in ASCII Up to 32 characters in ASCII to specify a customer SMTP server SMTP server Character string in ASCII IP address ...

Page 1004: ...s enabled SSL Secure Socket Layer TLS Transport Layer Security Port number Port number of the SMTP server Integer If you type E and press Enter in the e mail notification setting menu you can change and delete the e mail notification setting The current setting is displayed in numerical order as shown in the table below To proceed to the next setting press Enter or enter a setting value and press ...

Page 1005: ...dress Unchange dish hitachi com Enter Host FQDN Unchange bs2kfw com Enter Comment Unchange test Enter SMTP server Unchange 192 168 0 76 Enter Authentication Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Enter Name Unchange admin Enter Password Unchange Method PLAIN 0 PLAIN 1 LOGIN 2 CRAM MD5 Unchange 2 Enter Encryption Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Enter Protocol SSL 0 SSL 1 TLS Unchange 1 Enter S...

Page 1006: ...ting type N and press Enter or just press Enter E R Q R Enter E mail notification setting Notification Disable Address Host FQDN Comment SMTP server Port number 25 E mail authentication setting Authentication Disable Name Method PLAIN E mail encryption setting Encryption Disable Protocol SSL WARNING If e mail notification is scheduled to retry the latest setting will be in effect Confirm Y N Y Ent...

Page 1007: ... ASCII Up to 64 character string in ASCII Signs available are as follows _ Attach With or Without a log file notification to the destination Yes Notification with a log file to be sent to the destination No Notification without a log file to be sent to the destination If you type E in the e mail notification menu and press Enter you can edit the e mail address The current address list is displayed...

Page 1008: ...0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Select address 0 3 Q Quit 0 Enter Nickname user0 Unchange USER0 Enter Address user0 one8647 com Unchange Enter Attach Yes 0 No 1 Yes Unchange Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname USER0 Address user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address...

Page 1009: ... saved the selected address is deleted To cancel the setting change type N and press Enter or just press Enter E D Q D Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname user0 Address user0 one8647 com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Address Attach No Address3 Nickname Address Attach No Select address 0 3 Q Quit 0 Enter E mail address Address0 Nickname Address Attach No Addres...

Page 1010: ...ess list including addresses currently registered is displayed When you specify an address a message indicating that it takes a few minutes to put out the log to the file is displayed A message appears to confirm the e mail transmission At the prompt type Y and press Enter and the log is output to the file the e mail will be sent to the selected address To cancel the e mail transmission type N and...

Page 1011: ...1 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 8 2009 02 26 13 06 08 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 9 2009 02 26 13 14 47 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 10 2009 02 26 13 35 10 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 11 2009 02 26 14 04 42 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 12 2009 02 26 14 09 48 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 13 2009 02 26 14 20 11 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 14 2009 02 26 14 30 37 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X 15 2009 02 27 09 25 39 6100 04 0952 0BA5FFFF X ...

Page 1012: ...y module which is determined from previous SEL FRU INFORMATION 1 UNIT OTHER FRU MNEMONIC BUNDEN PARTS NAME REV ACTION CHK WEIGHT 50 DRAWING NO MAP_CHECK SERIAL NO 2 UNIT SYS FRU MNEMONIC PSALL PARTS NAME REV ACTION CHK WEIGHT 50 DRAWING NO MAP_CHECK SERIAL NO E mail address Address0 Nickname USER0 Address user0 mail hitachi com Attach Yes Address1 Nickname Address Attach No Address2 Nickname Addre...

Page 1013: ...igger e mail notification happened YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY AD year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second System Event Log gggg ee ssSS ee11223344 gggg Generator ID ee evn revision ss Sensor type SS Sensor number ee Event trigger 11 Event data 1 22 Event data 2 33 Event data 3 Result e mail notification result Not targeted O Notification is successful X Notification fails R Notification fail...

Page 1014: ...nection setting Configures required settings for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server connection S Edit directory search setting A Edit group authentication setting R Reset directory service setting Initializes directory service settings Q Quit Quits the LDAP command If you type D in the LDAP command menu and press Enter the current directory service settings are displayed D C S A R Q...

Page 1015: ...string A blank space is not available at the head and end of a string Role attribute Up to 64 character string Uppercase and lower case alphabet is available for the first character of a string Both uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters are available for the second or later characters of a string A blank space is not available at the head and end of a string Group authentication setting ...

Page 1016: ...ble 0 Disable 1 Enable Unchange 1 Enter LDAP server 0 192 168 1 100 Unchange 192 168 1 101 Enter LDAP server 1 192 168 1 200 Unchange 192 168 1 201 Enter LDAP server 2 Unchange Enter Set port number to 636 Y N N Enter Port number 636 1 65535 Unchange Enter Set Bind DN to Anonymous Y N N Enter Bind DN bind Unchange Enter Set Password Y N Y Enter Password Unchange Enter Retype password Enter connect...

Page 1017: ... Enter Bind DN testname Unchange testdn Enter Login ID attribute loginid_attribute Unchange Enter Role attribute role_attribute Unchange Enter directory search setting Bind DN testdn Login ID attribute loginid_attribute Role attribute role_attribute Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter If you type A in the LDAP command menu and press Enter you can edit the group au...

Page 1018: ...ibute gm_attribute Group DN 0 GDN0 Group DN 1 GDN1 Group DN 2 GDN2 Group DN 3 Group DN 4 Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter If you type C in the LDAP command menu and press Enter the reset directory service setting menu is displayed D C S A R Q R Enter Reset directory service setting menu C Connection setting D Directory search setting G Group authentication sett...

Page 1019: ...Enter or just press Enter C D G A Q D Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter When you type G in the reset directory service setting menu and press Enter you can reset the group authentication setting To reset the setting type Y at the confirmation message and press Enter To cancel the setting type N after the confirmation message and press Enter or just press E...

Page 1020: ...mand If you type S in the CER command menu and press Enter the following menu screen is displayed S Q S Enter SSH host key menu G Generate host key H Show host key information B Backup R Restore Q Quit G H B R Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description G Generate host key Generates host key pairs for the SSH server H Show host key information Display information ab...

Page 1021: ...ed in the table below Item Description of item Value Description of value Key length Host key length Integer Unit bit Fingerprint Host key fingerprint XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X X XX XX XX stands for two hexagonal figures Alphabets from a to f is shown in lower case If you type B in the SSH host key menu and press Enter you can save the host key pair of the SSH server You are prompte...

Page 1022: ...kup File1 pub test backup Select backup file 0 1 Q Quit 0 Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter Restoring backup data was completed Hit enter key Enter SEC command You can set the network service Enter SEC at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU SEC Enter SEC Service setting Service setting menu F FTP setting S SSH setting E Telnet setting H Connection allowed network setting for all of above proto...

Page 1023: ...255 0 0 0 Unchange Enter FTP setting Allow Allow Network address 192 0 0 0 Subnetmask 255 0 0 0 Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter If you type S in the SEC command menu and then press Enter you can set the permissible network settings for connecting an SSH server You can choose to allow or deny all access or allow access only from an address range defined by a pa...

Page 1024: ... Subnetmask Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter If you type H in the SEC command menu and then press Enter you can set the same permissible network settings for connecting to all three protocol servers FTP SSH and Telnet You can choose to allow or deny all access or allow access only from an address range defined by a particular network address and subnet mask Whe...

Page 1025: ...k address ALL Subnetmask Telnet setting Allow Allow Network address ALL Subnetmask Hit enter key Enter SO command You can display and set account and role information Type SO at the prompt and press Enter 5713RF0 NNNNN 0 IOEU SO Enter SO Security setting Security setting menu A Account setting R Role setting Q Quit A R Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description A A...

Page 1026: ...ct a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description A Add account D Delete account E Edit account detail information Q Quit Returns to the previous menu If you type A at the account menu and press Enter you are prompted to enter an account name password account status and role settings When you have done so the list of accounts is updated to include the account you intend to add ...

Page 1027: ...ed Enter Select account status 0 Disable 1 Enable Q Quit 1 Enter Role list ID Name 0 Administrator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select role 0 23 Q Quit 0 Enter Account setting ID Name Status Role 0 administrator Enable Administrator 1 iod Enable Administrator 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ...

Page 1028: ...dPt ceconsl If you type D at the account menu and press Enter you are prompted to enter an account number When you have done so the account settings are displayed without the account you intend to delete and a message appears prompting you to confirm deletion of the account To delete the account type Y and then press Enter To cancel the operation type N and then press Enter or simply press Enter A...

Page 1029: ...e Administrator Key Not installed Inactivity timer min 10 Prompt Chassis ID and Slot Number Account detail setting menu N Edit account name S Edit account status R Edit account role P Edit account password K Edit account public key I Edit account inactivity timer M Edit account prompt Q Quit N S R P K I M Q Select a menu item from the following list to execute it Menu Description N Edit account na...

Page 1030: ...etting menu and press Enter you can change the role assigned to the account You cannot change the role if a user is logged in to the account If you type P at the account detail setting menu and press Enter you can change the password to the account When changing the password of the currently logged in account you must enter the old and new passwords If your account with permission for editing acco...

Page 1031: ...m Y N Y Enter Installing public key was completed Hit enter key Enter Only OpenSSH public key file is supported Up to five public keys can be installed in one account RSA the first described public key cryptosystem and digital signature algorithm DSA are supported A public key with SSH version 1 is not supported Check the fingerprint of the public key and confirm that the fingerprint is identical ...

Page 1032: ...e the account prompt settings You can select from two formats chassis ID I O module slot number IOEU chassis ID and slot number or IOEU fixed If you type R and press Enter at the prompt for the SO command menu you can display the current role settings A R Q R Enter Role setting No Name Net Chassis Account 0 Administrator X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Role menu A...

Page 1033: ...you type a new account permission value the list of role settings is updated to reflect the change and a confirmation message appears To apply the new settings type Y and then press Enter To cancel the operation type N and then press Enter or simply press Enter A D E Q A Enter Enter role name Quit admin Enter Add network authority Y N Y Enter Add chassis authority Y N Y Enter Add account authority...

Page 1034: ...nter Role setting No Name Net Chassis Account 0 Administrator X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Confirm Y N Y Enter Writing setting was completed Hit enter key Enter If you type E at the role menu and press Enter you are prompted to enter the number of the role to edit When you have done so the current settings are displayed in the order shown in the table below and...

Page 1035: ...n press Enter or press Enter A D E Q E Enter 0 23 Q Quit 0 Enter Role name Administrator Unchange Enter Network authority Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Chassis authority Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Account authority Allow 0 Deny 1 Allow Unchange Enter Role setting No Name Net Chassis Account 0 Administrator X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Confirm Y N...

Page 1036: ...res the settings of the I O module to the factory defaults Q Quit Quits the DC command If you type R at the DC command menu and press Enter a warning message appears indicating that if you proceed to reset the I O module the I O module will restart to terminate the current session To restore the I O module to the defaults and restart type Y at the confirmation prompt and press Enter To cancel the ...

Page 1037: ...nter a file name and a message appears to save the configuration information To back up the configuration type Y at the confirmation prompt and press Enter To cancel the operation type N at the confirmation prompt and press the Enter or press Enter B R Q B Enter Input backup file name Q Quit conf Enter Confirm Y N Y Enter Creating backup file was completed Backup file name is io conf backup Hit en...

Page 1038: ...n type N at the confirmation prompt and press Enter or press Enter B R Q R Enter Backup file list File0 io conf backup Select backup file 0 Q Quit 0 Enter WARNING If confirm this connect is lost Confirm Y N Y Enter I O module0 Restarting Disconnected Correspondence between commands and permissions The following table shows the association between commands and the permissions required for command e...

Page 1039: ...N Yes 31 SEC Yes 32 SNM Yes 33 SO edits your account None required 2 34 SO edits accounts other than yours Yes 35 UBR Yes 36 WHO display a session None required 37 WHO forcibly terminates a session Yes 38 WWN Yes 39 XD Yes Yes Permission required for executing the command None required Executable without any permission None required 1 Executable without any permission Only the executable commands ...

Page 1040: ...n unit 2 Format of alert log messages viewed from the I O slot expansion unit console Timestamp ID Level Message YYYY MM DD hh mm ss XXXX XXXXXXX YYYY MM DD hh mm ss XXXX XXXXXXX Timestamp The date and time when the log message was generated in the format YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minutes ss seconds ID The message ID Level The level of the message Info information message WARNING warnin...

Page 1041: ...st 1803 WARNING On module s1 the temperature s2 fell below the warning level Meaning The temperature at the part shown in s2 of the module shown in s1 is below the warning level Action Although the device can keep working check if the temperature is proper where the device is installed 1805 Info On module s1 the temperature s2 has been restored to a tolerable level Meaning The temperature at the p...

Page 1042: ...those errors that occurred is beyond the limit Action Although the device can keep working this can change to an unrecoverable fault Consult your reseller or maintenance personnel 183F FAIL On module s1 an abnormal event occurred Meaning Failure occurs in the module shown in s Action Consult your reseller or maintenance personnel 1840 WARNING On module s1 an abnormal event occurred Meaning Failure...

Page 1043: ...d Meaning A system configuration is improper Action If you changed the configuration before the message appeared check if something is wrong in the configuration If not consult your reseller or maintenance personnel 18A0 WARNING LAN port s1 lacks redundancy Meaning The LAN port shown in s1 has no longer redundancy Action Check if the LAN port is properly connected Redundancy for LAN ports can be t...

Page 1044: ...ich is displayed by executing the BSM command from the I O expansion unit console 18B0 Info The time setting was updated Meaning I O module time setting is updated Action Nothing required 18B1 WARNING Connecting to the NTP server was failed Meaning Connection to the NTP server fails Action Check if communication between the I O slot expansion unit and NTP server is available Also check the NTP ser...

Page 1045: ... I O module is changed Action Nothing required 18E3 Info System information update alert is sent Meaning An alert to notify the system update is sent to SC BSM from the I O slot expansion unit Action Nothing required 18E4 Info Module information update alert is sent Meaning An alert to notify information update on modules installed in the I O slot expansion unit is sent to SC BSM Action Nothing re...

Page 1046: ...erations 1147 Quit LPAR manager 1289 LPAR manager functions 1292 HCSM 1361 HVM Navigator 1362 LP model updating 1363 LPAR manager version upgrade 1363 Migration between basic environment and LPAR manager environment 1364 LPAR manager Security 1366 Cautions 1371 LPAR manager setting item 1419 Port numbers used by LPAR manager 1428 System configuration 1429 LPAR manager boot messages 1440 LPAR manag...

Page 1047: ... Serial port COM1 Virtual 57 1X or later 78 1X or later Universal Serial Bus USB device CD DVD drive Exclusive shared 57 1X or later 78 1X or later Floppy disk FD drive Exclusive shared 57 1X or later 78 1X or later USB memory Exclusive shared 58 6X or later 78 6X or later keyboard Not supported mouse Not supported Remote console CD DVD drive Exclusive shared 58 2X or later 78 2X or later FD drive...

Page 1048: ...edicated Shared 58 1X or later 78 1X or later Hitachi 8 Gbps Fibre channel x 2 Dedicated Shared 58 1X or later 78 1X or later Flash drive PCI card Fusion io 365 GB PCIe Flash drive 2 Dedicated 59 21 or later 79 21 or later Fusion io 785 GB PCIe Flash drive 2 Dedicated 59 21 or later 79 21 or later Fusion io 1 2 TB PCIe Flash drive 2 Dedicated 59 21 or later 79 21 or later 1 This item is supported ...

Page 1049: ...Not supported by the following LPAR manager firmware versions Guest OS Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 57 1X or later X55A1 blade Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 4 57 3X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 58 6X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 7 59 01 or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 9 59 51 or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 58 8X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 2 59 0X or later Red Hat E...

Page 1050: ...08 Not supported Windows Server 2008 SP2 59 0X or later Windows Server 2008 R2 Not supported Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 59 0X or later Windows Server 2012 59 2X or later Windows Server 2012 R2 Not supported Guest OS X55R4 blade Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 Not supported Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 4 Not supported Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 Not supported Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 7 Not supported ...

Page 1051: ... 16 58 3X or later LPAR manager expansion mode 16 58 7X or later 30 58 8X or later Hyper threading 57 3X or later Dynamic change in scheduling mode 58 4X or later Memory Minimum division unit 256 MB 57 1X or later Maximum amount available for assignment per LPAR 3 LPAR manager standard mode 142 75 GB 57 1X or later 190 75 GB 58 1X or later 510 75 GB 59 0X or later 766 75 GB 59 21 or later LPAR man...

Page 1052: ... manager expansion mode 16 58 7X or later Assigning a NIC port duplicately to an LPAR LPAR manager standard mode Not supported LPAR manager expansion mode 58 7X or later Assigning a NIC port respectively to an LPAR LPAR manager standard mode Not supported LPAR manager expansion mode 58 7X or later VLAN 57 1X or later WOL 4 5 57 1X or later Teaming 57 1X or later TSO 57 1X or later Promiscuous mode...

Page 1053: ...nter LPAR packet filtering Not supported PXE boot Not supported FC Dedicated FC Fiber channel Minimum division unit Controller 57 1X or later Maximum number of dedicated FC ports per port Identical to that of physical FC ports 57 1X or later Storage area network SAN boot 57 1X or later FC switch configuration for supporting N Port ID Virtualization NPIV 57 1X or later SAN storage direct coupling c...

Page 1054: ...1X or later Configuration viewer 58 1X or later LPAR migration 58 1x or later Firmware update 58 1x or later Solutions 58 6x or later SC BSM 13 57 1X or later ServerConductor SC Deployment Manager DPM 14 57 1X or later Performance Management PFM 13 57 3X or later IT Resource Management Manager ITRM 6 13 58 7X or later Remote console 7 57 1X or later Virtual communication port COM console Maximum n...

Page 1055: ... 59 21 or later High reliability N 1 cold standby 57 1X or later Uninterruptible power supply UPS 57 1X or later Maintenance Guest memory dump collection command 57 1X or later LPAR manager dump collection command 57 1X or later LPAR manager firmware version up 57 1X or later PCI Express PCIe error isolation 58 7X or later Virtualization software VMwre Not supported Hyper V Not supported ...

Page 1056: ...d Hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 Not supported X57A2 blade Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 4 Not supported Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 78 7X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 7 79 01 or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 78 8X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 9 79 51 or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 2 79 0X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 4 79 4X or later Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 5 79 5X or la...

Page 1057: ...essor Assignment of physical processor numbers 78 1X or later Shared processor Assignment of physical processor numbers 78 3X or later Service ratio 78 1X or later Idle detection 78 1X or later Capping 78 1X or later Processor group 78 3X or later Max number of definable groups per LPAR manager 8 1 blade 16 78 3X or later 60 78 6X or later 2 blade SMP 16 78 3X or later 60 78 6X or later 4 blade SM...

Page 1058: ...AR manager standard mode Controller 78 1X or later LPAR manager expansion mode Port 78 7X or later Maximum number of physical LAN controllers to be assigned per LPAR manager 6 78 1X or later 8 79 0X or later Maximum number of physical ports to be assigned per LPAR manager 12 78 1X or later 16 79 0X or later Maximum number of shared NICs to be assigned per LPAR LPAR manager standard mode 8 78 1X or...

Page 1059: ...or later Transmission bandwidth control 79 7X or later TSO 79 7X or later Promiscuous mode Not supported Inter LPAR transmission packet filter 79 7X or later PXE boot Not supported Virtual NIC Maximum number of network segments per LPAR manager 4 78 1X or later Maximum number of virtual NIC to be assigned per LPAR LPAR manager standard mode 8 78 1X or later LPAR manager expansion mode 16 78 7X or ...

Page 1060: ... 79 42 or later HVM Navigator 78 6x or later SC BSM 13 78 1X or later Character based user interface CUI LPAR manager screen 78 1X or later Guest screen 78 1X or later CLI HvmSh 78 1X or later System operation HCSM 9 10 79 42 or later HVM Navigator LPAR settings 78 6x or later Monitoring 78 1X or later Configuration viewer 78 1X or later LPAR migration 78 1x or later Firmware update 78 1x or later...

Page 1061: ...item is supported by LPAR manager firmware version 58 71 78 71 or later 3 Max memory amount available for assignment Max physical memory Memory amount used by LPAR manager 4 This item is available only with the onboard LAN controller on a server blade not with an expansion card or PCI card 5 This item is available only through WOL by SC BSM SC DPM or HCSM With LPAR manager firmware version 58 80 7...

Page 1062: ...d in this chapter as defined in the table below Term Physical and Logical An image when the system is booted in the LP mode is as follows System Activation in the LP mode In addition in this chapter Symbols embraced by square brackets indicate keys on the keyboard If two keys are joined by a such as A B it means the two keys are to be pressed together Term Description Physical Indicates the resour...

Page 1063: ...rdware resource It cannot be used by LPARs to which it has not been allocated To switch the LPAR that can use resources make sure to shut down the LPAR once to change the configuration definition Processors Memories PCI devices Shared Exclusive shared Either LPAR manager or the particular LPAR to which a hardware resource has been allocated can exclusively use the hardware resource but the LPAR us...

Page 1064: ... be used when the LPAR is activated Since there is no overhead for switching the physical processors between the logical processors the LPAR performs faster Shared mode Physical processors are time shared among the logical processors defined in the LPAR for which the shared mode is specified The number of logical processors to be used in the shared mode can be set for each LPAR It is possible to s...

Page 1065: ...processor resource allocation rate called Service Ratio which represents the ratio of the time period in which the LPAR actually runs on the physical processors called Service Time The Service Ratio can be specified from 1 to 999 LPAR manager partitions the performance of the physical processor used in shared mode in 1 percent units LPAR manager calculates the relative allocation rate of the servi...

Page 1066: ... time 1 sec 3 000 milliseconds 1 sec 1000 milliseconds X Number of physical processors 3 3000 milliseconds Example 2 This example shows the allocation rates of LPAR1 Service Ratio 100 the number of the logical processors 2 LPAR2 Service Ratio 100 the number of the logical processors 2 and LPAR3 Service Ratio 100 the number of the logical processors 3 when the number of the physical processor can b...

Page 1067: ...es not work to a dedicated mode LPAR make sure to set the default value Y for correct performance Actual service to LPAR1 Actual service to LPAR2 LPAR1 workload decreases Actual service to LPAR1 Actual service to LPAR2 LPAR1 workload increases Actual service to LPAR2 Actual service to LPAR1 All shared processor service LPAR2 workload increases LPAR2 workload decreases All shared processor service ...

Page 1068: ...belongs to the processor group 0 A processor group number can be specified by the core Physical CPU CPU number LPAR1 2 Ways LPAR2 2 Ways LPAR3 2 Ways Shared Virtual CPU CPU number 4 Ways 0 1 0 1 Processor group 2 2 LPAR4 1 Way 0 0 Dedicated Processor group 1 0 1 1 Shared 3 Processor capping Disabled Processor capping Enabled Processor allocation service time LPAR1 LPAR2 LPAR1 LPAR2 LPAR1 busy beyo...

Page 1069: ...standard mode to expansion mode LPAR manager starts with memory to which 256 MB is added For example the memory for the guest OS is reduced by 256 MB This might cause some LPARs not to activate due to a memory shortage if the maximum memory has been used in LPAR manager standard mode Memory space for logical firmware Logical firmware uses a part of memory space assigned to each LPAR Memory space u...

Page 1070: ...en using the NUMA setting LPAR manager recommends using the non NUMA on all server blades It is unnecessary to set NUMA when the NUMA features are not required Outline The server blade of the NUMA configuration has two or more nodes which consists of a socket group of processors and memory connected to it Nodes are connected by the interconnection The memory in the same node for a processor is cal...

Page 1071: ...s performance to all the memory area becomes middle of the memory access performance of local memory and remote memory Memory accesses on the Non NUMA configuration Physical memory Physical processor Node0 Processor 0 Node1 Processor 1 Memory access cost Memory access Memory access is dispersed Interleaved Memory of Non NUMA Interconnect Node0 Node1 Processor 1 Memory access cost Memory access Int...

Page 1072: ...ory and physical processor in the different node to the LPAR shown as LPAR2 the access memory performance becomes lower which is because the logical processors of the LPAR use remote memory at any time The memory access performance depends on the configuration which processor and memory are assigned to LPAR in dedicated mode there might be a difference between LPARs Memory accesses of processors i...

Page 1073: ...o difference between LPARs See LPAR 1 and LPAR 2 below Memory access of processors in dedicated mode without any processor group Physical memory Node0 Node1 Memory access cost Memory access LPAR1 1way LPAR2 2way Socket Core Time shared Logical processor Shows only the memory access of LPAR2 LPAR1 would be the same When the processor group is not configured The memory access performance of all the ...

Page 1074: ...ode are assigned to the LPAR Memory access of processors in a shared mode processor group configuration Physical memory Node0 Node1 Memory access cost Memory access LPAR1 1way LPAR2 2way Socket Core Time share Logical processor Processor group small When making the processor group in a node and allocating the memory in the same node the memory accesses are always performed in the local memory and ...

Page 1075: ...is in Shared mode and the processor group is not configured LPAR manager assigns the memory in any node LPAR manager allocates preferentially the LPAR to the free physical memory that belongs in the same node with the assigned physical processor to the LPAR When the free physical memory in the same node does not reach the requirement the LPAR manager allocates the shortage from the other node When...

Page 1076: ...ngle node Basically it is unnecessary to specify a memory node Use the automatic memory assignment However when you need to suppress the activation if there is not enough free memory in the node specify the memory node Specify the memory node to all LPARs when you make at least one LPAR which specifies the memory node Do not intermingle the LPAR which specifies the memory node and the LPAR which d...

Page 1077: ...ible to skip specifying the physical processor number in the LPAR configuration Those are the same memory access performance When specifying the physical processor number A recommended example when in dedicated mode specifying the physical processor number Physical memory Physical processor Processor number Node0 Node1 Memory access cost Memory access 0 1 LPAR1 1way LPAR2 2way Socket Core Dedicate...

Page 1078: ...cket Core Time shared Logical processor Processor group small Physical processor Physical memory Physical processor Node0 Node1 Memory access cost Memory access LPAR1 1way LPAR2 2way Socket Core Dedicated Dedicated Logical processor Dedicated Processor group Specifies the processor group of the same node as the allocated memory The memory access is always performed to a local memory and you can ge...

Page 1079: ...ated mode a When the physical processors in more than one node or memory in more than one node are assigned to the LPAR When the physical processor and memory are assigned in a different node Avoid the configuration above and configure the LPAR using the physical processor and physical memory within one node Physical memory Physical processor Node0 Node1 Memory access cost Memory access LPAR1 1way...

Page 1080: ...re implemented in a PCI device each port cannot be assigned to a separate LPAR System required high processing performance System required critical time period and high processing in performance Shared mode A single PCI device is assigned to multiple LPARs guest OSs Each guest OS can use the assigned PCI device at the same time without knowing that the PCI device is shared with other OSs NIC perfo...

Page 1081: ...ns and Shared FC Functions in LPAR manager functions LPAR1 PCI LPAR2 2PCI Logical PCI Device Dedicated 4PCI Network Switch Fibre Channel Switch NIC FC NIC FC NIC NIC FC FC Dedicated Dedicated Dedicated Logical PCI Device LPAR1 2PCI Logical PCI Device NIC FC Network Switch Fibre Channel Switch NIC FC NIC NIC FC FC LPAR2 2PCI LPAR3 2PCI 2PCI Logical PCI Device ...

Page 1082: ...Virtual NIC Transmission bandwidth can be limited by the 100 Mbps Shared NIC A physical NIC can be shared by multiple LPARs Performance depends on the number of LPARs and traffic volume Less restrictions on NIC functions than VF NIC Dedicated and Shared Virtual NIC Available only for inter LPAR transmission No physical NIC is required Fibre Channel FC LPAR manager supports the following two Fibre ...

Page 1083: ...ronization with NTP server for LPAR manager system Note RTC Real Time Clock SEL System Event Log System Equipment LPAR Guest SELTime HVM LP System Time OS System Time Timer counter Lapse Timer Logical RTC Time Timer counter Lapse Timer interrupt Lapse OS Boot Time System Equipment Time Physical RTC Time OS Boot Time Time Zone Timer Counter Interrupt Timer Differential Differential ...

Page 1084: ...P server System Equipment LPAR Guest SELTime HVM LP System Time OS System Time Timer counter Lapse Timer Logical RTC Time Timer counter Lapse Timer interrupt Lapse OS Boot Time System Equipment Time Physical RTC Time OS Boot Time Time Zone Timer Counter Interrupt Timer Differential Differential Time synchronization Synchronizes time then apply it ...

Page 1085: ...24 hours Date and Time screen 1 Saving HVM configuration LPAR manager shutdown LPAR manager LPAR manager system time Timer counter 5 TSC 4 Cpu Frequency 1 Enable LPAR manager system time synchronization LPAR manager boot with system time synchronization enabled Enable LPAR manager system time synchronization LPAR manager boot with system time synchronization enabled Time Description System equipme...

Page 1086: ... time difference from the LPAR manager system time it is strongly recommended that you should adjust the differentials between the physical RTC time and LPAR manager system time using Adjust LPAR Time before booting the guest OS 2 The differentials between the logical RTC time and logical SEL time will be saved by pressing the F9 key Save Configuration on the LPAR manager Menu screen LPAR manager ...

Page 1087: ...m time to the NTP server to keep it correct Save Time Config a function to automatically save and update physical and logical RTC time eliminates guest OS time differentials at the guest OS reboot or LPAR manager reboot Thus enabling Save Time Config is highly recommended See Options for how to enable the function and restrictions ...

Page 1088: ...meter Storage environment design SAN disk partitioning plan FC switch parameter SAN security parameter OS introduction and setting Network Application required Management software Other necessary settings Start Operation 1 Create the parameter sheet using the system requirements Refer to LPAR manager setting item for details 2 Set the LP EFI driver on the LPAR manager screen and guest screen accor...

Page 1089: ...boot options 9 Guest OS installation Guest OS operation Guest OS shutdown Guest OS failure LPAR manager shutdown Version up Revision up 9 LPAR migration Available Unavailable 1 Log into BMC via Web browser for connection 2 Log into BMC via terminal software for connection 3 Log into LPAR manager via terminal software for connection 4 See Remote console connection for connection 5 See the manual of...

Page 1090: ...nal VT editor keypad setting to those in the following table and save it Before change After change Find 338 Find 327 Insert 327 Insert 338 Remove 329 Remove 339 Select 339 Select 335 Prev 335 Prev 329 3 Start Tera Term and execute Setup Read key map When some files are displayed select KEYBOARD CNF and then execute Open 4 Confirm that the PageUp key is available by scrolling pages up and down on ...

Page 1091: ...tting as follows Item Setting value Meta key Checked With the Meta key checked you can use the Alt key as a meta key When a function key is not available on the LPAR manager screen the Meta key might be used as a function key Alt 8 keys for example might be used as the F8 key Tip ...

Page 1092: ...ank number setting Start HVM HVM initial setting Set LPAR on the HVM screen Is there any configuration data Save the configuration data Activate LPAR Set the EFI driver Is AutoACT enabled No OS boot OS installation Yes 1 Application installation OS shutdown HVM system shutdown Note Setting and saving AutoACT allows LPAR to activate automatically from the next HVM boot 1 1 Install OS and applicatio...

Page 1093: ...ater or 06 01 or later Socket Interleave Non NUMA LP firmware version 59 1X 79 1X or earlier Non NUMA NUMA 5 LP firmware version 59 2X 79 2X or later PCI Error Handling Mode 3 Legacy LPAR manager firmware version 58 6X 78 6X or earlier Legacy PCIe Error Isolation 4 LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7X or later PCIe Error Isolation 4 Mezzanine Disable LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7X ...

Page 1094: ...replacement Maintenance in operation is available 4 When using PCIe Error Isolation use the following firmware versions Standard server blades with EFI 03 43 04 43 or later BMC 03 78 or later High performance server blades with EFI 03 17 04 17 or later BMC 04 33 or later or 06 01 or later See Chapter 13 System Operation and Management PCI Error Handling Mode for details 5 When setting NUMA to Sock...

Page 1095: ...k Confirm and the EFI setup is updated as shown below These settings allow you to boot LPAR manager and operate the LPAR manager screen If booting LPAR manager in the Basic mode after setting EFI restore all settings to the default values Tip ...

Page 1096: ...ng manager LP mode setting Setting the LP mode Using the server blade Web console select Server Operation LP Setup OS mode and change modes from Basic to LP mode Confirm that the OS mode setting is LP mode and then click Modify ...

Page 1097: ...1046 12 Logical partitioning manager Click Confirm and the OS setting is updated as shown in the following screen ...

Page 1098: ...sing the server blade Web console select Server Operation LP Setup Switch LP F W and click the bank number to boot Confirm that the bank number is correct for your requirement and click Modify The setting for the number of a bank to boot by pressing Confirm is updated as shown below ...

Page 1099: ...anager screen When using the LPAR manager screen connect to the LPAR manager screen via BMC connect to the BMC IP address via Telnet If you connect to the LPAR manager screen via the OS console connected to the management module some problems might occur For example a screen might change to another screen when you press an arrow key on the LPAR manager screen which is the same behavior when pressi...

Page 1100: ...pplying LPAR manager When having set and saved the following items on this screen the LPAR manager Menu appears to operate the LPAR manager screen Logical partitioning manager LP Internet Protocol IP Address Subnet Mask Virtual NIC VNIC System No System Configuration LP ID LP_0000 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 0...

Page 1101: ...8 BSM2 IP Address 0 0 0 BSM3 IP Address 0 0 0 Change of LP IP Address BSM4 IP Address 0 0 0 BSM1 Alert Port 20079 192 168 0 20 BSM2 Alert Port 20079 BSM3 Alert Port 20079 BSM4 Alert Port 20079 Management Path Default VNIC System No 0 F10 Update System Config Esc Menu System Configuration LP ID LP_192168020 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address 192 168 0 20 Subnet Mask 25...

Page 1102: ... 1000 Compute Blade 2000 and Compute Blade 320 See 1 MAC Address for Virtual NIC for further details about MAC address for the virtual NIC System Configuration LP ID LP_192168020 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address 192 168 0 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 BSM1 IP Address 192 168 0 168 BSM2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 BSM3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 VNIC System No ...

Page 1103: ...Addres BSM4 IP Addres Yes BSM1 Alert Por No BSM2 Alert Por BSM3 Alert Por Save all changes BSM4 Alert Por Management Path Default VNIC System No 1 F10 Update System Config Esc Menu System Configuration LP ID LP_192168020 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address 192 168 0 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 BSM1 IP Address 192 168 0 168 BSM2 IP Address 0 0 0...

Page 1104: ...er Menu screen to save the new setting See Save configuration changed on LPAR manager screen for details System Configuration LP ID LP_192168020 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address 192 168 0 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 BSM1 IP Address 192 168 0 168 BSM2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 BSM3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 BSM4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Normal End BSM1 Alert Por...

Page 1105: ... on Timesync on the Date and the System screen and press Enter to display a subscreen Select SVP and press Enter Confirm that the NTP setting is SYNC on the System Service State screen System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disab...

Page 1106: ...nning If you reboot LPAR manager after operating it for a long time with Save Time Config disabled or if a system failure in LPAR manager or failover with N M cold standby unexpectedly occurs a time lag occurs in the guest OS If changing LPAR manager configuration or LPAR configuration with Save Time Config enabled make sure to press the F9 key at the end of the setting change Although LPAR manage...

Page 1107: ...m Configuration Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment LP System Logs Allocated FC Information Firmware Version Information Saving LP configuration Tips F3 Activate F8 LPAR Screen F4 Deactivate F9 Save Configuration F5 Reac...

Page 1108: ...nd press Enter When the number of definable LPARs is 18 or larger you can switch the subscreen using arrow keys or When the number of them is 17 or smaller those arrow keys are not displayed Logical Partition LPAR Name Sta Scd Pro G Add LPAR AC PC VC PB 1 2 1 NO_NAME 3 2 NO_NAME 4 3 NO_NAME 5 4 NO_NAME 6 5 NO_NAME 7 6 NO_NAME 8 7 NO_NAME 9 8 NO_NAME 10 9 NO_NAME 10 NO_NAME Up PageDown Page Down 11...

Page 1109: ...ta Scd Pro Grp Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 2 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 4 0 4 4096 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1110: ...ME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 Logical Partition Name 10 LPAR1 PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 4 0 4 4096 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 Shared 0 Remain 4608 Dedicate 0 Logical partition name F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Men...

Page 1111: ...he functions such as the HA monitor Set a unique name within the LPAR manager system Tip Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Scd Pro Grp Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 2 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 NO_NAME Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Logical Inf...

Page 1112: ...number of processors in The number of Shared Logical Processors subscreen and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 The number of shared Logical Processors 10 2 own Page...

Page 1113: ...PAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 5 2 3 4096 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 Shared 0 Remain 4608 Dedicate 0 The number of shared processors F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deac...

Page 1114: ...essors Scheduling mode Assignment 9 10 D S wn Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 4 0 4 4096 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 Shared 0 Remain 4608 Dedicate 0 Logical processors scheduling mode F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Menu Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Scd Pro Grp Srv Mem VN...

Page 1115: ...formation Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 4 1 3 4096 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 Shared 0 Remain 4608 Dedicate 0 The number of logical processors F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Menu Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Scd Pro Grp Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea S 2 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y...

Page 1116: ...e LPAR to change and press Enter 2 Type the number of a processor group in Group Number Assignment subscreen and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Scd Pro Grp Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea S 2 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 Group Number Assignm...

Page 1117: ...PAR2 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea D 1 0 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 5 2 3 4096 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 Shared 0 Remain 4608 Dedicate 0 Logical partition group number F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact...

Page 1118: ...r Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 The memory size in MB N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 N BIOS 5 1024 6 7 256 002048 256 8 9 1024 10 Maximum size 4608 p PageDown Page Down Effecitive max 4608 Logical Information hysical Information Pro Shr Within bounds er Memory 4608 MB Ass...

Page 1119: ... 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 2048 0 Y N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN User Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 5 0 5 5120 0 Processors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 0 0 0 Shared 0 Remain 4608 Dedicate 0 The memory size in ...

Page 1120: ...ageDown Page Down Effecitive max 4608 Logical Information hysical Information Pro Shr Within bounds er Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 5 0 ocessors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 F1 Input number in GB Shared 0 Remain Dedicate 0 The memory size in Mega Byte F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Menu Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPA...

Page 1121: ... Maximum size 4608 p PageDown Page Down Effecitive max 4608 Logical Information hysical Information Pro Shr Within bounds er Memory 4608 MB Assign Total 5 0 ocessors 8 8 Act Total 0 0 F1 Input number in GB Shared 0 Remain Dedicate 0 The memory size in Mega Byte F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Menu Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN I...

Page 1122: ...t the cursor on the target LPAR AA and press Enter 2 Set Order Number on The auto activation order subscreen and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 2048 0 Y N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 8 The auto activation ...

Page 1123: ...tore the LPAR to the same condition as it was before the reboot Auto Activation Order settings are ignored in this Auto Activate See Options for further details about Pre State Auto Activation Tip Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 2048 0 Y 1 N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y 2 N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N...

Page 1124: ...of the target LPAR and the OS Type column and press Enter to display a subscreen Move the cursor with arrow keys or to select Default or Solaris and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta OSType 1 LPAR1 Dea Default 2 LPAR2 Dea Default 3 LPAR3 Dea Default 4 LPAR4 Dea Default 5 6 7 Setting OS Type 8 9 Default 10 Solaris ge Up PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Informa...

Page 1125: ...server blade of the specified physical partition and inserted into the PCI Slot PCI devices in the shared mode shown as whose assignment cannot be changed on this screen See Assign VNICs Virtual NICs to LPARs for information about how to assign the shared NIC and See Assign shared FCs to LPARs for information about how to assign the shared FC Onboard USB ports assigned to an LPAR dedicatedly can b...

Page 1126: ...10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 2 Intel Corp GbE Controller E00 62 0 0 F5 Attach Detach F10 Update PCI Dev Schd F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu PCI Device Assignment PCI Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type U N N N N N Schd E S S S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea A 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea PCI Device Scheduling mode Assignm...

Page 1127: ...E S D S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea A 2 LPAR2 De 3 LPAR3 De Save settings 4 LPAR4 De This operation will require a few minutes 5 6 Yes 7 No 8 9 Save all changes 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 2 Intel Corp GbE Controller E00 62 0 0 F5 Attach Detach F10 Update PCI Dev Schd F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu PCI Device Assignment PCI De...

Page 1128: ...3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type U N N N N N Schd E S D S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea A 2 LPAR2 Dea A 3 LPAR3 Dea A 4 LPAR4 Dea A 5 6 Normal End 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 2 Intel Corp GbE Controller E00 62 0 0 F5 Attach Detach F10 Update PCI Dev Schd F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu ...

Page 1129: ... to which that device is assigned and press Enter PCI Device Assignment PCI Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type U N N N N N Schd E S D S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea A 2 LPAR2 Dea A 3 LPAR3 Dea A 4 LPAR4 Dea A 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 2 Intel Corp GbE Controller E00 62 0 0 F5 Attach Detach F10 Upda...

Page 1130: ...D S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea A 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea PCI Device Number Assignment 4 LPAR4 Dea 5 A 6 7 8 PCI Device Assign 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 2 Intel Corp GbE Controller E00 62 0 0 F5 Attach Detach F10 Update PCI Dev Schd F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu PCI Device Assignment PCI Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1...

Page 1131: ... LPAR to assign the USB device A USB device can be assigned to multiple LPARs as other PCI devices When an exclusively shared USB device is assigned to multiple LPARs the LPAR activated first can use the USB device and the other LPARs activated later cannot use it To change LPARS to use the USB device execute the procedure to change LPARs that is described later in this manual PCI Device Assignmen...

Page 1132: ...ment PCI Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type U N N N N N Schd E S S S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea A 2 LPAR2 Act R 3 LPAR3 Dea A 4 LPAR4 Dea A 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 0 Intel Corp USB Controller U0 0 1d 0 F5 Attach Detach F10 Update PCI Dev Schd F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu Using the USB device ...

Page 1133: ...ttached to the newly selected LPAR When 0 Detach only is selected the USB device will be simply detached from the LPAR After the attachment operation it might take about 30 seconds until the USB device becomes available on the firmware or OS in the LPAR Tip PCI Device Assignment PCI Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type U N N N N N Schd E S S S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Act A 2 LPAR2 Act R ...

Page 1134: ...ing via remote console the remote console screen display or mouse operation might become slower due to Super Video Graphics Array SVGA emulation When the USB device is assigned to another guest OS it might take about 30 seconds before you can operate the keyboard and mouse When transferring from the Basic environment to LPAR manager environment the screen might not be displayed with the remote con...

Page 1135: ...NIC on the Virtual NIC Assignment screen Deactivate the LPAR to assign the virtual NIC 1 Place the cursor on Virtual NIC Number of the LPAR to which the virtual NIC is to be assigned and then press Enter Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 0 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down VNIC Information No 0...

Page 1136: ...AR2 Dea Vb 3 LPAR3 Dea Vc 4 LPAR4 Dea Vd 5 1a 6 1b 7 2a 8 2b 9 3a 10 3b 4a 4b ageDown Page Down 5a VNIC Information 5b No 0 MAC Address ag Undef Prm T VLANID F2 Disp F5 Set Prom Mode F6 Change MAC Addr F7 Select VLAN Esc Menu Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 1a 1b 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Pag...

Page 1137: ...mode If the FC adapter is already in the shared mode skip this step 2 Assign the shared FC to the LPAR on the Shared FC Assignment screen Place the cursor on the Shared FC to assign to the LPAR and press Enter Shared FC Assignment Shared FC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot 0 0 Port 0 1 PortStatus A A Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea 4 LPAR4 Dea 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page D...

Page 1138: ...nt Shared FC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot 0 0 Port 0 1 PortStatus Name Sta Shared FC vfcWWNId Assignment 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 4 LPAR4 Dea 2 5 3 6 4 7 5 8 6 9 7 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected Virtual FC Port WWN Information LPAR WWPN WWNN Bus Dev Func vfcID 0 1 0 0 30 4 0 F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu Shared FC Assignment Shared FC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot 0 0 ...

Page 1139: ...is displayed showing that LPAR manager configuration is being saved Menu LP_192168020 2009 02 18 11 23 00 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment LP System Logs Allocated ...

Page 1140: ...ke several minutes for saving Menu LP_192168020 2009 02 18 11 23 45 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment LP System Logs Allocated FC Information Firmware Version Inform...

Page 1141: ...tivate and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 2048 0 Y 1 N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y 2 N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 Activate LPAR 8 9 1 LPAR1 10 2 LPAR2 3 LPAR3 age Up PageDown Page Down 4 LPAR4 Logical Information Physical Information ...

Page 1142: ...other LPAR is using the USB device the first activated LPAR can connect to the remote console The latter activated LPAR cannot connect to the remote console To allow the latter activated LPAR to connect to the remote console it is necessary to change the USB assigned destination Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 2048 2 Y 1 ...

Page 1143: ...t PXE boot network boot when using ServerConductor SC Deployment Manager DPM 1 On the screen displayed at the logical BIOS boot select Boot Maintenance Manager 2 When the Boot Maintenance Manager screen is displayed select Boot Options Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the...

Page 1144: ...l is not displayed on the top of the boot order select Change the order Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Will be valid on next Add Boot Option boot Delete Boot Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order Boot0001 Change the order EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move H...

Page 1145: ...hange the order EFI Internal Shell Boot0001 Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order Boot0001 Change the order EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit EFI Internal Shell Boot0001 Move Selection Up Move Selection Down Enter Complete Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1146: ...it Fibre channel Board User s Guide BIOS EFI Edition for further details about the EFI driver Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager di...

Page 1147: ...ween those displayed 12 Enter drvcfg s driver handle controller handle hfccfg prompt is displayed 13 Enter the select command and select an adapter for booting Select 1 in the example above Shell drivers T D D Y C I R P F A V VERSION E G G D C DRIVER NAME IMAGE NAME 65 01010001 D X 1 Hitachi Fibre channel Driver EFIdriver Shell Shell drvcfg 65 Configurable Components Drv 65 Ctrl 74 Lang eng Shell ...

Page 1148: ...vice Disabled change y n y 0 Disabled default 1 Enabled c cancel please select 1 Boot Device List LUN decimal 1 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 2 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 3 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 4 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 5 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 6 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 7 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 8 WWPN 0000000000000000 LUN 0000 change y n y please select...

Page 1149: ...e the settings 16 Use the exit command to return to the EFI Shell 17 Execute the reconnect r command and then enter the map r command Confirm that the target LU is listed next to the Fibre and its WWN is correct Displayed details are different depending on the environment 18 Confirm the settings and then enter the exit command Shell reconnect r ReconnectController X X X Status Success Shell map r ...

Page 1150: ...Guest OS is booted CD DVD USB STORAGE DEVICE CD DVD boot CD DVD is used DPM NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PXE boot SC DPM is used Do not create multiple boot options for a boot device If you do the boot device might not boot up properly Guest OS Setup 1 On the screen displayed at the logical BIOS boot select Boot Maintenance Manager Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz...

Page 1151: ...nance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Add EFI Application or Add Boot Option Removable Fs as Boot Delete Boot Option Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1152: ... 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x1 0x0 MAC 00008762 F730 0x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x2 0x0 MAC 00008762 F731 0x0 v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 Input the description _ Input Optional Data _ Commit ...

Page 1153: ... 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 In In Please type in your data Co Windows Di Enter Complete Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Commit Changes and Exit Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 Input the description Windows Input Optional Data _ Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v M...

Page 1154: ... Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Add EFI Application or Add Boot Option Removable Fs as Boot Delete Boot Option Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1155: ...8010433B00 0x0 USB STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x1 0x0 MAC 00008762 F730 0x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x2 0x0 MAC 00008762 F731 0x0 v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer USB STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 Input the descr...

Page 1156: ... USB STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 In In Please type in your data Co CD DVD Di Enter Complete Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer USB STORAGE DEVICE Commit Changes and Exit Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 Input the description CD DVD Input Optional Data _ Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select En...

Page 1157: ...IOS boot select Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the Boot Maintenance Manager v Move Highlig...

Page 1158: ...nance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Add EFI Application or Add Boot Option Removable Fs as Boot Delete Boot Option Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1159: ... 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x1 0x0 MAC 00008762 F730 0x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x2 0x0 MAC 00008762 F731 0x0 v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 Input the description _ Input Optional Data _ Commit ...

Page 1160: ...es and Exit Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 Input the description Windows Input Optional Data _ Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 In In Please type in your data Co...

Page 1161: ... BIOS boot select Boot Maintenance Manager Hitachi Compute Blade E55 HVM LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the Boot Maintenance Manager v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Ent...

Page 1162: ...nance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Add EFI Application or Add Boot Option Removable Fs as Boot Delete Boot Option Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1163: ... Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E8010433B00 0x0 USB STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x1 0x0 MAC 00008762 F730 0x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci ...

Page 1164: ... Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 In In Please type in your data Co Windows Di Enter Complete Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Commit Changes and Exit Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0...

Page 1165: ...er Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Add EFI Application or Add Boot Option Removable Fs as Boot Delete Boot Option Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1166: ...it Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer FC STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x5 0x0 Pci 0x0 0x2 Pci 0x4 0x0 Fibre 0x50060E8010433B00 0x0 USB STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x1 0x0 MAC 00008762 F730 0x0 NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PciRoot 0x1 Pci 0x4 0x0 Pci 0x2...

Page 1167: ...er USB STORAGE DEVICE Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 In In Please type in your data Co DPM Di Enter Complete Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer USB STORAGE DEVICE Commit Changes and Exit Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit 0 x0 Input the description CD DVD Input Optional Data _ Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Ent...

Page 1168: ... Manager is displayed press Esc Go to PXE Boot network boot in Changing boot orders to execute the procedure Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1169: ...ce Manager Boot option example Device Boot type Application EFI Internal Shell EFI Shell boot EFI driver settings Windows FC STORAGE DEVICE Guest OS boot Guest OS is used CD DVD USB STORAGE DEVICE CD DVD boot CD DVD is used DPM NETWORK BOOT DEVICE PXE boot SC DPM is used Hitachi Compute Blade E55 HVM LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boo...

Page 1170: ...r Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Will be valid on next Add Boot Option boot Delete Boot Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1171: ...o the top of the boot options using a key or Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order Windows Change the order EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order Windows Change the order EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit EFI Internal Shell Discard Changes and Exit Windows ...

Page 1172: ...ot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1173: ...M LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager direct the system to continue to booting process v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the Boot Maintenance Manager v M...

Page 1174: ...r Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Will be valid on next Add Boot Option boot Delete Boot Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1175: ...d of the boot options using a key or Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows CD DVD Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows CD DVD Commit Changes and Exit CD DVD Discard Changes and Exit Windows EFI In...

Page 1176: ...Explorer Change the order CD DVD Change the order Windows EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1177: ... LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the Boot Maintenance Manager v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager direct the system to continue to booting process v Mo...

Page 1178: ...r Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Will be valid on next Add Boot Option boot Delete Boot Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1179: ...f the boot options using a key or Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows Commit Changes and Exit Windows Discard Changes and Exit EFI Internal Shell Move Select...

Page 1180: ...ot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer Change the order Windows Change the order EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1181: ... HVM LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager direct the system to continue to booting process v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Hitachi Compute Blade E55 HVM LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the Boot Maintenance Manager...

Page 1182: ...r Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Will be valid on next Add Boot Option boot Delete Boot Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1183: ...op and the second respectively using a key or Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows DPM Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Change the order EFI Internal Shell Change the order Windows DPM Commit Changes and Exit DPM Discard Changes and Exit Windows EFI In...

Page 1184: ... Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save File Explorer Change the order DPM Change the order Windows EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1185: ...der after booting the EFI Shell Otherwise the OS will not boot Especially when booting the OS after the LPAR Auto Activate sure to check if the guest OS boots up When multiple devices installing the OS in the File Explorer are displayed find out the target device from WWN or LUN on the display WWN is 0x50060E801025A260 for Fibre 0x50060E801025A260 0x0 0x0 for LUN Hitachi Compute Blade E55 HVM LPAR...

Page 1186: ...uddenly occurs during OS boot the service ratio allocated to LPAR might be low so that time out requirements for the OS are not satisfied If sudden rebooting occurs frequently display the LP System Logs screen and check whether the LP system log contains LP detects AP initialization timeout If it is contained review the service ratio allocated to the LPAR If actions above cannot complete the guest...

Page 1187: ...is an example for deleting CD DVD boot option 1 On the screen displayed at the logical BIOS boot select Boot Maintenance Manager Hitachi Compute Blade E55 LP LPAR Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz 1 99 GHz IA32 UEFI Ver 1 20 Continue This selection will Boot Maintenance Manager take you to the Boot Maintenance Manager v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry ...

Page 1188: ...n Boot Maintenance Manager Boot Options Modify system boot options Set Time Out Value Reset System v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager Go Back To Main Page Will be valid on next Add Boot Option boot Delete Boot Option Change Boot Order v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1189: ... X Acpi PNP0A08 0x0 Pci 0x1 Windows D 0x7 USB 0x3 0x0 Unit EFI Internal Shell 0x0 Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Spacebar Toggle Checkbox Esc Exit without Save Boot Maintenance Manager CD DVD X Windows EFI Internal Shell Commit Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit v Move Highlight Enter Select Entry Esc Exit without Save ...

Page 1190: ... pixels and 16 bit color If setting other bits for color replace the16 bit with bits you want to set Windows display setting It is recommended that the resolution should be set to 1024x768 pixel and 16 bit per color using the standard VGA driver Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 as the guest OS Set the OS following the steps below Set 1024x768 pixels for the screen resolution setting and ...

Page 1191: ...river and confirm that Driver is vesa If not change it to vesa Setting example Section Device Section Device Identifier Videocard0 Driver vesa EndSection 2 etc X11 xorg conf has not Section Monitor or Section Screen Monitor line create a new one referring to the examples described below Section Screen SubSection Display Modes and set Modes to 1024x763 If Modes does not exist create a new one Selec...

Page 1192: ...0 Depth 16 If setting 24 bits replace 16 with 24 Modes 1024x768 EndSubSection EndSection Here completed the Linux display setting Reboot the X server to reflect the resolution setting Set the resolution and pixel with etc x11 xorg conf If using GUI System Management Display or System Setting Resolution the setting of resolution or pixel might not be reflected correctly or the screen might be distu...

Page 1193: ... subscreen for deactivation power off is displayed select Yes Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Act 2 0 2 100 2048 2 Y 1 N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y 2 N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y N N BIOS 5 6 7 Deactivate LPAR 8 9 1 LPAR1 10 2 3 ge Up PageDown Page Down 4 Logical Information...

Page 1194: ...608 MB Assign Total 5 0 5 5120 2 Processors 8 8 Act Total 2 0 2 2048 2 Shared 0 Remain 2560 Dedicate 2 The power status Dea Deactivated power off or Act Activated power on F2 Mem Alloc Dsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Menu Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 0 2 100 2048 2 Y 1 N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 0 1 100 1024 0 Y ...

Page 1195: ...lar the hard disk might get damaged if you perform this operation while data is being accessed on the LPAR such as booting the guest OS We strongly recommend that you shutdown the guest operating system before deactivating it If LP auto shutdown is set the LPAR manager system will automatically shutdown once all the LPARs have been deactivated See Options for more on LP auto shutdown ...

Page 1196: ...lated to the devices will be deleted or reconfigured If this happens restore the backup files after hardware is replaced by service personnel For notes and restrictions on degeneration and isolation see Degeneration Isolation of Processors Memories and PCI Devices and Degeneration of Processor Cores Operations in need to back up files Create backup files before the following operations Changing ha...

Page 1197: ...onsole System console N A SC BSM N A In operation LPAR manager screen N A N A HVM Navigator N A N A System Web console System console N A SC BSM Available N A Not available Creating backup files Save LPAR manager configuration information to create backup files and keep them safe from loss For detailed operation information see the HVM Navigator User s Guide LPAR Configuration or ServerConductor B...

Page 1198: ... the background The display of the guest screen in the background is saved by LPAR manager in the internal buffer When that screen becomes the foreground it reflects to its most recent state on the serial terminal Even when a guest screen is in the background it does not lose any of the displayed information The following table describes main uses of each screen Screen Function LPAR manager screen...

Page 1199: ...ight remain on the screen and part of the screen is missing If you switch to the SMP command mode with Ctrl B and display the LPAR manager screen again it is not displayed correctly In this case press Alt t simultaneously to refresh the screen The screen refreshing operation Alt t works on all HVM screens If you continuously press an arrow key or a function key the screen might switch as pressing ...

Page 1200: ... the following two lines between lines of hiddenmenu and title serial unit 0 speed 115200 terminal timeout 10 serial console 3 Add the following line at the end of the kernel line console tty0 console ttyS0 115200 2 etc sysconfig init setting Change BOOTUP color to BOOTUP serial 3 etc sysconfig kudzu setting Change SAFE no to SAFE yes 4 etc inittab setting Add co 2345 respawn sbin agetty 115200 tt...

Page 1201: ...ters are reserved for the SVP console If the LPAR has the virtual COM console enabled from which connected to the LPAR guest screen you can operate the LPAR manager screen without this procedure See Virtual COM console function for how to use the virtual COM console Options System Control LP Dump Operation Pre State Auto Activation No Take LP Dump Execute LP Auto Shutdown No Shutdown State Ready L...

Page 1202: ...on for how to use the virtual COM console Menu LP_192168020 2009 02 18 13 28 33 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Shared FC Assignment Call LPAR Guest Screen s Allocated FC Informatio on Information...

Page 1203: ...an be moved up or down Subscreens with which selects a value 6 Page Down Scrolls the displayed page down Selects the smallest value in the subscreen for selecting values Screens that can be moved up or down Subscreens with which selects a value 7 F1 Used to specify the size of the memory to be allocated to LPAR in GB units Memory allocation subscreen for LPAR Configuration screen Standard sever bl...

Page 1204: ...yed and it cannot be selected by the cursor When the number of defined LPARs is 18 or larger arrow keys or are displayed LPAR manager Menu LPAR Configuration 10 F4 Deactivates powers off an LPAR When you press the F4 key a subscreen where you can select the LPAR that you want to deactivate is displayed Select the LPAR and press Enter The subscreen will not be displayed if the LPARs are entirely un...

Page 1205: ...te state or the Failure state its name will not be displayed and it cannot be selected by the cursor When the number of defined LPARs is 18 or larger arrow keys or are displayed LPAR manager Menu LPAR Configuration Sets the VLAN mode When you press the F7 key a subscreen where you can select the VLAN mode that you want to add is displayed Select the VLAN mode and press Enter VNIC Assignment Change...

Page 1206: ...Shared FC Assignment Date and Time Front Panel Note When the cursor position is reset it is repositioned over the item with the lowest LPAR number defined in the above screens and at the far left within the selectable row However the cursor position is not set again even if Alt t is executed while the subscreen is displayed during the LPAR setting or the like Forcibly displays the cursor Note If t...

Page 1207: ... and status of the defined LPAR are displayed 8 Shared FC assignment Assigns the shared mode Hitachi 4Gbps Fibre channel adapter to the LPARs The name and status of the defined LPAR are displayed 9 Allocated FC information Displays the configuration WWN of the FCs installed in LPAR manager 10 System configuration Sets the LPAR manager system configuration 11 System service state Displays the servi...

Page 1208: ...State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment LP System Logs Allocated FC Information Firmware Version Information 2 Tips F3 Activate F8 LPAR Screen F4 Deactivate F9 Save Configuration F5 Reactivate F6 Add Definition Alt t Screen Refresh F7 Remove Alt r LP System Shutdown 3 Co...

Page 1209: ...available on the LPAR where LPAR migration has failed 3 Comments Displays a brief description of the selected item 4 LPAR manager identifier Displays ID to identify LPAR manager configured in the system configuration screen See System configuration for the details of LPAR manager identifier 5 Error event detected Displays that LP system logs at the error level are detected When this is displayed c...

Page 1210: ...nal process If the guest OS hangs up deactivate the LPAR The disk will not be damaged because the LPAR has been disconnected from the disk 4 How to Reactivate an LPAR Press F5 React in this screen to display a subscreen place the cursor on an LPAR to reactivate on the subscreen and press Enter You can perform Reactivate only to activated LPARs Always perform Reactivate carefully because it is equi...

Page 1211: ...al capacity of memory the number of processors and number of virtual NICs of active LPARs Displays the configurable memory capacity left to be used by LPAR For Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware version 58 2X or earlier versions High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware version 78 2X or earlier veriosns 28 Error Event Detected Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Nam...

Page 1212: ...5 2 3 7 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 6 7 8 9 10 1 20 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Logical Information Physical Information Pro Shr Ded Mem VN 24 User Memory 4608 MB 21 Assign Total 5 0 5 5120 0 25 Processors 8 8 22 Act Total 2 0 2 2048 0 Shared 0 23 Remain 2560 Dedicate 2 26 Logical partition name F1 VCAssign F2 MemAllocDsp F3 Act F4 Deact F5 React F6 Add F7 Remove Esc Menu 27 Logical ...

Page 1213: ...cate to the LPAR 5 Shr Shared Processors LPAR manager firmware 58 2X 78 2X or lower Sets the number of shared processors allocated to the LPAR 0 6 Ded Dedicated Processors LPAR manager firmware 58 2X 78 2X or lower Sets the number of dedicated processors allocated to the LPAR 1 7 Scd Scheduling Mode LPAR manager firmware 58 3X 78 3X or later Sets a scheduling mode S Shared mode D Dedicated mode D ...

Page 1214: ...be automatically selected when the LPAR is activated Activate A Node is automatically selected NUMA enabled Displays the processor node assigned to the LPAR Processor node cannot be set Deactivate A Node will be automatically selected when the LPAR is activated Activate 0 to the maximum node number Node numbers displayed are assigned M Multiple nodes are assigned The following table shows displaye...

Page 1215: ...der when the LPAR is activated are assigned Memories of nodes other than those not set are not assigned Activate 0 to the maximum node number Only nodes displayed are assigned M Multiple nodes are assigned The following table shows displayed memory items NUMA setting Deactivate Activate Disabled A A Enabled A or 0 to the max 0 to the max or M 14 ID Idle Detection Enables disables the function that...

Page 1216: ...R BIOS 20 Page Up Page Down key Page Up Page Down Page Up Scrolls a page of the screen upwards Page Down Scrolls a page of the screen downwards 21 Assign Total Total resources allocated to LPAR Displays the total resources on all the LPARs Pro Displays the total number of logical processors Shr Displays the total number of logical processors in the sharing mode Ded Displays the total number of log...

Page 1217: ... a brief description of the selected item 27 Function Key Function key Displays the function keys that can be used on this screen F1 Specifies the size of the memory to be allocated to LPAR in GB units to specify a VC number or to display assignments of VC number TCP port F2 Displays the memory allocation status F3 Activates a LPAR F4 Deactivates a LPAR F5 Reactivates a LPAR F6 Adds a LPAR definit...

Page 1218: ...e 58 2X or earlier versions High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 2X or earlier versions Display only Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 3X or later versions High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 3X or later versions 5 Shr 6 Ded 7 Scd 8 Grp Can be changed only in shared mode 9 Srv Can be changed only in shared mode 10 Mem 11 VN Displa...

Page 1219: ...e a LPAR by pressing F3 in the Logical Partition Configuration screen Move the cursor over the LPAR that you want to activate on the displayed subscreen and press Enter This activation operation works only on LPARs that are deactivated 3 How to deactivate power off an LPAR Open the Logical Partition Configuration screen Move the cursor over the Sta column of the LPAR row that you want to deactivat...

Page 1220: ...AR whose number of shared processors you want to change and press Enter This will open a subscreen where you can select the number of processors Enter the desired number of processors and press Enter The number of shared processors can be changed only when the relevant LPAR is inactive You can assign the number of logical processors the same as or less than that of physical processors available in...

Page 1221: ... LPAR line to change the logical processor number and Pro column and press Enter to display a subscreen Type the number of logical processors to configure and press Enter on the subscreen You can assign the number of logical processors the same as or less than that of physical processors available in shared mode to an LPAR in shared mode If you assign more logical processors than physical processo...

Page 1222: ...signed to an LPAR With high performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware version 78 3X up to 1044480 MB memory can be assigned to LPARs 12 How to change the number of memory node to assign to an LPAR LPAR manager firmware version 59 2X 79 2X or later Place the cursor on the MN column of an LPAR line and press Enter to open a subscreen Set A or a node number and press Enter Assuming an LPAR...

Page 1223: ... screen Move the cursor over the ID column of the LPAR whose Idle Detection settings you want to change and press Enter This will open a subscreen Use the arrow keys or to select Yes or No and press Enter 15 How to activate an LPAR automatically Open the Logical Partition Configuration screen Move the cursor over the AA column of the LPAR which you want to set Auto Activate and press Enter This wi...

Page 1224: ... you remove an LPAR all the resources that had been assigned to the LPAR become unassigned 19 How to display memory allocation Press F2 in the Logical Partition Configuration screen to open the subscreen shown below This subscreen displays the memory allocation status in the address ascending order Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Scd Pro Grp Srv Mem VN PN MN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1...

Page 1225: ...t displayed ISOLATED Indicates that the area is isolated from the system target due to memory error detection Only the active LPARs are displayed Indicates an unallocated area Note 1 The memory area D000 0000 to FFFF FFFF for the IPF version LPAR manager and the memory area D000 0000 to FFFF FFFF are used for hardware So they are not displayed on this screen Note 2 A single guest memory area can b...

Page 1226: ... or in the subscreen that appears when pointing to the VC column of LPAR line and pressing Enter When the virtual COM console function is enabled and connected to the LPAR guest console via telnet LPAR guest screen connection by using the F8 key in the LPAR manager screen is still available In this case the LPAR guest screen displayed on the LPAR manager screen is preceded Logical Partition LPAR C...

Page 1227: ...unction is enabled and connected to the LPAR guest console via telnet LPAR guest screen connection by using the F8 key in the LPAR manager screen is still available In this case the LPAR guest screen displayed on the LPAR manager screen is preceded Logical Partition LP LPAR1 Virtual Console Name Sta Scd A AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Act D VC TCP Port N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea D N 0 N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea D 1 208...

Page 1228: ...olaris and press Enter OS Type can be changed only when the LPAR is deactivated Logical Partition LP Name Sta Scd LPAR1 Virtual Console A AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Act D N 1 BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea D VC TCP Port N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea D N 0 N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 D N BIOS 5 LPAR5 D Allocated LPAR Information to VC TCP Port N BIOS 6 7 VC TCP Lpar VC TCP Lpar 8 1 20801 1 9 20809 9 2 20802 10 20810 10 3 20803 11 20811 4 ...

Page 1229: ...er of logical processors For Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 2X or earlier versions High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 2X or earlier versions 11 Error Event Detected Logical Processor Configuration 1 2 3 5 Logical Processor Number Name Sta Pro 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 1 LPAR1 Act 2 0 1 8 2 LPAR2 Dea 1 D 3 LPAR3 Dea 1 D 4 LPAR4 Dea 1 D 5...

Page 1230: ...firmware 78 3X or later versions 11 Error Event Detected Logical Processor Configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 Logical Processor Number Name Sta Scd Pro Grp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 1 LPAR1 Act D 4 0 0 1 2 3 8 2 LPAR2 Act S 4 0 A A A A 3 LPAR3 Act S 4 0 A A A A 4 LPAR4 Act S 8 0 A A A A A A A A 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down 10 F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu ...

Page 1231: ...versions Assigns a logical processor to each LPAR No yet assigned S Assigned in the shared mode D Assigned in the dedicated mode only when the LPAR id deactivated Number displays the physical processor shown by the number is assigned only when the physical processor number is assigned if the dedicated LPAR is activated or deactivated Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 3X or later...

Page 1232: ...cessor number row and press Enter to display the subscreen Enter the physical processor number and press Enter Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 2X or earlier versions High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 2X or earlier versions Deactivate the LPAR and set it in the dedicated mode before executing this setting Title Guest status Remarks Activate Deactivate...

Page 1233: ...processors using the function Then If the physical processor number needs to be set to the logical processor reset it on the Logical Processor Configuration screen and save the LPAR manager configuration Without resetting an error occurs when you create LPAR configuration or update it from SC BSM 57 0X to 58 22 58 40 or later Added or reduced The setting is initialized If the physical processor nu...

Page 1234: ...22 78 40 or later Added or reduced The setting is initialized If the physical processor number needs to be set to the logical processor reset it on the Logical Processor Configuration screen and save the LPAR manager configuration Without resetting LPAR manager will automatically assign a physical processor Update to a specific version 2 Not added reduced The setting is initialized but the informa...

Page 1235: ...anager firmware 78 2X or earlier versions 18 Error Event Detected Physical Processor Configuration 1 Processor 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 Blade 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 Die 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 Core 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 5 Thread 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 Status RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN 9 Schedule D D S S S S S S Esc Menu 18 Error Event Detected Physical Processor Configuration 1 Processor 0 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 1236: ...ed or preventively degenerated High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 3X or later versions Cores are deactivated and degenerated 18 Error Event Detected Physical Processor Configuration 1 Processor 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 Blade 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 Socket 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 Core 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 Thread 0 1 0 1 0 1 0...

Page 1237: ...rocessor is at idle 11 Node Displays the physical processor node number When NUMA is disabled is displayed 12 Group Displays the number of a processor group 13 Name Sets a processor group name 14 Total Core Displays the total number of cores 15 Shr Core Displays the total number of cores in shared mode 16 Ded Core Displays the total number of cores in dedicated mode 17 Function Key Displays functi...

Page 1238: ...and press Enter Processor group 0 the default processor group cannot be deleted 5 How to deactivate a processor core High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware version 78 3X or later Display the Physical Processor Configuration screen Place the cursor on the State line of a processor column which you need to deactivate and press Enter to display a subscreen to confirm for the deacti...

Page 1239: ...NIC function is temporarily unavailable and communication with the management module and external networks break down LPARs also have the following symptoms depending on the scheduling mode of the physical processor Dedicated mode A failure occurs in the LPAR using the failed physical processor in the dedicated mode Other LPARs are not affected Shared mode LPARs using the processor in the shared m...

Page 1240: ... PCI card that has been inserted into a PCI slot or a PCI device that has been integrated in the server blade 9 Error Event Detected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot LPAR SNIC 0 Intel Corp USB Controller U6 M 1 Intel Corp GbE Controller G6 S 1 2 Intel Corp GbE Controller 13 S 2 3 Hitachi Ltd Fibre Channel 4Gbps 2Port S 12 S 4 Intel Corp GbE Controller E61 7 5 Intel Corp GbE Controlle...

Page 1241: ...n the PCI device has been assigned to a single LPAR the LPAR number that the PCI Device has been assigned to M The PCI device has been assigned to multiple LPARs S The PCI device is being shared The PCI device is not assigned 6 SNIC Shared NIC Number Displays the shared NIC number of a PCI device if it is a shared NIC Number Indicates that the PCI device is a shared NIC number Indicates that the P...

Page 1242: ...SCSI controller RAID controller N Network Interface Card NIC When SR IOV is enabled v is added to the end F Fibre channel U USB controller 5 Schd Displays the scheduling mode of a physical PCI device D Dedicated mode S Shared mode E Exclusive shared mode Virtual NIC PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot LPAR SNIC 0 Intel Corp USB Controller U6 M 1 LPAR1 LPAR1 PCI Device Mapping Informatio...

Page 1243: ...device With a virtual NIC the location is shown as err following the slot display indicates that the physical PCI device is blocked LPAR PciConfig Displays a location of a logical PCI device With a virtual NIC the location is shown as 8 Seg Bus Dev Fnc Host PciConfig Displays PCI configuration addresses of a physical PCI device and virtual NIC LPAR PciConfig Displays the PCI configuration address ...

Page 1244: ... of PCI devices selected by the cursor Switch USB devices assignment 11 Error Event Detected PCI Device Assignment 4 PCI Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 Type U N F N 6 Schd E S S S Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Act R 2 LPAR2 Dea A 3 LPAR3 Dea A 4 LPAR4 Dea A 5 2 3 7 6 7 8 9 10 1 8 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down 9 Selected PCI Device Information Vendor Device Name Slot Bus Dev Func 0 Intel Corp USB Contro...

Page 1245: ...abled v is added to the end F Fibre channel U USB controller 6 Schd Scheduling Mode Sets the PCI device s scheduling mode D Assigns to a LPAR in the dedicated mode IPF version LPAR manager only E Assigns to a LPAR in the exclusively shared mode S Assigns to a LPAR in the shared mode A PCI device available for changing its scheduling mode has on the right of Schd A PCI device Schd without is not av...

Page 1246: ...de of a PCI device to LPAR manager IPF version LPAR manager only F11 Scrolls the page to the left within the screen F12 Scrolls the page to the right within the screen LPAR manager firmware version 59 0X 79 0X or later F6 Changes the USB Auto Attach settings Shown when USB Auto Allocation to LPAR is set to Disable on the LP Options screen 11 Error event detected Error event detection Displays that...

Page 1247: ...the PCI Device Assignment screen Move the cursor over the intersection between the LPAR to which you want to assign the PCI device and the PCI device column and press Enter In the subscreen that appears move the cursor over A and press Enter To undo an assignment select 3 How to change LPARs to connect a PCI device Open the PCI Device Assignment screen Press F5 Attach Detach to display a subscreen...

Page 1248: ...AR is added 1 LPAR Number Displays LPAR numbers 2 Name LPAR Name Displays the LPAR name NO_NAME 3 Sta Status Displays the LPAR status Act Activate The LPAR is powered on Dea Deactivate The LPAR is powered off Fai Failure The LPAR cannot be used due to an unrecoverable failure Reboot LPAR manager when this happens Dea 4 VNIC Total number of VNIC Displays the number of VNICs assigned to LPARs 0 11 E...

Page 1249: ...Other than X55R4 NIC1 6 Virtual NIC Number VNIC Number Displays the VNIC number 7 VNIC Assignment Virtual NIC Assignment Assigns VNIC to each LPAR Not assigned Va Vd Sets the identifier for the network segment of the VNIC 1a 8h Sets the identifier for the network segment of the shared NIC When SR IOV is enabled v is added to the end Content on the screen depends on the LPAR manager firmware versio...

Page 1250: ...F NIC only All all IDs can be specified Untagged One ID from 1 to 4094 For LPAR manager firmware 57 30 or later versions Inter LPAR Packet filtering Displays the inter LPAR packet filter of the VNIC Disable Inter LPAR packets are transferred inside LPAR manager but not transferred outside LPAR manager Enable Inter LPAR packets are transferred outside LPAR manager but not inside LPAR manager Disabl...

Page 1251: ...r in LPAR manager expansion mode F11 Scrolls the screen to the left F12 Scrolls the screen to the right 11 Error event detected Error event detection Displays that LP system logs at the error level are detected When this is displayed check the LP system log in the LP System Logs screen See LP system logs for checking LP system logs To delete this display press the Esc key with this screen or open ...

Page 1252: ...Enter to display the subscreen Select a Device Type and press Enter The following table shows support for VNIC types per guest OS Guest OS VNIC Device type Standard server blade High performance server blade X55A1 X55A2 X55R3 X55S3 X55R4 X57A1 X57A2 Red hat Enterprise Linux 5 3 NIC1 NIC2 Red hat Enterprise Linux 5 4 NIC1 NIC2 Red hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 NIC1 NIC2 Red hat Enterprise Linux 5 7 NIC1...

Page 1253: ...ersion 59 5X 79 5X or later 8 Supported by LPAR manager firmware version 59 72 79 72 or later 2 How to Change VNIC assignment Display the Virtual NIC Assignment screen Deactivate the LPAR to change the virtual NIC assignment Place the cursor on the crossing item of the LPAR in line and the virtual NIC number in the column and press Enter to display the subscreen for selecting the assignment Place ...

Page 1254: ...PAR in line and the virtual NIC number in the column and press F6 Change MAC Add to display the subscreen Enter the new value and press Enter Values to set range from 00 00 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF The value reserved by LPAR manager however cannot be set Do not set a multicast address and broad cast address See 1 MAC address for Virtual NIC for details of the MAC address It is not recommen...

Page 1255: ... 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 1a 1b 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 Select VLAN mode 5 6 UNDEFINE 7 TAGGED 8 UNTAGGED 9 10 Cancel VLAN mode e Up PageDown Page Down VNIC Information No 0 MAC Address 00 00 87 62 f7 00 Shared NIC 1 Tag Undef Prm T Inter LPAR Packet Filtering Disable VLANID Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 1a 1b 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 D...

Page 1256: ...0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 5 VLAN ID count is less than 16 6 Do you continue 7 8 Yes 9 No 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down VNIC Information No 0 MAC Address 00 00 87 62 f7 00 Shared NIC 1 Tag Undef Prm T Inter LPAR Packet Filtering Disable VLANID F2 Disp F5 Set Prom Mode F6 Change MAC Addr F7 Select VLAN F8 Packet Filter Esc Menu Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3...

Page 1257: ...cuous setting Receiving packets Guest OS LPAR manager screen Disable Restricted Through Receives only packets addressed to the LPAR MAC Enable Restricted Receives only packets addressed to the LPAR MAC Through Receives all packets on the same network segment Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 1a 1b 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 5 6 7 8...

Page 1258: ...ssignment and Promiscuous Mode settings defined in the different network segment identifier from the list displayed with F2 Disp press the Esc key to close the current display move the cursor and press F2 Disp again Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 1a 1b 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 5 Promiscuous Mode Setting 6 7 Restricted 8 Throug...

Page 1259: ... Dea 0 NIC2 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 NIC2 5 6 VLAN ID Allocation Prom Mode Setting Display 7 Segment 2av TXRATE ASSIGN 10000Mbps ACT 0Mbps 8 1 7 8 9 LPAR VNIC Prm Mode VLAN ID TXRATE ACT 10 1 2 R Undef 10000 N 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 Down VNIC Information No 2 MAC Address 00 00 87 62 f7 02 Shared NIC 2 Tag Undef Prm R Inter LPAR Packet Filtering Disable VLANID TXRATE 10000 Mbps F2 Disp F5 Set Prom Mode F6 Change MAC ...

Page 1260: ...splays the promiscuous mode defined in the virtual NIC shown in 3 5 Mode Displays the VLAN mode defined in the virtual NIC shown in 3 6 VLAN ID Displays VLAN IDs defined in the virtual NIC shown in 3 from smaller to larger numbers 7 TXRATE ASSIGN LPAR manager firmware version 59 7X 79 7X or later For VF NIC Displays the total of transmission bandwidth limitation assigned to the LPAR 8 ACT LPAR man...

Page 1261: ...packets Packets to outside LPAR manager Use Inside LPAR manager Outside LPAR manager Disable Transferred Not transferred Transferred Enables inter LPAR communication in the same segment Used for inter LPAR communication only inside LPAR manager Enable Not transferred Transferred Transferred Disables inter LPAR communication in the same segment Used for improving independence and security of LPARs ...

Page 1262: ...f you press F8 Packet Filter when the shared NIC specified with the cursor is not defined in the network segment identifier the subscreen will not be displayed Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 1a 1b 2 LPAR2 Dea 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 0 5 6 Inter LPAR Packet Filtering 7 8 Disable 9 Enable 10 Disable ALL PageDown Page Down VNIC Information No...

Page 1263: ...ress the Enter key When pressing F1 on the subscreen you can enter a numeric value by the 100 Mbps Virtual NIC Assignment Virtual NIC Number Name Sta VNIC Device 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 LPAR2 Dea Set TXRATE of VF in Mbps 3 4 1000 5 6 100 00010000 100 7 8 1000 9 10 Max TXRATE 10000 Mbps PageDown Page Down VNIC Information F1 Input number in Mbps No 0 MAC Address Tag Undef Prm R Inter LPAR Pac...

Page 1264: ...of the FC selected by the cursor 11 Error Event Detected Shared FC Assignment Shared FC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Slot 0 0 5 Port 0 1 6 PortStatus A A Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea 1 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea 4 LPAR4 Dea 5 2 3 7 6 7 8 9 10 1 8 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down 9 Selected Virtual FC Port WWN Information LPAR WWPN WWNN Bus Dev Func vfcID 0 1 2338000087014002 2338000087014003 30 4 0 1 10 F11 ...

Page 1265: ...C Assignment Sets the shared FC port to each LPAR To assign the shared FC port select the shared FC port by eh cursor to display a subscreen and set vfcID 8 PageUp PageDown keys Page Up Page Down Page Up scrolls a page upwards Page Down scrolls a page downwards 9 Selected Virtual FC Port WWN Information Virtual FC Port WWN Information Displays the information on the shared FC port selected by the ...

Page 1266: ...nged cannot be changed 1 How to change the shared FC assignment Display the Shared FC Assignment screen Deactivate the LPAR to change the shared FC assignment Shared FC Assignment Shared FC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot 0 0 Port 0 1 PortStatus A A Name Sta 1 LPAR1 Dea 1 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea 4 LPAR4 Dea 5 6 7 8 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected Virtual FC Port WWN Information LPAR...

Page 1267: ...o LPAR1 Shared FC Assignment Shared FC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot 0 0 Port 0 1 PortStatus Name Sta Shared FC vfcWWNId Assignment 1 LPAR1 Dea 2 LPAR2 Dea 3 LPAR3 Dea 2 4 LPAR4 Dea 3 5 4 6 5 7 6 8 7 9 10 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Selected Virtual FC Port WWN Information LPAR WWPN WWNN Bus Dev Func vfcID 0 1 2338000087014002 2338000087014003 30 4 0 1 F11 Left F12 Right Esc Menu Shared FC ...

Page 1268: ... FC adapter powered on and performing properly Does the same symptom occur using a new FC cable Execute this if possible If the problem is not fixed the problem by checking and dealing with the above contact our maintenance personnel When PortStatus is C Config Check unavailable due to configuration problem check the following When 4 Gbps fiber channel adapter is used does the FC switch support N_...

Page 1269: ...79 1X or later 12 Error Event Detected Allocated FC Information 2 3 4 5 6 10 Vfc Seed Info 1 11 1 1 Lpar Slot Port SchMd vfcID WWPN WWNN 1 0 0 S 1 2338000087014002 2338000087014003 2 0 0 S 2 2338000087014004 2338000087014005 3 0 0 S 3 2338000087014006 2338000087014007 4 0 0 S 4 2338000087014008 2338000087014009 7 8 9 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down Esc Menu 12 Error Event Detected Allocated FC I...

Page 1270: ...ys the FC s World Wide Node Name Displays for anything other than the Hitachi FC adapter WWPN Migration World Wide Port Name Migration LPAR manager firmware version 59 1X 79 1X or later and LP model Enterprise Displays World Wide Name for FC temporarily used in migration For details see HVM Navigator User s Guide Migration Functions This item is displayed when WWN Migration is selected in item 1 9...

Page 1271: ...255 255 4 Default Gateway Default gateway Sets the IP address of the Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 5 BSM1 4 IP Address BSM1 4 IP addresses Sets the BSM IP addresses Sets IP address for a server blade on which ServerConductor Blade Server Manager BSM HvmSh command and HvmGetPerf command operate When LPAR manager is started the System Manager 1 4 IP Addresses which are set to the management module are app...

Page 1272: ...nglish Displays the alert message in English 10 Virtual Console Port Virtual COM console TCP port Set the TCP port to connect the LPAR guest console via telnet Can set only a TCP port that is connect to VC1 One is added to the TCP number of VC2 and consecutive TCPs as one is added to the number of VC When LPAR manager is booted the TCP ports serial numbers starting from 20801 that LPAR manager obt...

Page 1273: ...e with LPAR manager firmware 78 4X or later versions 6 BSM 1 4 Alert Port 1 Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 3X or earlier versions High performance with LPAR manager firmware 78 3X or earlier versions 1 Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 4X or later versions High performance with LPAR manager firmware 78 4X or later versions 7 Management Path 1 Display only 8...

Page 1274: ...s and press Enter to display a subscreen Enter the new address on the subscreen and press Enter The LP IP Address is set as 0 0 0 0 by default Without setting another address except 0 0 0 0 at the first boot however the LPAR manager system will not boot Do not set a multicast address and broad cast address 3 How to set the Subnet Mask Display the System Configuration screen Place the cursor on the...

Page 1275: ...e LPAR manager system will not boot The following table shows available VNIC System Numbers Item LPAR manager firmware version 57 1X or later 78 1X or later 59 21 or later 79 21 or later Range of numbers available for VNIC System number 1 to 128 1 to 1024 The value set for the virtual NIC System Number will be used as the fourth and fifth bytes of the MAC address of the virtual NIC inside in the L...

Page 1276: ...nager firmware version 78 71 or later When LPAR manager Operating Mode is changed from standard mode to expansion mode LPAR manager starts with memory to which 256 MB is added The memory for the guest OS is reduced by 256 MB This might cause some LPARs not to activate due to a memory shortage if the maximum memory has been used in LPAR manager standard mode For LPAR manager operating mode see LPAR...

Page 1277: ...M3 IP Address 0 0 0 ss 0 0 0 0 BSM4 IP Address 0 0 0 Standard ss 0 0 0 0 BSM1 Alert Port 20079 Expansion ss 0 0 0 0 BSM2 Alert Port 20079 ss 0 0 0 0 BSM3 Alert Port 20079 ss 0 0 0 0 BSM4 Alert Port 20079 ss 0 0 0 0 Management Path Default VNIC System No 1 F10 Update System Config Esc Menu System Configuration LP ID LP_192168020 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address 192 1...

Page 1278: ...4 IP Address LP System will shutdown after a few minutes BSM1 Alert Port BSM2 Alert Port 20079 LP CLI6 IP Address 0 0 0 0 BSM3 Alert Port 20079 LP CLI7 IP Address 0 0 0 0 BSM4 Alert Port 20079 LP CLI8 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Management Path Default VNIC System No 1 F10 Update System Config Esc Menu System Configuration LP ID LP_192168020 Alert Language Japanese Virtual Console Port 20801 LP IP Address ...

Page 1279: ...tem Config and select No in the confirmation screen that opens All changed settings will be restored to their original values You cannot move to other screens while changes are being made To move to another screen press F10 select either Yes or No and conclude the change process Because it takes time for the changed settings to be reflected in the LPAR manager system the movement to another screen...

Page 1280: ...anager is running Thus the setting which is not saved will disappear when LPAR manager is rebooted Execute F9 Save configuration in the LPAR manager Menu screen to save the new setting If you change a BSM IP address BSM alert port or alert language in this screen the setting values are effective only during LPAR manager running and not saved with F9 Save Configuration When you reboot LPAR manager ...

Page 1281: ...ger firmware version 58 8X or earlier High performance server blade with LPAR manager firmware version 78 8X or earlier 16 Error Event Detected System Service State System Service 12 Virtual LAN Segment State 1 SVP Access RUN PORT NIC V 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 BSM Access RUN 13 a 14 D A D 3 HA Monitor RUN b D A D 4 NTP SYNC c D 5 Force Recovery d D Hardware Component Internal Path State 6 BMC RUN 15 Connect...

Page 1282: ...egment State 1 SVP Access RUN PORT NIC V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 BSM Access RUN 13 a 14 D A D 3 HA Monitor RUN b D A D 4 NTP SYNC c D d D e f g 5 Force Recovery h Hardware Component Internal Path State 6 BMC RUN 15 Connect Success Link Yes PageUP Page UP PageDown Page Down Esc Menu 7 System Service State shared PCI Device Port State 2 2 8 Type N F N 9 NIC 1 2 PORT NIC G2 5 4 10 0 11 U A D 1 U A D 2 3 4 ...

Page 1283: ... in the error state UNKNOWN No updates from the service patrol STOP 4 NTP NTP LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7X or later Displays NTP status SYNC Synchronization with NTP is successful NO SYNC Synchronization with NTP is not executed ERROR Synchronization with NTP failed INACTIVE Synchronization with NTP is cancelled With multiple NTP servers configured having synchronized with any NTP ser...

Page 1284: ... unrecoverable error Not available because the status is unknown D 8 TYPE Device Type Shows the type of the PCI device in the shared scheduling mode on the PCI Device Assignment screen N Network interface Card NIC When SR IOV is enabled v is added to the end F Fibre channel 9 NIC Shared NIC number Displays the shared NIC numbers when the device type is N shown in 8 Displays when the device type is...

Page 1285: ...How to recover System Service to a normal state Display the System Service State screen Since the cursor is already placed on Force Recovery press Enter to display a subscreen Select Yes and press Enter Force Recovery processing takes one to three minutes to complete During the period you will not be able to perform any operations on LPAR manager Operation with Force Recovery should be done with n...

Page 1286: ...tings for setting the BMC time Set the logical SEL System Event Log time to each LPAR by which the physical SEL detected by LPAR manager is reported to each LPAR Any values modified on this screen will not be saved automatically in the LPAR manager System and lost at the LPAR manager boot Press F9 Save Configuration on the LPAR manager Menu screen explicitly to save the newly set value To change t...

Page 1287: ...one Current RTC 1 LPAR1 Act 2009 02 18 14 15 33 0 2 LPAR2 Dea 2009 02 18 14 15 33 0 3 LPAR3 Dea 2009 02 18 14 15 33 0 4 LPAR4 Dea 2009 02 18 14 15 33 0 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 2 17 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down System Date and Time Date and Time 2009 02 18 14 15 33 Time Zone 0 00 Adjust LPAR Time 9 10 11 12 Select LPAR SystemEventLog time mode Local Time GMT 18 F6 Change System Date and Time ...

Page 1288: ...Act Activated The LPAR is powered on Dea Deactivated The LPAR is powered off Fai Failure The LPAR cannot be used due to an unrecoverable failure Reboot LPAR manager when this happens Dea 5 Time Mode SEL date and time mode Sets the SEL date and time mode GMT GMT Greenwich Mean Time mode Local Time Local time mode The SEL time mode can be set when LPAR SEL Time has been displayed in the display time...

Page 1289: ...atically adjust the SEL date and time You can specify it on 1 hour basis and the minimum value is 12 hours and the maximum value is 14 hours You cannot set when the SEL date and time mode is GMT The SEL time zone is set only when LPAR SEL Time is displayed in the display time selection LPAR manager System time zone 8 Current RTC Init RTC Differential RTC Initial RTC Displays in decimal the differe...

Page 1290: ...t update RTC time are cleared at that time LPAR manager firmware version 59 41 79 41 or later LP System Time Synchronizes RTC time and SEL time of an LPAR with LPAR manager system time Specified Zone In a specified time zone synchronizes RTC time and SEL time of an LPAR with LPAR manager system time UTC Synchronizes RTC time and SEL time of an LPAR with UTC time All LPAR manager firmware versions ...

Page 1291: ...r later Configures an IP address for NPT servers This item is effective only when TimeSynch is set to NTP Configure an NTP server with NTP version 3 or 4 None 17 PageUp PageDown keys Page Up Page Down Page Up scrolls the SEL Date and Time frame upwards Page Down scrolls the SEL Date and Time frame downwards 18 Function Key Function key Displays function keys available on this screen F6 Changes the...

Page 1292: ... Date and Time LPAR manager firmware version 58 6X 78 6X or earlier LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7X or later only with TimeSync Disable 10 Time Zone LPAR manager firmware version 58 6X 78 6X or earlier LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7X or later only with TimeSync Disable 11 Adjust LPAR Time 12 Comment Display only 13 Select Setting Display LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7...

Page 1293: ...lier On the Date and Time screen place the cursor on Adjust LPAR Time and press Enter to show a subscreen Select a target LPAR on the subscreen and press Enter System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync SVP 6 7 Time Adjust LPAR 8 9 0 All LPAR 10 1 LPAR1 2 LPAR2 3 LPAR3 e Up PageDown Page Down System Date and Time 4 LPA...

Page 1294: ...Different form LPAR manager Unknown UTC Same as LPAR manager Different form LPAR manager Unknown Unknown Same as LPAR manager Different form LPAR manager Unknown Adjusts LPAR manager system time using Adjust LPAR Time Adjusts LPAR manager system time using the guest EFI or guest OS Not using Adjust LPAR Time On the Date and Time screen place the cursor on Adjust LPAR Time and press Enter to show a...

Page 1295: ...u have set NTP perform the following steps On the Date and Time screen synchronize the LPAR time using Adjust LPAR Time System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync SVP 6 7 Select Source time to adjust LPAR time 8 9 HVM System Time 10 Specified Zone UTC Down Page Down System Date an Adjust LPAR time with Specified Zone D...

Page 1296: ...bscreen Select your time zone and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Date and Time LPAR RTC Name Sta Time Mode Date and Time Time Zone 1 LPAR1 Dea yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2 LPAR2 Dea yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 3 4 5 6 Select Display Time 7 8 LPAR RTC 9 LPAR SEL Time 10 Last Activated Last Deactivated RTC Last Modified PageDown Page Down System Date and Tim Date and Time yyy Display LPAR SEL Time 0 Adjust LPA...

Page 1297: ...press Enter The time display switches to the selected time information Logical Partition LPAR Date and Time LPAR SEL Time Name Sta Time Mode Date and Time Time Zone 1 LPAR1 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 2 LPAR2 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 3 4 5 6 Select Display Time 7 8 LPAR RTC 9 LPAR SEL Time 10 Last Activated Last Deactivated RTC Last Modified PageDown Page Down System Dat...

Page 1298: ...o display a subscreen for selecting the time to display Place the cursor on LPAR SEL Time and press Enter The SEL time of the LPAR appears Place the cursor on any column of year month day hour minute second of System Event Log Time in the LPAR line to change the SEL time and press Enter The subscreen appears according to the item to be changed Select the desired time with arrow keys PageUp and Pag...

Page 1299: ...Server 2 Automatic time Synchronization Disable SVP Disable NTP server0 1 NTP server1 1 Enable SVP NTP NTP server0 1 NTP server1 1 1 When a domain name is specified None is displayed The following table shows what is displayed on the Date and Time screen when the NTP settings of BMC are imported using Import Config BMC time settings Date and Time screen Import Config TimeSync NTP Server 1 NTP Serv...

Page 1300: ...minutes is not Daylight saving time is not supported 9 How to operate LPAR manager using NTP LPAR manager firmware version 58 7X 78 7x or later a Time synchronization with a management module recommended Shut down all OSs On the Date and Time screen place the cursor on LPAR RTC and press Enter to open the subscreen Select LPAR SEL Time and press Enter Logical Partition LPAR Date and Time LPAR RTC ...

Page 1301: ...Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 2 LPAR2 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 Logical Partition LPAR Date and Time LPAR SEL Time Name Sta Time Mode Date and Time Time Zone 1 LPAR1 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 2 LPAR2 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 3 4 5 6 Select Display Time 7 8 LPAR RTC 9 LPAR SEL Time 10 Last Activated Last Deactivated RTC Last Modified PageDown Pag...

Page 1302: ...7 8 Select Setting Display 9 10 Setting NTP p PageDown Page Down System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disable 7 8 Select NTP Server 9 10 Disable NTP SVP e Up PageDown Page Down System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disable System...

Page 1303: ...ted Last Deactivated RTC Last Modified PageDown Page Down System Date and Tim Date and Time yyy Display LPAR SEL Time 0 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disable F6 Change System Date and Time F7 Change System Time Zone Esc Menu Logical Partition LPAR Date and Time LPAR SEL Time Name Sta Time Mode Date and Time Time Zone 1 LPAR1 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 2 LPAR2 De...

Page 1304: ...open the subscreen Select Setting and press Enter 7 8 Select NTP Server 9 10 Disable NTP SVP e Up PageDown Page Down System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disable System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disable 7 8 Select Setting Di...

Page 1305: ...open the subscreen Select Disable and press Enter 7 8 Select NTP Server 9 10 Disable NTP SVP e Up PageDown Page Down System Date and Time Date and Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone 9 00 Adjust LPAR Time Setting Import Config None TimeSync Disable System Service Virtual LAN Segment State SVP Access RUN PORT NIC V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BSM Access RUN a D A D HA Monitor RUN b D A D NTP SYNC c D d D System...

Page 1306: ... Time to display a subscreen showing the current time Type any time you need and press Enter AD year is limited from 2000 to 2099 13 How to change the LPAR manager system time zone Display the Date and Time screen Press F7 Change System Time Zone to display a subscreen for selecting a system time zone With arrow keys PageUp and PageDown select a system time zone you need and press Enter Shut down ...

Page 1307: ...Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 2 LPAR2 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 Logical Partition LPAR Date and Time LPAR SEL Time Name Sta Time Mode Date and Time Time Zone 1 LPAR1 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 2 LPAR2 Dea Local Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 9 00 3 4 5 6 Select Display Time 7 8 LPAR RTC 9 LPAR SEL Time 10 Last Activated Last Deactivated RTC Last Modified PageDown Page Down Sys...

Page 1308: ...he NTP server Before starting LPAR manager we recommend that you set your server s system date to a year between 2000 and 2037 Otherwise we cannot guarantee normal operation of the date and time configuration on this screen LPAR s SEL time and LPAR manager display time can be set at any year between 2000 and 2099 AD We cannot fully guarantee normal operations of LPAR manager date and time processi...

Page 1309: ...LPAR manager screen Initializes an LPAR s NVRAM non volatile RAM Copies NVRAM between LPARs Collects the LPAR manager dump Specifies the LPAR manager hang up detection Standard server blade with LPAR manager firmware version 58 8X or earlier High performance server blade with LPAR manager firmware version 78 8X or earlier 19 Error Event Detected Options System Control LP Dump Operation 1 Pre State...

Page 1310: ...own LP Auto Shutdown Specifies whether or not to shut down the LPAR manager system if all LPARs have become deactivated Yes Shuts down the LPAR manager system No Does not shut down the LPAR manager system When turning off the system power with UPS set LP AutoShutdown to Yes When LPAR migration is performed LP Auto Shutdown is disabled the same as when the value is No No 19 Error Event Detected Opt...

Page 1311: ... or Disables USB Auto Allocation Enable USB is automatically attached to an LPAR when the LPAR is activated Disable USB is automatically attached to only the LPAR specified Enable 7 Save Changed Config Format Save Changed Config Format LPAR manager firmware version 59 0X 79 0X or later Sets whether or not to save a format changed at LPAR manager boot or information that is not yet saved at LPAR ma...

Page 1312: ...his operation cannot be performed if Select is displayed in 14 or 15 The cursor cannot move over this column Item Behavior when Copy NVRAM performed EFI driver settings Not copied Boot order copied 14 LPAR from which the NVRAM is copied Displays the LPAR from which the NVRAM will be copied Select will be displayed if no LPARs have been defined 15 LPAR to which the NVRAM is copied Displays the LPAR...

Page 1313: ... operating the system TSC 18 Save Time Config Saving time configuration automatically LPAR manager firmware version 59 41 79 41 or later Sets whether or not to automatically save adjusted time configuration of LPAR manager system time and LPAR time in physical RTC and LPAR manager configuration information Enable Enables the Save Time Config Disable Disables the Save Time Config 19 Error Event Det...

Page 1314: ... Place the cursor on Pre State Auto Activation under System Control and press Enter to display a subscreen Use the arrow keys or to select Yes or No and press Enter 3 How to change LP Auto Shutdown Display the LP Options screen Place the cursor on LP Auto Shutdown under System Control and press Enter to display a subscreen Use the arrow keys or to move the cursor to select Yes or No and press Ente...

Page 1315: ...Operating an application such as Media Player which uses the multimedia timer 7 How to change the USB Auto Allocation to LPAR LPAR manager firmware version 59 0X 79 0X or later Place the cursor on USB Auto Allocation to LPAR and press Enter to display a subscreen Select Enable or Disable on the subscreen and press Enter See the PCI Device Assignment screen for setting details 8 How to change Save ...

Page 1316: ...d 2 Selecting Config save and Shutdown saves the information and then performs shutdown Selecting Shutdown performs shutdown without saving configuration Not supported Place the cursor on Save Changed Config Format and press Enter to show a subscreen On the subscreen select Enable or Disable and press Enter 9 How to skip the confirmation prompt subscreen when activating a LPAR Display the LP Optio...

Page 1317: ...on the confirmation prompt subscreen and pressing Enter You can also stop displaying the confirmation prompt subscreen by reactivating the LPAR selecting Yes Don t ask anymore on the confirmation prompt subscreen and pressing Enter 11 How to change Screen Switching Character Display the LP Options screen Place the cursor on Ctrl l and press Enter to open a subscreen Enter the new character on the ...

Page 1318: ...ace the cursor on the Execute field under Take LP Dump and press Enter to display a subscreen Select Yes on the subscreen LP System Logs All level Level Date Time Event Info 2009 02 18 11 41 59 LP dump transfer succeeded Info 2009 02 18 11 41 58 LP dump generation succeeded Error 2009 02 18 11 41 58 LP damage is occurred Esc Menu If there was LP Dump file it will be overwritten Do you want to cont...

Page 1319: ...mp collection indicating LPAR manager dump transfer succeeded Options System Control LP Dump Operation Pre State Auto Activation No Take LP Dump Execute LP Auto Shutdown No Shutdown State Ready LP ErrorWatching Yes Confirmation Activation Yes Deactivation and Reactivation Yes Screen Swit Completed Please check LP System Logs screen LPAR LP NVRAM Operation Clear NVRAM LPAR4 Copy NVRAM From LPAR1 To...

Page 1320: ...AR manager dump transfer succeeded LP system log entries after 10 minutes or more or if you get the LPAR manager dump transfer failed log entry another failure might have occurred Contact maintenance personnel Repeat this operation to obtain multiple LPAR manager dumps 13 How to change a value to be based for timer counter calculation LPAR manager firmware version 59 2X 79 2X or later You need to ...

Page 1321: ...irmation LP ErrorWatching Yes Activation Yes PhyCPU C State C3 Enable Deactivation and Reactivation Yes USB Auto Allocation Save Changed Config LP TimerCounter Base Setting ing Character LP TimerCounter Bas Ctl l TSC Cpu Frequency on LPAR1 m LPAR1 To LPAR2 Esc Menu Options System Control LP Dump Operation Pre State Auto Activation No Take LP Dump Execute LP Auto Shutdown No Shutdown State Ready Co...

Page 1322: ...using the guest OS or NTP time synchronization for the guest OS Enable the Save Time Config on the Options screen Options System Control LP Dump Operation Pre State Auto Activation No Take LP Dump Execute LP Auto Shutdown No Shutdown State Ready Confirmation LP ErrorWatching Yes Activation Yes PhyCPU C State C3 Enable Deactivation and Reactivation Yes USB Auto Allocation to LPAR Enable Save Change...

Page 1323: ...screen Save the configuration on the Menu screen using F9 Save Configuration With LPAR manager firmware version 59 41 79 41 or later enabling Save Time Config is recommended You can change settings for Save Time Config while LPAR manager is running If you reboot LPAR manager after operating it for a long time with Save Time Config disabled or if a system failure in LPAR manager or failover with N ...

Page 1324: ...12 Logical partitioning manager System event log Alert Alert ID 0x1531 Message HVM configuration was saved RC 6 LP System Logs All level Level Date Time Event Info yyyy mm dd hh mm ss HVM saved configuration ...

Page 1325: ...reshes at a rate specified by the Sampling time For Standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware version 58 2X or earlier versions High performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 2X or earlier versions 25 Error Event Detected LPAR Usage 15 Sampling time 5 16 Proc D 3 3 S 5 5 Name Shr Ded SrvRatio Srv Srv ms Dsp ms Busy Dsp PC 1 LPAR1 2 100 40 0 2000 48 2 4 0 9 N 2 LPAR2 1 1000 84...

Page 1326: ...ng time 5 16 Proc D 3 3 S 5 5 17 Grp All Name Scd Pro Grp SrvRatio Srv Srv ms Dsp ms Busy Dsp PC 1 LPAR1 S 2 0 2000 48 2 4 N 2 LPAR2 D 1 0 1000 847 84 7 3 LPAR3 D 1 1 1000 1000 100 0 4 LPAR4 D 1 1 1000 885 88 5 5 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 7 8 9 10 1 18 Ded LPAR Total 3000 2732 91 0 19 Shr LPAR Total 100 40 0 2000 48 2 4 20 LPAR Total 2780 34 7 21 SYS1 378 4 7 22 SYS2 932 11 6 23 System Total 80...

Page 1327: ...isplays the proportion of the LPAR s service time to the service time of physical processors running correctly that are assigned to the shared mode LPAR If the Service Percentage calculated inside LPAR manager does not match the specified Service Ratio is displayed on the right side If it does match is not displayed Grp ALL is displayed Displays when the LPAR is in the dedicated mode Grp ALL is di...

Page 1328: ...displayed Displays when the LPAR is in the dedicated mode Grp ALL is displayed 14 PC Processor Capping Displays the enabled disabled status of the Processor Capping function as configured in the LPAR Configuration screen Y Processor Capping has been enabled N Processor Capping has been disabled The LPAR is in the dedicated mode The LPAR has not been activated 15 Sampling time Sampling time Sets th...

Page 1329: ...hared mode If the displayed values include Srv ms with in LPARs in the shared mode this value has Srv ms displays the total service time of LPARs in shared mode when SRV with is included is displayed in that value Dsp ms displays the total execution time of LPARs in shared mode Busy displays the busy ratio of all LPARs in the shared mode This value is obtained by the following formula Busy the tot...

Page 1330: ... LPARs SYS1 and SYS2 Busy displays the system busy ratio This value is the total busy ratio in the LPAR manager system and is obtained by the following formula Busy system busy time system service time x 100 24 PageUp PageDown Page Up Page Down Page Up scrolls the LPAR Usage frame upwards Page Down scrolls the LPAR Usage frame downwards 25 Error Event Detected Error event detection Displays that L...

Page 1331: ...screen data Console Log Data 10 Error Event Detected Logical Partition LPAR Front Panel Name Sta Liquid Crystal Display Dump CLD CLE 1 LPAR1 Act S0001 Active Dump Dsp Ers 2 LPAR2 Act S0001 Active Dump Dsp Ers 3 LPAR3 Act S0001 Active Dump Dsp Ers 4 LPAR4 Dea B0002 System Power off Void Dsp Ers 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 7 8 9 10 1 8 PageUp Page Up PageDown Page Down 9 Dump logical partition Esc Menu ...

Page 1332: ...d Void Dump 6 CLD Console Log Display Displays the selected LPAR s guest screen data console log data Dsp 7 CLE Console Log Erase Deletes the selected LPAR s guest screen data console log data from the buffer in LPAR manager Ers 8 PageUp PageDown key Page Up Page Down Page Up scrolls the Front Panel frame upwards Page Down scrolls the Front Panel frame downwards 9 Comment Comments Displays a brief...

Page 1333: ...nes If the console log data exceeds the number of lines in the buffer it is overwritten sequentially from the oldest data 4 How to collect console log data Display the Front Panel screen Place the cursor on the CLD column in the LPAR row whose console log data you would like to display Press Enter to open a subscreen Use the arrow keys or to select Yes on the subscreen and press Enter It will take...

Page 1334: ...e oldest log To display the detailed information place the cursor on the LP system log and press Enter Levels of LP system logs Level Description Action 1 Error An LPAR manager system error occurred See the action in LPAR manager system logs screen messages 2 Warning This is not an error but you should pay attention to it 3 Information This event does not apply to the above levels 8 Error Event De...

Page 1335: ...lays the time when the LP system log was collected 6 Event Event Displays the event of the LP system log 7 PageUp PageDown PageUp PageDown Page Up Scrolls a page up for the screen display Page Down Scrolls a page down for the screen display This item is displayed when the system log of two pages or more is retained 8 Error event detected Error event detection Displays that LP system logs at the er...

Page 1336: ...ions 9 Error Event Detected Firmware Version Information System F W 7 Hitachi Fibre Channel F W 1 LP F W VV RR TT KK XX XX XX Slot 00 XXXXXX 2 BIOS VV RR 3 BMC VV RR Esc Menu 8 Error Event Detected Firmware Version Information System F W 6 Hitachi Fibre Channel F W 1 LP F W Act VV RR TT KK XX XX XX Slot 00 XXXXXX LP F W Alt VV RR TT KK 2 BIOS VV RR 3 BMC VV RR LP License Information 4 LP Model Ent...

Page 1337: ...se Enterprise model 5 LP Serial LP Serial Number Displays the LP serial number 6 Hitachi Fibre channe l F W Hitachi Fibre chann el Firmware Version Displays the FC adapter firmware version of the slot number 7 PageUp PageDown Page Up Page Down PageUp Scrolls a page upward to show a screen PageDown Scrolls a page downward to show a screen 8 Error Event Detected Error event detection Displays that L...

Page 1338: ...d Detected an LP system log at the error level When this is displayed check the LP system log on the LP system logs screen referring to LPAR manager system logs screen messages To delete this message press the Esc key on the LPAR manager menu screen or open the LP system logs screen 3 Error Event Detected Menu LP_192168020 2009 02 18 14 20 19 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Lo...

Page 1339: ...14 20 19 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment LP System Logs Allocated FC Information Firmware Version Information The operation is prohibited due to the other command ...

Page 1340: ...ation Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment ogs Allocated FC Information Shutdown LP system sion Information Shutdown Cancel Tips F3 Activate F8 LPAR Screen F4 Deactivate F9 Save Configuration F5 Reactivate F6 Add Definiti...

Page 1341: ... Continue rmation Yes No Tips F3 Activate F8 LPAR Screen F4 Deactivate F9 Save Configuration F5 Reactivate F6 Add Definition Alt t Screen Refresh F7 Remove Alt r LP System Shutdown Configure logical partitioning of processors and memory Move Cursor Enter Select LP Ver VV RR TT KK Menu LP_192168020 2009 02 18 14 20 58 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Logical Processor Configurat...

Page 1342: ...ctor Blade Server Manager install ServerConductor Advanced Agent to all the LPARs Menu LP_192168020 2009 02 18 14 21 28 Logical Partition Configuration System Configuration Logical Processor Configuration System Service State Physical Processor Configuration Date and Time PCI Device Information LP Options PCI Device Assignment LPAR Usage VNIC Assignment Front Panel Shared FC Assignment LP System L...

Page 1343: ...ual NIC differs from a physical LAN controller in specifications and operation 1 Virtual NIC With LPAR manager up to four network segments can be set for virtual NICs By defining connections between these network segments and virtual NICs you can perform the Inter LPAR Communication without using physical NICs Network segments can be set on the Virtual NIC VNIC Assignment screen The identifiers fo...

Page 1344: ...troller However communication among shared NICs in different network segments needs to use an external network via a physical LAN controller The following table shows the number of physical LAN controllers to be assigned to LPAR manager Item LPAR manager firmware version 57 1X or later 78 1X or later 59 0X or later 79 0X or later Max number of physical LAN controllers to be assigned to LPAR manage...

Page 1345: ... assigned to segment 2a LPAR2 Virtual Network LPAR manager LPAR1 Segment 1a Segment 1b External network Port0 Physical NIC 1 0 1 0 1 Port1 Segment 2a Port0 2 2 Physical NIC 2 Shared NIC Shared NIC When a shared NIC is used the guest OS recognizes it as 1 Gb LAN Intel PRO 1000 or Intel 82576 specifications With a shared NIC function virtual NIC of 1 Gb LAN Intel 82546 or Intel 82576 specifications ...

Page 1346: ... communication Up to two physical LAN controllers can be assigned to LPAR manager The following table describes relation between the number of Shared NICs and network segment identifiers Shared NIC number Port number Network segment identifier 1 0 1av 1 1bv 2 0 2av 1 2bv In the figure above communication between Shared NIC 0 of LPAR1 assigned to Segment 1av and Shared NIC 1 of LPAR2 assigned to Se...

Page 1347: ...R IOV update it to the one that supports SR IOV Contact your reseller for details In LPAR manager mode you cannot update NIC firmware Change to Basic mode before updating NIC firmware Setting SR IOV See Hitachi Compute Blade Emulex Adapter User s Guide for Hardware for details Setting LPAR manager expansion mode On System Configuration screen for LPAR manager set the LPAR manager operating mode to...

Page 1348: ...itch module slot1 PCI Slot0 Port0 Port0 of the PCI NIC0 4 Port1 Port1 of the PCI NIC0 Port2 Port2 of the PCI NIC0 5 Port3 Port3 of the PCI NIC0 PCI Slot1 Port0 Port0 of the PCI NIC1 2 Port1 Port1 of the PCI NIC1 Port2 Port2 of the PCI NIC1 3 Port3 Port3 of the PCI NIC1 Expansion Slot0 Port0 LAN switch module port of the switch module slot 2 6 Port1 LAN switch module port of the switch module slot ...

Page 1349: ...1 2b 4b Port2 3 3a 5 5a Port3 3b 5b PCI Slot1 Port0 Not installed Installed Shared 2 2a Port1 2b Port2 3 3a Port3 3b Expansion Slot0 Port0 Installed Dedicated Not installed Port1 Port2 Port3 Expansion Slot1 Port0 Installed Shared 4 4a Not Installed Port1 4b Port2 5 5a Port3 5b Virtual NIC Function Specifications 1 MAC addresses Virtual NIC system number 0 to 128 with LPAR manager standard mode The...

Page 1350: ... MAC addresses used by the system with Virtual NIC number 0 to 7 are identical to those with LPAR manager standard mode MAC addresses used by the system with Virtual NIC number 8 to 15 are provided in the following string format Those MAC addresses are automatically generated by LPAR manager MAC address format XX XX XX YY YY ZZ Calculate the offset value from the base point with the followings to ...

Page 1351: ...ormat in the system with Virtual NIC number 129 or greater MAC address is automatically created by LPAR manager MAC address format XX XX XX YY YY ZZ Calculate the offset value from the base point with the followings to generate a MAC address 1 LPAR 1 to 16 Virtual NIC system number 129 x 1024 LPAR number 1 x 16 Virtual NIC number 2 LPAR 17 to 32 Virtual NIC system number 129 x 1024 256 LPAR number...

Page 1352: ...calculation result 0x0001 0 0 Base point 0x0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 After adding virtual NIC System Number 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0000 Rearrange bits in endian conversion Hexadecimal value 0000 0000 It is not recommended to change the MAC address If the MAC addresses are changed make sure that it is not the same MAC address port on the network If there is more than one identical MAC address on a...

Page 1353: ... NIC only active backup is available However these functions should be used with communication packet monitoring Probe and ARP monitoring turned off and the delay before a team member is activated Activation Delay updelay set to 60 or more At less than 60 communication with external networks may become impossible upon activation Receiving operation when MTU Maximum Transfer Unit values are not the...

Page 1354: ...dth may not be fully used Addition and Deletion of Shared NICs VF NICs to from the activated LPAR It is not possible to add or delete a shared NIC or VF NIC to from the activated LPAR To change the configuration all the LPARs have to deactivate once Configuration takes a few minutes Therefore it is recommended that you set the configuration before you activate LPARs NIC Communication during Physic...

Page 1355: ...e frames are tagged with the IEEE802 1Q format If untagged is specified only one VLAN ID can be specified Tagged port This setting is for receiving tagged frames IEEE802 1Q from more than one specified VLAN group A virtual NIC for which tagged port is specified can receive both tagged frames with the specified VLAN ID and untagged frames Tagged frames sent from a virtual NIC with the tagged port s...

Page 1356: ...escribed in the following table VLAN mode of receiving ports Receiving frame Untagged Tagged VLAN ID Tagged VLAN ID Undef Received Rejected Rejected Tag Received Received Rejected Untag Received Give tags Rejected Rejected Sending Frames MAC address table selects ports for transfer among ports in which conditions for received frames VLAN mode and VLAN ID correspond with each other Then frames will...

Page 1357: ... VLAN so you can divide the broadcast domain for each virtual NIC Assign one virtual NIC to multiple broadcast domains within the same virtual network By making VLAN settings for the virtual NIC from the guest OS you can use the functions equivalent to the physical NIC to operate tags and perform frame filtering In addition on the Virtual NIC VNIC Assignment screen specify tagged port for the virt...

Page 1358: ...al NIC Setting Example When setting TagVLAN on OS Set the Tagged mode and VLAN ID to the corresponding port on the Virtual NIC VNIC Assignment screen of LPAR manager When sending receiving Tagged packets to from the external switch without setting TagVLAN on OS Set the Untagged mode and VLAN ID to the corresponding port on the Virtual NIC VNIC Assignment screen of LPAR manager When sending receivi...

Page 1359: ... on the Virtual NIC VNIC Assignment screen Port Speed Port1 Port128 Auto Negotiation This setting cannot be changed Supports 1000BASE TX VLAN mode and VLAN ID Port1 Port128 VLAN mode Undef default Tagged Untagged Only one 1 VLAN mode per port can be set VLAN ID Tagged Up to 16 VLAN IDs out of the range from 1 to 4094 or Assign all ID Untagged Only one 1 VLAN ID out of the range from 1 to 4094 Prom...

Page 1360: ...on This setting cannot be changed Supports 10 100 1000 10000BASE TX VLAN mode and VLAN ID Port1 Port16 VLAN mode if the version of Emulex NIC firmware is 4 6 x x Undef Default Tagged Untagged Only 1 VLAN mode can be set per LPAR VLAN mode if the version of Emulex NIC firmware is 10 2 x x Tagged default Untagged Only 1 VLAN mode can be set per port VLAN ID Tagged Up to 16 VLAN IDs out of the range ...

Page 1361: ...Auto Negotiation This setting cannot be changed 10GBASE KR 1000GBASE KX VLAN mode and VLAN ID Port1 Port16 VLAN mode When Emulex NIC firmware version is 4 6 x x Undef Default Tagged Untagged Only 1 VLAN mode can be set per port VLAN mode When Emulex NIC firmware version is 10 2 x x Tagged Default Untagged Only 1 VLAN mode can be set per port VLAN ID Tagged Only All ID can be specified Untagged Onl...

Page 1362: ...cription LAN switch Cm2 Network Element Configuration is required DCB switch Automatic migration of port profiles AMPP function for the DCB switch is used How to use Promiscuous function 1 How to set the promiscuous mode You can set the promiscuous mode to an LPAR on the Virtual NIC VNIC Assignment screen one of the LPAR manager screens See 4 How to change the promiscuous mode for details 2 Perfor...

Page 1363: ... captured cannot be captured Capturing packets on different network segment Packets on the different network segment cannot be captured even if it is on the same VNIC segment Communication route Promiscuous mode Restricted Through LPARx LPARy None None LPARx External PC 1 LPARx Broadcast LPARy LPARx None None LPARy External PC 1 LPARy Broadcast can be captured cannot be captured None no packet ...

Page 1364: ... switch of LPAR manager connected to the guest OS The following figure shows how to transfer a packet when the bridge is implemented in the guest OS When the promiscuous mode is set to Through for each port1 of the virtual LAN switch 1a and 2a communication with nodes is available across the bridge That is because port1 of both virtual LAN switches can transfer packets not to the MAC address of LP...

Page 1365: ... NIC 1a and cannot communicate with external nodes When the promiscuous mode is set to Through LPAR3 can communicate with external nodes That is because port3 of the virtual LAN switch 1a can transfer packets to the changed MAC address of LPAR3 NIC 1a LPAR1 LPAR2 LPAR3 1a 1a 1a 1 2 3 16 17 Virtual LAN Switch 1a External Network 1 LPAR manager 2a 2a Changed MAC x Through setting x Restricted settin...

Page 1366: ...y multiple NIC cards is used When using teaming and or load balancing it is recommended to verify the operation in advance or set promiscuous mode to Through See LAN Advanced Function Manual Appendix in Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 SOFTWARE GUIDE for details of teaming and load balancing ...

Page 1367: ...the adapter simultaneously In the shared FC there are two ways in which the FC adapter can be shared FC Port assigned respectively to an LPAR This method involves assigning one LPAR exclusively to a port on a FC adapter that has two or more ports Thus by using the FC Port Partition function with a FC adapter with two ports two LPARs can share a FC adapter FC Port assigned to multiple LPARs One por...

Page 1368: ... PCI Slot7 Port0 FC switch module port0 in I O board module slot7 1 1 Port1 FC switch module port1 in I O board module slot7 Expansion Slot0 Port0 FC switch module port in switch module slot2 3 Port1 FC switch module port in switch module slot2 Port2 FC switch module port in switch module slot3 Port3 FC switch module port in switch module slot3 Expansion Slot1 Port0 FC switch module port in switch...

Page 1369: ...u are using needs to support the NPIV N_Port ID Virtualization function For the storage set the virtual WWPN WWNN hereafter referred to as vfcWWPN vfcWWNN The vfcWWPN vfcWWNN is created by LPAR manager from the vfcID set in the Shared FC Assignment screen You can check the created vfcWWPN vfcWWNN on the LPAR manager Shared FC Assignment screen and the Allocated FC Information screen 3 Set Adapter ...

Page 1370: ...I Device Assignment screen and Shared FC Assignment screen of LPAR manager See Assign PCI devices to LPARs and Assign shared FCs to LPARs for details Set the scheduling mode of FC adapters in shared mode on the PCI Device Assignment screen Set the followings on the Shared FC Assignment screen Shared FC ports to be assigned to user LPARs WWN identifier to be assigned to shared FC vfcID 4 Set storag...

Page 1371: ...ger bit C 3 bits Platform ID 010 D 4 bits vfcID enter on the Shared FC Assignment screen vfcID E 1 bit FC port No on FC card Port0 0 Port1 1 Port2 0 Port3 1 F 6 bits Relative slot No in which FC card is installed Mezzanine card slot 0 Port0 111111 Port1 111111 Port2 111110 Port3 111110 Mezzanine card slot 1 Port0 111101 Port1 111101 Port2 111100 Port3 111100 For the relative slot number for PCI ca...

Page 1372: ...s When you boot a guest OS on such LPAR the guest OS may detect the unallocated port as follows but the OS activity will not be affected Microsoft Windows SCSI described as Unassigned Hitachi Shared FC Device and a RAID controller device can be seen from the device manager Linux By inputting the lspci command the following device is informed the head bb dd f may be different depending on the PCI s...

Page 1373: ...example with an I O slot expansion unit connected to server blade 0 With server blade 1 replace slot numbers of I O board modules 0 1 with slot numbers 2 3 Replace I O adapter slot numbers as well With an I O slot expansion unit connected to one server blade Slot number of server blade I O slot expansion unit Relative slot number Server blade number Slot number of I O board module I O adapter slot...

Page 1374: ...r blades 2 and 3 replace slot numbers of I O board modules 0 3 with slot numbers 4 7 Replace I O adapter slot numbers as well With I O slot expansion units in 2 blade SMP configuration Slot number of server blade I O slot expansion unit Relative slot number Server blade number Slot number of I O board module I O adapter slot number 1 8 mode 1 4 mode port 0 1 4 mode port 1 0 0 0 8 8 1 9 9 2 10 10 3...

Page 1375: ... configuration With the server blade 4 5 6 and 7 replace slot numbers of I O board modules 0 7 with slot numbers 8 15 Replace I O adapter slot numbers as well With I O slot expansion units in 4 blade SMP configuration Slot number of server blade I O slot expansion unit Relative slot number Server blade number Slot number of I O board module I O adapter slot number 1 8 mode 1 4 mode port 0 1 4 mode...

Page 1376: ...ode 1 4 mode port 0 1 4 mode port 1 7 31 31 3 8 32 32 9 33 33 10 34 34 11 35 35 12 36 36 13 37 37 14 38 38 15 39 39 2 4 0 72 72 1 73 73 2 74 74 3 75 75 4 76 76 5 77 77 6 78 78 7 79 79 5 8 80 80 9 81 81 10 82 82 11 83 83 12 84 84 13 85 85 14 86 86 15 87 87 3 6 0 88 88 1 89 89 2 90 90 3 91 91 4 92 92 5 93 93 6 94 94 7 95 95 7 8 96 96 9 97 97 10 98 98 11 99 99 12 100 100 13 101 101 14 102 102 ...

Page 1377: ...rtitioning manager Slot number of server blade I O slot expansion unit Relative slot number Server blade number Slot number of I O board module I O adapter slot number 1 8 mode 1 4 mode port 0 1 4 mode port 1 15 103 103 ...

Page 1378: ...is route is used only when LPAR manager creates LPAR SEL 4 When NTP server is used the system unit timer is updated Server blade LPAR HVM Timer counter Lapse of time Timer counter Timer counter Lapse of time Timer interrupt Lapse of time LPAR manager boot time OS boot time L U Timer counter Interrupt timer SEL time difference SEL timer L Chassis SVP time L BMC time zone 2 LPAR manager time zone Gu...

Page 1379: ...al time between LPAR manger system time and OS system time 2 LPAR SEL timer Used as the reference for LPAR SEL time Virtualized SEL timer differential time between LPAR manager system time and OS system time 2 LPAR SEL time zone Time zone for LPAR SEL time Used when LPAR manager creates SEL OS system time Guest OS time Calculated by adding time shown at LPAR manager boot and a lapse of time on the...

Page 1380: ...se it is easy to operate You can also configure the LPAR timer with EFI on the LPAR manager screen See the HVM Navigator User s Guide for details 1 Open Boot Setting Menu on HVM Console and click Boot Order Update 2 Place EFI SHELL on the top in the Boot Order pane and click Commit Click the arrow button to HVM Menu to select 0 HVM Main Menu from the drop down list ...

Page 1381: ...1330 12 Logical partitioning manager 3 When the HVM Main Menu is displayed click Activate LPAR to activate the target LPAR 4 Click Screen to open the activated LPAR screen ...

Page 1382: ...mezone Time setting input format date mm dd yyyy time hh mm ss timezone s hh mm Set the local time with the time command The Timezone command shows the timezone which will not affect EFI or OS behavior The Timezone setting is not essential 6 Click Deactivate LPAR on HVM Main Menu to deactivate the target LPAR ...

Page 1383: ...1332 12 Logical partitioning manager 7 Open Boot Setting Menu on HVM Console and click Boot Order Update 8 Place LU to boot on the top in the Boot Order pane and click Commit ...

Page 1384: ...AR manager operating modes on the LPAR manager screen Item Standard server blade High performance server blade LPAR manager standard mode LPAR manager expansion mode LPAR manager standard mode LPAR manager expansion mode Max number of LPARs to be activated 16 16 58 7X or later 30 58 8X or later 60 60 Memory used by LPAR manager 1280 MB 1536 MB 1536 MB 1536 MB Max total number of shared NICs and vi...

Page 1385: ...ger standard mode When you select Yes to Save LPAR manager configuration and reboot LPAR manager system Do You Continue LPAR manager will be automatically rebooted 3 When LPAR manager expansion mode is changed to LPAR manager standard mode assignment of virtual NICs 8 to 15 will be forcibly initialized which cancels all assignment 4 You can configure this setting with the LPAR manager screen HvmSh...

Page 1386: ...AR manager expansion mode to LPAR manager standard mode When you select Yes to Save LPAR manager configuration and reboot LPAR manager system Do You Continue LPAR manager will be automatically rebooted 4 The setting for assigning a segment duplicately can be available in LPAR manager expansion mode while a segment is assigned not duplicately in LPAR manager standard mode 5 When you have assigned a...

Page 1387: ...elect Yes to Save LPAR manager configuration and reboot LPAR manager system Do You Continue LPAR manager will be automatically rebooted 4 A definition per port is provided with LPAR manager expansion mode with LPAR manager standard mode a definition per controller is provided 5 When you have defined a segment by the port in LPAR manager expansion mode the settings remains even if the mode is chang...

Page 1388: ...operation of multiple LPARs enabled the operating guest screens by using the virtual COM console instead of the system console Up to 16 LPARs can be simultaneously connected to the virtual COM console Background inoperable LPAR manager screen LPAR1 screen LPAR2 screen LPAR16 screen System console Operable only on the foreground Only one console can be connected in the system Virtual COM console Mu...

Page 1389: ...en the cursor is positioned at the VC column in the LPAR line 2 In a subscreen shown when Enter is pressed with the cursor positioned at the VC column in the LPAR line This TCP port is used in 2 Connection to LPARs This operation is always available regardless of whether LPARs are active or inactive Logical Partition LPAR Configuration Name Sta Pro Shr Ded Srv Mem VN ID AA AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Act ...

Page 1390: ... to Comment when you place the cursor the VC column of the LPAR line via telnet This TCP port is used in 2 Connecting to LPARs This operation can be done regardless of the status of an LPAR active or deactive at any time Logical Partition LP LPAR1 Virtual Console Name Sta Scd A AC PC VC PB 1 LPAR1 Act D VC TCP Port N N BIOS 2 LPAR2 Dea D N 0 N N BIOS 3 LPAR3 Dea D 1 20801 N N BIOS 4 LPAR4 Dea D 2 ...

Page 1391: ... can operate the guest OS 3 If the connection fails a popup message informing Error will be displayed Connection failures are as follows TCP IP communication to the LPAR manager IP address is unavailable Check the path to the LPAR manager IP address If changing a TCP port the TCP port might not be connected depending on the terminal OS setting or account privilege Confirm that the TCP port is avai...

Page 1392: ...ーン操作不可 LPAR2 スクリーン操作不可 LPAR1 スクリーン操作可能 LPAR2 スクリーン操作可能 LPAR3 スクリーン操作不可 CTL L Switch to the LPAR manager screen F8 Switch to the selected LPAR screen The selected LPAR can be operated by the system console However it cannot be operated by the virtual COM console LPAR1 screen operable LPAR2 LPAR3 LPAR1 LPAR2 screen inoperable LPAR manager inoperable Background Foreground System console Virtual ...

Page 1393: ...f characters might not be pasted 256 or more characters per line for the Windows command prompt and 1024 or more characters per line for Linux prompt cannot be pasted In addition if 1024 or more characters are pasted for the Linux prompt Linux might hang up or unexpected screen operation might occur The number of characters that can be pasted without being lost is less than 256 per line for the Wi...

Page 1394: ...ical server See the ServerConductor manual for the details While LPAR manager is processing a request from SeverConductor operation on the LPAR manager screen is not available For further details see Notifying that requests from an external management console are being processed When using ServerConductor Deployment Manager make sure to set PXE boot network boot For further details see Setting the...

Page 1395: ...e by executing HvmSh Then it transfers the collected data to the external File Transfer Protocol FTP server to save it as a file This function allows memory dump even if a logical server error occurs such as when OS dump data cannot be collected by the guest OS and can be used for analyzing logical server errors The figure below shows a schematic diagram of the guest memory dump function LPAR mana...

Page 1396: ...igits hhmmss Collection time 24 hour notation in the order of hour 2 digits minute 2 digits and second 2 digits nnn Serial number for file division with the unspecified number of digits In the case of two digits or less 0 is not attached at the high order digits The LPAR manager s system time is used for collection date and time 8 Command functions Input information Enter the following information...

Page 1397: ...rver We recommend the following combinations of OSs and software programs providing the FTP server function as an external FTP server If there is any combination other than those specified the operation is not guaranteed OS Software providing the FTP server function Windows Server 2003 IIS 6 0 Windows XP Professional IIS 5 1 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 5 vsftpd Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 1 vsftpd H...

Page 1398: ...led and the target LPAR is deactivated forcibly If this deactivation fails the target LPAR is blocked When this state occurs contact the maintenance personnel If an unrecoverable error occurs during guest memory dump in the LPAR manager machine that performs guest memory dump the memory dump operation is cancelled When this state occurs contact the maintenance personnel If an LPAR manager Assist e...

Page 1399: ...tes the LPAR manager dump collection command is also available 4 Dump data transfer method Memory dump data is transferred from the LPAR manager machine to the external FTP server through the management LAN The LPAR manager dump data are compressed and a GZIP file is created by the LPAR manager machine The file is transferred to the external FTP server using the FTP protocol 5 Dump data format Sam...

Page 1400: ...mum concurrent collection 1 Another dump data collection request to the same LPAR manager machine cannot be accepted during memory dump operation 10 Condition for data collection Except for the notes described later LPAR manager dump is always enabled How to use the LPAR manager dump collection command For the basic usage of HVM management commands that are essential when using the LPAR manager du...

Page 1401: ...s in the network between the LPAR manager machine and external FTP server during LPAR manager dump the LP dump operation is cancelled When this state occurs check the network configuration between LPAR manager machine and external FTP server If the problem is still not solved check whether the FTP software of the external FTP server is running correctly If the problem still remains contact the res...

Page 1402: ... and busy ratio for the LPAR manager system The HvmGetPerf command obtains the latest values of performance statistics collected in a second It supports a summary output format for higher legibility and a text format that is easy for other programs to handle Installing the HvmGetPerf command The HvmGetPerf command is provided as an executable command on the command prompt of Windows Server 2003 Wi...

Page 1403: ...e command obtains all operation overview items lpar LPAR number Specify the LPAR to obtain an overview of operation using an integer value If this option is omitted the command outputs information for all LPARs filename output destinati on file name The command outputs an overview of operation in text format to the specified file If the specified file exists the contents of the file are erased and...

Page 1404: ...ysical processors mounted in the LPAR manager system It shows the busy ratio and the mounting location of each processor all pcpu GetPerf ver 1 2007 10 01 11 13 27 GMT 9 00 LP IP 192 168 0 26 Name 1_Blade3 LPAR Total Busy 54 msec 1 3 SYS1 5 msec 0 1 SYS2 48 msec 1 2 Proc Shr 2 Ded 2 Proc 000 2 90 Blade 3 Die 0 Core 0 Thread 0 Proc 001 2 50 Blade 3 Die 0 Core 1 Thread 0 Proc 002 2 90 Blade 3 Die 1 ...

Page 1405: ...Dsp ms Busy Dsp and PC Logical processor information defined for each LPAR is output It includes the logical CPU number whether it is dedicated or shared Shr or the number of a dedicated physical processor LPAR manager execution time Hyper running wait time Ready and LPAR execution time Used If the lpar option specifies LPAR the command outputs information only for the specified LPAR If the lpar o...

Page 1406: ... 0 Omitted in the middle 1 DB_SRVM 0 1 1000 12 1 2 2 2 DB_SRVS 2 0 100 100 0 2000 31 1 5 21 1 3 APP_SRVM 0 1 1000 12 1 2 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Omitted in the middle 1 0 0 1002 4 12 1 1 0 0 0 Omitted in the middle 2 0 992 0 31 2 1 1000 0 0 Omitted in the middle 3 0 1 994 1 12 3 1 0 0 0 The rest is omitted LP system information LPAR information Physical processor information LPAR1 Logical proces...

Page 1407: ...a shared CPU with processor capping 1 indicates a shared CPU without processor capping and 2 indicates a dedicated CPU Information for 16 LPARs is displayed regardless of whether the LPARs are defined For LPARs not defined the LPAR name is shown as and other items shown as 0 If the lpar option specifies an LPAR number the command outputs information only for the specified LPAR all lpar Logical CPU...

Page 1408: ...tPerf command Error message If an error occurs during command execution the following message is output to the standard error If an error occurs the command process terminates with the termination code described in the message In a Windows batch file you can obtain the termination code by referencing the ERRORLEVEL environment variable immediately after executing the HvmGetPerf command echo off lo...

Page 1409: ...bind 0x01030001 Network bind operation has failed Check the communication configuration Alternatively wait for a while and retry failed to activate session 0x01030002 Failed to establish a communication session Check the number of SC BSM devices concurrently connecting to the LPAR manager and whether other machines are executing the HvmGetPerf command simultaneously Cannot Write File or Given Too ...

Page 1410: ...command from a management server which is set to neither BSM nor LP CLI IP address will be ignored by LPAR manager The management server needs to have PFM agent in operation Management Server PFM Agent LPAR manager 2 Perform a statisitcs command 3 Receive the result of the statistics command PFM Web Console 1 Collect statistics 4 Transmit the statistics 5 Displays the report Segment A Segment A Se...

Page 1411: ...r later versions 57 30 or later versions With LPAR manager not supporting LP CLI IP Address set the IP address of the management server to BSM IP Address With LPAR manager supporting LP CLI IP Address set the IP address of the management server to LP CLI IP Address Setting the management server IP address to BSM IP Address Routing table Example 1 route p add 172 16 0 2 mask 255 255 255 254 192 168...

Page 1412: ...ms Manager HCSM is software for operating large scale systems A system administrator can manage hardware resources and power supply monitor operation status and operate N M cold standby and hardware See the Compute Systems Manager Software User s Guide for details ...

Page 1413: ...o total the operation status to multiple LPAR managers on the network and to view the monitored history picked up from various viewpoints For details see the HVM Navigator User s Guide Monitoring Functions Configuration viewer Overview of the configuration viewer The configuration viewer is a function to display the LPAR manager system configuration list and LPAR manager system block diagram For d...

Page 1414: ...dating LP model is user updatable See LP Model up Procedure for details LPAR manager version upgrade LPAR manager version is user upgradable See the Compute Blade 2000 LPAR Manager Version Upgrade Guide LPAR Manager Revision Update Guide for details ...

Page 1415: ...Install the NIC driver Server blade Set EFI 1 Set the LP mode 2 SAN security Change the setting of WWPN WWNN 1 See EFI setting for the details 2 See LP mode setting for the details Migration from LPAR manager environment to basic environment The following table describes setting and checking items when migrating from LPAR manager environment to the Basic environment Item Setting and Checking Befor...

Page 1416: ...te the IP address before migration See MAC Address for Virtual NIC for the NIC MAC address For setting middleware see the middleware manual Change the setting of SAN security on the storage side because the LPAR manager environment and Basic environment WWPN WWWNN are different For WWPN WWNN for the shared FC see FC Shared WWPN WWNN For the setting change of SAN security see the manual of your sto...

Page 1417: ...en the other system tries to connect to LPAR manager over TLS the LPAR manager certificate is sent to the other system The other system can authenticate the LPAR manager by verifying the server certificate LPAR manager server certificate LPAR manager can use self signed certificates or certificates signed by a certificate authority CA as the LPAR manager server certificate When the other system au...

Page 1418: ... 30 characters 4 6 1 Required item 2 Alphanumerical characters hyphones and period can be used for this item 3 Uppercase alphabetic characters can be used 4 Alphanumerical characters hyphones periods pluses single quotations commas left parentheses right parentheses slashes colons equals question marks and spaces can be used for this item 5 Printable ASCII characters can be used 6 This can be fill...

Page 1419: ...the server certificate signed by CA Use the opr HvmCACertificateRegist command to register the signed server certificate to the LPAR manager The certificate can be registered only in the LPAR manager for which the CSR is created Use the opr HvmSecureCmmConfigSave command to save the LPAR manager configuration information and back up that before shutting down or rebooting the LPAR manager Authentic...

Page 1420: ...gh security algorithm can be used Security strength and LPAR manager management interfaces For LPAR manager you can change security strength of management interfaces shown in the following table When the security strength is changed LPAR manager interfaces will use the following protocol and encryption methods shown in the table below See Encryption algorithm supported by LPAR manager for the sett...

Page 1421: ...t period Encryption algorithm supported by LPAR manager The following tables show encryption algorithm supported by LPAR manager SSL TLS Cipher suites Security strength Default High TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA Server certificate Security strength Public key algorithm Def...

Page 1422: ... NIC firmware version 4 1 334 2801 or lower Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported 4 2 433 604 or later Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Emulex 10 Gb NIC 10 Gb Switch Module Emulex 10 Gb NIC 10 Gb Switch Module is supported under the following conditions When updating Emulex 10 Gb NIC driver to 4 2 390 6 or later f...

Page 1423: ...ween the transfer rate of the FC port and that of the Fibre channel card In this case change the transfer rate of the FC port to the same rate of your Fibre channel card using the portcfgspee command Using shared FC The following table shows whether or not a shared FC is available Connection configuration Shared FC available or not 4 Gbps fiber channel adapter 8 Gbps fiber channel adapter Connecte...

Page 1424: ... in the table below Type of FC adapter Firmware version of FC adapter Connection type 4Gbps adapter 2x 08 12 or later Auto or Point to Point 2x 08 10 or earlier Point to Point 8Gbps adapter All versions Auto or Point to Point For connection directly to the storage available only for 8 Gbps adapters set the connection type to Loop ...

Page 1425: ... on the non primary server blades are not updated LPAR manager configuration file of the primary server blade is used for SMP configuration The following table shows the relation between the server blade configuration and LPAR manager configuration files Server blade configuration LPAR manager configuration file used SMP Configuration Slot number 2 blade SMP 0 to 1 LPAR manager configuration file ...

Page 1426: ...ansion card slot 0 Expansion card slot 1 Onboard LAN PCIe slot 1 PCIe slot 0 Expansion card slot 0 Expansion card slot 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 With 4 blade SMP configuration the following performance might be slower than that with 1 blade or 2 blade SMP Performance when more logical processors in shared mode than physical processors are assigned Virtual COM console Tim...

Page 1427: ...et 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Core 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 Thread 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 State ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT Status HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG HIG Group 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Schedule S S S S S S D D D D D D S S S S a Processors in the socket must belong to the same processor group b ...

Page 1428: ...orm Module LPAR manager does not support TPM Trusted Platform Module If with TPM installed disable TPM SUPPORT in EFI Setup Menu Click Advanced Trusted Computing and set TPM SUPPORT to Disable Notes on adding NIC A network segment identifier 1a 2a 2b is changed automatically when changing to a shared NIC after adding NIC You need to check LPAR network configuration or settings by the change when L...

Page 1429: ...ble below Emulex 10 Gb 2 port LAN adapter Emulex 10 Gb 4 port LAN adapter Emulex 10 Gb 2 port CNA adapter Emulex 10 Gb 4 port CNA adapter Emulex 10 Gb 2 port CNA board Item LPAR manager firmware version 59 3X 79 3X or lower 59 4X 79 4X or later Emulex 10 Gb firmware version 4 1 334 2801 or lower 4 2 433 604 or later 4 6 348 0 or later Supported Not supported Not supported when Emulex 10 Gb NIC and...

Page 1430: ... memory is 256 MB iup to 32 processors can be installed Figures in parentheses show the recommended value Setting LPAR manager system Set a unique value to VNIC System number per LPAR manager including Compute Blade 1000 Compute Blade 2000 and Compute Blade 320 If a value overlaps with that of another LPAR manager network communication is not available on LPAR because the MAC address of the virtua...

Page 1431: ...een in use When using a guest screen set the serial console If it is already set skip this setting For how to set the serial setting see Serial setting when using the guest screen Using Linux When you use Linux on LPAR manager change the settings to those described in the Hitachi Compute Blade Software Guide Using Windows When you use Windows on LPAR manager change the settings to those described ...

Page 1432: ... performance improvement Not supported Notes on ServerConductor Blade server manager VF NIC view and settings are not supported Do not backup configuration information using SC BSM while the configuration is being saved on the LPAR manager screen or HVM Navigator or LPAR migration is being performed If you do the backed up configuration is incomplete Discard the back up obtained during the saving ...

Page 1433: ...x0 Without E Extra 1 is added before x Ex1 1x1 Without E Extra 1 is added before x x Server blade number Slot numbers for an I O slot expansion unit LPAR manager screen SC BSM I000 I015 20 35 I100 I115 36 51 I200 I215 52 67 I300 I315 68 83 I400 I415 84 99 I500 I515 200 215 I600 615 216 231 I700 I715 232 247 A physical processor number for LPAR manager can be specified between 0 and 31 When you spe...

Page 1434: ... at the disk duplicate installation as Basic does If executing one of the following before five reboots are completed automatic reboots stops and DPM will halt while still operating Then follow the two instructions 1 Do not connect to the guest console from the LPAR manager screen 2 Do not connect via the remote desktop The LPAR to be a master client and LPAR to be a target client should have the ...

Page 1435: ...void interference between LPARs which changes LPAR performance depending on the workload status of another LPAR assign processors following the description below Assign an even number of processors to an LPAR Although you can select processors to use on the Logical Processor Configuration screen when assigning dedicated processors do not assign any thread in the same core to different LPARs Thread...

Page 1436: ...Assigning Shared processors to LPARs dedi shared 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LPAR1 dedicated 2 LPAR2 dedicated 4 Core Thread 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 LPAR1 dedicated 3 LPAR2 dedicated 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Core Thread 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LPAR1 shared 2 LPAR2 shared 3 Core Thread 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 LPAR1 sha...

Page 1437: ...eration or isolation If there is something wrong with it reconfigure as necessary When all processors are degenerated in a nonprimary server blade in SMP configuration the server blade itself is degenerated including memories and PCI devices in it Degeneration of Processor Cores When the State of a processor core on the Physical Processor Configuration screen is Wrn Warning the number of recoverab...

Page 1438: ...taching the USB device execute the following operation For instability in firmware or OS behavior or OS hangup attach the USB device If it does not recover the OS behavior deactivate the LPAR and then activate it again For the USB device that remains displayed on the OS attach the USB device and then detach it again For improper keyboard operation any key might remain pressed on the OS If so execu...

Page 1439: ...R Although the minimum memory allocation size to LPAR is 256 MB the minimum memory size that the guest OS can work differs depending on the type and version of OS the number of the logical processors middleware or application 1 TB or greater memory is supported only by the following OSs Do not use that for other OSs If you do the OS might not work properly Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 200...

Page 1440: ...cation Example LPAR 1 3 GB LPAR 2 1 GB LPAR 3 1 GB LPAR 4 1 GB LPAR 5 1 GB LPAR 6 1 GB LPAR 7 1 GB LPAR 8 1 GB LPAR9 1 GB LPAR 10 20 GB Memory allocation Example LPAR 1 3 GB blank 1 GB LPAR 3 1 GB blank 1 GB LPAR 5 1 GB blank 1 GB LPAR 7 1 GB blank 1 GB LPAR9 1 GB blank 20 GB 1 Activates LPARs with an even number 2 Activates LPARs with 24 GB memory LPAR manager screen Example Memory Allocation Dis...

Page 1441: ...e discontinuous blank memories beyond the memory size of address 0 to the top SYS1 1 displayed on the Memory Allocation Display and you allocate all those blank memories to LPARs LPAR activation fails Memory allocation Example LPAR 1 3 GB LPAR 2 4 GB LPAR 3 1 GB LPAR 4 4 GB LPAR 5 1 GB LPAR 6 4 GB LPAR 7 1 GB LPAR 8 4 GB LPAR 9 20 GB Memory allocation Example LPAR 1 3 GB blank 4 GB LPAR 3 1 GB bla...

Page 1442: ...ddress 0 to the top SYS1 displayed on the Memory Allocation Display 1 and one 256 MB blank memory and you allocate all those blank memories to LPARs LPAR activation fails Memory allocation Example LPAR 1 3 GB LPAR 2 4 GB LPAR 3 1 GB LPAR 4 4 GB LPAR 5 1 GB LPAR 6 256 GB LPAR 7 1 GB LPAR 8 4 GB LPAR 9 2 GB Memory allocation Example LPAR 1 3 GB blank 4 GB LPAR 3 1 GB blank 4 GB LPAR 5 1 GB blank 256...

Page 1443: ...activated LPARs using the memory next to the blank memory to reduce the number of discontinuous blank memories 3 Define a new dummy LPAR allocate the memory size described step 1 to the dummy LPAR and activate the LPAR Hardware memory dump LP mode does not support hardware memory dump When using LPAR manager make sure to collect LP dump and guest memory dump instead of hardware memory dump When ha...

Page 1444: ... enabled User Memory space with the hardware memory dump enabled is at a maximum 512 MB less than the space with the setting disabled For further details about hardware memory dump see Hardware Memory Dump in Chapter 5 Hardware Memory Dump Disabled Hardware Memory Dump Enabled ...

Page 1445: ...assigned Maximum number of ports Dedicated NIC Intel 1 Gb Broadcom 1 Gb Shared NIC Virtual NIC NIC2 Dedicated NIC Intel 10 Gb 9 port resources used for 1 port Dedicated NIC Emulex 10 Gb 3 port resources used for 1 port 32 32 14 2 32 26 2 32 20 4 32 Maximum number of NIC ports assigned to an LPAR on Windows On Windows OS the maximum number of NIC ports assigned to one LPAR is limited If you assign ...

Page 1446: ...sors LPAR Maximum number of ports Example of I O assignment combination SMT disabled SMP enabled Dedicated NIC Intel 1 Gb Broadcom 1 Gb Shared NIC Virtual NIC NIC2 Dedicated NIC Intel 10 Gb 3 port resources used for 1 port Dedicated NIC Emulex 10 Gb 4 port resources used for 1 port 1 1 2 8 8 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 2 2 3 4 10 10 0 0 4 2 0 2 0 2 3 5 6 12 12 0 0 0 4 0 4 0 2 4 7 8 14 14 0 0 2 4 0 6 0 2 5 9 10 ...

Page 1447: ...r 1 port Dedicated NIC Emulex 10 Gb 4 port resources used for 1 port 4 8 0 12 0 4 12 23 24 30 30 0 0 6 8 0 14 0 4 13 25 26 32 32 0 0 8 8 0 16 0 4 14 27 28 34 32 0 0 10 8 0 18 0 4 15 29 30 36 32 0 0 12 8 0 20 0 4 16 31 32 38 32 0 0 14 8 0 22 0 4 17 33 34 40 32 0 0 16 8 0 24 0 4 18 35 36 42 32 0 0 18 8 0 26 0 4 19 37 38 44 32 0 0 20 8 0 28 0 4 20 39 40 46 32 0 0 22 8 0 30 0 4 21 41 42 48 32 0 0 24 8...

Page 1448: ...ximum number of ports the number of processors x 2 4 SMT enabled Maximum number of ports the number of processors 1 2 x 2 4 Intel 10 Gb NIC uses 3 ports of resources for a port When assigning Intel 10 Gb NIC 3 port resources are required for one port Emulex 10 Gb NIC uses 4 ports of resources for a port When assigning Emulex 10 Gb NIC 4 port resources are required for one port The following table ...

Page 1449: ...sed for 1 port Dedicated NIC Emulex 10 Gb 4 port resources used for 1 port 4 7 8 12 12 0 0 0 4 0 4 0 2 5 9 10 14 14 0 0 2 4 0 6 0 2 6 11 12 16 16 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 4 7 13 14 18 18 0 0 0 6 0 2 0 4 8 15 16 20 20 0 0 2 6 0 4 0 4 9 17 18 22 22 0 0 4 6 0 6 0 4 10 19 20 24 24 0 0 0 8 0 8 0 4 11 21 22 26 26 0 0 2 8 0 10 0 4 12 23 24 28 28 0 0 4 8 0 12 0 4 13 25 26 30 30 0 0 6 8 0 14 0 4 14 27 28 32 32 0 0 8 ...

Page 1450: ...10 Gb 3 port resources used for 1 port Dedicated NIC Emulex 10 Gb 4 port resources used for 1 port 12 8 0 20 0 4 17 33 34 38 32 0 0 14 8 0 22 0 4 18 35 36 40 32 0 0 16 8 0 24 0 4 19 37 38 42 32 0 0 18 8 0 26 0 4 20 39 40 44 32 0 0 20 8 0 28 0 4 21 41 42 46 32 0 0 22 8 0 30 0 4 22 43 44 48 32 0 0 24 8 0 32 0 4 23 45 46 50 32 0 0 26 8 0 32 0 4 24 47 48 52 32 0 0 28 8 0 32 0 4 25 49 50 54 32 0 0 30 8...

Page 1451: ...ing Emulex 10 Gb NIC 2 port resources are required for one port FC uses one port of resources for 4 ports When assigning FC 1 port resource is required for four ports The following table shows examples of I O assignment to the number of processors Number of processors LPAR Maximum number of ports Example of I O assignment combination SMT disabled SMP enabled Dedicated NIC Intel 1 Gb Broadcom 1 Gb ...

Page 1452: ...w SMT disabled Maximum number of ports the number of processors x 6 2 SMT enabled Maximum number of ports the number of processors 1 2 x 6 2 Up to 4 ports in Intel 10 Gb NIC can be assigned Intel 10 Gb NIC uses 3 ports of resources for a port When assigning Intel 10 Gb NIC 3 port resources are required for one port Emulex 10 G 2 port resources are required for one port FC uses one port of resource...

Page 1453: ...t Dedicated NIC Emulex 10 Gb 2 port resources used for 1 port FC 1 port resource is used for 4 ports 2 3 4 10 9 0 0 4 3 2 0 4 1 0 0 4 3 5 6 16 15 0 4 4 3 4 0 4 7 0 0 4 4 7 8 22 21 0 4 4 9 4 0 4 13 0 0 4 5 9 10 28 27 0 0 4 15 4 0 4 19 0 4 4 6 11 12 34 32 0 0 4 21 4 0 4 25 0 4 32 7 13 14 40 32 0 0 4 27 4 0 4 31 0 4 56 8 15 16 50 32 0 0 8 32 4 0 24 32 0 4 64 9 17 18 52 32 0 0 32 32 4 0 48 32 0 4 64 1...

Page 1454: ... X55R3 X55S3 59 72 or higher Standard server blades X55R4 79 70 or higher High performance server blade X57A2 Switch module Connection only to10 Gb switch module is supported NIC Emulex 10 Gb NIC NIC firmware version 4 6 348 0 Standard server blades X55R3 X55S3 10 2 340 10 Standard server blades X55R4 4 6 348 0 High performance server blade X57A2 NIC driver version When Emulex NIC firmware version...

Page 1455: ...d ARP table Not supported Redundancy configuration bonding Monitoring ARP monitoring MII monitoring Operating mode balance rr mode 0 Not supported active backup mode 1 Supported balance xor mode 2 Not supported broadcast mode 3 Not supported 802 3ad mode 4 Not supported balance tlb mode 5 Not supported balance alb mode 6 Not supported MAC failover Supported VLAN 8 Undef When Emulex NIC firmware ve...

Page 1456: ...n the LPAR after Force Recovery is completed 2 When a VF NIC device is isolated the following message appears in var log messages Immediately reboot the guest OS to which the VF NIC device is assigned to release the isolation var log messages clocksource tsc unstable delta 8589944970 ns 3 When a guest OS to which VF NIC is assigned is rebooted the following messages may appear in var log messages ...

Page 1457: ...1406 12 Logical partitioning manager guest OS operation var log messages XX XX X Bus Dev Func be2net 0000 XX XX X opcode 34 1 failed status 3 8 ...

Page 1458: ...n Emulex NIC firmware version is 4 6 x x Item VLAN mode for LPAR manager fail_over_mac ARP monitoring Undef Untagged fail_over_mac 1 MII monitoring Undef Untagged fail_over_mac 1 Tagged only All fail_over_mac 0 When Emulex NIC firmware version is 10 2 x x Item VLAN mode for LPAR manager fail_over_mac ARP monitoring Untagged fail_over_mac 1 MII monitoring Untagged fail_over_mac 1 Recommended fail_o...

Page 1459: ...the remote console is disabled Therefore power on power off reset and MNI using the remote console are not available If you operate the mouse on the EFI screen or text screen during the guest OS installation input from the keyboard might slow down Do not use the mouse on those screens In standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware version 58 1X or earlier or high performance server blades wi...

Page 1460: ...rs in some LPARs which have detected a failure not in all LPARs Thus each LPAR has different active VNIC which causes inter LPAR communication not to be available between the active and standby See Figure 2 When MI link monitoring is configured this trouble does not occur because switching networks occurs in all LPARs at a failure If switching back causes discrepancy however this failure occurs Wh...

Page 1461: ...ager Figure 2 Discrepancy between LPARs LPAR manager LPAR1 LPAR2 Active 1a Standby 2a Active Active Shared NIC Shared NIC Shared NIC Shared NIC Management server Physical NIC Physical NIC Transmission for the standby is not performed ...

Page 1462: ... following table This will cause the following conditions Windows recognizes the I O card in the same physical slot as a new device If no PCI bus value exists the driver setting value is the default If a PCI bus exists the value that is set to the same assigned slot before the mode change is applied When I O cards are installed in physical slots 2 and 3 with 1 4 mode and the mode is changed to 1 8...

Page 1463: ...ving the configuration Check the SYS2 value on the LPAR Usage screen to find how much load is on LPAR manager When the SYS2 value Dsp ms is 1800 ms or higher a heavy load on LPAR manager might cause the timeout If it occurs due to a temporary increase in load save the configuration again after the load decreases Settings for WWN and MAC address The following table describes whether or not to use D...

Page 1464: ...overy in N M cold standby environment Problem Time difference might occur when switchover or recovery occurs in the N M cold standby environment due to the difference for BIOS time in specifications on the OS This problem might occur if all the following three conditions are satisfied 1 The Compute Blade System uses the N M cold standby function 2 The following OSs shown in a and b are mixed in th...

Page 1465: ...synchronization without executing the following procedure See RTC time Synchronization at N M Cold Standby Failover in Chapter 13 for details If all the OSs and virtual platforms in the same N M standby group can be 2 a BIOS time as local time When configuring the system Set your local time to all server blades including a standby server blade in the N M standby group When changing server blades C...

Page 1466: ... M cold standby is supported due to expansion of the NIC system number LPAR manager firmware version on the standby server blade is later than that on the active server blade 1 If you expand virtual NIC system numbers to 129 in the standby server blade data cannot be restored from the standby server blade to the active server blade UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply It takes about 30 seconds longer ...

Page 1467: ...here the same device path is registered in different boot options Screen with Boot0000 selected Screen with Boot0001 selected The following steps will cause this problem 1 Activate an LPAR and then select Continue in the logical BIOS screen to enter EFI Shell 2 Through EFI Shell select Boot Maintenance Manager in the logical BIOS screen and register a device path with Add Boot Option Performing St...

Page 1468: ... way to check when the LPAR manager configuration is saved If the time is unknown you need to save the LPAR manager configuration before shutting down LPAR manager Press F9 Save Configuration on the LPAR manager Menu screen to save LPAR manager configuration If you shut down or reboot LPAR manager before saving the configuration newly changed values will be lost See Save configuration changed on L...

Page 1469: ... to LPAR manager from SC BSM fails due to the timeout LP Web system logical VGA snapshot is not displayed or refreshing the display takes longer It takes longer five minutes or longer to collect LPAR manager dumps You can find a value of the processor usage rate in the LPAR manager network communication as a value of SYS2 on the LPAR Usage screen When a problem shown above occurs check the SYS2 va...

Page 1470: ... each LPAR manager system including Compute Blade 1000 Compute Blade 2000 and Compute Blade 320 0 LP ID LPAR manager identifier The default value created automatically from the LP IP address is recommended LPAR manager IP address Alert Language Language used for alert notices BSM IP address BSM Alert Port Management server address setting such as SC and BSM Virtual Console Port Port number used in...

Page 1471: ...n to LPAR USB auto attachment Enable Save Changed Config Format Saves a changed configuration format Disable LP TimerCounter Base Calculates a Timer Counter value TSC Save Time Config Saves time configuration automatically Disable Activation Confirmation of LPAR Activation operation Yes Deactivation and Reactivation Confirmation of LPAR Deactivation operation Yes Screen Switching Character Charact...

Page 1472: ...ction function of a guest CPU Y ProcessorCapping PC Capping function for shared CPU service Not assigned AutoAct setting AA Activates LPAR automatically when LPAR manager boots Not assigned AutoClear setting AC Automatically clears SEL for LPAR N Virtual COM console VC Set Y or a VC number when using the virtual COM console N Pre boot setting PB None but BIOS can be selected BIOS Logical processor...

Page 1473: ...Transmission bandwidth limitation Sets transmission bandwidth limitation for LPAR 10000 Mbps Shared FC assignment VfcID setting Assigns shared FC to LPAR Not assigned Date and time Logical SEL time mode Time mode for logical SEL Local Logical SEL time zone Time zone for logical SEL The time zone is set when adding LPARs Same as the system 1 Displays A with standard server blades with LPAR manager ...

Page 1474: ...to Only setting value reference is available in the FC shared mode Auto Spinup Delay Set Spinup Delay to Enabled or Disabled and also wait time for a disk Disabled Login Delay Time When login delay is necessary in configuration with multiple nodes connected to the FC SW such as cascade connection specify the time to delay 3 sec Persistent Bindings Can specify whether or not the OS driver performs ...

Page 1475: ...12 Logical partitioning manager Setting screen Setting field Description for setting field Default If exceeding Total number of LU Number of LU per HBAFC Port the entries remained in the list will be ignored ...

Page 1476: ...ed Subnet Mask Default Gateway Alert Language VNIC System No LP ID Virtual console port BSM IP address 3 BSM Alert Port 3 LP CLI IP Address Deactivating the target LPAR is not required LPAR manager Operating Mode Rebooting the server blade is required Change in LP option setting Pre State Auto Activation Deactivating target LPARs is not required LP Auto Shutdown LP Error Watching Confirmation Acti...

Page 1477: ...ng USB device assignment Assign a device to the LPAR deactivated and attach the device to the LPAR activated NC FC scheduling mode change Deactivate all LPARs VNIC Device Type setting Deactivating the target LPARs is required NIC assignment unassignment MAC address change of NIC FC assignment unassignment FC vfcID change VLAN setting to NIC Deactivating the target LPARs is not required To set VLAN...

Page 1478: ...ironment to Basic environment affected such as needing to deactivate LPAR not affected 1 Target LPARs need to be deactivated with standard server blades with LPAR manager firmware 58 3X or later versions or high performance server blades with LPAR manager firmware 78 3X or later versions 2 Target LPARs need to be deactivated in the shared mode 3 Target LPARs need to be deactivated with standard se...

Page 1479: ...igator PFM ITRM and HCSM RMCP TCP 23250 20670 LPAR migration TCP 23401 20671 LPAR migration Virtual COM console TCP 20801 to 20816 1 Virtual COM console LP Web system TCP 80 443 LPAR manager firmware update Logical VGA snapshot HTTP HTTPS NTP TCP 123 Time synchronization NTP Guest memory dump LPAR manager dump collection command TCP 21 21 Dump collection FTP SC BSM TCP 20079 Transmission to the ma...

Page 1480: ... LPAR manager virtual LAN SW not set VLAN on the OS and each server communicate with task LAN A and task LAN B respectively To communicate with the management LAN the onboard dedicated NIC is used VLAN is not set Set VLAN to the common server on the OS which allows it to communicate with task LAN A and task LAN B via LPAR manager virtual LAN SW with Tagged setting To communicate with the managemen...

Page 1481: ...N SVP BSM DPM etc Untagged ID aa Untagged ID aa Untagged ID bb Untagged ID bb Task LAN B Tagged ID aa bb Tagged ID aa bb Virtual LAN SW in LP OnBoard NIC PCI NIC VLAN setting Virtual NIC Port Physical NIC Port LPARx Task A Server NIC 1a 1B Untagged management LAN NIC 2a 2b Untagged Task LAN A NIC 1a NIC 1b NIC 2a NIC 2b NIC 1a NIC 1b NIC 2a NIC 2b NIC 1a NIC 1b NIC 2a NIC 2b LPARy Task B Server NI...

Page 1482: ... to use the FC sharing function with 4 Gbps fiber channel adapter Enable the N Port ID Virtualization NPIV function of FCSW for using the NPIV function of FCSW Multiple LPARs can share a single HBA port To share a port allocate the port to LPARs on the LPAR manager screen using the WWN identifier vfcID The following is an example for allocation with vfcID 1 to 8 in this configuration vfc ID HBAO H...

Page 1483: ...or LPAR1 Data for LPAR4 Data for LPAR3 CTL0 0 1 FCSW1 NPIV CTL1 0 1 System for LPAR1 System for LPAR2 System for LPAR4 System for LPAR3 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 Main System Sub System Sub Data Main Data VfcID x Unused VfcID Physical HBA port 8 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HBA0 Port0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HBA0...

Page 1484: ...s Fibre channel adapter See How to use the shared FC function II with connection directly to storage for details Multiple LPARs can share an HBA port To share a port allocate the port to LPARs on the LPAR manager screen using the WWN identifier vfcID The following is an example for allocation with vfcID 1 to 15 in this configuration vfc ID HBAO HBA1 Port 0 Port 1 Port 0 Port 1 1 LPAR1 allocated LP...

Page 1485: ... Port1 1 2 3 4 5 15 HBA1 Port0 Data for LPAR2 Data for LPAR1 Data for LPAR4 Data for LPAR3 CTL0 0 1 CTL1 0 1 System for LPAR1 System for LPAR2 System for LPAR4 System for LPAR3 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 HBA0 Port0 Port1 HBA1 Port0 Port1 Main System Sub System Sub Data Main Data vfcID x Unused vfcID Physical HBA port ...

Page 1486: ... 2 3 Mezzanine card 1 FC 8G 4 Onboard NIC 0 0 Storage SAN Chassis External LAN switch Management LAN External LAN switch Business LAN A Management LAN LPAR Manager LPAR1 LPAR2 SVP module M0 M1 SW module 0 LAN SW SW module 1 LAN SW SW module 2 FCSW SW module 3 FCSW SW module 4 LAN SW SW module 5 LAN SW PCI Express PCI Express LPAR3 LPAR4 0 0 1 2 3 I 0 board 0 NIC 1G 4 0 1 0 0 1 1 I 0 board 1 NIC 1G...

Page 1487: ...nboard GbE Onboard GbE Backplane 1 Gbps LAN switch module switch module slot 0 LPAR 0 1 LPAR 12 LPAR 6 5 4 3 2 1 GbE Port 1 GbE Port 2 GbE Port 3 GbE Port 4 Port numbers on the front panel Port in use Port not in use 13 14 22 16 15 23 24 11 21 12 6 5 13 14 22 16 15 23 24 11 21 Server Blade 7 Onboard GbE LPAR 0 1 0 1 0 1 4 3 2 1 GbE Port 1 GbE Port 2 GbE Port 3 GbE Port 4 0 0 0 0 1 Gbps LAN switch ...

Page 1488: ...E Port 26 13 14 22 16 15 23 24 11 21 12 6 5 4 3 2 1 26 25 GbE Port 1 GbE Port 2 GbE Port 3 GbE Port 4 10GbE Port 25 10GbE Port 26 13 14 22 16 15 23 24 11 21 12 6 5 4 3 2 1 26 25 GbE Port 1 GbE Port 2 GbE Port 3 GbE Port 4 10GbE Port 25 10GbE Port 26 13 14 22 16 15 23 24 11 21 Server Blade 7 LPAR 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 GbE mezzanine card mezz...

Page 1489: ... Port 2 8Gbps FC Port 3 8Gbps FC Port 4 8Gbps FC Port 5 8 Gbps FC Port 0 8 Gbps FC Port 1 8 Gbps FC Port 2 8 Gbps FC Port 3 8 Gbps FC Port 4 8 Gbps FC Port 5 8 Gbps FC Port 0 8 Gbps FC Port 1 8 Gbps FC Port 2 8 Gbps FC Port 3 8 Gbps FC Port 4 8 Gbps FC Port 5 25 25 25 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 port FC mezzanine card mezzanine card slot 1 2 port FC mezzanine card mezzanine card slot 0 2 port FC mezzanin...

Page 1490: ... Gbps FC Port 5 8 Gbps FC Port 0 8 Gbps FC Port 1 8 Gbps FC Port 2 8 Gbps FC Port 3 8 Gbps FC Port 4 8 Gbps FC Port 5 8 Gbps FC Port 0 8 Gbps FC Port 1 8 Gbps FC Port 2 8 Gbps FC Port 3 8 Gbps FC Port 4 8 Gbps FC Port 5 1 3 17 16 25 25 25 25 1 3 0 2 0 2 1 3 1 3 0 2 0 2 1 3 1 3 0 2 0 2 1 3 1 3 17 16 17 16 17 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port in use Port not in use 8 Gbps FC switch module Switch module slot 2...

Page 1491: ...t due to the Enabled hardware memory dump setting What to do Set Disabled in the EFI setup menu Advanced hardware memory dump Settings hardware memory dump Message content LPAR manager Loader detected flash memory access error and load configuration from SVP Explanation Automatic recovery was performed due to failure in the flash memory Since the copy to the flash memory failed however configurati...

Page 1492: ...supported in LPAR manager system Please change APIC Mode to xAPIC Mode Explanation LPAR manager cannot boot because APIC Mode is not set to xAPIC What to do Set APIC Mode to xAPIC using the server blade Web console Message content LPAR manager Loader detected Emulex Multi Channel mode Bus 0xXX Dev 0xXX Fnc 0xXX which is not supported Please disable Emulex Multi Channel mode Explanation LPAR manage...

Page 1493: ...ion There is no LPAR left to be defined LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified process What to do Review the process Message content Auto activation for LPARx results in error Explanation Auto activation for LPARx failed LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified process What to do Follow the instructions in subsequent messages Message content Cannot change LPAR manager System Time due to NT...

Page 1494: ...ing the device has failed LPAR manager operation If activating the LPAR stops activation If changing the device target stops connecting or disconnecting the device What to do Deactivate the relevant LPAR reassign the device that has been assigned to the LPAR and then reactivate the LPAR Message content Device Schedule Mode is not Exclusive Shared Explanation The schedule mode of the target PCI dev...

Page 1495: ...e USB device and stops changing the USB device assignment to other LPARs What to do Assign the USB device to the LPAR again Message content LPAR manager could not import Time Setting of SVP Explanation Importing time from the management module failed LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified process What to do Check if the management module version supports the NTP linkage Message content LPAR m...

Page 1496: ...reen Message content LPAR manager is recovering specified LPAR from failed migration state This operation prevents some operations from performing Explanation Does not allow you to operate screens because the failed LPAR in LPAR migration is currently being recovered LPAR manager operation The failed LPAR in LPAR migration is being recovered What to do None Message content Inhibit ICV request for ...

Page 1497: ... Correct the value and retry Message content Invalid second data Explanation The numeric value you specified for the LPAR manager System Date and Time change is invalid LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified process What to do Correct the value and retry Message content Invalid separator Explanation The numeric value you specified for the LPAR manager System Date and Time change is invalid LP...

Page 1498: ...the system from memory assigned to the LPAR is not enough LPAR manager operation Aborts LPAR activation What to do Assign more memory to the LPAR and then activate the LPAR Message content LPAR corrupted in a LPAR Migration exist Please try again after recovering the LPAR Explanation Operation is not available due to a failed LPAR by LPAR migration LPAR manager operation Aborts LPAR deactivation W...

Page 1499: ...ated a currently active LPAR Message content Memory size is zero Explanation Because the memory size is zero the LPAR cannot be activated LPAR manager operation Aborts LPAR activation What to do Set a memory size and active the LPAR Message content No groups can be removed Explanation No group can be deleted LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified process What to do Review the specified proces...

Page 1500: ...nged setting effective you need to press the F10 key LPAR manager operation Waits for the F10 key to be pressed What to do Press any key wait for the output message to disappear and then press the F10 key Message content Resource lock failure Explanation Locking resources failed when you updated configuration information Locking resources failed when you performed a system or LPAR operation Lockin...

Page 1501: ... the scheduling mode of the LPAR to shared mode before reset Message content The LPAR Migration is in progress This LPAR Migration prevents some operations such as activation deactivation and LPAR reconfiguration from performing Explanation Operation with screen is not allowed due to LPAR migration in progress LPAR manager operation LPAR migration is being performed What to do Wait for a while unt...

Page 1502: ...LPAR you tried to manipulate is not available due to LAPR migration in execution LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified process What to do Retry the specified process after LPAR migration is complete Message content Target LPAR is Executing Rollback Explanation The LPAR you tried to manipulate is not available due to rollback by LPAR migration LPAR manager operation Aborts the specified proce...

Page 1503: ...ncels the specified process What to do Execute the process again when LPAR manager firmware update is completed Message content Updating LPAR manager firmware Please wait until it is finished Explanation LPAR manager shutdown is waiting for execution during updating LPAR manager firmware LPAR manager operation Stops activating LPAR What to do Wait for a while until LPAR manager firmware updating i...

Page 1504: ...Is also collected with this message Message content CPU core swap is completed Auto Level Information Explanation Replaced the core with an alternative one due to a sign of failure detected What to do Save the LPAR manager system configuration because the configuration is updated Message content Dmar Fault occurred Level Error Explanation DMAR fault occurred What to do Contact your reseller or mai...

Page 1505: ...l Information Explanation Guest memory dump started by the start operation of guest memory dump What to do None Message content Guest dump was cancelled Level Information Explanation Guest memory dump was cancelled by the canceling operation of guest memory dump What to do None Message content Guest Double Fault DF occurred Level Information Explanation A guest double fault occurred What to do Che...

Page 1506: ... content H W Corrected MCK logging was suppressed Level Error Explanation The number of times of corrected machine check event logging exceeded the threshold The error logging was suppressed What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content H W Corrected MCK occurred Level Warning Explanation A corrected machine check event occ...

Page 1507: ... Error Explanation An LPAR manager fault LPAR manager fault resulting from a hardware fault occurred What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR Manager detected a failure of retrying the setting of TxRate configuration Level Error Explanation Retry of the operation to configure TxRate failed What to do A network fai...

Page 1508: ...ement module failed What to do Check if the management module version supports the NTP linkage Correct the management module time setting if needed and re import the time setting from the management module Message content LPAR manager could not power off the PCI slot Level Error Explanation Failed to power off the physical PCI slot What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equi...

Page 1509: ...lt maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager detected a failure of retrying the setting of TxRate configuration Level Error Explanation Retrying TxRate setting failed What to do Check the network state connected the device because the network failure may occur If the network has no problem the device may be out of order Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consu...

Page 1510: ... LPAR manager detected Activation error for Shared NIC Level Error Explanation A failure in validating shared NIC was detected What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR Manager detected different version of firmware on the NIC device Level Error Explanation A fault in the combination of the firmware versions of NIC...

Page 1511: ...C Level Information Explanation LPAR manager received the driver request for isolating ports in the shared FC from the guest OS This log can be collected when the FC fault threshold management is enabled in the guest OS What to do None Message content LPAR manager detected Driver Ver Error at Shared FC at expansion card Level Warning Explanation The FC driver not supporting shared FC was detected ...

Page 1512: ...very to release the isolation Then reboot the guest OS to use the PCI device Message content LPAR manager detected failed SR IOV feature was recovered Level Information Explanation Detected the isolated PCI device is recovered What to do None The PCI device has been recovered from the error state The PCI device isolated on the LPAR will run properly after the guest OS reboot Message content LPAR m...

Page 1513: ...r detected Initialization error for Shared NIC Level Error Explanation A failure in initializing shared NIC was detected What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager detected invalid I O slot expansion unit number Level Warning Explanation An invalid I O slot expansion unit number was detected What to do Conta...

Page 1514: ...ror for Shared NIC at on board Level Error Explanation Shared NIC link down was detected What to do Check the connection to shared NIC If this action takes no effect contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager detected Link Down error for Shared NIC Level Error Explanation Shared NIC link down was detected What to do Ch...

Page 1515: ...rchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager detected MCKINT for Shared FC Level Error Explanation A temporary fault in shared FC was detected What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager detected network communication error at SC Manager access Level Error Explanation A...

Page 1516: ...evice configuration do not match What to do Check the LPAR manager configuration information and hardware configuration Message content LPAR manager detected PCI dev assign error Level Warning Explanation LPAR manager detected invalid PCI device allocation information What to do Re allocate the PCI device on the PCI Device Assign screen If this LP system log is re obtained contact the reseller fro...

Page 1517: ...ation Ignored some CPUs due to those CPUs installed beyond the maximum number of them that LPAR manager can recognize What to do Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager detected uninitialized Shared device Level Error Explanation Detected an uninitialized shared I O device What to do Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager det...

Page 1518: ... Warning Explanation Transfer of the LPAR manager dump to the management module failed What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager dump transfer retry Level Information Explanation The LPAR manager dump was re transferred to the management module What to do None Message content LPAR manager dump transfer succ...

Page 1519: ... the Personality setting is set to NIC mode For details about how to check this setting see the manual Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 500 Emulex Adapter User s Guide for Hardware Note however that you cannot change the setting in LP mode To change the setting change the mode to Basic mode Message content LPAR manager firmware update failed Level Warning Explanation LPAR manager firmware updating faile...

Page 1520: ...ncorrectable error Level Error Explanation Physical memory was isolated due to uncorrectable error What to do If the same message happens multiple times contact your reseller or maintenance personnel Message content LPAR manager Loader detected load error and recovered Level Warning Explanation Configuration information failed to be read however this error was corrected What to do If this LP syste...

Page 1521: ...at to do None Message content LPAR manager logged the EFI Driver log for Shared FC at expansion card Level Information Explanation The shared FC driver transferred the log to LPAR manager What to do None Message content LPAR manager logged the EFI Driver log for Shared FC Level Information Explanation The shared FC driver transferred the log to LPAR manager What to do None Message content LPAR man...

Page 1522: ...atus has changed to Ready What to do None Message content LPAR manager skipped LPAR auto activation process Level Information Explanation Activate LPAR was skipped with the auto activate operation What to do None Message content LPAR manager started retrying the setting of TxRate configuration Level Warning Explanation Failed to the setting of TxRate configuration Retry the setting of TxRate confi...

Page 1523: ... Config Format is not set to Enable on the LP Options screen save the configuration once more Message content LPAR manager updated the configuration files Level Information Explanation LPAR manager configuration with the previous version is updated to the new version What to do None Message content LP LFW detected failure of getting boot device Level Warning Explanation LPAR manager logical firmwa...

Page 1524: ...n activate the LPAR Message content LP LFW detected tftp error and recovered Level Information Explanation LPAR manager logical firmware detected a network failure while the network is booting and the failure was recovered What to do None Message content LP LFW detected tftp error Level Warning Explanation LPAR manager logical firmware detected a network failure while the network is booting What t...

Page 1525: ...rs This event might be put out by the OS shutdown or LPAR deactivation However there is no problem if Logical CPU performance returns to normal is put out in a few minutes Message content LPAR damage occurred Level Error Explanation An LPAR manager fault LPAR fault occurred What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content LPAR...

Page 1526: ...is action takes no effect contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content Network Segment damage occurred Level Error Explanation A fault occurred in the network segment used for shared NICs or virtual NICs What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content NTP server...

Page 1527: ...late specified CPU core manually Level Information Explanation Although a sign of failure is detected in the CPU core replacement is not available due to lack of alternative cores What to do Cancel the specified core to use although the performance might slow down Message content Physical Memory Isolation Level Error Explanation Uncorrectable memory failure was detected and the physical memory was...

Page 1528: ...ization system log is not collected even though you have saved the configuration consult your reseller or call for maintenance personnel Message content Shadow Command was retried Level Information Explanation A request to LPAR manager Assist was retransmitted What to do None Message content Shared FC MCK Log was logged in LPAR at expansion card Level Information Explanation Shared FC fault inform...

Page 1529: ...hardware resource shortage for SR IOV functions What to do Check if all firmware combination supports SR IOV Refer to Hitachi Compute Blade Emulex Adapter User s Guide for Hardware for the correct combination Message content Thermal error occurred Level Warning Explanation A temperature rise warning event occurred What to do Remove the dust from the air vent of the system device to improve ventila...

Page 1530: ...at to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content VNIC damage on LPAR manager Assist occurred Level Error Explanation A virtual NIC LPAR manager Assist fault occurred What to do Contact the reseller from which you purchased this equipment or consult maintenance personnel Message content Your CPU core usage license expired Level I...

Page 1531: ...Action None 0xFCA1 Warning LPAR X Failed to deactivate RC Y Description Failed to deactivate LPAR X X is the LPAR number Y is the error reason code Action Contact your reseller or maintenance personnel 0xFC73 Information LPAR X Initiating shutdown due to scheduled turn off request Description Starts scheduled LPAR X deactivation X is the LPAR number Action 0xFCA2 Warning LPAR X Watchdog timer has ...

Page 1532: ...ation failed on the destination LP X is the IP address on the migration source LP Y is the IP address on the migration destination LP Z is the error reason code Action Take actions following HCSM messages shown during LPAR migration task in operation 0xFC78 Information LPAR X Sent information update alert Description LPAR X information is updated X is the LPAR number Action None 0xFC79 Information...

Page 1533: ...it the following URL http www gnu org licenses lgpl 2 1 html bzip2 BSD License Visit the following URL http www opensource org licenses bsd license php tianocore EFI BSD License Eclipse License FAT32 License TianoCore Org Contribution Agreement Visit the following URL http sourceforge net apps mediawiki tianocore index php title BSD_License_from _Intel http sourceforge net apps mediawiki tianocore...

Page 1534: ...it the following URL http www gnu org licenses gpl 2 0 html Broadcom Tigon3 ethernet driver GNU General Public License version 2 Visit the following URL http www gnu org licenses gpl 2 0 html Others software contained in Redhat Enterprise Linux GNU General Public License version2 and license agreement of each software Visit the following URL http www gnu org licenses gpl 2 0 html ...

Page 1535: ...1484 12 Logical partitioning manager ...

Page 1536: ...515 MAC address in the Compute Blade 2000 1517 Smart Configure 1518 N M cold standby 1522 Digital certificates for the system web console 1543 E mail notification 1555 SNMP function 1562 SNMP function for I O slot expansion unit 1693 LDAP server linkage 1727 Power efficiency 1742 Dictionary updating 1748 Operation log 1752 Syslog Transfer 1766 Notes on Windows 1769 Useful settings for Red Hat Ente...

Page 1537: ...ation a server blade installed in a slot with a smaller number located on the left viewed from the front is called the primary server blade The primary server blade can be installed in slot 0 1 2 4 5 6 in the 2 blade SMP configuration The slot to which the primary server blade is installed is the partition number Slot location for 2 blade SMP configuration 搭載可能搭載可能搭載可能搭載可能搭載可能搭...

Page 1538: ...d slot 4 in the 4 blade SMP configuration The slot to which the primary server blade is installed is the partition number Slot location for 4 blade SMP configuration 7 Partition number 0 Partition number 4 Slot for Primary Slot for Primary Server blade slot number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 1539: ...s To control and do setup of the server blade use the remote console 2 OS Installation You cannot use the OS console to install the OS Use the remote console to install the OS For details about the remote console see Connect the System in Chapter 3 1 Preparation for using the OS console 1 1 Terminal software installation Terminal software must be installed in the console terminal in advance Note t...

Page 1540: ...rminal type VT100 The OS console cannot be used as a Windows Special Administration Console SAC Sample setup with a server blade running Linux 5 This example is for Red Hat Linux 1 boot grub grub conf setting At the end of each kernel line enter the console parameters to be passed to the kernel console tty0 console ttyS0 115200 2 etc inittab setting 1 To the last line append co 2345 respawn sbin a...

Page 1541: ...yS0 115200 When entering from the keyboard on OS console set the following 2 etc securetty setting Add ttyS0 3 Create etc init ttyS0 conf ttyS0 agetty This service maintains a agetty on ttyS0 stop on runlevel S016 start on runlevel 23 respawn exec agetty h L w dev ttyS0 115200 vt100 Install Linux to use Text mode login If you installed Linux to use Graphic mode login switch to Text mode login For ...

Page 1542: ...the SSH connections See Initial Settings with Server Blade Web Console User Account Configuration Edit User Accounts Screen in Chapter 5 You can create up to 1 session of OS console for a server blade You cannot create multiple sessions of OS console simultaneously for the same server blade The following is a sample of SSH connection sequence using Linux terminal 1 Enter the command ssh i public_k...

Page 1543: ...t may occur on the I O device It is recommended to evaluate the impact on the performance by suppressing text outputs If required try suppressing some text outputs to improve the performance 3 Text data input to the OS console with the cut and paste operation may not be transferred in its entirety if the data are more than 16 bytes 3 2 Character codes and display colors The terminal device may han...

Page 1544: ...indows 2000 and Windows 98 Press the Ctrl and Break keys simultaneously Telnet client on UNIX variant Press the Ctrl and keys simultaneously to escape to Telnet command mode Then type send brk and press Enter For details about the System Request Key see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Reference Guide For security reasons the System Request Key is disabled by default See the Reference Guide for the se...

Page 1545: ...nfo igb grep version version xx xx xx hx If hx where x is a number appears at the end of the version value the Hitachi LAN driver igb has been applied When you use Windows Server 2012 R2 on a high performance server blade WOL function is not supported 2 WOL is not enabled immediately after a server blade s AC power is turned on To enable WOL on a server blade enable the WOL setting on the OS suppo...

Page 1546: ...estore the WOL setting to the enabled status by shutting down the OS Shut down the OS by powering off the blades using the front panel button or by entering the Management Module s PC command In Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008 OS setup is required to enable WOL For the required settings see Using Wake On LAN WOL in LAN Devices described in the Compute Blade 2000 Software Guide and LAN ...

Page 1547: ...t connect port and connect it to the I O slot expansion unit with the I O slot expansion connection cable Up to 16 slots per blade are available with the I O slot expansion unit and up to 8 I O slot expansion units can be connected to a server chassis Connection between I O slot expansion unit and server chassis Server chassis I O slot expansion unit I O slot expansion unit connection adapter Cont...

Page 1548: ...r slot 15 x4 4 I O dapters available through server chassis connect port 0 of I O module 1 4 I O dapters available through server chassis connect port 0 of I O module 0 4 I O dapters available through server chassis connect port 1 of I O module 1 4 I O dapters available through server chassis connect port 1 of I O module 0 1 8 mode 1 4 mode 0 PCI Express expander PCI Express expander PCI Express e...

Page 1549: ...e 1 Server chassis Server blade I O adapter module slot I O slot expansion unit 1 8 mode I O slot expansion unit connect cable a set of 2 and a control signal cable 1 Up to 16 slots available for one blade ロ Server chassis I O slot expansion unit 1 4 mode Up to 8 slots available for each blade Server chassis Up to 64 slots available for 4 blade SMP configuration Server blade I O adapter module slo...

Page 1550: ...en management modules are configured redundantly only the interface on the active side is enabled Server blade Basic logical partitioning LPAR manager shared interface Remote keyboard video mouse KVM Server blade Web console OS console intelligent platform management interface IPMI over LAN For details see Initial Settings with Server Blade Web Console in Chapter 5 LPAR manager Dedicated Interface...

Page 1551: ...t ports MGMT0 and MGMT1 By connecting cables to these ports the management interfaces of each module can be accessed Hereafter this network is referred to as a management network A schematic diagram of the management network is shown below BladeSymphony 2000 Chassis 8 blades 6 switches Server blade Switch module Management module standby Interfaces shared by HVM Basic Interfaces dedicated to HVM M...

Page 1552: ...ils Connection to the Switch Module console for details see Connection to the Setup Terminal in Chapter 7 Smart configuration for details see Smart Configure For these purposes the Compute Blade 2000 uses a class C subnet mask 255 255 255 0 network address as its internal network This IP address cannot be used on the Compute Blade 2000 management network or on the external network reached from the...

Page 1553: ...using Tag VLAN Management module exclusive No No Yes Note 1 Yes Can be selected No Cannot be selected Note 2 The same connection method is always used for the Basic LPAR manager shared Interface and LPAR manager Dedicated Interface for the same blade The management module exclusive method can only be selected for the switch module This option behaves as follows Connection to management interfaces ...

Page 1554: ...m Web Console Features in Chapter 6 LPAR manager Dedicated Interface LPAR manager console For details see Chapter 12 Logical partitioning manager Switch Module Switch module console For details see your switch module manual If you choose to connect to the switch module using the management module exclusive method you must set the switch module s IP addresses in advance as listed in the following t...

Page 1555: ... 2000 is equipped with ports MGMT0 and MGMT1 for connecting to the management network For each module you can choose which of these two ports to use when connecting to the management interfaces This allows the system to be configured for different purposes as in these examples Use MGMT0 to connect to the management module and MGMT1 to connect to the server blade and switch module This allows a cle...

Page 1556: ...is 8 blades 6 switches Server blade Switch module Management module standby Interfaces shared by HVM Basic Interfaces dedicated to HVM Management module Management module M G M T 0 M G M T 1 M A I N T M G M T 1 M G M T 0 M A I N T L2SW L2SW Management module Active ...

Page 1557: ...ent for this purpose A maximum of 19 VLANs can be created with between 2 and 4000 VLAN IDs Either one of ports MGMT0 and MGMT1 must be assigned to each VLAN both ports cannot be assigned to the same VLAN The Tag VLAN functionality can be used in conjunction with Port selection for management interface connection This allows configurations such as the following Connect to the management module and ...

Page 1558: ...le Management module M G M T 0 M G M T 1 M A I N T M G M T 1 M G M T 0 M A I N T L2SW L2SW You can specify a VLAN ID per module and also can specify the same VLAN ID for multiple modules VLAN ID 40 VLAN ID 30 VLAN ID 20 VLAN ID 10 External L2SW Interfaces shared by HVM Basic Interfaces dedicated to HVM Switch module Management module active ...

Page 1559: ...are enabled The newly active management module uses the same IP addresses for the management interfaces as did the failed over management module When connecting to a management interface you do not need to be aware of which management module is active BladeSymphony 2000 Chassis 8 blades 6 switches Server blade Switch module Managemetn module active Management module newly active Management module ...

Page 1560: ...ment network This functionality is known as Link Fault Tolerance LFT An overview of LFT is shown in the following figure BladeSmyphony 2000 Chassis 8 blades 6 switches Server blade Switch module Management module standby L2SW MGMT0 MGMT0 L2SW LANSW LANSW LANSW Failure 1 Detects linkdown in the associated LANSW and closes ports on the active management module 2 Opens ports on the standby management...

Page 1561: ...eemed broken by the management module In initial state when the link to an LFT enabled port on the active management module is detected as being down for three seconds continuously the link is switched to the other port You can change the number of seconds before link switching begins using the management module s serial console or the system Web console The specifiable range is 1 to 3600 seconds ...

Page 1562: ...etting Edit BSM information D Delete manager setting Delete BSM information DB Show Edit basis detail setting View or edit basic information DM Show Edit manager detail setting View or edit detailed BSM information T Test N M cold standby Test N M cold standby Q Quit Quit the BSM setup menu 2 If you select M Edit manager setting the following window appears Enter the host name IP address and SVP a...

Page 1563: ... manager server chassis and IOEU on BSM Refer to the BSM manual If not the chassis ID information before the change remains on BSM for which BSM chassis management may not work properly If you change the Alert Port setting in the BSM settings from the default 20079 you must change the setting in the BSM services file You can edit the Alert Port setting by selecting DM Show Edit manager detail sett...

Page 1564: ...ings see Managing Security in System Web Console Chapter 6 for more details When the HCSM port number used for communication via HTTPS is changed from the default number 443 to another set the same port number in the management module With firmware versions earlier than A0310 the port number is set to 80 for HTTP protocol by default Once the firmware is updated to A0310 or later at fields the port...

Page 1565: ...lation with ServerConductor BladeServer Manager Even if a management module has settings for ServerConductor Blade Server Manager referred to as BSM hereinafter the management module can be interfaced with HCSM You need not delete BSM settings ...

Page 1566: ... WWN is generated by LPAR manager for each LPAR manager system based on the seed information for virtual FC WWNs When a Fibre channel board is used in LPAR manager mode the virtual FC WWN is used regardless of whether the peripheral components interconnect PCI device is specified as dedicated or shared When a Fibre channel board is replaced the virtual FC WWN remains unchanged provided the board i...

Page 1567: ...of Smart Configure The WWN unique to the Fibre channel board 10 Gb CNA adapter or 10 Gb CNA board is not used in N M cold standby Optional Physical WWNs apply only in Compute Blade They are not used for Fibre channel boards implemented in any other hardware Virtual FC WWNs apply only in LP mode They are not used for Fibre channel boards implemented in any other hardware Initializing Optional Physi...

Page 1568: ...s such as Persistent Binding can be available after switching partitions because the MAC address viewed from an OS is not changed after switching partitions with N M cold standby Either Default Physical MAC address or Optional Physical MAC address is available Both of them cannot be used at the same time For information about how to select a MAC address see PR Command in Chapter 6 Optional Physica...

Page 1569: ...tional Physical WWNs assigned to the Fibre channel board 10 Gb CNA adapter or 10 Gb CNA board in the active and standby partitions are swapped and re assigned to each Fibre channel board 10 Gb CNA adapter or 10 Gb CNA board Smart Configure is performed when the setting information is obtained or set and when the Optional Physical WWNs are set For details of N M cold standby see N M cold standby Fo...

Page 1570: ...MC and EFI firmware are required to support Smart Configure Since the inline method does not need to execute Smart Configure in switching N M it requires a shorter time required for switching N M than the pxe method For executing N M cold standby Smart Configure methods for the active and standby partitions can be different pxe inline Outline Obtain and configure the setting information on partiti...

Page 1571: ...ored from the N M switched status Smart Configure is executed in both the active and standby partitions With the inline method the setting information of the active partition is set to the standby partition during the power on and OS is booted Thus Smart Configure is not executed at N M switching When a partition is restored from the state after the N M switching Smart Configure is not executed to...

Page 1572: ... or by BMC itself Smart Configure is executed by the management module and the setting information in the management module is updated Operation of partitions during Smart Configure The light emitting diode LED on the front panel of the server blade blinks during Smart Configure While the condition LED CND is blinking the power to the partition is temporarily turned on For details of the condition...

Page 1573: ...tandby partition The operation is temporarily interrupted due to a hardware failure but the corrective actions from a failure occurrence to the operation resumption can be streamlined with less hardware resources The N M cold standby function supports LPAR manager by BSM Plus When the hardware fault occurs in the active partition on which multiple LPARs are running those running on the active part...

Page 1574: ...ler from which you purchased this product When you use the teaming function provided by Intel PROSet on the server blade it is necessary to prepare the N 1 Teaming Kit additionally For details contact the reseller from which you purchased this product Different Smart Configure methods are allowed for the active and standby partitions When recovering N M cold standby make sure that an operating mod...

Page 1575: ...sion must be installed in the active partition and the standby partition 2 Partition in LP mode In the N M cold standby LPAR manager configuration information for the active partition such as LPAR setting LPAR status and WWN information managed by LPAR manager are copied and taken over to the standby partition which is booted in the LP mode This can allow the standby partition to recreate the same...

Page 1576: ...rtition in the same way as in the Basic mode Fibre channel board Fibre channel board Active Partitions Standby Partitions N M Failover SAN connection is taken over by WWN succession managed by HVM WWN A to WWN C Security by WWN Management module Setting information is taken over Setting information is exchanged FC switch that supports NPIV when using the shared FC function HVM config info 1 WWN A ...

Page 1577: ... HBA BIOS setting Enable or Disable 5 Boot priority setting Enable or Disable Boot target WWN Boot target logical unit number LUN Emulex 10 Gb CNA setting Preboot eXecution Environment PXE Boot Support 6 PXE VLAN Support PXE VLAN ID PXE VLAN Priority Admin Logical Link with MultiChannel Support Enabled NOTICE Make sure to apply the same LPAR manager firmware version with the active partition to th...

Page 1578: ...card or Emulex 16 Gb 2 port fibre channel adapter all items in the setup menu are taken over 6 You need to configure the same setting for MultiChannel Support and for Personality to the active and standby partitions Disable DHCP for iSCSI settings Set a unique IP Address for iSCSI Initiator Connect to iSCSI Target correctly Connected Up to four iSCSI Traget sessions are available per port Do not e...

Page 1579: ...the boot path order boot timer driver path and order for the logical EFI A driver path added manually from the EFI shell cannot be taken over 2 See WWN in the Compute Blade 2000 Time taken for N M failover The following describes the time required for N M failover when a partition fails 1 Partition in Basic mode with the standby partition in the pxe method 2 Partition in Basic mode with the standb...

Page 1580: ... startup is not completed within the maximum allotted time for Host OS Startup specified by the user an error message displays that N M failover failed KASV00212 E is shown on the HCSM task result window regardless of whether the standby OS has started Thus even if N M cold standby failover is successful and the standby OS has started the error message KASV00212 E may be displayed on the HCSM task...

Page 1581: ...X 04 XX or later When N M cold standby is configured in the LP mode the server blade and its peripherals must support LPAR manager A standby partition can be replaced with the active partition that has a different type and number of CPU and memory capacity from the standby partition However confirm that requirements for operating OS and application are satisfied and both of them can operate on the...

Page 1582: ... above are not satisfied when Emulex 10 Gb CNA is installed on the active and standby partitions N M cold standby does not work properly To take over settings Emulex 10 Gb CNA with N M cold standby the following conditions need to be satisfied Item Condition Server blade Standard server blade X55S3 BMC firmware 05 17 or later or 07 01 or later EFI firmware 09 40 10 40 or later High performance ser...

Page 1583: ...04 4 2 390 6 4 2 456 0 Configuration with LAN driver 4 2 390 6 or 4 2 456 0 and CNA firmware 4 1 334 2801 is not supported To take over settings Emulex 10 Gb CNA FCoE for Personality with N M cold standby the following conditions need to be satisfied Item Condition Server blade Standard server blade X55S3 BMC firmware 05 54 or later or 07 01 or later EFI firmware 09 56 10 56 or later High performa...

Page 1584: ...le with the inline method Smart Configure is not performed because the setting information is set to the standby partition during the power on Configuration information on the active partitions must be acquired by the Smart Configure when the N M cold standby is implemented That is not when N M failover occurs This is because failing partitions may not be able to perform Smart Configure Interface ...

Page 1585: ...ocedure for Compute Blade The following outlines the implementing flow on the N M cold standby Each step is described in the subsequent sections 1 Setting the SAN See the manual for the product 2 Setting the BSM Plus or HCSM See the manual or help for the BSM Plus or HCSM Make sure to test the switching after setting the N M cold standby 1 Setting the server blade for Smart Configure 2 Enabling th...

Page 1586: ...ormed immediately on the partitions on which the N M cold standby support function is enabled This results in an Optional Physical WWN being assigned to the Fibre channel boards The Smart Configure execution time is shown in Time Required for Smart Configure Execution The procedures in 1 and 2 above are mandatory even for an N M cold standby system built in LP mode 3 Setting the SAN and FC switche...

Page 1587: ... FCoE setting Set FCoE settings including enabling Boot Bios For further details see the 10Gb Converged Network Production Instruction Manual EFI setup Xeon Server Blade Set the booting priority and enable the active partition to be booted from the SAN For details about the procedure see Standard Server Blade Setup Menu X55A1 X55A2 Models in Chapter 5 Partitions in LP mode Set up the server blade ...

Page 1588: ...board documentation Boot settings From the LPAR s EFI menu select Boot option maintenance menu Enable the LPAR to be booted from the SAN by setting the boot path and boot order For details about the procedure see Boot the Guest OS in Logical partitioning manager Chapter 12 5 N M cold standby setup in BSM Plus or HCSM Set up the N M cold standby configuration in the BSM Plus or HCSM such as setting...

Page 1589: ...ion 6 N M switching test run Before starting operation conduct an N M switching test run to confirm that switching is performed successfully by one of the following Performing a manual failover from the BSM Plus Operating the test N M cold standby using HCSM Issuing a switching test alert using the BSM Command or HCSM Command For details about the N M cold standby configuration and N M switching p...

Page 1590: ...information in the management module differs from the actual LPAR manager settings and N M switching may fail Changing CNA after configuring the N M cold standby If restoring iSCSI is required after CNA is changed in the configuration where CNA is used with iSCSI for Personality you need to configure the following settings depending on the N M cold standby Status Setting value Active server blade ...

Page 1591: ...by partition using the PR command This setting inhibits partitions from automatically powering on at the power supply recovery Smart Configure however performs regardless of this setting The above steps are unnecessary if you do not automatically start the partition after the recovery of system power source even though using the uninterruptible power supply UPS When the N M cold standby support fu...

Page 1592: ...tion Method on the BMC Time screen select Use the NTP server of the Management Modules with RTC time handover on N M cold standby failover See BMC Time in Chapter 5 When enabling this function make sure to check the time of the management module and BMC before operation When N M cold standby occurs with the incorrect time the correct RTC time is not taken over to the standby partition If the incor...

Page 1593: ... one hour difference depending on the time when the N M cold standby failover occurs When enabling DST execute the following When N M failover occurs at the day of starting or finishing DST adjust the difference on the OS using NTP or manually Reboot the OS after DST has started or finished This can update the system information required for RTC time synchronization to avoid time difference due to...

Page 1594: ...tal certificates for the system web console To authenticate a management module a root certificate issued by a certificate authority CA and a digital certificate signed by the CA The digital certificate signed by a CA is shown as 1 and 2 below 1 Certificate signed by an external CA 2 Certificate signed by your own CA Digital certificate specifications The following table shows digital certificate ...

Page 1595: ...Initials Up to 30 characters 4 Unstructured name Up to 60 characters 4 6 Challenge password Up to 30 characters 4 6 1 Make sure to fill in this item 2 Alphabetical capital and small letters Arabic numerals hyphones and periods can be used for this item 3 Alphabetical capital letters can be used 4 Alphabetical capital and small letters Arabic numerals hyphones periods pluses single quotations comma...

Page 1596: ...ing a digital certificate signed by a certificate authority you can authenticate a management module and encrypt a communication path Creating a self signed digital certificate The following chart shows the flow for creating a self signed digital certificate to using the digital certificate 1 1 Generate a self signed digital certificate 1 2 Download the digital certificate to a client PC 1 3 Impor...

Page 1597: ...a self signed server certificate 1 Press the The operation for certification in the Service Settings screen of the system web console to display the Information of server certificate section 2 Press Creation to display the Certificate operations screen ...

Page 1598: ...tem Operation and Management 3 Fill in the fields of Key algorithm and Subject and press Confirm 4 Confirm that the values are correct on the following screen and press Operation to generate the server certificate ...

Page 1599: ...ertificate to a client PC 1 Press The operation for certification in the Service settings screen of the system web console to display the Certificate operations section 2 Press Download to download the digital server certificate generated in step 1 1 to your client PC ...

Page 1600: ...owser of your client For information about how to import it to the web browser refer to the web browser Help 1 4 Change the service setting for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer HTTPS Press Edit on the Server settings screen to change the protocol settings to HTTPS Encryption of communication paths will be enabled from the next connection ...

Page 1601: ...eps from importing a digital certificate with a certificate authority to using the digital certificate 2 1 Create a certificate signing request CSR 2 2 Submit the CSR to a certificate authority obtain the digital certificate with the signature 2 3 Import the signed digital certificate 2 4 Change the setting to use HTTPS in the service settings ...

Page 1602: ...signing request CSR 1 Press the The operation for certification in the Service Settings screen of the system web console to display the information of server certificate section 2 Press To create screen to go to the screen including the Certificate operations section ...

Page 1603: ... are correct on the next screen and press Operation to create the CSR A private key corresponding to the CSR is created simultaneously in the management module The same key as this one however can never be created It is recommended that you press Backup in the Certificate operations section to obtain the backup after creating a CSR ...

Page 1604: ...tificate 2 3 Import the signed digital server certificate 1 Press The operation for certification in the Service Settings screen of the system Web console to go to the Certificate operations section Then press Import to display the screen for importing 2 Confirm that the certificate information displayed is the same as the certificate information you have obtained and press Operation to import the...

Page 1605: ...ication in the Service Settings screen of the system Web console to go to the Information of server certificate screen Then press Edit on the upper right of the screen to change the protocol settings to HTTPS Encryption of the communication path will be enabled from the next connection To enable the management module authentication the root certificate of CA must have been imported to the Web brow...

Page 1606: ...ation triggered by failure events The e mail notification is executed when logs are output from a server blade by manual operation In this case there is no e mail notification triggered by failure events before this e mail 3 Triggered by manual operation the current status With this function you can collect information on the current status of the equipment and send it attached to e mail To find t...

Page 1607: ...ment module or system Web console 5 Retry Notification Retries the e mail notification If notification triggered by failure or by log output fails 6 Notification Triggered by failure Subject AUTO Failure report Body Mail description The trouble occurred by the following device Information on the server chassis Brief information on the failure Attachment 1 svpsts YYYYMMDD hhmmss gz trc YYYYMMDD hhm...

Page 1608: ...erformed 5 When security is set to high select d TLS If not e mail notification is not performed Attached file specifications The following table describes files attached to e mail notification NO File name Contents Maximum size 2 Notified automatically upper line Triggered by manual operation lower line 1 svpsts YYYYMMDD hhmmss gz Device information 500 kbyte 500 kbyte 2 trc YYYYMMDD hhmmss tar g...

Page 1609: ...hows the procedure for using e mail functions See System Web Console in Chapter 6 for information about how to operate the system web console grep e CPU e timer e LOC proc interrupts 2 Set the basic information for e mail notification 3 Set the destination information for e mail notification 4 Execute the test to transmit e mail ...

Page 1610: ...tion Keep other settings unchanged The source e mail address is an e mail sender address from Specify the host name or IP address in the SMTP server field The default port number of the SMTP server is 25 3 Setting the destination information for e mail notification External link setting shows the e mail remote notification Input or select the necessary items in the e mail address 0 to 3 fields for...

Page 1611: ...ng description and correct them as necessary Check if communication between the management module and the mail server is available If not check that the LAN cable is properly connected Check the network setting of the management module You need to specify DNS in the network setting of the management module when specifying the mail server as the host name Check if the SMTP service is running on the...

Page 1612: ...il notification setting The operation for e mail address failed The SMTP server does not support the specified encryption system Description The SMTP server does not support the encryption method specified in the email notification setting Checking and Action Check and correct the encryption method in the email notification setting The operation for e mail address failed The error occurred during ...

Page 1613: ...ntaneously to the manager according to the Compute Blade private management information base MIB This enables the SNMP manager to monitor faults The following image shows management by SNMP 1 SNMP Polling Function Item Description Support command 1 SNMPv1 v2c v3 Get GetNext GetBulk Maximum number of SNMP managers that can be notified simultaneously 4 Supported modules Server blade management modul...

Page 1614: ...ere the alert occurred Binding of the sixth variable Alert ID See SVP Service Processor Log Message in Chapter 6 ID 14Ex and 17Ex are out of target for SNMP trap Binding of the first variable Time when the alert was sent Binding of the second variable Chassis ID Note This SNMP trap function does not support the SNMP standard trap 3 Specifications of SNMPv3 Item Description Authentication Hush meth...

Page 1615: ...that allows SNMP trap function to perform 4 Using the console set the information required for SNMP functions including the IP address of the destination SNMP manager and the name of a community for SNMPv1 v2c the IP address of the destination SNMP manager engine ID access type user name and password for SNMPv3 5 Using the test notification function perform a test trap notification If the SNMP man...

Page 1616: ...0 0AlertTrapBladeSerious 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 3 39 1 0 1 2 2 The server blade of Compute Blade 2000 encountered a fault at the warning level Server blade 6 hitachiComputeBlade200 0AlertTrapBladeInformati on 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 3 39 1 0 1 2 3 The server blade of Compute Blade 2000 encountered a fault at the information level Server blade 7 hitachiComputeBlade200 0AlertTrapOtherNon Recoverable 1 3 6 1 4 1 11...

Page 1617: ...SNMP agent side Select External cooperation SNMP setting Agent setting and Manager setting and then set the various items of information on the SNMP agent the destination of SNMP traps SNMP manager address and community name for SNMPv1 v2c To use SNMPv3 set items of information on the SNMP agent in the same way including the destination of SNMP traps user name access level types of authentication ...

Page 1618: ...tion Operate the SNMP function by following the information that is set with the system Web console When a fault occurs in the Compute Blade obtain log files needed for fault analysis using the DL command if there is a request from maintenance personnel ...

Page 1619: ... 39 bdsTrapcommon 0 Common definition of Compute Blade private traps hitachiComputeBlade1000 1 Trap definition for Compute Blade 1000 hitachiComputeBlade320 2 Trap definition for Compute Blade 320 hitachiComputeBlade2000 10 Trap definition for Compute Blade 2000 systemExMib 5 hitachiComputeBlade 39 chassisConfig 1 Server Chassis information moduleConfig 2 Detailed module information moduleStatus 3...

Page 1620: ...D Object ID OID corresponding to an MIB object identifier is shown 3 SYNTAX The meaning of a syntax used in the private MIB is shown as follows No SYNTAX Description 1 Not Accessible Access is not allowed 2 Display String 0 to 2040 characters in a row 3 INTEGER Integer value from 2147483648 to 2147483647 4 Integer32 Integer value from 2147483648 to 2147483647 4 Access RO shows that MIB access is r...

Page 1621: ...D 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 2 RO Shows the vender OID of the management equipment This equipment has the OID value of private hitachi system Compute Blade 2000 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 3 39 10 as the fixed value 3 sysUpTime 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 RO Shows the accumulated time by the 10 msec after the SNMP agent boots up 4 sysContact 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 RO 1 Shows the contact related to the management equipment The contact set wi...

Page 1622: ... each interface 1 One of the following values is shown up 1 down 2 testing 3 11 ifOperStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 8 RO Shows the current status of each interface 1 One of the following values is shown up 1 down 2 testing 3 12 ifInOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 RO Shows the total number of octets that each interface has received 1 13 ifInUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 RO Shows the number of unicast packe...

Page 1623: ...fSpecific 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 22 RO Shows the reference to MIB that specifies features of the interface media It is the MIB object ID dependent on ifType 1 1 This object includes the information only on some interfaces 2 This object is RW in the SNMP standard but RO for this equipment c at group No Object identifier OID Access Description 1 atTable 1 3 6 1 2 1 3 1 NA Shows the Address Translation Ta...

Page 1624: ...DestU nreachs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 3 RO Shows the total number of incoming Destination Unreachable messages 4 icmpInTimeE xcds 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 4 RO Shows the total number of incoming TimeExceeded messages 5 icmpInParm Probs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 5 RO Shows the total number of incoming Parameter Problem message s 6 icmpInSrcQu enchs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 6 RO Shows the total number of incoming Source Quench messages 7 icmp...

Page 1625: ...pOutSrc Quenchs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 19 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Source Quench messages 20 icmpOutRedi rects 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 20 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Redirect messages 21 icmpOutEch os 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 21 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Echo Request messages 22 icmpOutEch osReps 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 22 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Echo Reply message 23 icmpOutTim estamps 1...

Page 1626: ... 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 4 RO Shows the remote IP address of TCP connection 2 7 tcpConnRem Port 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 5 RO Shows the remote port number of TCP connection 2 8 tcpInErrs 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 14 RO Shows the number of incoming error segments 9 tcpOutRsts 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 15 RO Shows the number of outgoing segments with the reset RST flag 1 This object is RW in the SNMP standard but RO for this equipment ...

Page 1627: ...or statuses are badValue 10 snmpInRead Onlys 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 11 RO Shows the total number of incoming PDUs whose error statuses are readOnly 11 snmpInGenE rrs 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 12 RO Shows the total number of incoming PDUs whose error statuses are genErr 12 snmpInTotal ReqVars 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 13 RO Shows the total number of MIB objects that are successfully collected 13 snmpInTotal SetVars 1 3 6 1 2...

Page 1628: ...ows the number of outgoing GetResponces messages 28 snmpOutTr aps 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 29 RO Shows the number of outgoing Traps 29 snmpEnabl eAuthenTra ps 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 30 RO 1 Shows whether or not to issue an authentication failure Trap enable 1 disable 2 30 snmpSilent Drops 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 31 RO Shows the total number of SNMP incoming messages that were silently dropped because the reply size was g...

Page 1629: ...1 6 3 10 2 1 1 RO Shows the engine ID value for SNMP engine management 2 snmpEngine Boots 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 2 RO Shows how many times the SNMP engine SNMP agent has been booted after the last setting of a snmpEnginID 3 snmpEngine Time 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 3 RO Shows how many seconds has passed after the last booting of the SNMP engine SNMP agent 4 snmpEngine MaxMessag eSize 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 1 1 4 RO ...

Page 1630: ...k 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 2 1 RO 1 Used for spin lock operation to change usmUserTable security 8 usmUserTab le 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 2 2 NA Shows the user table in Local Configuration Datastore LCD of the SNMP engine 9 usmUserEntr y 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 NA Shows the user table entry in Local Configuration Datastore LCD of the SNMP engine 10 usmUserEng ineID 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 1 RO Shows ID for managing...

Page 1631: ...ncryption 4 usmAesCfb128Protocol AES encryption 18 usmUserPriv KeyChange 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 9 RO 1 Object to create an encryption key shown in usmUserEngineID This object is set when usmUserName of a requester is different from sumUserName of this entry 19 usmUserOw nPrivKeyCha nge 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 10 RO 1 Object to create an encryption key shown in usmUserEngineID This object is set whe...

Page 1632: ...s 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 2 1 2 5 NA Shows the method for storing this table entry which is fixed at active 1 9 vacmAccess Table 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 4 1 NA Shows the table of access rights that the group has 10 vacmAccess Entry 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 4 1 1 NA Shows the table entry of access rights that the group has 11 vacmAccess ContextMatc h 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 4 1 1 4 RO 1 Shows the method for matching contextNam...

Page 1633: ... y 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 1 2 1 NA Shows the local storage table entry for information on the sub tree family of MIB view 20 vacmViewTr eeFamilyMa sk 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 1 2 3 RO Shows the mask value of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree The value is fixed at H 21 vacmViewTr eeFamilyTyp e 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 1 2 4 RO 1 Shows that MIB view is included or excluded One of the following values is displayed 1 included 2 ex...

Page 1634: ...6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the maximum number of slots for management module installation 4 chassisCapa citySw 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 1 3 Integer32 RO Shows the maximum number of slots for switch module installation 5 chassisCapa cityFan 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 1 5 Integer32 RO Shows the maximum number of slots for fan module installation 6 chassisCapa cityPs 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39...

Page 1635: ...essibl e NA Shows the table entry describing the information on server blade installation 4 bladeInstallIn dex 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 2 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityBlade to identify the table entry 5 bladeInstallS lotnum 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 2 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the server blade slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0...

Page 1636: ...ssibl e NA Shows the table entry describing the information on management module installation 4 mmInstallInd ex 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 3 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityMm to identify the table entry 5 mmInstallSlo tnum 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 3 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the management module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0...

Page 1637: ...cessibl e NA Shows the table entry describing the information on switch module installation 4 swInstallInde x 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 4 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacitySw to identify the table entry 5 swInstallSlot num 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 4 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the switch module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0 to ch...

Page 1638: ...ccessibl e NA Shows the table entry describing the information on fan module installation 4 fanInstallInd ex 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 6 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityFan to identify the table entry 5 fanInstallSlot num 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 6 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the fan module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0 to chas...

Page 1639: ...sible NA Shows the table entry describing the information on power supply module installation 4 psInstallInde x 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 7 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityPs to identify the table entry 5 psInstallSlot num 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 7 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the power supply module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from...

Page 1640: ...in 4 ranging from 0 to chassisCapacityPciRiser 1 6 pciRiserInsta llExist 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 9 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the PCI e riser card IOCD module installation status in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 1 non exist 2 exist 3 unknown h chassisConfigSystem group 1 2 No Object identifier OID Syntax Access Description 1 chassisConfi gSystem 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 10 No...

Page 1641: ...ation of the server chassis This value is shown as 1 for 0 1kW 12 chassisConfi gMaxCurren cy 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 10 11 Integer32 RO Shows the max current consumption value in the max configuration of the server chassis This value is shown as 1 for 0 1A 13 chassisConfi gMaxPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 10 12 Integer32 RO Shows the rated power value in the max configuration of the server chassis...

Page 1642: ...ot Accessible NA Shows the table entry describing the information on PCI Express switch module installation 4 pcieSwInstall Index 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 11 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value to identify the table entry ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityPcieSw 5 pcieSwInstall Slotnum 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 1 11 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the PCI Express switch module slot number corresponding to...

Page 1643: ...ay String RO Shows the Product Name of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 1 7 bladeInfoPro ductPartMod el 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 4 Display String RO Shows the Product Part Model of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 1 8 bladeInfoPro ductVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 5 Display String RO Shows the Product Version of the server blade installed in the slot sh...

Page 1644: ...116 5 39 2 2 1 1 15 Display String RO Shows the Board Manufacture of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 1 19 bladeInfoCa pacityCpu 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 16 Integer32 RO Shows the max number of processors mounted on the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 4 20 bladeInfoCa pacityIo 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 17 Integer32 RO Shows the max number of mezzanine cards mo...

Page 1645: ...own in 5 This value is shown as 1 for 0 1 C 4 28 bladeInfoCP U0TempLow er 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 25 Integer32 RO Shows the lower temperature threshold value of CPU for warning in the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 This value is always shown as 0 29 bladeInfoCP U1TempHigh er 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 26 Integer32 RO Shows the upper temperature threshold value of CPU for warn...

Page 1646: ...e server blade One of the following values is shown 10 1 non redundancy 2 unknown 3 memory mirroring 4 online spared memory 37 bladeInfoTot alAmountOf Dimm 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 34 Integer32 RO Shows the max amount of DIMM available for a server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB 11 38 bladeInfoMa nagementIp Address 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 1 1 35 DisplayString RO Shows the IP address ...

Page 1647: ...alled in the server blade in the slot shown in 5 This value is shown as 1 for 1MHz 4 47 bladeInfoCp uInfo1CpuSt epping 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 2 1 7 Display String RO Shows the stepping of the first processor installed in the server blade in the slot shown in 5 6 48 bladeInfoCp uInfo2SlotNu m 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 2 1 8 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the second processor installed in th...

Page 1648: ...e entry of the information table on the mezzanine card installed in the server blade shown in 5 56 bladeInfoIoIn foIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 3 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index of the information table on the mezzanine card installed in the server blade shown in 5 57 bladeInfoIoIn fo1SlotNum 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 3 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the first mezzanine card installed...

Page 1649: ... This value is always 1 64 bladeInfoIoIn fo2Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 3 1 9 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the mezzanine card in the second slot in the server blade in the slot shown in 5 8 1 non exist 2 exist 3 unknown 65 bladeInfoIoIn fo2ProductN ame 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 3 1 10 Display String RO Shows the Product Name of the mezzanine card installed in the send slot in the server blade ...

Page 1650: ...nfoDim mInfo1Capa city 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 3 9 2 2 4 1 3 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the first slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB 13 74 bladeInfoDim mInfo1Type 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 3 9 2 2 4 1 4 Display String RO Shows the type of DIMM installed in the first slot of the server blade 14 75 bladeInfoDim mInfo1Frequ ency 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 3 9 2 2 4 1 5 Inte...

Page 1651: ... 82 bladeInfoDim mInfo3Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 12 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the third slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 83 bladeInfoDim mInfo3Capa city 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 13 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the third slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB...

Page 1652: ... 92 bladeInfoDim mInfo5Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 22 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 5th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 93 bladeInfoDim mInfo5Capa city 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 23 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 5th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB 13 ...

Page 1653: ...02 bladeInfoDim mInfo7Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 32 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 7th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 103 bladeInfoDim mInfo7Capa city 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 33 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 7th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB 13 ...

Page 1654: ... 112 bladeInfoDim mInfo9Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 42 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 9th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 113 bladeInfoDim mInfo9Capa city 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 43 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 9th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB 1...

Page 1655: ... 122 bladeInfoDim mInfo11Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 52 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 11th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 123 bladeInfoDim mInfo11Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 53 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 11th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 ...

Page 1656: ... 132 bladeInfoDim mInfo13Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 62 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 13th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 133 bladeInfoDim mInfo13Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 63 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 13th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 ...

Page 1657: ... 142 bladeInfoDim mInfo15Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 72 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 15th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 143 bladeInfoDim mInfo15Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 73 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 15th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 ...

Page 1658: ... 152 bladeInfoDim mInfo17Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 82 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 17th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 153 bladeInfoDim mInfo17Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 83 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 17th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 ...

Page 1659: ... 162 bladeInfoDim mInfo19Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 92 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 19th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 163 bladeInfoDim mInfo19Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 93 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 19th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 ...

Page 1660: ...72 bladeInfoDim mInfo21Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 102 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 21st slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 173 bladeInfoDim mInfo21Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 103 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 21st slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for 1 ...

Page 1661: ... 182 bladeInfoDim mInfo23Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 112 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 23rd slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 183 bladeInfoDim mInfo23Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 113 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 23rd slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for ...

Page 1662: ... 192 bladeInfoDim mInfo25Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 122 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 25th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 193 bladeInfoDim mInfo25Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 123 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 25th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for ...

Page 1663: ... 202 bladeInfoDim mInfo27Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 132 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 27th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 203 bladeInfoDim mInfo27Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 133 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 27th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for ...

Page 1664: ... 212 bladeInfoDim mInfo29Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 142 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 29th slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 213 bladeInfoDim mInfo29Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 143 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 29th slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for ...

Page 1665: ... 222 bladeInfoDim mInfo31Exist 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 152 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 31st slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 12 1 exist 2 non exist 3 unknown 223 bladeInfoDim mInfo31Cap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 4 1 153 Integer32 RO Shows the capacity of DIMM installed in the 31st slot of the server blade This value is shown as 1 for ...

Page 1666: ...116 5 39 2 2 5 Not Accessible NA Shows the information table of the firmware version on the server blade 233 bladeInfoFwI nfoEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 5 1 Not Accessible NA Shows the entry of the information table on the server blade 234 bladeInfoFwI nfoIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 5 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index of the information table on the server blade 235 bladeInfoFw ActBmcVersi on...

Page 1667: ... server blade 15 240 bladeInfoFw AltHvmVersi on 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 2 2 5 1 7 Display String RO Shows the LPAR manager firmware version currently not used on the server blade 15 12 non exist is shown if no server blade or no DIMM is installed unknown is shown if no information is obtained 13 0 is shown if no information is obtained or if no server blade or no DIMM is installed 14 Not install is s...

Page 1668: ... 1 1 3 Display String RO Shows the Product Name of the management module of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 1 7 mmInfoProd uctPartMode l 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 3 1 1 4 Display String RO Shows the Product Part Model of the management module of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 1 8 mmInfoProd uctPartMode l2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 3 1 1 5 Display String RO Shows the Product Part Model...

Page 1669: ...wn in 5 2 16 mmInfoBo ardManufa cture 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 3 1 1 13 Display String RO Shows the Board Manufacture of the management module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 17 mmInfoHig herTemp 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 3 1 1 14 Integer32 RO Shows the upper temperature threshold value of inlet air for warning to the management module of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 This valu...

Page 1670: ...1 3 Display String RO Shows the firmware version of a bank currently not used by the management module 4 25 mmInfoFw ActDiction aryVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 3 2 1 4 Display String RO Shows the SEL dictionary version of a bank currently used by the management module 4 26 mmInfoFw AltDictiona ryVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 3 2 1 5 Display String RO Shows the SEL dictionary version of a bank...

Page 1671: ...roduct Serial Number of the switch module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 9 swInfoProdu ctManufactur e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 4 1 1 6 Display String RO Shows the Board Product Manufacturer of the switch module installed in the slot shown in 5 2 10 swInfoProdu ctVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 4 1 1 7 Display String RO Shows the Board Product Version of the switch module installed in the slot s...

Page 1672: ...le installation 4 fanInfoIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 6 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityFan to identify the table entry 5 fanInfoSlotnu m 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 6 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the fan module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0 to chassis CapacityFan 1 6 fanInfoType 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 6 1 1 3 Display String RO...

Page 1673: ...ct Name of the power supply module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 8 psInfoProduc tPartModel 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 7 1 1 5 Display String RO Shows the Product Part Model of the power supply module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 9 psInfoProduc tVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 7 1 1 6 Display String RO Shows the Product Version of the power supply module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 1...

Page 1674: ...n 5 This value is always shown as 0 15 psInfoExhau stTempHigh er 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 7 1 1 12 Integer32 RO Shows the upper temperature threshold value of exhaust air for warning to the power supply module installed in the slot shown in 5 This value is shown as 1 for 0 1 C 2 16 psInfoExhau stTempLowe r 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 7 1 1 13 Integer32 RO Shows the lower temperature threshold value of ...

Page 1675: ...n the slot shown in 5 1 7 pciRiserInfoPr oductPartMod el 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 9 1 1 4 Display String RO Shows the Product Part Model of the PCI e Riser card IOCD module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 8 pciRiserInfoPr oductVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 9 1 1 5 Display String RO Shows the Product Version of the PCI e Riser card IOCD module installed in the slot shown in 5 1 9 pciRiserInfoPr...

Page 1676: ... installed in the slot shown in 5 1 non exist 2 exist 18 pciRiserIoEx pansionProd uctPartMode l 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 9 2 1 3 DisplayStri ng RO Shows the ProductPartModel of I O slot expansion units connected to the I O board module installed in the slot shown in 5 3 19 pciRiserIoEx pansionProd uctSerialNu m 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 9 2 1 4 DisplayStri ng RO Shows the ProductSerialNo of I O slot ...

Page 1677: ... index of information on of PCI riser cards connection on the I O slot expansion unit connected to the I O board module 26 pciRiserIoEx pansionBelo ngedPciSlot 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 2 9 3 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the 1st slot for a PCI riser card to be connected to the I o slot expansion unit connected to the I O board module shown in 5 4 27 pciRiserIoEx pansionBelo ngedPciSlot 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 ...

Page 1678: ...5 39 2 9 3 1 9 Integer32 RO Shows the 8th slot for a PCI riser card to be connected to the I o slot expansion unit connected to the I O board module shown in 5 4 2 1 is shown if no I O board module installed no I O slot expansion unit connected or no I O slot expansion unit can be identified 3 Not Install is shown if no I O board module installed no I O slot expansion unit connected or no I O slot...

Page 1679: ...e PCI Express switch module installed in the slot shown in 5 2 10 pcieSwInfoPr oductVersion 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 10 1 1 7 DisplayStri ng RO Shows the ProductVersion of the PCI Express switch module installed in the slot shown in 5 2 11 pcieSwInfoBo ardProductNa me 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 2 10 1 1 8 DisplayStri ng RO Shows the BoardProductName of the PCI Express switch module installed in the slot...

Page 1680: ...eStatus Slotnum 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the server blade slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0 to chassisCapacityBlade 1 6 bladeStatus HealthStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following messages is shown 1 1 normal 2 fail 3 unknown 7 bladeStatus Sens...

Page 1681: ...2 Not Accessible NA Shows the table of information on the voltage sensor with the server blade 15 bladeVoltage Entry 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 Not Accessible NA Shows the table entry of information on the voltage sensor with the server blade 16 bladeVoltInd ex 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityBalde to identify the table entry 1...

Page 1682: ... slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 23 bladeVoltSe nsor3Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 8 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 4 24 bladeVoltSe nsor3Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 9 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 5 The v...

Page 1683: ...or the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 4 30 bladeVoltSe nsor5Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 15 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 31 bladeVoltSe nsor5Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 16 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the ...

Page 1684: ...9 3 2 2 1 22 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 38 bladeVoltSe nsor8Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 23 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 4 39 bladeVoltSe nsor8Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 24 In...

Page 1685: ...r the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 45 bladeVoltSe nsor10Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 30 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 46 bladeVoltSe nsor10Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 31 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server bl...

Page 1686: ...d 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 37 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 53 bladeVoltSe nsor13Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 38 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 4 54 bladeVoltSe nsor13Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39...

Page 1687: ...ver blade installed in the slot shown in 5 4 60 bladeVoltSe nsor15Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 45 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 61 bladeVoltSe nsor15Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 46 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server b...

Page 1688: ...d 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 52 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 68 bladeVoltSe nsor18Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 53 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 69 bladeVoltSe nsor18Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 5...

Page 1689: ... the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 75 bladeVoltSe nsor20Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 60 Display String RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 76 bladeVoltSe nsor20Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 61 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the serve...

Page 1690: ... 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 67 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 83 bladeVoltSe nsor23Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 68 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 84 bladeVoltSe nsor23Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 69 Int...

Page 1691: ...rver blade in the slot shown in 5 4 90 bladeVoltSe nsor25Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 75 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 91 bladeVoltSe nsor25Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 76 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade inst...

Page 1692: ...tenth of the response value 97 bladeVoltSe nsor27Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 82 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 98 bladeVoltSe nsor28Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 83 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in...

Page 1693: ...1642 13 System Operation and Management 6 invalid is shown if no server blade or no sensor is installed unknown is shown if no information can be obtained ...

Page 1694: ... the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 105 bladeVoltSe nsor30Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 90 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 106 bladeVoltSe nsor30Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 91 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server b...

Page 1695: ... tenth of the response value 112 bladeVoltSe nsor32Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 97 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 113 bladeVoltSe nsor33Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 98 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown...

Page 1696: ...1645 13 System Operation and Management 6 invalid is shown if no server blade or no sensor is installed unknown is shown if no information can be obtained ...

Page 1697: ... 1 104 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 120 bladeVoltSe nsor35Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 105 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 121 bladeVoltSe nsor35Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 106...

Page 1698: ...1647 13 System Operation and Management 6 invalid is shown if no server blade or no sensor is installed unknown is shown if no information can be obtained ...

Page 1699: ...e tenth of the response value 127 bladeVoltSe nsor37Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 112 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the server blade installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 128 bladeVoltSe nsor38Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 113 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot sh...

Page 1700: ...1649 13 System Operation and Management 6 invalid is shown if no server blade or no sensor is installed unknown is shown if no information can be obtained ...

Page 1701: ...39 3 2 2 1 119 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 135 bladeVoltSe nsor40Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 2 1 120 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 136 bladeVoltSe nsor40Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 ...

Page 1702: ...s 0 if no server blade or no sensor is installed Obtain the MIB object of the next OID and determine whether or not the replied value is valid 6 invalid is shown if no server blade or no sensor is installed unknown is shown if no information can be obtained ...

Page 1703: ...String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 144 bladeTempS ensor2Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 6 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 145 bladeTempS ensor2Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 7 INTEGER RO ...

Page 1704: ... 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 12 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 151 bladeTempS ensor4Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 13 INTEGER RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 152 bladeTempS ensor5Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 3...

Page 1705: ...r blade in the slot shown in 5 4 158 bladeTempS ensor11Valu e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 33 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 159 bladeTempS ensor7Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 21 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in ...

Page 1706: ...ladeTempS ensor13Nam e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 38 Display String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 165 bladeTempS ensor13Valu e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 39 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 1 T...

Page 1707: ...ladeTempS ensor15Nam e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 44 Display String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 171 bladeTempS ensor15Valu e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 45 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 1 T...

Page 1708: ...ladeTempS ensor17Nam e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 50 Display String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 177 bladeTempS ensor17Valu e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 51 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 1 T...

Page 1709: ...ladeTempS ensor19Nam e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 56 Display String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 183 bladeTempS ensor19Valu e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 57 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 1 T...

Page 1710: ...adeTempSe nsor17Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 2 3 1 50 Display String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 189 bladeTempSe nsor17Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 2 3 1 51 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 1 The re...

Page 1711: ...ladeTempS ensor19Nam e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 56 Display String RO Shows the temperature sensor name for the server blade in the slot shown in 5 4 195 bladeTempS ensor19Valu e 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 3 1 57 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature value of the server blade in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 1 T...

Page 1712: ...ble on DIMM installed in the server blade 201 bladeDim mStatus Entry 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 Not Accessible NA Shows the entry of the information table on DIMM installed in the server blade 202 bladeDim mStatus Index 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index of the information table on DIMM installed in the server blade 203 bladeDim m1Status 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 2...

Page 1713: ...Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 4th DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 207 bladeDim m5Status 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 6 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 5th DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degener...

Page 1714: ...unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 212 bladeDim m10Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 11 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 10th DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 213 bladeDim m11Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 12 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 11th DI...

Page 1715: ...mal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 218 bladeDim m16Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 17 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 16th DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 219 bladeDim m17Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 18 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 1...

Page 1716: ...mal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 224 bladeDim m22Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 23 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 22nd DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 225 bladeDim m23Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 24 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 2...

Page 1717: ...mal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 230 bladeDim m28Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 29 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 28th DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 231 bladeDim m29Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 30 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 2...

Page 1718: ...mal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 234 bladeDim m32Statu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 3 2 4 1 33 INTEGER RO Shows the status of DIMM installed in the 32nd DIMM slot of the server blade One of the following values is shown 8 1 normal 2 unknown 3 degenerated 4 planned degenerated 8 Unknown is shown if no server blade is installed or if no DIMM in the DIMM slot if CPU is in failure or degen...

Page 1719: ...m 1 6 mmStatusHeal thStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the management module in the slot shown in 5 One of the following messages is shown 1 1 normal 2 fail 3 unknown 7 mmStatusPow erStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 1 1 4 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the management module installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following messages is shown 2 1 power off 2 p...

Page 1720: ...lue ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityMm to identify the table entry 14 mmVoltSensor 1Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 2 1 2 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the management module in the slot shown in 5 4 15 mmVoltSensor 1Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 2 1 3 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the management module in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of ...

Page 1721: ...tSensor 3Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 2 1 8 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the management module installed in the slot shown in 5 4 21 mmVoltSensor 3Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 2 1 9 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value of the management module installed in the slot shown in 5 5 The value is shown using the unit of 0 1 V The actual value is one tenth of the response valu...

Page 1722: ...management module is installed or redundancy setting is on the process if the data cannot be obtained or if no sensor exists 6 invalid is shown if no management module is installed or redundancy setting is on the process unknown is shown if no data is obtained ...

Page 1723: ...hown using the unit of 0 1 V The actual value is one tenth of the response value 28 mmVoltSensor 5Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 2 1 16 INTEGER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the management module in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 29 mmVoltSensor 6Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 3 2 1 17 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name f...

Page 1724: ...GER RO Shows the voltage value validity of the management module in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 35 mmVoltSensor8 Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 3 2 1 23 Display String RO Shows the voltage sensor name for the management module in the slot shown in 5 4 36 mmVoltSensor8 Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 3 2 1 24 Integer32 RO Shows the voltage value ...

Page 1725: ...1674 13 System Operation and Management 6 invalid is shown if no management module is installed or redundancy setting is on the process unknown is shown if no data is obtained ...

Page 1726: ...or 42 mmTemperatur eEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 3 3 1 Not Accessible NA Shows the table entry describing the information on the management module temperature sensor 43 mmTempIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 3 3 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityMm to identify the table entry 44 mmTempSenso r1Name 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 3 3 1 2 Display String RO Shows the temperat...

Page 1727: ...ng the unit of 0 1 C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 49 mmTempSenso r2Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 3 3 1 7 INTEGER RO Shows the temperature value validity of the management module in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 6 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 1 unknown is shown in the process of setting redundancy or when no management module is installed or the statu...

Page 1728: ...1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityISw to identify the table entry 5 swStatusSlotnu m 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 4 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the switch module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0 to chassisCapacitySw 1 6 swStatusHealt hStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 4 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the switch module installed in the ...

Page 1729: ... 5 fanStatusSlotnu m 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 6 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the fan module slot number corresponding to the index shown in 4 ranging from 0 to chassisCapacityFan 1 6 fanStatusHealth Status 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 6 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the fan module installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following messages is shown 1 1 normal 2 fail 3 unknown 7 fanStatusPower Stat...

Page 1730: ... of the following messages is shown 1 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 14 fan2RpmValue 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 6 2 1 4 Integer32 RO Shows the RPM value of the second fan in the fan module installed in the slot shown in 5 15 fan2RpmValid 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 6 2 1 5 INTEGER RO Shows the RPM validity of the second fan in the fan module installed in the slot shown in 5 Usually one of the following mess...

Page 1731: ... 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 7 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the power supply module installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following messages is shown 1 1 normal 2 fail 3 unknown 7 psStatusPower Status 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 7 1 1 4 INTEGER RO Shows the status of the power supply module installed in the slot shown in 5 One of the following messages is shown 1 1 power off 2 power on 3 unknown 4 b...

Page 1732: ... C The actual value is one tenth of the response value 2 14 psTempHotSpot Valid 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 7 2 1 5 INTEGER RO Shows the HotSpot temperature value validity of the power supply module in the slot shown in 5 One of the following values is shown 3 1 invalid 2 valid 3 unknown 15 psTempExhaust Value 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 5 39 3 7 2 1 6 Integer32 RO Shows the exhaust air temperature value of the po...

Page 1733: ...OCD module status 4 pciRiserStatusI ndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 9 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityPciRiser to identify the table entry 5 pciRiserStatusS lotnum 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 9 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the power supply corresponding to the index value shown in 4 ranging from 0 to chassisCapacityPciRiser 1 6 pciRiserStatusP ower...

Page 1734: ... 16 5 39 3 10 1 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityPcieSw to identify the table entry 5 pcieSwStatusSl otnum 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 10 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the PCI Express switch module corresponding to the index value shown above ranging from 0 to chassisCapacityPcieSw 1 6 pcieSwStatusH ealthStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 3 10 1 1 3 INTEG...

Page 1735: ... 39 4 2 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to partitionConfigCapacity to identify the table entry 4 partitionConf igPrimaryBla deNum 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 2 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the primary blade number of the partition corresponding to the index value shown in 3 ranging from 0 to partitionConfigCapacity 1 1 5 partitionConf igBladeCou nt 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 2 1 3 Integer...

Page 1736: ... 2 1 7 Integer32 RO Shows the rated power value of the partition shown in 4 The value is shown 1 for 1W 4 10 partitionConf igTotalAmou ntOfDimm 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 2 1 8 Integer32 RO Shows the total DIMM amount available for the entire partition This value is shown as 1 for 1 GB 1 1 1 is shown when no partition corresponding to the index value exists 2 unknown is shown when no partition existe...

Page 1737: ...the index value shown in 3 a value from 0 to partitionConfigCapacity 1 5 partitionBladeSl otNum1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 3 1 3 Integer32 RO Shows the primary blade slot number of the partition corresponding to the index value shown in 4 1 6 partitionBladeSl otNum2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 3 1 4 Integer32 RO Shows the slot location of the 2 nd server blade that belongs in the partition corresponding...

Page 1738: ... 4 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the 2nd I O board module that belongs to the partition in 4 1 7 partitionPciRise rSlotNum3 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 5 1 5 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the 3rd I O board module that belongs to the partition in 4 1 8 partitionPciRise rSlotNum4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 4 5 1 6 Integer32 RO Shows the slot number of the 4th I O board module that belongs to ...

Page 1739: ...5 39 5 1 1 2 Integer32 RO Shows the partition number corresponding to the index value shown in 3 ranging from 0 to partitionConfigCapacity 1 5 partitionStatusP owerStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 5 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the power status of the partition corresponding to the partition number shown in 4 One of the following messages is shown 1 1 power off 2 power on 3 unknown 4 pre configure 5 booting...

Page 1740: ...ows the current that currently consumed by the partition in 4 This value is shown as 1 for 1W 4 9 partitionStatusC urrentPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 5 1 1 7 Integer32 RO Shows the power that currently consumed by the partition in 4 This value is shown as 1 for 1W 4 1 unknown is shown when no partition exists or no partition existence data can be obtained 2 unknown is shown when no partition exists...

Page 1741: ...undancy 3 unknown 5 chassisStatusC urrentTemp 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 4 Integer32 RO Shows the inlet air temperature of the server chassis This value is shown as 1 for 0 1 C 1 6 chassisStatusC urrentCurrency 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 5 Integer32 RO Shows the current consumed by the server chassis using the unit of 0 1A 7 chassisStatusC urrentPower 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 6 Integer32 RO Shows t...

Page 1742: ...the server chassis One of the following messages is shown 1 turn off 2 turn on 14 chassisStatusL edTemp 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows the temperature LED TEP status on the front panel of the server chassis One of the following messages is shown 1 turn off 2 turn on 15 chassisStatusL edDev 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 1 4 INTEGER RO Shows LED status of a device installed in the server...

Page 1743: ...nfoIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 1 6 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value ranging from 1 to chassisCapacityMarlog to identify the table entry 20 chassisStatusM arlogInfoData 1 3 6 1 4 1 1 16 5 39 6 1 1 6 1 2 DisplayStri ng RO Shows the MAR Maintenance Action Report log information data corresponding to the index value shown in 18 1 0 is shown when all server blades installed in the chassis are...

Page 1744: ...eously to the manager according to the I O slot expansion unit private MIB This enables the SNMP manager to monitor faults The following image shows management by SNMP 1 SNMP Polling Function Item Description Support command 1 SNMPv1 v2c v3 Get GetNext GetBulk Maximum number of SNMP managers that can be notified simultaneously 4 Supported modules I O slot expansion unit chassis power supply module...

Page 1745: ...ding of the fourth variable Alert message Binding of the fifth variable Location where the alert occurred Binding of the sixth variable Alert ID See Alert Log Message in Chapter 11 Note This SNMP trap function does not support the SNMP standard trap 3 Specifications of SNMPv3 Item Description Authentication Hush method MD5 SHA 1 Encryption method DES AES128 2 Prerequisites Prerequisites for using ...

Page 1746: ...ment that allows SNMP trap function to perform 4 Using the console set the information required for SNMP functions including the IP address of the destination SNMP manager and the name of a community for SNMPv1 v2c the IP address of the destination SNMP manager engine ID access type user name and password for SNMPv3 5 Using the test notification function perform a test trap notification If the SNM...

Page 1747: ... The I O slot expansion unit encountered a fault at the information level I O slot expansion unit 4 iodalertTrapIoxcEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 3 39 1 1 1 1 4 The I O slot expansion unit encountered an event at the event level I O slot expansion unit b Setting the information for using the SNMP polling Select MIB objects to acquire the information on the I O slot expansion unit and configure the necessa...

Page 1748: ...estination of SNMP traps SNMP manager address and community name 6 Performing SNMP tests Select the SNM command of the console for the I O slot expansion unit T SNMP trap test and then perform SNMP trap transmission to perform the SNMP trap notification test 7 SNMP operation Operate the SNMP function by following the information that is set with the console When a fault occurs in the I O slot expa...

Page 1749: ...Interface information at 3 ARP information ip 4 IP information icmp 5 ICMP information tcp 6 TCP information udp 7 UDP information snmp 11 SNMP information private 4 private 1 hitachi 116 system 3 HitachiComputeBlade 39 bdsTrapcommon 0 Common definition of I O slot expansion unit private traps iod 11 Trap definition for IOEU systemExMib 5 hitachiComputeBlade 39 iod 11 Chassis information ioPsm 12 ...

Page 1750: ...ct ID OID corresponding to an MIB object identifier is shown 3 SYNTAX The meaning of a syntax used in the private MIB is shown as follows No SYNTAX Description 1 Not Accessible Access is not allowed 2 Display String A string consists of 0 to 2040 characters 3 INTEGER Integer value from 2147483648 to 2147483647 4 Integer32 Integer value from 2147483648 to 2147483647 4 Access RO shows that MIB acces...

Page 1751: ... expansion unit 2 sysObjectID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 2 RO Shows the vender OID of the management equipment This equipment has the OID value of private hitachi system hitachiComputeBlade iod 1 3 6 1 4 1 116 3 39 11 as the fixed value 3 sysUpTime 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 RO Shows the accumulated time by the 10msec after the SNMP agent boots up 4 sysContact 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 RO 1 Shows the contact related to the managem...

Page 1752: ...each interface 1 One of the following values is shown up 1 down 2 testing 3 11 ifOperStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 8 RO Shows the current status of each interface 1 One of the following values is shown up 1 down 2 testing 3 12 ifInOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 RO Shows the total number of octets that each interface has received 1 13 ifInUcastPkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 RO Shows the number of unicast packet...

Page 1753: ...fSpecific 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 22 RO Shows the reference to MIB that specifies features of the interface media It is the MIB object ID dependent on ifType 1 1 This object includes the information only on some interfaces 2 This object is RW in the SNMP standard but RO for this equipment c at group No Object identifier OID Acces s Description 1 atTable 1 3 6 1 2 1 3 1 NA Shows the Address Translation T...

Page 1754: ...3 6 1 2 1 5 3 RO Shows the total number of incoming Destination Unreachable messages 4 icmpInTimeE xcds 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 4 RO Shows the total number of incoming TimeExceeded messages 5 icmpInParm Probs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 5 RO Shows the total number of incoming Parameter Problem message s 6 icmpInSrcQu enchs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 6 RO Shows the total number of incoming Source Quench messages 7 icmpInRedire cts 1 3...

Page 1755: ...utSrc Quenchs 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 19 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Source Quench messages 20 icmpOutRedi rects 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 20 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Redirect messages 21 icmpOutEch os 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 21 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Echo Request messages 22 icmpOutEch osReps 1 3 6 1 2 1 5 22 RO Shows the total number of outgoing Echo Reply message 23 icmpOutTim estamps 1 3...

Page 1756: ... 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 4 RO Shows the remote IP address of TCP connection 2 7 tcpConnRem Port 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 5 RO Shows the remote port number of TCP connection 2 8 tcpInErrs 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 14 RO Shows the number of incoming error segments 9 tcpOutRsts 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 15 RO Shows the number of outgoing segments with the RST flag 1 This object is RW in the SNMP standard but RO for this equipment 2 This...

Page 1757: ...rror statuses are badValue 10 snmpInRe adOnlys 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 11 RO Shows the total number of incoming PDUs whose error statuses are readOnly 11 snmpInGe nErrs 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 12 RO Shows the total number of incoming PDUs whose error statuses are genErr 12 snmpInTot alReqVars 1 3 6 1 2 1 11 13 RO Shows the total number of MIB objects that are successfully collected 13 snmpInTot alSetVars 1 3 6 1 2 ...

Page 1758: ...1 1 28 RO Shows the number of outgoing GetResponces messages 28 snmpOutTr aps 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 29 RO Shows the number of outgoing Traps 29 snmpEnabl eAuthenTra ps 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 30 RO 1 Shows whether or not to issue an authentication failure Trap enable 1 disable 2 30 snmpSilent Drops 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 31 RO Shows the total number of SNMP incoming messages that were silently dropped because the repl...

Page 1759: ...1 6 3 10 2 1 1 RO Shows the engine ID value for SNMP engine management 2 snmpEngine Boots 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 2 RO Shows how many times the SNMP engine SNMP agent has been booted after the last setting of a snmpEnginID 3 snmpEngine Time 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 2 1 3 RO Shows how many seconds has passed after the last booting of the SNMP engine SNMP agent 4 snmpEngine MaxMessag eSize 1 3 6 1 6 3 10 1 1 4 RO ...

Page 1760: ...k 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 2 1 RO 1 Used for spin lock operation to change usmUserTable security 8 usmUserTab le 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 2 2 RO Shows the user table in Local Configuration Datastore LCD of the SNMP engine 9 usmUserEntr y 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 RO Shows the user table entry in Local Configuration Datastore LCD of the SNMP engine 10 usmUserEng ineID 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 1 RO Shows ID for managing...

Page 1761: ...ncryption 3 usmAesCfb128Protocol AES encryption 18 usmUserPriv KeyChange 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 9 RO 1 Object to create an encryption key shown in usmUserEngineID This object is set when usmUserName of a requester is different from sumUserName of this entry 19 usmUserOw nPrivKeyCha nge 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 1 2 1 10 RO 1 Object to create an encryption key shown in usmUserEngineID This object is set whe...

Page 1762: ...1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 2 1 2 5 NA Shows the method for storing this table entry which is fixed at active 1 9 vacmAccess Table 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 4 1 NA Shows the table of access rights that the group has 10 vacmAccess Entry 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 4 1 1 NA Shows the table entry of access rights that the group has 11 vacmAccess ContextMatc h 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 4 1 1 4 RO 1 Shows the method for matching contextName ...

Page 1763: ... y 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 1 2 1 NA Shows the local storage table entry for information on the sub tree family of MIB view 20 vacmViewTr eeFamilyMa sk 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 1 2 3 RO Shows the mask value of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree The value is fixed at H 21 vacmViewTr eeFamilyTyp e 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 1 2 4 RO 1 Shows that MIB view is included or excluded One of the following values is displayed 1 included 2 ex...

Page 1764: ...r connecting to server chassis 6 ioChassisStat icInfoInfoMod el 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 1 5 DisplayStr ing RO Shows the model name of the I O slot expansion unit chassis 7 ioChassisStat icInfoChassis Type 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 1 6 DisplayStr ing RO Shows the backplane type of the I O slot expansion unit chassis 8 ioChassisStat icInfo ChassisId 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 1 7 DisplayStr ing RO Sho...

Page 1765: ...temperature warning threshold of inlet air for the I O slot expansion unit chassis Unit 0 1 C 18 ioChassisStat icHeight 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 1 17 Integer32 RO Shows the height of the I O slot expansion unit chassis Unit 1U 19 ioChassisStat icSize 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 1 18 Integer32 RO Shows the size of the I O slot expansion unit chassis Unit 1U 20 ioChassisStat icTotalMass 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 ...

Page 1766: ...O slot expansion chassis One of the following values 1 off 2 on 6 ioChassisDy namicStatus LocationLed 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 2 5 INTEGER RO Shows a state of Location LED 1 on the I O slot expansion chassis One of the following values 1 off 2 on 7 ioChassisDy namicPower Status 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 2 6 INTEGER RO Shows a state of power supply to the I O slot expansion chassis One of the foll...

Page 1767: ...lowing values is displayed 1 invalid 2 valid 15 ioChassisDy namicTempE xhaustValue 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 2 14 Integer32 RO Shows the temperature of outlet air from the I O module 1 in the I O slot expansion unit chassis Unit 0 1 C 16 ioChassisDy namicTempE xhaustValid2 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 11 2 15 INTEGER RO Shows the temperature validity of outlet air from the I O module 1 in the I O slot e...

Page 1768: ... 12 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the maximum number of slots for installing power supply modules 3 ioPsmStaticT able 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 12 1 2 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the table of the static information on the power supply module 4 ioPsmStatic Entry 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 12 1 2 1 Integer32 RO Shows the table entry of the static information on the power supply module 5 ioPsmStaticI ndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 1...

Page 1769: ...6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 12 2 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the dynamic information on the power supply module 2 ioPsmDyna micTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 12 2 1 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the table of the dynamic information on the power supply module 3 ioPsmDyna micEntry 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 12 2 1 1 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the table entry of the dynamic information on the power supply module 4 ioPsmDyna mic...

Page 1770: ...he index value to identify the table entry Value 1 to ioFanStaticSlotCapacity 6 ioFanStaticIn stallExist 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 13 1 2 1 2 INTEGER RO Shows a state of fan modules One of the following values is displayed 1 nonexistent 2 existent 3 unknown 7 ioFanStaticT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 13 1 2 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows a type of the fan module The following value is displayed 1 standard 8 ioFanS...

Page 1771: ...he fan module One of the following values is displayed 1 power off 2 power on 3 unknown 6 ioFanDynami cHealthStatu s 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 13 2 1 1 3 INTEGER RO Shows a state of the fan module One of the following values is displayed 1 normal 2 fault 3 unknown 7 ioFanDynami cSensorCap acity 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 13 2 1 1 4 INTEGER RO Shows the number of fans per fan module 8 ioFanDynami cValue1 1 ...

Page 1772: ... 11 6 5 39 14 1 2 1 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the table entry of the static information on the PCI express slot 5 ioPcieStaticI ndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 14 1 2 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the index value to identify the table entry Value 1 to ioPciStaticSlotCapacity 6 ioPcieStaticT ype 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 14 1 2 1 2 INTEGER RO Shows a type of the card installed in the PCI express slot One of the fol...

Page 1773: ...a power state of the PCI express slot One of the following values is displayed 1 power off 2 power on 3 unknown 7 ioPcieDynam icReceiverEr ror 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 14 2 1 1 4 Integer32 RO Shows the number of ReceiverError counts of the PCI express slot 8 ioPcieDynam icFcUpdateTi meoutError 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 14 2 1 1 5 Integer32 RO Shows the number of FcUpdateTimeoutError counts of the PCI exp...

Page 1774: ...owing two groups ioUpPortStatic and ioUpPortDynamic Each group is described in the following table a to b a ioUpPortStatic group 1 3 No Object identifier OID Syntax Access Description 1 ioUpPortStati c 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 1 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the static information on the server chassis connect port 2 ioUpPortStati cPortCapacit y 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 1 1 Integer32 RO Shows the maxim...

Page 1775: ...a type of the server chassis connect port One of the following values is displayed 1 I O slot expansion unit connect cable 2 sideband cable 11 ioUpPortStati cInstallExist 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 1 4 1 5 INTEGER RO Shows the connection status of a cable connected to the server chassis connect port One of the following values is displayed 1 not connected 2 connected 12 ioUpPortStati cSlotnum 1 3 6 ...

Page 1776: ...mber of the PCI express slot belonging to the server chassis connect port b ioUpPortDynamic group 1 2 No Object identifier OID Syntax Access Description 1 ioUpPortDyn amic 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 2 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the dynamic information on the server chassis connect port 2 ioUpPortDyn amicTable 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 2 1 Not Accessibl e NA Shows the table of the dynamic information on...

Page 1777: ...6 5 39 15 2 1 1 8 Integer32 RO Shows the number of BadDLLPError counts of the server chassis connect port 12 ioUpPortDyn amicReplay NumRollover Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 2 1 1 9 Integer32 RO Shows the number of ReplayNumRolloverError counts of the server chassis connect port 13 ioUpPortDyn amicReplayT imerTimeout Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 11 6 5 39 15 2 1 1 1 0 Integer32 RO Shows the number of Replay...

Page 1778: ... at user authentication Adding user account information to the LDAP directory on the LDAP server allows all management modules and server blades using the LDAP server to use the added user account information Besides it is not necessary to register user account information with each module Group authentication During user authentication the group information in the LDAP directory is viewed and onl...

Page 1779: ... required setting items Active directory setting item Setting item 1 Server certificate 2 Bind DN for the LDAP server 3 User account for logging in to management modules and to server blades 4 Group that is allowed to login to the management module and server blade Server certificate Because all communications between Compute Blade 2000 and LDAP servers are carried out through Secure Socket Layer ...

Page 1780: ...ng an LDAP bind DN and a password Registering a user account to use as a bind DN Register a user account to use as an LDAP bind DN with your Windows server For details about how to register user accounts see the documentation of your Windows server You must grant the access permission for the LDAP directory to use when authenticating users to the user account to be used as the LDAP bind DN Registe...

Page 1781: ...gement Console MMC screen is displayed select Menu File Add Remove Snap in In the Add Standalone Snap in screen click the Add select ADSI Edit from Available standalone snap ins click Add and then click Close When ADSI Edit is not available see Windows support tools ...

Page 1782: ...one Snap in screen click OK Confirm that ADSI Edit is added to Console Root in the MMC screen 4 Click ADSI Edit in the MMC screen and select Connect to 5 Select Domain for the domain context of Active Directory to connect and click OK 6 Right click ADSI Edit again and select Connect to ...

Page 1783: ...t configuration CN Configuration DC domain base CN Services CN Windows NT CN Directory Service and select properties 9 Click dSHeuristics and then Edit to set a value in the Properties screen When the value is Not Set type 0000002 in the field When a value is set change the 7 th number from the left to 2 Do not change other numbers ...

Page 1784: ...ormation to be used after logging in to management modules or BMC User name The following characters and the number of characters are available for user names Number of characters From 1 to 32 characters Available characters for the head of a name A Z a z Available characters for from the second to the end of a name A Z a z 0 9 hyphen _ underscore period Password The following characters and the n...

Page 1785: ...1734 13 System Operation and Management Follow the procedure below to assign role information 1 Select Start Run type mmc and click OK ...

Page 1786: ...nagement Console MMC screen is displayed select Menu File Add Remove Snap in In the Add Standalone Snap in screen click Add select ADSI Edit from Available standalone snap ins click Add and then click Close When ADSI Edit is not available see Windows support tools ...

Page 1787: ...nfirm that ADSI Edit is added to Console Root in the MMC screen 4 Click ADSI Edit in the MMC screen and select Connect to 5 Select Domain for the domain context of Active Directory to connect and click OK 6 Open the ADSI Edit tree and right click a user account to give roles on the LDAP directory to open Properties ...

Page 1788: ...ring 10 Set roles for management modules with the following character string 11 After setting roles click OK Management ModuleRole role_name role_name used role names defined to the management module ServerBladeRole XXXXXXXX X 0 or 1 XXXXXXXX each X from the head to the end corresponds to a following role in the numerical order 1 Login 2 Administrator 3 Server Operation 4 User Account Management 5...

Page 1789: ...r accounts you allow login with each group For details about how to create groups and how to register user accounts with groups see the documentation of your Windows server You can use a single group for logging in to server blades and management modules Windows support tools Windows Support Tools is a package software program that contains ADSI Active Directory Service Interface Edit for operatin...

Page 1790: ...ystem authenticates users by using the user account information set for management module and BMC Registering LDAP servers A maximum of three LDAP servers can be registered If you register multiple LDAP servers the system tries to connect to the LDAP servers in the order they were registered The system searches the LDAP directory on the server of which connection was established first and tries to...

Page 1791: ...ied root directory are to be searched at user authentication Attribute indicating login IDs Specify the attribute of each entry in the LDAP directory to be compared with the user ID specified at user authentication For Active Directory the attribute name sAMAccountName is used for searching login IDs usually Attribute indicating roles If you grant a role to the user account for logging in to a man...

Page 1792: ...dicating groups Specify the attribute in which the list of user accounts whose login is to be allowed is stored For Active Directory the list of user accounts is normally stored in the attribute name member DN whose login is allowed Specify the group DN created in Registering groups A maximum of five groups can be specified User accounts of which login you want to allow must belong to one of the s...

Page 1793: ...r chassis as a 24 hour graph or in table format Current data view In the Current Data view you can view the following power usage data for the server chassis and server blades Server chassis Item Description Maximum power supply W Total DC power supplied by all Power Supply Modules Current power supply W Total DC power supplied by the active Power Supply Modules The display changes when optimized ...

Page 1794: ...requency MHz Maximum operating frequency of the CPU When Turbo Mode is enabled the CPU frequency shown by the OS may be greater than the displayed value Power supply module Item Description Maximum power supply W Maximum DC power that can be supplied by the Power Supply Module Current power consumption W Current power supplied by the Power Supply Module Management module Item Description Power rat...

Page 1795: ...r cap on the power consumption of a selected server blade The set power cap must be between the minimum and maximum power consumption values displayed on the console Power capping has two control modes Static control and dynamic control In static control mode appropriate ACPI processor performance states P states are set for the server blade s CPU in line with the specified power capping value so ...

Page 1796: ...ic control mode Select Dynamic for dynamic control mode Static 4 Exception processing Set the server blade s behavior when the power consumption within a defined period exceeds a user specified value 1 Log a fault SEL Warning 2 Log a fault SEL and set the CPU duty cycle to 12 5 Warning CPU duty cycle 12 5 Warning CPU duty cycle 12 5 1 When you select static control mode for high performance server...

Page 1797: ...003 The following describes how to set up DBS in Windows Server 2003 From the Control Panel click Power Options On the Power Schemes page change the Power schemes settings Those relating to DBS are as follows DBS is enabled by setting Server Balanced Processor Power and Performance power scheme item 2 Setup Item Description 1 Always on Sets the performance state to the highest level and disables D...

Page 1798: ...not turned off Setting procedure To use optimized Power Supply Module control you must enter settings on the Power Control Settings List View of the Management Module s system Web console Alternatively enter the required settings in command mode using the PSM Command Note that optimized control is disabled by default Control of maximum power consumption Control of maximum power consumption is func...

Page 1799: ...t dictionary to any earlier version Locate the currently installed dictionary version in Firmware Management View in the system Web console FV Command or FW Command in the system console Chapter 6 or FW Command in the I O slot expansion unit console in Chapter 10 Check your dictionary version with the dictionary file name as follows Naming rules dict xxxxx update The procedure with the system Web ...

Page 1800: ...tion and Management Updating dictionary 1 Log in to the system Web console as Administrator 2 Select Maintenance Firmware in the menu on the left of the screen 3 In the Firmware screen click Update settings 4 Click Browse ...

Page 1801: ...gement 5 In the Choose file window select a dictionary file and click Open 6 Confirm that the file you selected is displayed in the dictionary field and click Update 7 In the confirmation screen click Operation Dictionary update starts ...

Page 1802: ...1751 13 System Operation and Management 8 When the dictionary update is completed the screen returns to Firmware Confirm that your dictionary version has been updated ...

Page 1803: ... When using this operation log function with X57A1 model you need to install BMC firmware version 04 51 or later Operation log messages can be changed depending on the firmware version Specifications of operation log The following table describes specifications of operation logs No Item Description Server blade operation logs Management module operation logs 1 Recording Operation events are classi...

Page 1804: ... 048 logs Server chassis selected Up to 18 432 logs 2 048 x 8 partitions and 2 048 for logs of other than partitions 7 Download file format Comma separated values CSV file a comma is used as a separator 8 Download file name operation log_ model name _ product code csv model name _ product code are identical to those of the server blade with which you have downloaded logs opr YYYYMMDD hhmmss csv YY...

Page 1805: ...7 to 17 The name of a component where you operated Server blade operation logs Server Blade Management module operation logs Management Module 5 Operation place place 15 to 40 Host name of a component where you operated Server blade operation logs an IP address of the server blade Management module operation logs an IP address of the management module 6 Operation category categ 7 to 19 A category ...

Page 1806: ...ation event occurred without success or failure The following shows the dump examples of operation logs seq_no date par_no compid place categ result subjtype subject sessionid msgid message 1 2011 05 22T06 33 18 000 09 00 0 Management module 192 168 0 1 StartStop Success User Operation maintenance FFFFFFFF 8000 On Partition0 requested operation Channel System Console Method Power on 2 2011 05 22T0...

Page 1807: ... on the switch module On Switch module 1 s requested operation Channel 2 s Method 3 s 0807 SWC command failed to request operation on the switch module On Switch module 1 s failed to requested operation Channel 2 s Method 3 s 1800 Authentica tion logged in to the system console Logged in to the System Console Username 1 s Session ID 2 s Source IP address 3 s 1801 Failed to log in to the system con...

Page 1808: ...setting is changed Channel 2 s Category 3 s Value 4 s 3809 LC command changed switch module LAN settings On Switch module 1 s LAN setting is changed ApplyManaegment module setting Channel 2 s 380E LC command changed VLAN settings VLAN setting is changed Move port Channel 1 s Target 2 s Partition 3 s Switch module 4 s VLAN ID 5 s 380F LC command created a VLAN VLAN is created on management LAN port...

Page 1809: ... BSM test alert On Partition 1 s SC BSM send test alert N M cold standby Channel 2 s Category 3 s 382B MI command changed e mail settings E mail setting is changed Channel 1 s Category 2 s Detail 3 s Value 4 s 382C MI command changed e mail settings E mail setting is changed Channel 1 s Address 2 s Detail 3 s Value 4 s 382D MI command removed e mail settings E mail setting is removed Channel 1 s A...

Page 1810: ...nnel 1 s Category 2 s Detail 3 s Value 4 s 384C LDAP command changed LDAP settings LDAP setting is changed Channel 1 s Category 2 s Detail 3 384E UBR command restored server blade settings On Partition 1 s setting 2 s is restored Channel 3 s Category 4 s Blade 5 s Slot 6 s Slot on IOEU 7 s 384F UBR command removed server blade settings file On Partition 1 s setting 2 s is removed Channel 3 s Categ...

Page 1811: ...ng is changed Channel 1 s Detail 2 s Value 3 s 3917 Backing up the fibre channel settings For mezzanine card and I O board On Partition 1 s setting 2 s is backed up Channel 3 s Category 4 s Blade 5 s Slot 6 s File 7 s 3918 Backing up the fibre channel settings For I O board on an I O slot expansion unit On Partition 1 s setting 2 s is backed up Channel 3 s Category I O adapter on IOEU Blade 4 s Sl...

Page 1812: ... 0017 Requested OS shutdown Requested an OS shutdown of the server blade Method xxx 0018 EFI started successfully EFI started successfully 1001 Authentica tion Logged in to the remote console Logged in to the remote console Username xxx Source IP address xxx User authentication method xxx 1002 Logged out from the remote console Logged out from the remote console Username xxx Source IP address xxx ...

Page 1813: ...ss Initialized user accounts Requested an initialization of the user accounts Method xxx 3002 Changed BMC IP address Requested a change of BMC IP address IP address after change xxx Method xxx 3003 Changed username Requested a change of username xxx Username after change xxx Role xxx Method xxx 3004 Changed user account information Requested a change of user account information for xxx Item change...

Page 1814: ...ge of LPAR manager settings Method xxx 3017 Changed language settings Requested a change of language settings Method xxx 3018 Changed asset information Requested a change of asset information Method xxx 3019 Changed mouse mode of remote console Requested a change of mouse mode of remote console Method xxx 301A Backed up server management settings Requested a backup of server management settings Me...

Page 1815: ...ested a change of Remote CD DVD settings Port number xxx Method xxx 302A Requested changing remote FD connection port Requested a change of Remote FD settings Port number xxx Method xxx 302B Requested changing Web console HTTP settings Requested a change of Web console HTTP settings Service xxx Method xxx 302C Requested changing Web console HTTPS settings Requested a change of Web console service ...

Page 1816: ...FPGA was updated FPGA was updated New FPGA xxx Method xxx 8009 Switched BMC firmware bank Requested a switching of BMC firmware bank Bank to be used xxx Method xxx 800A Switched EFI firmware bank Requested a switching of EFI firmware bank Bank to be used xxx Method xxx 800B Requested hardware memory dump Requested a hardware memory dump Method xxx 800C Canceled PCI Express deconfiguration Requeste...

Page 1817: ...tion or when the management module fails immediately after your operation the audit event may not be sent depending on the timing Syslog transfer is performed in cleartext Encrypted communication is not supported Port number 514 is fixed for use in Syslog transfer The port number cannot be changed Only Audit events can be sent to the syslog server Events as alert trigger for SC BSM or HCSM are not...

Page 1818: ...ce is displayed as the result in the operation log when an operation fails and info is displayed when the operation result is other than failure Using Syslog transfer The following flowchart shows the procedure for using Syslog transfer 1 Installing the Syslog server Install a syslog server to transfer Audit events 2 Setting Syslog transfer to management modules and BMC Configure the following set...

Page 1819: ... destination Use FQDN to set the host name The port number used for Syslog transfer cannot be changed Only one syslog server can be specified as destination 3 Sending Syslog transfer test message When you log into the management module system console or system Web console Logged in to the System Console or Logged in to the System Web Console is sent For BMC Requested a Send syslog transfer test me...

Page 1820: ...and check as follows NMI dump registry Set the registry key on the registry editor HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control CrashControl Name NMICrashDump Type REG_DWORD Value 1 Virtual memory pagefile sys Set the virtual memory following the steps below The procedure shown below is an example and may not be available with some environments See the following Website for further details ...

Page 1821: ...gh space is secured for the file destination Complete memory dump requires the following setting as well as settings shown in Memory dump in no system response Complete memory dump registry Set the registry key on the registry editor HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control CrashControl Name CrashDumpEnabled Type REG_DWORD Value 1 The setting above is required only for Windows Server 20...

Page 1822: ...In the environment with Linux Tough Dump a highly reliable tool for collecting dumps the setting stops the system when NMI is issued Thus you do not need to change the setting 1 NMI Non Maskable Interrupt hardware interruption that cannot be prevented by software Red Hat Enterprise Linux has some functions to utilize NMI such as monitoring CPU hang ups profiling kernel and stopping a system instan...

Page 1823: ...show command results title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 2 6 18 128 el5 root hd0 0 kernel vmlinuz 2 6 18 128 el5 ro root dev VolGroup00 LogVol00 nodmraid initrd initrd 2 6 18 128 el5 img title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 2 6 18 128 el5 root hd0 0 kernel vmlinuz 2 6 18 128 el5 ro root dev VolGroup00 LogVol00 nodmraid nmi_watchdog 0 initrd initrd 2 6 18 128 el5 img kernel unknown_nmi_panic 0 k...

Page 1824: ...ncies This may seriously affect your business by not starting processes and batch jobs at the scheduled time To avoid this problem disable the item Legacy USB Support in the BIOS setting if your system satisfies conditions described later in Conditions for Time Delay If this countermeasure cannot be applied be sure to execute the procedures shown in How to Deal With the Time Delay For how to apply...

Page 1825: ...ecuting the tasks described in restrictions above Once the OS is booted you can use USB devices including USB CD ROM and USB FD regardless of the Legacy USB Support setting Keyboard operation in the BIOS setup menu and Boot menu is available regardless of the setting How to deal with the time delay If you are not using the preventive measure be sure to execute the procedure shown below every time ...

Page 1826: ...tions b Adjust the time using the following command Example to set time to 15 00 7 th August 2009 date s 08 07 15 00 2009 c Reboot the system d Check if the CPU clock frequencies are correctly recognized using step 2 described above after the reboot e Confirm that the system clock is correct System problems by error in detecting frequency of APIC timer at OS boot Frequency of the APIC timer may be...

Page 1827: ...abling Legacy USB Support to prevent the interrupt of USB Legacy emulation when frequency is being detected When you have disabled Legacy USB Support the following restrictions are applied Restriction When disabling Legacy USB Support you cannot use USB devices until the USB driver is loaded from the GRUB menu during OS boot 1 Booting from USB devices such as a USB CD ROM and USB FDD is not availa...

Page 1828: ...ed 1 209338158 52343376 52341770 52317862 52335150 2 209325542 Incorrectly detected 1 88748664 22188646 22187456 22187286 22185276 2 44361775 Hardware memory dump Hardware Memory Dump is a system embedded functionality to get memory dump It is supported by X57A1 X55A1 and X55A2 models of Compute Blade 2000 server blades EFI version 03 xx 04 xx needs to be installed on the X55A1 model to use the Ha...

Page 1829: ...e acpiphp has not been loaded then the device remains on the OS causing inconsistency between current states of the device and the OS Apply the hot plug module to avoid the trouble described above Target system requirements The following requirements apply to a target system The OS is one of those below Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 4 x86 AMD Intel 64 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 4 Advanced Platform x8...

Page 1830: ...eption to the argument of the ethtool command The following describes values of tx rx parameters and the format To enable TCP checksum offload use the procedure by replacing values of tx rx parameters off with on values off disabled or on enabled Disable TCP checksum offload in both transmission and reception using the ethtool command Add the ethtool command to sbin ifup pre local as shown below a...

Page 1831: ...MP_COMMANDLINE parameter to edit etc sysconfig kdump Example for edited KDUMP_COMMANDLINE parameter KDUMP_COMMANDLINE ro root dev vgroot hashdist 1 3 Restart the system for etc sysconfig kdump to take effect For the system with many I O adapters getting Kdump may fail even if this setting is added If so change memory size for Kdump kernel from 128 MB by default to 256 MB 512 MB and retry it If the...

Page 1832: ...isplayed such as VMware ESX VMware ESX Server and VMware ESX Server 3i Vmware ESX 4 0 Vmware ESXi 4 0 or later versions are provided with parameters to stop the system when NMI is issued Enable the setting by following the procedure below This can prevent unexpected behavior at hardware failure It is highly recommended that you should set these parameters Vmware ESX Server 3 5 is also provided wit...

Page 1833: ...ox click VMkernel 5 In the right pane find VMkernel Boot nmiAction and ensure that it is set to 2 6 Click OK 7 Reboot the host Checking the result Follow the procedure below to check if the setting is properly configured 1 Log in VMware ESX or vCenter Server as a user with root or Administrator 2 Click the Configuration tab and then Advanced in the Software group 3 Click VMkernel Boot from the cat...

Page 1834: ...ng parameters to the last line of the etc sysctl conf file 3 Reboot WMware ESX Checking the hardware failure When hardware is in failure the error LED of the system lights solid If ERROR LED lights solid contact your reseller If the following message is displayed on the service console screen of VMware ESX hardware can fail Check if the error LED lights on the system VMware ESX 4 0 VMwqare ESXi 4 ...

Page 1835: ... HBA With some serious failures however notifying NMI prompts OS to reboot the same way as Legacy When PCI express unrecoverable errors occur the OS operation stops for about 500 minutes because EFI collects failure information Take this OS down time at the failure into account when you design a system Legacy PCI express error is not isolated by EFI When unrecoverable PCI express failure occurs no...

Page 1836: ...r BMC 04 33 or later PCIe Error Isolation Le gacy With Hyper V supports only Legacy mode Without Hyper V supports PCIe Error Isolation and Legacy mode When all I O devices including HBA and NIC are configured with redundancy PCIe Error Isolation mode is recommended With other than that make sure to select Legacy mode Red Hat Enterprise Linux5 3 Legacy Supports only Legacy mode Red Hat Enterprise L...

Page 1837: ...rictions on PCIe error isolation mode Note the following restrictions on PCIe error isolation modes Onboard NICs do not support the PCIe error isolation mode Make sure to disable the PCIe error isolation setting of the onboard NIC when using the PCIe error isolation mode with a standard server blade with EFI 03 43 04 43 or later and BMC 03 78 or later a high performance server blade with EFI 03 17...

Page 1838: ... OS Virtual environment Windows Server 2008 R2 RedHat Enterprise Linux 5 4 5 6 I O adapter 1 Gbps Ethernet x2 GVX CN2N1G1X1 GVX CN2D1G1X1 1 Gbps Ethernet x4 GVX CN2N1G2X1 GVX CN2D1G2X1 10 Gbps Ethernet x2 GVX CN2NXG2X1 GVX CN2DXG2X1 8 Gbps Fibre channel x1 Hitachi GVX CC2N8G1X1 GVX CC2D8G1X1 8 Gbps Fibre channel x2 Hitachi GVX CC2N8G2X1 GVX CC2D8G2X1 8 Gbps Fibre channel x2 Emulex GVX CC2N8G3X1 GV...

Page 1839: ...Linux 5 4 Item Model name Version OS kernel 2 6 18 164 15 1 or later Driver 10 Gbps Ethernet x2 ixgbe 2 0 75 7 h1 or later 1 Gbps Ethernet igb 1 3 19 3 h8 or later 8 Gbps Fibre channel Hitachi hfcldd x86 1 5 16 1218 or later x64 4 5 16 1218 or later Redundancy software 1 Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager 6 5 1 00 or later Management software ServerConductor Blade Server Manager 08 90 or later ServerCon...

Page 1840: ...g out the cause of the failure and for recovering with the update patches when configuring the system How to check PCI express error isolation 1 Log into the management module system console 2 Perform DL command to display system event logs for the target partition The following message PCI Express Error Isolation Started is displayed the PCI Express error has been isolated For using the DL comman...

Page 1841: ...MTF You can use SMASH to perform operations including powering on or off a server blade and refer to FRU information X57A2 X55R3 X55S3 and X55R4 server blade models can use SMASH with SMASH CLP Command Line Protocol and WS MAN Web Services Management See the DMTF Web site shown below for details about SMASH and WS MAN http dmtf org SMASH features The following items are available for SMASH with Co...

Page 1842: ...wer Supply DMTF 1 0 0 or later 9 DSP1018 Service Processor DMTF 1 0 0 or later 10 DSP1022 CPU DMTF 1 0 0 or later 11 DSP1026 System Memory DMTF 1 0 0 or later 12 DSP1033 Profile Registration DMTF 1 0 0 or later 13 DSP1034 Simple Identity Management DMTF 1 0 0 or later Connection to SMASH CLP SMASH CLP Command Line Protocol is available using terminal software on a console terminal connected via Te...

Page 1843: ...details about OS console Using SMASH CLP With SMASH CLP you can operate target shown in a hierarchical structure using verb Type the following string in the SMASH CLP command line to operate an item shown in the table SMASH Operations verb options target properties See the table verb available for options for verbs available for SMASH CLP See the table targets for operations for targets correspond...

Page 1844: ...erations target Operation corresponding to the target admin1 system1 Shows server blade status Powers on the server blade Powers off the server blade Performs server blade hardware reset admin1 system1 cpu N admin1 system1 capabilities1 cpucap N admin1 hdwr1 mainchassis1 card N chip N Shows processor status admin1 system1 memory1 admin1 hdwr1 mainchassis1 card N pmem N Shows memory status admin1 s...

Page 1845: ...ff the server blade To perform hardware reset on the server blade To switch to PXE boot To cancel PXE boot specify bootsrcsetting4 instead of bootsrcsetting3 start admin1 system1 cd admin1 system1 settings1 bootcfgsetting1 set bootorder admin1 system1 settings1 bootcfgsetting1 bootsrcsetting3 cd admin1 system1 show stop admin1 system1 reset admin1 system1 ...

Page 1846: ...ith WnRM 1 1 is not supported You can download Windows management framework including WinRM 2 0 from Microsoft Web site When using WinRM make sure that WS MAN service is enabled See Chapter 5 Server Blade Setup Server Settings Tab Service Settings for details about WS MAN service When using WinRM make sure that SMASH CLP is included in the user account roles See Chapter 5 Server Blade Setup Initia...

Page 1847: ...agement resources id entify Identifies if WS MAN is executed on the server blade connected RESOURCE_URI RESOURCE Description cimv2 CIM_ComputerSystem Shows server blade status Powers on the server blade Powers off the server blade Performs server blade hard reset cimv2 CIM_Processor Shows processor status cimv2 CIM_Chip cimv2 CIM_ProcessorCapabilities cimv2 CIM_Memory Shows memory status cimv2 CIM...

Page 1848: ...sic Digest Negotiate encoding VALUE Specifies an encoding for communication with a server blade connected file VALUE Specifies an XML file read from a file when s et c reate and i nvoke operations are executed skipCAcheck Specifies that the server certification does not need a signature of a trusted route certification authority You need to use this option only with a trusted computer skipCNcheck ...

Page 1849: ...C winrm i RequestStateChange cimv2 CIM_ComputerSystem CreationClassName CIM_ComputerSystem Name IPMI BMC DeviceID 32 RequestedState 2 r https 172 16 0 2 5986 wsman a basic u user02 p pass02 encoding utf 8 C winrm e cimv2 CIM_ComputerSystem r https 172 16 0 2 5986 wsman a basic u user02 p pass02 encoding utf 8 C winrm i RequestStateChange cimv2 CIM_ComputerSystem CreationClassName CIM_ComputerSyste...

Page 1850: ...mtf com wbem wscim 1 cim schema 2 CIM_BootConfigSetting xmlns wsa http schemas xmlsoap org ws 2004 08 addressing xmlns wsman http schemas dmtf org wbem wsman 1 wsman xsd n1 source wsa ReferenceParameters wsman ResourceURI http schemas dmtf com wbem wscim 1 cim schema 2 CIM_BootSourceSetting wsman ResourceURI wsman SelectorSet wsman Selector Name InstanceID BootSourceSetting1 wsman Selector wsman S...

Page 1851: ... 06h 07h 25h BMC Device and Messaging Commands Get System GUID App 06h 07h 37h Get Channel Authentication Capabilities App 06h 07h 38h Set Session Privilege Level App 06h 07h 3Bh Close Session App 06h 07h 3Ch Get Session Info App 06h 07h 3Dh Set Channel Access App 06h 07h 40h Get Channel Access App 06h 07h 41h Set User Access App 06h 07h 43h Get User Access App 06h 07h 44h Set User Name App 06h 07...

Page 1852: ...Reserve SEL Storage 0Ah 0Bh 42h Get SEL Entry Storage 0Ah 0Bh 43h Clear SEL Storage 0Ah 0Bh 47h Get SEL Time Storage 0Ah 0Bh 48h Set SEL Time Storage 0Ah 0Bh 49h LAN Device Commands Set LAN Configuration Parameters Transport 0Ch 0Dh 01h 2 Get LAN Configuration Parameters Transport 0Ch 0Dh 02h Serial Modem Device Commands Set SOL Configuration Parameters Transport 0Ch 0Dh 21h 3 Get SOL Configuratio...

Page 1853: ... v2c SNMP v3 Email notification SMTP SMTP StartTLS LDAP LDAPS HCSM HTTPS command and Hitachi original protocol alert SC BSM Hitachi original protocol Remote maintenance Hitachi original protocol For the function with System Center Operations Manager Management Pack SCOM MP SNMP is used Server blade BMC Function Protocol for use OS console telnet ssh Web HTTP HTTPS IPMI over LAN IPMI v1 5 IPMI v2 0...

Page 1854: ...ngth levels include Default and High The system has shipped with the setting Default The setting value High increases the security strength on the management network for the system equipment When encrypted data communication is available you cannot send data in unencrypted form For encrypted data communication encryption algorithm with high security is used ...

Page 1855: ...le Available Email notification SMTP Available Not available Not issues e mail SMTP StartTLS Available SSL3 0 TLS1 0 1 1 1 2 Available TLS 1 2 LDAP LDAPS Available SSL3 0 TLS1 0 1 1 1 2 Available TLS 1 2 HCSM HTTPS and Hitachi original protocol Available SSL3 0 TLS1 0 1 1 1 2 5 Available TLS 1 2 5 SC BSM Hitachi original protocol Available You can prevent communication by BSM command to close the ...

Page 1856: ... 1 2 Available TLS 1 2 3 LDAP LDAPS Available SSL3 0 TLS1 0 1 1 1 2 Available TLS 1 2 SMASH CLP telnet Available Not available 1 ssh Available SSHv2 Available 2 WS MAN HTTPS Available SSL3 0 TLS1 0 1 1 1 2 Available 3 1 The port used for the protocol is closed 2 For password authentication use RSA the first described public key cryptosystem for connection Digital signature algorithm DSA host key a...

Page 1857: ...ll management modules are restarted When the primary management module has been initialized the new value takes effect 3 When a security level is changed BMC for the server blade is restarted and then the new value takes effect 4 The setting is dynamically updated 5 The setting can take effect only when the server blade BMC supports the security strength setting Notes When security strength for a ...

Page 1858: ...H_AES_128_CBC _SHA TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC _SHA SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SH A SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CB C_SHA SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CB C_SHA SSL_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SH A SSL_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SH A SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_M D5 SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CB C_SHA SSL_DHE_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES4 0_CBC_SHA SSL_DHE_DSS_EXPORT_WITH_DES4 0_CBC_SHA TLS_EMPTY_RENEGO...

Page 1859: ...S_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CB C_SHA TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_S HA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SH A Server certificate Public key algorithm Management module Server blade Security strength Security strength Default High Default High RSA1024 authentication RSA1024 configuration RSA2048 authentication RSA2048 configuration RSA4096 authentication RSA4096 configuration DSA1024 authentication DSA1024 confi...

Page 1860: ...authentication RSA2048 authentication RSA4096 authentication RSA4096 authentication DSA1024 authentication DSA1024 authentication RSA1024 authentication Key exchange algorithm Management module Server blade Security strength Security strength Default High Default High diffie hellman group1 sha1 diffie hellman group14 sha1 diffie hellman group exchange sha1 diffie hellman group exchange sha256 Encr...

Page 1861: ...ngth Security strength Default High Default High hmac md5 hmac sha1 hmac ripemd160 hmac ripemd160 openssh com umac 64 openssh com hmac sha1 96 hmac md5 96 hmac sha2 256 hmac sha2 512 SNMP v3 Encryption algorithm Management module Server blade Security strength Security strength Default High Default High None SNMP not supported DES AES128 Authentication algorithm Management module Server blade Secu...

Page 1862: ...s chapter describes how to troubleshoot problems you may encounter while operating the system equipment Troubleshooting 1812 How to display the server blade screen 1818 Memory dump collection 1819 Error at server blade startup 1825 ...

Page 1863: ...ower outlet Is the monitor s power switch turned on Is the cable securely connected Does replacing the monitor fix the problem If there is no improvement contact your sales or service representative 1 3 Screen display The screen display is abnormal or garbled Is the monitor s brightness and contrast controls set correctly Is the cable securely connected Does replacing the monitor fix the problem I...

Page 1864: ... The displayed memory is less than the actual installed memory Contact your sales or service representative 1 11 Hard disk drive The hard disk drive does not work properly Check the file system referring to the manual for your operating system If the problem is unresolved contact your sales or service representative 1 12 USB device floppy disk drive The floppy disk drive does not work Make sure yo...

Page 1865: ...y to start the remote console the remote console does not start with a message shown like Downloading the application Solution 1 Update Java Runtime Environment JRE to 7u2 or later Solution 2 Click x button instead of Cancel to close the message window like Downloading the application shown at remote console startup 1 20 Remote console application Java application When Internet Explorer 8 is used ...

Page 1866: ... software does not recognize the Fan Module Is the Fan Module inserted correctly into the chassis Restart the management server remove and re insert the Management Module and then check again If the problem is unresolved contact your sales or service representative 2 3 Fan Module The fan makes a strange noise Is something touching the fan If there is no apparent problem contact your sales or servi...

Page 1867: ...s connected to the Management Module via the serial port Is the serial cable connected to the connector Are the communication parameters set appropriately in the communication software 9600 bps 1 stop bit Are you using an RS 232C cross cable Does removing the Management Module from the chassis and then re inserting it make any difference If the problem is unresolved contact your sales or service r...

Page 1868: ...scribes what action to take in each case No Location of Problem Nature of Problem Checklist and Action 4 1 LED The green power LED is not illuminated when the power is on Is the power cable connected Is power being supplied to the AC input terminal If there is no apparent problem contact your sales or service representative 4 2 The Power Supply Module emits an odor Contact your sales or service re...

Page 1869: ...cribes how to display the screen of a server blade To view the screen display it remotely To remotely display the screen You can remotely display the server blade system s screen with a PC or server and not the server blades For the procedures see Connect the Remote Console in Chapter 3 ...

Page 1870: ... memory dump for Windows See Memory Dump in No System Response and Complete Memory Dump in Chapter 13 for memory dump settings Triggering memory dump When the blue screen appears in STOP error memory dump is automatically collected When the system hangs up issuing non maskable interrupt NMI allows the memory dump to be collected To issue NMI select NMI from Power and Reset menu of Remote console a...

Page 1871: ...f the system does not restart after the memory dump is 100 completed restart the system manually After collecting memory dump The collected memory dump is copied to the specified location after the system re startup The default location is SystemRoot MEMORY DMP Then the following event log is output after the memory dump file is copied Event ID 1001 Source Save Dump for Windows Server 2003 R2 BugC...

Page 1872: ...en the system hangs up issuing NMI allows the memory dump to be collected To issue NMI select NMI from Power and Reset menu of Remote console application or click Server Operation tab Power and LEDs and click NMI button See Connect the Remote Console in Chapter 3 or Server Blade Setup in Chapter 5 for details Collecting memory dump The following screen is displayed during memory dump collection Ex...

Page 1873: ...cribes how to collect memory dump for Linux See Using Parameters to Stop the System at Hardware Failure and Useful Settings for VMware in Chapter 13 for memory dump settings Triggering memory dump When the local console displays a purple screen memory dump is automatically collected When the system hangs up issuing NMI allows the memory dump to be collected Follow the steps below to issue NMI 1 Re...

Page 1874: ...1823 14 14 When You Need Help The following screen is displayed during memory dump collection Purple screen When NMI is issued Memory dump is completed when Escape for local debugger is displayed ...

Page 1875: ... is collected The default location for the memory dump is var core vmkernel zdump X X is any number Multiple var core vmkernel zdump X files may exist Check the date for the file using the Is command If a file has the time that is the same as the system re startup the file is the dump file output this time When starting the virtual machine after the system startup proceed as usual If not restartin...

Page 1876: ...ductor CMOS battery failed Button battery voltage has dropped Consult your reseller or maintenance personnel 2 CMOS Checksum error Defaults loaded Button battery voltage has dropped Consult your reseller or maintenance personnel 3 Central processing unit CPU Failure CPU has failed Consult your reseller or maintenance personnel 4 Hard disk Diagnosis fail Hard disk has failed Third party memory and ...

Page 1877: ...1826 14 14 When You Need Help ...

Page 1878: ...chapter provides information about how to care for devices routinely service life limited parts that require replacement and consumables Items requiring routine maintenance 1828 Cleaning 1829 Service life limited parts 1831 Notes on maintenance 1832 ...

Page 1879: ... maintenance If abnormal conditions are observed during routine maintenance consult your dealer or call maintenance personnel Item Description Cleaned or inspected every System equipment Cleaning 1 Remove dust from vent holes 6 months 1 Checkout 1 Check fan noise including system fan modules and power supply modules 6 months 1 If the equipment is used in a dusty environment clean it once a month ...

Page 1880: ...clean it once a month WARNING Turn off the power and pull out the power cable before cleaning the system equipment If not the cleaning could cause an electric shock or equipment failure How to clean the ventilation holes Wipe the ventilation holes as shown in the following figure by using a dry cloth or vacuum them with the system turned off To be cleaned ...

Page 1881: ...wer and pull out the power cable before cleaning the I O slot expansion unit If the power is not turned off and the power cable is not pulled out the cleaning could cause an electric shock or equipment failure How to clean the ventilation holes Wipe the ventilation holes as shown in the following figure using a dry cloth or vacuum them with the I O slot expansion unit powered off To be cleaned ...

Page 1882: ...lent random access performance shock resistance and low power consumption but restrictions on writing amount Typical amount written in a server is expected to be around 50 GB day In the environment with frequent writing the amount may reach the upper limit 2 If you leave a dead SSD for a long time the data on the SSD disappears When SSD s days are numbered it sends a S M A R T Self Monitoring Anal...

Page 1883: ... drives HDDs Do not perform a defragmenting program when using SSDs Notes on maintenance When parts replacement is required in maintenance due to some system failure usually the latest versions of parts and basic input output system BIOS extensible firmware interface EFI firmware are applied to replacement BIOS firmware not for target parts may be updated to the latest version as necessary Note th...

Page 1884: ...1 Appendix Specifications This appendix contains Specifications of system equipment 2 Interface specifications 22 Software license 25 ...

Page 1885: ...nvironmental requirement Temperature in Celsius 5 C to 35 C Humidity in percent There must be no condensation 20 to 80 EMC standard FCC ICES EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 KC KN24 KC KN22 C Tick GOST BSMI CCC Noise 64 dB 3 Rated wind 17 2 m 3 min 607 CFM 4 1 The number of server blade may be limited in the redundancy configuration with 1 1 power supplies 2 This is the rated value of a server chassis The ...

Page 1886: ...verified by Hitachi Wake On LAN Available only for onboard Gb Ethernet Front interface USB 2 0 x 2 Serial port COM2 x 1 5 Outside dimension W x D x H mm 47 7 x 547 x 336 except backplane connector Mass 8 36 kg Power consumption Maximum 1 357 W 480 W 486 W Power consumption in operation 2 257 W 358 W 382 W Indications based on the Energy Saving Law Classification b Not targeted Energy consumption e...

Page 1887: ... Remote console OS console via Telnet SSL IPMI 2 0 Support only for it connected with a product verified by Hitachi Wake On LAN Available only for onboard Gb Ethernet Front interface USB 2 0 2 Serial port COM2 x 1 6 Outside dimension W x D x H mm 47 7 547 336 except the Backplane connector Mass 8 56 kg Power consumption Max 1 337 W Power consumption in operation 2 270 W Indications based on the En...

Page 1888: ...Main memory DDR3 Registered ECC DIMM 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB LV DDR3 Registered ECC DIMM 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB Memory size Max 192 GB 16 GB x 12 Built in HDD Number of HDDs that can be installed 2 5 type x Max 4 Size Max 1800 GB with RAID0 or RAID5 4 Feature Supports RAID 0 1 5 6 10 Hot plug Hot spare 5 Number of mezzanine slots 2 Network interface Gb Ethernet x 2 ports Management interface Server blade Web...

Page 1889: ...er consumption in operation 3 The energy consumption efficiency is obtained by dividing the electric power consumption measured with the measurement method defined by the Energy Saving Law by the composite theoretical performance defined by the Energy Saving Law 4 When configuring a single RAID Group logical drive the capacity is available up to 2 TB 5 RAID 6 is supported only with GV CA2SRD2X1 Y ...

Page 1890: ...lots 2 Management interface Remote KVM Serial redirection via Telnet SSL IPMI 2 0 Support only for it connected with a product verified by Hitachi Wake On LAN Available only for onboard Gb Ethernet port 0 Applying the dedicated driver allows port 1 available Front interface USB 2 0 2 Serial port COM2 x 1 6 Outside dimension W x D x H mm 47 7 547 336 except connector bumps on the backplane surface ...

Page 1891: ...s 7 2 GT s 6 4 GT s 8 0 GT s Main memory DDR3 LV Registered ECC DIMM 1333 MHz 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB DDR3 LRDIMM 1333MHｚ 32GB Memory size Max 768 GB 32 GB x 24 Number of mezzanine slots 2 Management interface Remote KVM Serial redirection via Telnet SSL IPMI 2 0 Support only for it connected with a product verified by Hitachi Wake On LAN Available only for onboard Gb Ethernet port 0 Applying the de...

Page 1892: ...ache memory 30 MB 25 MB 25 MB 20 MB 15 MB 15 MB 5 MB QPI Quick path interconnect frequency 8 0 GT s 8 0 GT s 8 0 GT s 8 0 GT s 8 0 GT s 7 2 GT s 6 4 GT s Main memory DDR3 LV Registered ECC DIMM 1600 MHz 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB DDR3 LV Registered ECC DIMM 1866MHz 8GB 16GB DDR3 LRDIMM 1600 MHz 32 GB Memory size Max 768 GB 32 GB x 24 Embedded HDD Type and number Type 2 5 x Max 6 Capacity 1 Max 7200 GB with R...

Page 1893: ... power consumption for facility design 3 Guideline of the power consumption for normal operation 4 The Energy consumption efficiency is obtained by dividing the electric power consumption measured with the measurement method defined by the Energy Saving Law by the composite theoretical performance defined by the Energy Saving Law 5 Theoretical performance of multiple processors is out of target fo...

Page 1894: ...erial port COM2 x 1 available only for the primary blade 5 QPI Full Width 6 4 GT s 4 ports Outside dimension W x D x H mm 47 7 x 547 x 336 except the Backplane connector Mass 10 8 kg Power consumption Max 2 638 688 694 Power consumption in operation 3 473 519 530 Indications based on the Energy Saving law Classification J Energy consumption efficiency 4 2 8 2 1 1 9 Supported OS Microsoft Windows S...

Page 1895: ...the primary blade 6 QPI Full Width 6 4 GT s 4 ports Outside dimension W x D x H mm 47 7 x 547 x 336 except the Backplane connector Mass 10 8 kg Power consumption Max 2 575 W 553 W 652 W 630 W 664 W 642 W Power consumption in operation 3 478 W 456 W 501 W 479 W 512 W 490 W Indications based on the Energy Saving law Classification J Energy consumption efficiency 4 1 4 1 0 Out of target 5 Supported O...

Page 1896: ...H 167 65 mm x 68 90 mm or smaller Power supply for the card 3 3 V Max 3 A 12 V Max 2 1 A 1 Power consumed by the card Max 25 W Indicator Power green Attention orange Input power supply 12 V Maximum power consumption 25 W Outside dimension W x D x H mm 25 6 x 239 x 80 6 except Backplane connector Mass 0 48 kg 1 Auxiliary AUX is not supported ...

Page 1897: ... IGMPv2 v3 PIM SM PIM SSM Ipv6 routing Uni cast Static RIPing OSPFv3 BGP4 Multi cast MLDv1 v2 PIM SM PIM SSM Network function Security function Filter L2 IPv4 IPv6 L4 and port to port relay interruption IEEE802 1X authentication Quality of Service QoS Flow detection L2 IPv4 IPv6 L4 band monitoring rate control marking DSCP User Priority Priority control Flow base User priority mapping disposal con...

Page 1898: ...High availability Function associated with LAN controller redundancy failover association hot plug replacement configuration backup Specifications of 1 Gb LAN pass through module Item Specification Model name 1 Gbps LAN pass through module LAN port External port 1000BASE T x 16 ports Internal port 1000BASE Serdes x 16 ports server blade I F Connector RJ 45 Circuit 1 Gbps Full Duplex fixed Auto Neg...

Page 1899: ...ade I F Connector SFP Circuit 10 Gbps Full Duplex fixed Auto Negotiation enabled fixed Indicator LED Module Power Status1 UID Circuit Link Activity Operation Module operations only with management modules No operation available with the module itself Power supply 12 V Mass 1 4 kg without SFP optical transceiver 0 019 kg per unit Cooling Forced air cooling Hardware hot swap Available Dimension W x ...

Page 1900: ... VI FC PH FC GS 2 FC PH 3 FC SW IPFC RFC FC AL2 Service class Class 2 class 3 class F Maximum frame size 2112 byte payload Data traffic Unicast multicast broadcast Media type 8 Gb SFP LC connector short wave laser Maximum 500 m at 1 Gbps 300 m at 2 Gbps 150 m at 4 Gbps 50 m at 8 Gbps Scalability Full fabric architecture with up to 239 switches Console port management port 10 100 Ethernet RJ 45 Ser...

Page 1901: ...ole CLI Offers the CLI Command Line Interface for system operation and management The CLI is managed by a user SVP console GUI Supports the system Web console Middleware coordinating function HA monitor Provides coordination with the high availability HA cluster HA monitor Server management software Provides coordination with Server Conductor BladeServer Manager Smart Configure Collects informatio...

Page 1902: ...aining in power interruption 20 ms or longer Outside dimensions W x D x H mm 104 x 740 x 70 except Backplane connector Mass 6 38 kg For A2 chassis Item Specification Input Rated voltage 200 to 240 VAC Permissible variation 178 to 264 VAC sequence 160 276 0 5 s Frequency 50 60 Hz 3 Hz Rated current 20 A Efficiency 92 typ Power factor 0 9 or higher Inrush current 50 A or lower Leaking current 0 7 mA...

Page 1903: ...ging method HotSwap Protection method Breaks the over current with a fuse HotSwap Controller OCP function Redundancy method N 1 Indicator Active green Failure orange Humidity sensor Installed on the control board Outside dimension W x D x H mm 83 x 237 x 85 8 except Backplane connector Mass 1 44 kg AC power input module specifications per module Item Specification 2 input connectors 1 input connec...

Page 1904: ...ct port 4 as standards 2 per I O module Power supply module 2 as standards 1 1 redundancy Cooling fan module 4 as standards 2 per I O module 1 1 redundancy Outside dimension W x D x H mm 449 x 759 x 174 EIA standard unit 4 U Mass Maximum About 48 kg Power supply Input voltage frequency AC 200 V to 240 V single phase 50 60 Hz Max rated voltage 1 kW Environment Temperature C 5 to 35 C Humidity 20 to...

Page 1905: ...rential signal Input Output 4 GND Cable Ground RS 232C interface connector management module Pin Signal Name Description Direction 1 CD Carrier Detect Input 2 RD Receive Data Input 3 TD Transmit Data Output 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 5 GND Signal Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready Input 7 RTS Request to Send Output 8 CTS Clear to Send Input 9 RI Ring Indicator Input ...

Page 1906: ...nput 4 TP2 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 5 TP2 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 6 TP1 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 7 TP3 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 8 TP3 Transmit Receive Data Output Input Connected with 100BASE TX 10BASE T Pin Signal Name Description Direction 1 TX Transmit Data Output 2 TX Transmit Data Output 3 RX Receive Data Input 4 NC Reserved 5 NC Reserved 6 RX Receive ...

Page 1907: ...ut 4 TP2 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 5 TP2 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 6 TP1 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 7 TP3 Transmit Receive Data Output Input 8 TP3 Transmit Receive Data Output Input Connected with 100BASE TX 10BASE T Pin Signal Name Description Direction 1 TX Transmit Data Output 2 TX Transmit Data Output 3 RX Receive Data Input 4 NC Reserved 5 NC Reserved 6 RX Receive Da...

Page 1908: ...dicates that we must distribute the source code on CDROM or DVD by your request Please take note that you will be charged for the media shipping fee and commission When you need to have source code media check the BMC firmware version on the Web console screen write it down and contact your reseller to give them the version For the following open source software consult your reseller Software Lice...

Page 1909: ... netkit tftp syslogd BSD License Visit the following URL http www freebsd org copyright license html stunnel stunnel license Visit the following URL https www stunnel org sdf_copying html ntp ntpdate NTP License Visit the following URL http opensource org licenses NTP rsyslog GNU General Public License version 3 Visit the following URL http www rsyslog com doc licensing html ...

Page 1910: ...P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A AC alternating current ACPI advanced configuration and power interface ADSI active directory service interface AER advanced error reporting AFT adapter fault tolerance ALB adaptive load balancing ALM alarm lamp AMPP automatic migration of port profiles APIC advanced programmable interrupt controller ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange AUX auxiliary ...

Page 1911: ... baseboard management controller BSM Blade Server Manager C CA certificate authority CAS column address strobe CBL cable removal tool CC consistency check CD compact disc CEE Converged Enhanced Ethernet CIM Common Information Model CLI command line interface Client client PC CLP Command Line Protocol ...

Page 1912: ...cation port CPU central processing unit CRLF carriage return line feed CRT cathode ray tube CSR certificate signing request CSV comma separated values CUI character based user interface D DBS Demand Base Switching DCB Data Center Bridging DDR double data rate DER Distinguished Encoding Rules DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ...

Page 1913: ...me DNS domain name system DPM Deployment Manager DSA digital signature algorithm DST Daylight Savings Time DVD digital versatile disc E EC Event Code ECC Error Check and Correct EFI extensible firmware interface EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIST Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology EKMS electronic key management systems ...

Page 1914: ...FDE full disk encryption FFB fuse free breaker FPGA field programmable gatearray FQDN qualified domain name FRU field replaceable unit FTP File Transfer Protocol G GMT Greenwich Mean Time GNU GNU s Not Unix GPL GNU General Public License GPT GUID partition table GSRP Gigabit Switch Redundancy Protocol ...

Page 1915: ...nk Manager HFC PCM Hitachi Fibre Channel Path Control Manager HPET high precision event timer HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer HVM Hitachi Virtualization Manager HvmSh HVM Shell command used like a proper noun I IAC interpreted as command ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol IOCD input output control device ...

Page 1916: ...ce ITRM IT Resource Management Manager J Java A programming language created by James Gosling and now developed by Sun used to produce software for multiple platforms JRE Java Runtime Environment K KVM keyboard video and mouse L L Locality Name LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACPDU LACP data unit LAN local area network LC LAN configuration ...

Page 1917: ...tocol LED light emitting diode LF line feed LFT Link Fault Tolerance LID Location ID Lamp LLC last level cache LOCID location ID LED LOM legacy OS mode LP LPAR manager logical partitioning manager LPAR logical partition LPVID logical port VLAN ID LTO Linear Tape Open LU logical unit LUN logical unit number ...

Page 1918: ...ace crossover MIB management information base MMC Microsoft Management Console MN memory node MSR LED Master LED MTU maximum transfer unit N NAS network attached storage NCQ native command queuing NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NIC network interface card NMI non maskable interrupt NPIV N Port ID Virtualization ...

Page 1919: ...g files NVRAM non volatile RAM O O Organization Name OEM original equipment manufacturer OID object ID OU Organization Unit Name P PCI peripheral components interconnect PCIe PCI Express PDU power distribution unit PEM privacy enhanced mail PFM Performance Management PIT programmable interval timer POD Ports On Demand ...

Page 1920: ... Arrays of Independent Disks RAS reliability availability serviceability RC Read Create Reference Code RE RC type enhanced bit RHEL Red Hat Enterprise Linux RO read only ROM Read Only Memory RPM revolutions per minute RSA Public key cryptosystem the algorithm of which was first publicly described by Rivest Shamir and Adleman The acronym stands for names of the three ...

Page 1921: ...le SAN storage area network SAS serial attached SCSI SBR serial boot ROM SC ServerConductor Schd scheduling mode SCOM MP System Center Operations Manager Management Pack SD Secure Digital SDN Software Defined Networking SEL system event log SFP small form factor pluggable plus SFT switch fault tolerance ...

Page 1922: ...rdware SMP Symmetric Multiprocessing SMT simultaneous multi threading SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Srv service ratio SSD solid state drive SSH Secure SHell SSL Secure Socket Layer ST State or Province Name STS status LED SVGA Super Video Graphics Array SVP service processor T TCP Transmission Checksum Protocol ...

Page 1923: ...UID unit ID UPS uninterruptible power supply USB Universal Serial Bus UTC U L Coordinated Universal Time Often spelled out as Universal Time Coordinated and sometimes as Universal Coordinated Time because abbreviated as UTC The time standard commonly used across the world since 1972 and used to synchronize time across internet networks UTP Unshielded Twist Pair cable UUID universal unique ID V VD ...

Page 1924: ...otocol VT Intel Virtualization Technology Video Terminal W WDT Watch Dog Timer WinRM Windows Remote Management WOL Wake On LAN WS MAN Web Service Management WWN world wide name WWNN world wide node name WWPN world wide port name Z ZMODEM A type of name A file transfer protocol updated from XMODEM and YMODEM mainly by supporting sliding window ...

Page 1925: ...16 Glossary ...

Page 1926: ...Hitachi Compute Blade 2000 User s Guide ...

Page 1927: ...s 2845 Lafayette Street Santa Clara California 95050 2639 U S A www hds com Regional Contact Information Americas 1 408 970 1000 info hds com Europe Middle East and Africa 44 0 1753 618000 info emea hds com Asia Pacific 852 3189 7900 hds marketing apac hds com ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Compute Blade 2000

Reviews:

Related manuals for Compute Blade 2000

Brands by name

Popular brands

Hitachi Compute Blade 2000, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Compute Blade 2000

Reviews:

Related manuals for Compute Blade 2000

Brands by name

Popular brands